MastercamX - RefGuide Ok

Reference Guide
Mastercam X
Reference Guide
July, 2005
ii MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
Mastercam Reference Guide

Date: July 15, 2005
Copyright 2005 CNC Software, Inc. All rights reserved.
First Printing: July 15, 2005
Software: Mastercam X
ISBN: 1-883310-42-3
IMPORTANT NOTICE!
PLEASE READ THIS STATEMENT AND THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

COMPLETELY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE.
BY CONTINUING TO USE THIS SOFTWARE, YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR A
SINGLE ENTITY) INDICATE YOUR INTENTION TO BE BOUND BY AND ACCEPT
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU MAY NOT ACCESS OR
OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE AND WILL IN FACT BE PROHIBITED FROM
DOING SO. THIS COMPUTER SOFTWARE MAY BE USED ONLY PURSUANT TO
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH BELOW, AND SOLELY IN
CONJUNCTION WITH THE ACCOMPANYING SECURITY MECHANISM (UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE "EXCEPTIONS TO SECURITY MECHANISM
REQUIREMENTS" SECTION OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS) WHICH
MUST BE PRESENT ON YOUR COMPUTER (OR NETWORK AS APPLICABLE) AT
ALL TIMES DURING SUCH USE.
Read This If You Have Received This Software From A Third Party: If you received
this Software from someone other than an authorized CNC Software, Inc. reseller,
you do NOT have a legal software license. (For example, if you acquired this
Software simply by buying a machine or Software from the former owner or from
an auction, you do not have a valid license.) You should contact CNC Software,
Inc. (860-875-5006) in order to obtain a new and valid license. Use of this Software
without a valid software license is unlawful, a violation of the Copyright Act and
may expose you to criminal liability under 17 United States Code Sec. 506,
including fines and damages.
Software License
If you have paid a license fee, CNC Software, Inc. ("CNC") a Connecticut
corporation with its principal place of business at 671 Old Post Road, Tolland,
Connecticut, 06084 hereby grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(the "License") to use this software program (the "Software") and its
accompanying documentation (and, if applicable, to permit your authorized
employees to use them), solely in accordance with the terms and conditions of this
Software License Agreement . You may use the Software solely for your internal
business purposes and solely in conjunction with the accompanying hardware or
software device, method, scheme or other security measure provided by CNC
which allows a user to access the Software and prevents unauthorized access to the
Software (the "Security Mechanism"). The Software, any updates to the Software
(including any that you download through the Internet), and the Documentation
shall hereinafter collectively be referred to as the "Software" and are all governed
by this License.
Restrictions
You may not use the Software without a Security Mechanism provided by CNC or
CNCs suppliers. When CNC or CNCs suppliers provide you with a single-user
Security Mechanism, the Software may only be used (in executable code form
only) on a single computer to which the Security Mechanism is physically
attached. In the event CNC or CNCs suppliers provide you with a multiple-user
Security Mechanism for use over an internal network (a "Network Security
Mechanism"), the Software may be used: (a) in executable code form only; (b) only
on end-user computers that are connected to the internal network to which the
Network Security Mechanism is attached; and (c) only by the number of users and
iii
accessed by the number of end-user computers for which licenses were purchased
and as further allowed by the Network Security Mechanism. You may physically
transfer the Software from one computer equipped with a single-user Security
Mechanism to another only if the Security Mechanism is included in the transfer
and is installed with the new computer.
You shall not: (a) copy (except as provided below), adapt, modify the Software; (b)
publish, display, disclose or create a derivative work from the Software or any part
thereof; (c) de-compile or translate, disassemble, create or attempt to create, by
reverse engineering or otherwise, the source code form of the Software from the
executable code of the Software; (d) remove any proprietary notices, labels or
marks from the Software; (e) sell, rent, lease, distribute or otherwise transfer or
provide all or any part of the Software to any person or entity without the prior
written consent of CNC; (f) use the Software to provide outsourcing, service
bureau, time sharing or other services to any third party; or (g) sublicense, assign,
delegate or otherwise transfer your rights in the Software, under the Software
License Agreement or any of the related rights or obligations for any reason
without the prior written consent of CNC. You shall not circumvent, bypass,
modify, reverse engineer, disassemble, disable, alter, enhance or replicate the
function of the Security Mechanism in any manner whatsoever. Any attempt to do
so shall result in automatic termination of this License without prejudice to all
other legal rights and remedies of CNC.
Copying Restrictions
You may make one (1) copy of the Software for backup or archival purposes,
provided that you reproduce all proprietary notices of CNC on any such copy.
Non Transferable
You may not transfer or assign the Software or this Software License Agreement or
any rights or obligations hereunder. Any attempt to do so will automatically
terminate this License without the need for notice. This termination is without
prejudice to all other legal rights and remedies of CNC.
Intellectual Property Rights
The Software is and includes intellectual property of CNC. All associated

intellectual property rights, including, without limitation, worldwide patent,
trademark, copyright and trade secret rights, are reserved. CNC retains all right,
title and interest in and copyrights to the Software, regardless of the form or media
in or on which the original or other copies may subsequently exist. This Software
License Agreement shall not constitute a sale of the Software and no title or
proprietary rights to the Software are transferred to you hereby. You acknowledge
that the Software is a unique, confidential and valuable asset of CNC, and CNC
shall have the right to seek all equitable and legal redress, which may be available
to it for the breach or threatened breach of this Software License Agreement
including, without limitation, injunctive relief. Unauthorized copying of the
Software or failure to comply with the above restrictions shall result in automatic
termination of this License and this Software License Agreement without prejudice
to all other legal rights and remedies of CNC.
Confidentiality
Enforcement Obligations
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of CNC and
you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as
great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most
confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and
conditions of this Software License Agreement to those persons employed by you
who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to
ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without
limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the
Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software or defeating
the Security Mechanism.
In the event you become aware that any person or entity in your employ or under
your control in a manner not authorized by this Software License Agreement is
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
110
iv MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
using the Software, you shall immediately use reasonable best efforts to have such
unauthorized use of the Software immediately cease. You shall promptly notify
CNC in writing of any unauthorized use of the Software of which you become
aware.
Limited Warranties
CNC WARRANTS THAT THE MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS

DISTRIBUTED WILL BE FREE OF DEFECTS IN MATERIAL OR WORKMANSHIP
FOR A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS AFTER PURCHASE. THE FOREGOING
LIMITED WARRANTY EXCLUDES DEFECTS ARISING OUT OF ACCIDENT,
NEGLECT, MISUSE, FAILURE OF ELECTRIC POWER AND CAUSES OTHER THAN
ORDINARY AND AUTHORIZED USE. EXCEPT FOR THE FOREGOING LIMITED
WARRANTY, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS, WITH ALL FAULTS." YOUR
SOLE REMEDY AND CNCS SOLE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE, AT
CNCS SOLE OPTION, REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE MEDIA OR REFUND
OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE BY YOU OF THE
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE ONLY
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY CNC REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, CNC DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. CNC IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE
ANY UPDATES TO THE SOFTWARE. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE
DEFECTIVE FOLLOWING ITS PURCHASE, YOU (AND NOT CNC, ITS
DISTRIBUTOR, OR RETAILER) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION AND ANY INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Note on Documentation: While CNC makes every effort to ensure that its
Documentation for the Software is accurate and up-to-date, it cannot guarantee
the Documentation at all times represents the latest operation and functionality of
the Software. The content of the "Getting Started Guide," "User Manual" and other
documentation for the Software is provided for informational purposes only. The
content of the Documentation may be changed without notice to you. CNC
expressly disclaims any warranty or representation that the Documentation is an
accurate and/or current reflection of the Softwares operation and performance.
Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL CNC, OR ITS EMPLOYEES, SHAREHOLDERS, DISTRIBUTORS
OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, SPECIAL,
PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION)
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE
AGREEMENT OR THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF EVEN IF CNC HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. CNCS ENTIRE LIABILITY
WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE
AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF THE
LICENSE FEE PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Indemnification
You shall indemnify and hold harmless CNC, its officers, directors, employees,
suppliers and agents from and against all losses, settlements, claims, actions, suits,
proceedings, judgments, awards, damages, liabilities, costs and expenses
including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys fees (collectively "Losses")
which arise out of or as a result of any breach of this Software License Agreement
by you or your employees, agents, resellers, dealers or sub-dealers and shall
reimburse CNC for any and all legal, accounting and other fees, costs and expenses
reasonably incurred by any of them in connection with investigating, mitigating or
defending any such Losses.
Educational Pricing
Termination
General
U.S. Government Restricted

Rights
Export Restrictions
If this Software was obtained through or in accordance with a CNC "Educational

Pricing" plan, option, grant, schedule or program, it may not be used by anyone,
including you, to conduct any computer aided design, computer aided drafting,
computer aided machining, or training activities that, directly or indirectly,
generate or otherwise result in monetary revenues for the benefit of any individual
or any entity, other than the school that originally received this Software.
This Software License Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate
this Software License Agreement at any time by returning to CNC all copies of the
Software under your control and by returning the Security Mechanism to CNC.
CNC may terminate this Software License Agreement if CNC determines, in its sole
discretion, that you have violated the terms of this Software License Agreement.
Upon termination of this Software License Agreement, you agree to immediately
return to CNC all copies of the Software, return the Security Mechanism to CNC,
and certify to CNC in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have
been returned. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights,
indemnification and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software
License Agreement. You may not transfer this Software to the purchaser of any
equipment on which the Software may be resident. You may not transfer this
Software via liquidation, bankruptcy, auction, close of business, or any other
method that does not involve an authorized Mastercam reseller. This License is
for you alone. In the event you breach the provisions of this Section, CNC shall be
entitled to liquidated damages in the amount of Fifteen Thousand Dollars
($15,000), plus its reasonable attorneys fees and court costs.
This Software License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by
the laws of the state of Connecticut, without regard to conflicts of law provisions.
The sole jurisdiction and venue for any litigation arising from or related to this
Software License Agreement or the subject matter hereof shall be in an appropriate
state or federal court located in Hartford, Connecticut. You hereby submit to the
personal jurisdiction of the Federal District Court for the District of Connecticut
and to the Superior Court of the State of Connecticut. This Software License
Agreement shall constitute the entire agreement between you and CNC with
respect to the subject matter hereof. Any waiver or modification of this Software
License Agreement shall be valid only if it is in writing and signed by both parties
hereto. If any part of this Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of
competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Agreement shall be interpreted so as
to reasonably effect the intention of the parties.
The Software provided hereunder is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in
48 C.F.R. 2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial
computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212.
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, the
Software made available to the United States of America, its agencies and/or
instrumentalities, is provided with only those rights set forth in this Agreement.
Use, duplication or disclosure of the Software by the government is subject to the
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial
Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19, as amended, or
any successor regulations thereto.
You represent and warrant that you will not, without obtaining prior written
authorization from CNC and, if required, of the Bureau of Export Administration of
the United States Department of Commerce or other relevant agency of the United
States Government, export or re-export, directly or indirectly, the Software from
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
110
vi MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
the United States to (i) any country destination to which export is restricted by the
Export Administration Regulations of the United States Department of Commerce;
(ii) any country subject to sanctions administered by the Office of Foreign Assets
Control, United States Department of the Treasury; or (iii) such other countries to
which export is restricted by any other United States government agency. You
further agree that you are solely responsible for compliance with any import laws
and regulations of the country of destination of a permitted export or re-export,
and any other import requirement related to a permitted export or re-export.
Exceptions to Security
Mechanism Requirements
CNC software programs Mastercam Design LT and Mastercam Demo do not

require the use of Security Mechanisms, and the provisions in this Software
License Agreement relating to Security Mechanisms do not apply to your use of
such programs, provided, however, that such provisions shall apply to your use of
all other Software provided hereunder.
Survival
All provisions of this Software License Agreement relating to confidentiality, nondisclosure, CNCs proprietary rights, disclaimers, and limits of liability, or
indemnification by Customer shall survive termination of this License for any
reason.
Reservation of Rights
All rights not expressly granted are reserved by CNC.
Trademarks
Mastercam is a registered trademark of CNC.

Windows, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, and Windows XP are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Mastercam Verify is created in conjunction
with MachineWorks Ltd.
Printed in the United States of America.

Printed on recycled paper.
vii
Contents
1. Introduction to Mastercam X ..........................................1
X
Starting Mastercam ..............................................................2

Learning about HASP and NetHASP ......................................3
Getting Help ...........................................................................4

Using Online Help ..................................................................4
Mastercam X Documentation ................................................6
Mastercam Support and Services ...........................................8
The Mastercam Workspace ...............................................10

Mastercam Terms and Concepts..........................................11
Graphics window ............................................................ 12
Status bar ......................................................................... 12
Toolpath and Solids Manager tabs ................................ 13
Toolbars ........................................................................... 14
Interactive prompts ........................................................ 15
Tool tips ........................................................................... 15
Dialog boxes .................................................................... 16
Ribbon bars ...................................................................... 17
Learning Mode ................................................................ 20
AutoCursor and Visual Cues ........................................... 20
General Selection ribbon bar ......................................... 20
Sketcher ............................................................................ 21
Live, fixed and phantom entities ................................... 22
Chaining ........................................................................... 23
Rightclick menus ........................................................... 23
Shortcut keys ................................................................... 25
Machine Definition / Control Definition Managers .... 25
Toolpaths ......................................................................... 26
Libraries (operations, tools, materials) ......................... 27
7/7/05
viii MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
Mastercam Menus ..............................................................29

File Menu ..............................................................................30
Edit Menu..............................................................................31
View Menu ............................................................................32
Analyze Menu .......................................................................33
Create Menu..........................................................................34
Solids Menu ..........................................................................35
Xform Menu ..........................................................................36
Machine Type Menu .............................................................36
Toolpaths Menu....................................................................37
Screen Menu .........................................................................38
Settings Menu .......................................................................39
Help Menu ............................................................................40
Customizing Your Workspace ............................................41

Customizing Toolbar Settings ..............................................42
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar files.......................46
Customizing Toolbar Functions ...........................................46
Drag and Drop Visual Cues .............................................48
Adding Functions and Toolbars .....................................49
Moving Toolbar Functions ..............................................50
Deleting Toolbar Functions ............................................50
Renaming and Deleting Toolbars ...................................50
Customizing Drop-down Menus ..........................................51
Creating Drop-down Menus ...........................................53
Renaming Drop-down Menus ........................................54
Deleting Drop-down Menus ...........................................54
Adding Drop-down Menu Functions .............................55
Moving Menu Functions .................................................55
Deleting Menu Functions ................................................56
Adding Drop-down Menus to Toolbars .........................56
Adding Submenus to Drop-down Menus ......................56
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu ................58
Adding Separators to Toolbars / Menus...............................59
Creating and Saving Toolbar States......................................60
Hiding / Showing Toolbars .............................................61
Using the Toolbar RightClick Menu .............................64
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts ..........................65
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping files .......66
Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments ..................67
7/7/05
ix
Removing Shortcut Assignments ................................... 68

X
Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)............69

Configuring Mastercam X.....................................................69
Managing Configuration Files ..............................................70
Setting Default Values ..................................................... 71
Tolerances ........................................................................ 72
Files .................................................................................. 74
Converters ........................................................................ 75
Screen ............................................................................... 76
Colors ............................................................................... 77
Chaining ........................................................................... 79
Shading ............................................................................ 80
Solids ................................................................................ 81
Printing ............................................................................ 82
CAD Settings .................................................................... 82
Drafting Dimension Properties ...................................... 83
Start / Exit ........................................................................ 89
Toolpaths ......................................................................... 92
Post Processing ................................................................ 94
Backplot ........................................................................... 95
Verify ................................................................................ 97
Merging Configuration Files.................................................99
Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch) ................ 100
The Role of Machine and Control Definitions .................101

Control Definitions and Toolpath Defaults........................103
Working with Post Processors ............................................103
Opening and Translating Files ..........................................104

Saving Files .........................................................................105
Sharing Files with the Zip2Go Utility .................................106
Opening Files with Other Applications ..............................108
Printing and Plotting ..........................................................110
2. Design .....................................................................................115
X
Drawing and Design Basics .............................................116

Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar ......................................116
Visual Cues ..................................................................... 117
Entering Position Coordinates ..................................... 118
Using FastPoint Mode to Enter Coordinates .............. 119
7/7/05
16
x MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
Customizing AutoCursor behavior ...............................120

Selecting Entities.................................................................124
Using the General Selection ribbon bar .......................125
Entity Selection Tips ......................................................131
Chaining..............................................................................134
Chaining Wireframe Geometry .....................................135
Chaining Solids ..............................................................137
Setting Attributes ................................................................138
Setting Attributes for New Entities ...............................138
Changing Entity Attributes ............................................142
Setting Z Depth ...................................................................146
Working in 2D and 3D Mode ..............................................146
Changing the Graphics Window Display............................147
Zooming ..........................................................................148
Setting Viewports ...........................................................149
Setting Planes / Views / WCS..............................................150
Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems .......................151
Displaying Coordinate Information .............................160
Understanding the Top View ........................................162
Managing Views .............................................................163
Measuring View Origins ................................................164
Changing View Origins ..................................................165
Creating Views from Selected Entities .........................167
Creating Views By Rotating ...........................................168
Creating Views from Normals .......................................169
Change the Tplane or the WCS? ....................................170
Using WCS and Tplanes to Set Up Toolpaths ..............176
Lathe Coordinate Systems .............................................178
Editing Your Work...............................................................182
Undo / Redo ...................................................................182
Delete / Undelete ...........................................................183
X
Creating Geometry ............................................................186

Using the Sketcher Toolbar ................................................186
Editing Live Entities.........................................................187
Creating Points....................................................................189
Create point position .....................................................189
Create point dynamic ....................................................190
Create point node points ...............................................190
Create point segment ....................................................190
Create point endpoints ..................................................191
7/7/05
xi
Create point small arcs ................................................. 191

Creating Lines .....................................................................192
Create line endpoint ..................................................... 192
Create line closest ......................................................... 194
Create line bisect ........................................................... 194
Create line perpendicular ............................................. 195
Create line parallel ........................................................ 196
Creating Arcs and Circles....................................................196
Create circle center point ............................................. 197
Create arc polar ............................................................. 197
Create circle edge point ................................................ 198
Create arc endpoints ..................................................... 199
Create arc 3 points ........................................................ 199
Create arc polar endpoints ........................................... 200
Create arc tangent ......................................................... 200
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes..........................................201
Create rectangle ............................................................ 202
Create rectangular shapes ............................................ 203
Create polygon .............................................................. 204
Create ellipse ................................................................. 205
Bounding box ................................................................ 206
Letters ............................................................................. 208
Create spiral ................................................................... 209
Create Helix ................................................................... 210
Solid to 2D profile .......................................................... 211
Create Relief Groove ..................................................... 212
Creating Fillets and Chamfers ............................................214
Fillet entities .................................................................. 214
Fillet chains .................................................................... 215
Chamfer entities ............................................................ 215
Chamfer chains ............................................................. 216
Creating Splines ..................................................................217
Create manual spline .................................................... 217
Create automatic spline ................................................ 218
Using the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar .............. 219
Create curves spline ...................................................... 220
Create blended spline ................................................... 220
Creating Primitives .............................................................220
Guidelines for Working with Primitives ...................... 221
Create block ................................................................... 222
7/7/05
16
xii MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
Create cone .....................................................................223

Create cylinder ...............................................................224
Create sphere ..................................................................224
Create torus ....................................................................225
X
Modifying Geometry..........................................................227
Editing Entities....................................................................227
Trim / Break submenu ..................................................227
Join entities .....................................................................234
Close arc ..........................................................................234
Convert NURBS ..............................................................234
Modify NURBS ...............................................................235
Simplify ...........................................................................235
Transforming Entities .........................................................236
Assigning New Attributes to Transformed Entities .....238
Xform Translate ..............................................................238
Xform Translate 3D ........................................................240
Xform Mirror ..................................................................241
Xform Rotate ...................................................................242
Xform Scale .....................................................................244
Xform Offset ...................................................................245
Xform Offset Contour ....................................................246
Xform Project ..................................................................248
Xform Rectangular Array ...............................................250
Xform Roll .......................................................................251
Xform Drag .....................................................................253
Xform STL .......................................................................253
Analyzing Entities ...............................................................254
Analyze Entity Properties ..............................................255
Analyze Position .............................................................257
Analyze Distance ............................................................257
Area / Volume submenu ................................................258
Analyze Chain .................................................................260
Analyze Contour .............................................................261
Analyze Angle .................................................................262
Analyze Dynamic ...........................................................263
Database / Number submenu ......................................264
Test Surfaces and Solids submenu ...............................266
Changing Entity Attributes .................................................267
Advanced Drawing and Design ........................................269

Displaying Surfaces and Solids...........................................269
7/7/05
xiii
Shading Settings ............................................................ 270

Surface Creation .................................................................275
Surface Representation ................................................. 275
Maximum surface deviation ........................................ 276
Base surface ................................................................... 276
Surface Display .............................................................. 277
Creating ruled or lofted surfaces .................................. 278
Creating revolved surfaces ........................................... 279
Creating offset surfaces ................................................ 280
Creating swept surfaces ................................................ 281
Creating net surfaces .................................................... 282
Creating fence surfaces ................................................. 284
Creating draft surfaces .................................................. 284
Creating extruded surfaces ........................................... 286
Filleting Surfaces ........................................................... 287
Trimming Surfaces ........................................................ 290
Creating a surface from a solid face ............................. 292
Creating a surface from a flat boundary ...................... 293
Filling holes with surfaces ............................................ 294
Removing Boundaries from Trimmed Surface ........... 296
Splitting surfaces ........................................................... 296
Untrimming surfaces .................................................... 297
Blending surfaces .......................................................... 297
Solids...................................................................................301
Creating a Solid Model: Process Overview .................. 301
Solids Associativity ........................................................ 303
Selecting Solids .............................................................. 305
Combining Solid Operations ........................................ 306
Working with Solid Functions ...................................... 307
Boolean Operations ...................................................... 325
Solids Manager .............................................................. 332
Checking Solid Models ................................................. 334
Viewing and Naming Solid Models .............................. 336
Editing Solid Models ..................................................... 338
Edit solid geometry ....................................................... 339
X
Drafting ...............................................................................344
Drafting Dimensions ..........................................................344
Smart Drafting Dimensions................................................345
7/7/05
16
xiv MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
Dimension Ribbon Bar Shortcut Keys ..........................346

Baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions .....................346
Working with Ordinate Dimensions...................................348
Non-Dimensioned Drafting Entities ..................................350
Associating drafting entities with geometry .......................353
Creating Associated Drafting Entities ..........................354
Changing Associated Drafting Entities .........................354
Associated Drafting Entity Status .................................355
Regenerating Associated Drafting Entities ..................355
Defining Drafting Options ..................................................356
X
Power User Tips ................................................................358

Working with Levels............................................................358
Setting the Main Level ...................................................358
Using the Level Manager Rightclick Menu ................360
Creating Level Sets .........................................................360
Reusing Level Names (Save/Get) ..................................361
Hiding Entities ....................................................................362
Blanking Entities .................................................................362
Copying Entities..................................................................363
3. Machining .............................................................................365
X
X
Machining Process Overview ..........................................366

Choosing a Machine and Control Definition ...................367
Selecting a Machine Definition ..........................................369
Editing Machine Definitions...............................................371
Working with Control Files and Control Definitions .........374
Accessing the Control Definition Manager ..................376
Editing a Control File .....................................................377
Building the Post Processor List ....................................379
Validating the Control File / Post Processor ................381
Working with Control Properties ..................................383
Tolerances ......................................................................384
Communications ...........................................................385
Files .................................................................................386
NC Dialog ........................................................................387
NC Output ......................................................................389
Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values .............................390
Work System ...................................................................392
Tool .................................................................................393
7/7/05
xv
Linear ............................................................................. 395

Arc ................................................................................... 396
Rotary ............................................................................. 398
Feed ................................................................................ 399
Cutter Compensation ................................................... 400
Machine Cycles ............................................................. 401
Subprograms ................................................................. 405
Operation Defaults ........................................................ 406
Text ................................................................................. 408
X
Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files ........................413

Using Open dialog box options ..........................................413
Setting File Open Options ............................................ 415
Switching Units of Measure ......................................... 416
Opening and Importing Files .............................................416
Merging Pattern Files..........................................................418
Setting Machine Group Properties ..................................421

Working with the Toolpath Manager .................................421
Using the Insert Arrow........................................................423
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups...............424
Renaming Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups .... 426
Setting Machine Group Properties .....................................427
Files tab .......................................................................... 428
Tool settings tab ............................................................ 430
Stock setup tab .............................................................. 434
Safety zone tab .............................................................. 437
Creating Toolpaths ............................................................439

Mill Toolpath Types ............................................................440
Contour Toolpaths ........................................................ 441
Circle Toolpaths ............................................................ 448
Drill Toolpaths ............................................................... 453
Feature-based Drilling .................................................. 460
Pocket Toolpaths ........................................................... 463
Wireframe Toolpaths .................................................... 464
Specialized Toolpaths ................................................... 468
Surface Toolpath Types ......................................................471
Surface Rough and Finish Parallel Toolpaths ............. 471
Surface Rough and Finish Radial Toolpaths ............... 472
Surface Rough and Finish Project Toolpaths .............. 472
Surface Rough and Finish Flowline Toolpaths ........... 473
Surface Rough and Finish Contour toolpaths ............ 473
7/7/05
16
xvi MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
Surface Rough Restmill Toolpaths ...............................474

Surface Rough Pocket Toolpaths ..................................475
Surface Rough Plunge Toolpaths ..................................476
Surface Finish Parallel Steep Toolpaths .......................476
Surface Finish Shallow Toolpaths ................................477
Surface Finish Pencil Toolpaths ...................................477
Multiaxis Toolpath Types ...................................................479
Selecting Geometry for 5-axis Toolpaths .....................481
5-axis Curve Toolpaths ..................................................482
5-axis Drill Toolpaths .....................................................483
5-axis Swarf Toolpaths ...................................................483
5-axis Multisurface Toolpaths .......................................484
5-axis Flowline Toolpaths .............................................486
5-axis Port Toolpaths .....................................................487
4-axis Rotary Toolpaths .................................................488
Lathe Toolpath Types .........................................................489
General Turning Toolpaths ...........................................490
Mill / Turn Toolpaths ....................................................502
Miscellaneous Operations .............................................509
Router Toolpath Types .......................................................516
Block Drilling Toolpaths ................................................517
Nesting Toolpaths...............................................................519
Engraving Toolpaths ...........................................................522
Toolpath Chaining Techniques ..........................................524
Working with Open and Closed Chains .......................524
Chaining Direction ........................................................525
Chaining Contour Toolpaths ........................................526
Synchronizing Chains ....................................................527
Selecting Tools ....................................................................528
Selecting a tool ...............................................................529
Managing Toolpath Operations .........................................534
Using Toolpath Manager icons .....................................536
Displaying Toolpaths .....................................................539
Guidelines for Working with Operations .....................540
Editing Operations ..............................................................541
Editing Common Parameters .......................................542
Changing the NC File Name ..........................................544
Renumbering Tools .......................................................545
Renumbering Work Offsets ...........................................546
Reversing Toolpaths ......................................................547
7/7/05
xvii
Recalculating Feeds / Speeds ....................................... 547

X
Backplot and Verify ...........................................................548

Backplotting Operations.....................................................548
Verifying Operations...........................................................551
Running the Verification .............................................. 552
Configuring Verification Parameters ........................... 553
Tool Simulation During Verification ........................... 554
Using STL comparison .................................................. 555
Post Processing .................................................................558

Post Processors, and Control / Machine Definitions . 559
About PST files ............................................................... 560
About NCI files .............................................................. 561
Post Processing Toolpath Operations ......................... 562
X
X
Machining Solids ...............................................................564

Power User Tips ................................................................565
Batch Processing Toolpath Operations ..............................565
Selecting Files for Batch Processing ............................ 566
Selecting Operations from a Batch File ....................... 566
Selecting Batch Operations from Mastercam Files .... 567
Tagging Operations for Batch Processing ................... 567
Running Batch Jobs ....................................................... 567
Reviewing Batch Processing Log Files ......................... 568
Importing Operations.........................................................568
Guidelines for importing toolpath operations ........... 569
Exporting Operations .........................................................569
Transforming Operations ...................................................570
Selecting Operations to Transform .............................. 572
Choosing Transformation Types ................................. 572
Organizing Transform Operations ............................... 573
Associating Work Offsets .............................................. 573
Trimming Toolpaths...........................................................573
Tips for Trimming Toolpaths ....................................... 574
Index........................................................................................577
7/7/05
16
xviii MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
7/7/05
chapter 1
Introduction to
Mastercam X
This chapter covers the following topics:
Starting Mastercam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 2

Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 4
The Mastercam Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Mastercam Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 28
Customizing Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 40
Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) . . . page 68
The Role of Machine and Control Definitions . . . . . . page 100
Printing and Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 109
Welcome to Mastercam X! Mastercam X is a powerful CAD/CAM application you use to design parts and create complete machining operations. To help you make the most of Mastercam X, use this guide to:
Get a basic orientation to the interface and functions.

Customize and configure Mastercam for optimum efficiency.
Understand the fundamentals of using Mastercam to design
and cut parts.
At the end of the Design and Machining chapters, youll find Power User
tips that go beyond the basics and introduce you to using advanced
features.
2 MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide
Starting Mastercam
This document assumes that you have successfully installed
Mastercam X, have completed the necessary post-installation procedures, and are ready to begin using Mastercam to design and machine
parts.
Note: For information on installing Mastercam, see the
Mastercam X Installation Guide included with your software, or
contact your local Reseller.
In this section, you will learn about:
Starting up Mastercam
Troubleshooting HASP and NetHASP issues (page 3)
IMPORTANT: If you have upgraded from a previous
Mastercam version, see the Mastercam X Transition Guide for
important information on converting Mastercam files, libraries,
and post processors.
Although you access Mastercam from a single executable, it is actually
a customized suite of modular products, each of which is optimized
for a specific type of machining. The Mastercam family of products
includes Mastercam Design, Mastercam Router, Mastercam
Mill, Mastercam Lathe, and Mastercam Wire. Separate add-on
modules are available for Mastercam Solids, Mastercam Nesting,
and Mastercam Engraving.
Note: Mastercam Wire will be available with a future release.
X To start Mastercam:
1 Doubleclick the Mastercam icon on your Windows
Desktop:
Or select Mastercam from the Windows Program menu. By

default, Mastercam starts up in the Design application.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Starting Mastercam 3
2 To open a machine-specific Mastercam product (for
example, Mill, Router or Lathe), select a machine definition

from the Machine Type menu.
Note: You can also switch between Mastercam products by
choosing certain functions from the drop-down menus or toolbars, or by selecting an operation from the Toolpath Manager.
Learning about HASP and NetHASP

Mastercam uses two types of licensing: single-user licensing and
network licensing. A single-user license requires a special piece of
hardware called a HASP (sometimes called a dongle or SIM) attached
to the parallel or USB port on your computer. If you receive the
following message when starting Mastercam, this component is
either missing or not configured properly:
Refer to the Mastercam X Installation Guide or contact your local

Reseller for assistance.
Network licensing requires a NetHASP to be installed on a computer
on your network. If any of the following messages display when
starting Mastercam, contact your network administrator for assistance:
Error checking out a [Mastercam product name] license. No

licenses have been purchased for this product.
Active NetHASP server not found.
All available licenses are in use.
Getting Help
Topics in this section include:
Using Online Help (page 4)

Mastercam X Documentation (page 6)
Mastercam Support and Services (page 8)
Using Online Help

The How do I get here link expands into text that provides navigational information.
Tabbed dialogs deliver help on dialog boxes. Click the Field definitions tab to view field definitions.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Getting Help 5
The Field definitions tab provides pop-up topics of dialog box

controls.
Every topic provides an e-mail link you can use to contact CNC Software Technical Documentation for feedback.
Mastercam X Documentation
Your Mastercam installation includes a suite of documentation tools
you can use to make the most of your Mastercam experience. These
documents are designed to get you up and running quickly, and to
provide ongoing education and support as you work with basic and
advanced features.
In addition to the Mastercam X Getting Started Guide you are
currently reading, your Mastercam X documentation includes:
Mastercam X Installation Guide (printed document):

Provides detailed instructions for installing HASP and
NetHASP devices, and Mastercam X. It also includes information on installing upgrades and update codes, and troubleshooting.
Mastercam X Quick Reference card (printed document and
PDF): Provides a graphical summary of Mastercam X key
features and functions.
Mastercam Transition Guide (printed document and PDF):
Assists Mastercam Version 9 users with the process of
migrating their settings, libraries, and parts to Mastercam X.
Includes PDF checklists to use as migration worksheets.
Mastercam Version 9 to X Function Map (PDF): Maps all
functions available in Mastercam Version 9 to a Mastercam X
equivalent.
Comprehensive context-sensitive Help: Embedded,
compiled HTML Help system, located in the Mastercam
\HELP directory.
To open Help to its default topic, choose Help, Contents
from the Mastercam menu, or press ALT+H.
To open context-sensitive help, click the help
button in any dialog box or ribbon bar to open a
related help topic.
Mastercam X Reference Guide (PDF): Supplements the
Help and other Mastercam product documentation. Includes
comprehensive conceptual information, detailed overviews,
examples, definition of terms and workflow-related information on using Mastercam X and its functions. To open, choose
Help, Reference Guide.
Mastercam X Post Parameters Guide (PDF): Describes
changes to the MP parameter model for Mastercam X. It
introduces the new parameters for machine definition,
control definition, and machine group properties, and
presents examples on how to access them. It includes a
complete list of all the post parameters available in

Mastercam X plus a transition map of changes to Version 9
parameters.
Notes:
You must install Adobe Reader (version 3.0 or higher)
before you can view or print PDF documentation.
All PDF documents are available from the Mastercam X
\Documentation directory.
X To view a PDF document:
1 From the Mastercam menu, choose Help, Reference Guide.
This automatically opens the Adobe Acrobat Reader to

display the document.
TIP: To display the PDF document in its own window, rather
than in a Web browser window, deselect the option to Display
PDF in browser in the Readers Internet preferences page. For
more information on setting this and other preferences, refer to
the Reader Help.
2 To navigate through the document, use the bookmark list in
the left-most pane of the Reader window, or use the Search

functions.
3 To view information, scroll through the pages using the
mouse wheel or the scroll bar on the right side of the Reader
window.
You can view PDF documents in three different page layouts. This
affects how some Reader functions work, and also affects links in the
PDF document. To change the layout, choose View, Page Layout and
one of the following options:
Single PageSelects all the text on a page of the PDF document
(with the exception of graphics or text that is part of a graphic).
To select all text on the current page, choose Edit, Select All.
Select a link to display the page the link is on.
ContinuousArranges the pages in a continuous vertical column.
To select all the text in the PDF document (with the exception
of graphics or text that is part of a graphic), choose Edit,
Select All.
Select a link to jump to the link destination, which displays

at the top of the window.
Continuous-FacingArranges the pages side by side, with the first
page displayed on the right.
PDF Guidelines
Embedded links within the documentred text, or a hand
icon that displays when the cursor is moved over texttake
you to information on the selected topic.
You can expand and collapse the Bookmark list. To expand a
bookmark (show subtopics), click on its plus symbol (+). To
collapse it (hide subtopics), click the minus symbol ().
If the Reader toolbar does not appear, press the F8 key to
display it.
To search for a word or phrase, click the binocular icon to
begin a search.
Note: For more information on working with PDFs, refer to the
Reader Help.
Mastercam Support and Services

Use the following Web sites to find information on Mastercam:
www.emastercam.com
Mastercam global user forum
www.mastercam.com
CNC Software, Inc. corporate Web

site
www.mastercamedu.com
CNC Software, Inc. Educational Division Web site
For assistance with installing Mastercam, its SIM or NetHASP, or to

obtain more information on using Mastercam, contact your local
Mastercam Reseller. If your Reseller is unavailable, you can call CNC
Technical Support Services Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m.5:30
p.m., USA Eastern Standard Time.
When calling CNC Software for technical support, please follow these
guidelines:
Be sure you have already tried to contact your Mastercam

Reseller.
Provide the serial number of your SIM HASP or NetHASP.
Be ready to describe the problem in detail. Write down what

happened, particularly if you cannot call immediately after
the problem occurs.
Be in front of your computer when you call.
If possible, try to duplicate the problem before calling. Our
Support Services technician may require you to duplicate the
problem while you are on the phone.
When you call, have ready a complete description of your
hardware, including your operating system (OS), central
processing unit (CPU), graphics card and settings, and
memory.
You can also leave a message for CNC Support Services twenty-four
hours a day, seven days a week via our e-mail or Web site addresses.
When sending e-mail, please include:
The serial number of your SIM HASP or NetHASP

Telephone number and contact information where you can
be reached
Files required to reproduce an issue, such as .MCX and post
files
TIP: Use Mastercams Zip2Go utility to gather Mastercam part
data into a compressed .Z2G file. This utility makes it easy to
provide your Reseller or CNC Support Services with a file
attachment that contains the information they need. Zip2Go
scans the machine groups in your current part file and captures
information such as your Mastercam configuration, machine
definition, and post files. For more information on using
Zip2Go, please refer to the Mastercam Help.
Important Contact Information

Address
CNC Software, Inc.

671 Old Post Road
Tolland, Connecticut, 06084-9970
USA
Phone
(860) 875-5006
Fax
(860) 872-1565
FTP Address
ftp://ftp.mastercam.com
Internet Address
http://www.mastercam.com
E-mail
support@mastercam.com
The Mastercam Workspace

Use this section to learn about:
Mastercam Interface Elements

Mastercam Terms and Concepts (page 11)
Figure 1-1: Mastercam interface element overview
AutoCursor
Title bar Menu bar ribbon bar
Prompt area
General Selection Function

ribbon bar
ribbon bar
Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager

(Operations Manager pane)
Interactive
prompt
Status bar
Graphics window Toolbar
Vertically docked tool bar and most

recently used (MRU) function bar
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace 11
Mastercam Terms and Concepts

In this section, you will learn more about the terms identified in
Figure 1-1: Mastercam interface element overview on page 10, and
fundamental Mastercam concepts and features, including:
Graphics window
(page 12)
General Selection ribbon bar

(page 20)
Status bar
(page 12)
Sketcher
(page 21)
Toolpath and Solids

Manager tabs (page 13)
Live, fixed and phantom entities

(page 22)
Toolbars
(page 14)
Chaining
(page 23)
Interactive prompts
(page 15)
Rightclick menus
(page 23)
Tool tips
(page 15)
Shortcut keys
(page 25)
Dialog boxes
(page 16)
Machine Definition / Control

Definition Managers (page 25)
Ribbon bars
(page 17)
Toolpaths
(page 26)
Learning Mode
(page 20)
Libraries (operations, tools,

materials) (page 27)
AutoCursor and Visual

Cues (page 20)
Graphics window
This is the main workspace in Mastercam where you view, create, and
modify geometry, drafting entities, and toolpaths.
Figure 1-2: Mastercam graphics window
Note: Mastercam is configured to display numeric data using a

default Metric or Inch base unit of measure. Mastercam makes it
easy to switch between these measurement systems whenever the
part data requires the change. For more information, see Setting
Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on page 68 and
Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch) on page 99.
Status bar
The Status bar appears along the bottom of the Mastercam window.
You use its functions to edit the current settings for entity colors,
attributes, levels, and groups, and to define the view and orientation
of entities in the graphics window.
Figure 1-3: Mastercam Status bar
Note: You can also access Status bar functions from various
Mastercam menus and toolbars.
To customize the Status bar by changing the order in which the fields
appear or removing options, click the Status bar configure option (!).
This opens the Customize Status bar dialog box where you can
change the Status bar layout or reset it to the default setting.
TIP: Unless you select entities prior to making changes,
changing attributes, views, and planes applies only to the entities and toolpaths you create; existing entities and toolpaths
retain the attributes that were effective when they were
created.
You can use the Status bar and Analyze functions to change
attributes associated with existing entities. For more information, see Changing Entity Attributes on page 142.
Toolpath and Solids Manager tabs

The Toolpath Manager and Solids Manager tabs appear in the Operations Manager pane, a central location where you can manage all the
elements of the current job.
Figure 1-4: Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager pane
You can show or hide the Operations Manager pane by choosing the
View, Toggle Operations Manager function. Hiding the Operations
Manager expands the graphics window view to fit the full width of the
Mastercam window.
TIP: Use standard Windows methods to resize the Operations
Manager pane, the graphics window, or the entire Mastercam
window, as necessary.
The Toolpath Manager tab is where you define setup parameters, such as file defaults, tool settings, stock setup and
safety zones. You also use this tab to view, organize and edit
machine groups, toolpath groups, and operations. A toolpath
operation consolidates all the information needed to create a
particular toolpath.
If Mastercam Solids is installed, when you work with a solid
model, the Solids Manager tab lists each solid in the current
file. You can expand the tree structure of a solid to view its
history (a list of the operations that were performed to
construct the solid), and its toolpaths.
Toolbars
Toolbars are collections of functions represented by icons. Arrows in
the toolbar represent a submenu of functions you can view and select
in a drop-down list.
Figure 1-5: Example: toolbar
Choose a function in the toolbar by clicking it. Mastercam provides a

set of default toolbars to help you get started, but you can customize
them to meet your unique needs. In the Settings, Customize function, you can choose to show, hide, or redefine toolbars, create
completely new ones, and define a personalized right-mouse button
menu that contains the functions you use most often. For more information, see Customizing Your Workspace on page 40.
Interactive prompts
Some functions use interactive prompts. Prompts appear as small text
boxes in the graphics window after you select a function. They guide
you through performing the necessary actions required to complete
the function. For example, the following prompt appears when you
choose the Create line endpoint function from the Create, Line
menu:
After you select an endpoint in the graphics window, the first prompt
is replaced with another instruction:
In this example, as you create additional lines, the prompts continue

to appear in succession until you choose to exit the function.
TIPS:
You can drag a prompt to any position in the Mastercam
window. Subsequent prompts appear in the new position.
You can change the size of the interactive prompt by scaling
it up or down. To do this, position the cursor in the prompt,
rightclick, and choose Small, Medium, or Large.
Tool tips
Tool tips display when you hover the mouse over a function icon or a
button in a dialog box or ribbon bar. They help you to identify the
function or option.
Figure 1-6: Example: Tool tips
Button
Ribbon bar icon
Dialog boxes
Dialog boxes appear when you must enter information to complete a
selected function. Many dialog boxes allow you to interact with the
graphics window. For example, you can enter values in the dialog box
fields by temporarily returning to the graphics window and selecting a
position, entity, or toolpath.
You can expand some dialog boxes to show additional fields. By
default, they appear in a contracted format.
Figure 1-7: Example: dialog box, contract and expand
To expand or contract the dialog box,

click the double arrow buttons, located
in the upper left corner.
To return to the graphics window and
select a position or point, choose the
Position button.
Ribbon bars
Ribbon bars function like dialog boxes but look similar to toolbars.
Ribbon bars open when you activate many Mastercam functions. You
use them to create, position, and modify the geometry.
Figure 1-8: Example: ribbon bar
TIP: When you create geometry with ribbon bars and dialog
boxes, you can edit an entity as long as it remains live. You will
learn more about entity states later in Live, fixed and phantom
entities on page 22.
In the Mastercam workspace, a blank Ribbon Bar displays just above
the graphics window to indicate the default ribbon bar position.
When you choose a function that uses a ribbon bar, the function
ribbon bar replaces the blank Ribbon Bar placeholder. You can
change the default position, and dock or undock the ribbon bar. If you
undock the blank Ribbon Bar, it is removed from the Mastercam
window until you choose a function that uses a ribbon bar. Then the
ribbon bar displays in the last undocked Ribbon Bar position.
Navigating ribbon bars

There are three ways to move between buttons and fields in ribbon
bars. You can:
Use the mouse to click buttons and place the cursor in a

particular field.
Use the Tab key to move the cursor between fields.
Press a shortcut key to activate the button or field associated
with that key. For example, type T to activate the Tangent
button.
TIP: Use tool tips to identify shortcut keys.
Note: Some ribbon bar buttons and fields may be unavailable

(appear disabled) depending on the options you choose.
Locking and unlocking fields

The data in ribbon bar fields can be frozen (locked) to prevent the
value from changing when you reposition the cursor in the graphics
window. Each field has three states:
UnlockedThe normal and default state of a
ribbon bar or dialog box field is unlocked. This
state allows the field to change to the position of
the cursor in the graphics window.
Soft-locked When soft-locked, the data is only
frozen for the next entity you create. After an
entity is created, the field returns to the
unlocked (default) state. To soft-lock a field,
type a value into the field and press Enter.
Notice that the button next to the field appears
pressed in, signifying a soft-locked state.
Hard-lockedWhen hard-locked, the data is
frozen until you manually unlock the field. You
hard-lock a field to use a specific value repeatedly, for example, when creating multiple duplicate entities. To hard-lock a field, enter the value
and either click the button next to the field or
use Shift+click. The button remains selected
and the field is colored, indicating that the value
is locked. To unlock a field, click the button next
to the field.
TIP: You can also hold down the Shift key and press the field's
shortcut key to hard-lock the field.
Entering values in fields

In addition to typing values in ribbon bar and dialog box fields, or
using the cursor to dynamically update fields, you can use one of the
following methods to enter field values.
Click the drop-down arrow in the field to choose from a list of

values previously entered into the ribbon bar. These values
are saved in the registry and remain available, even after you
end the current Mastercam session.
In many numeric fields, you can rightclick in the field to
access a menu of data entry shortcuts.
Figure 1-9: Data entry shortcuts rightclick menu
To choose a shortcut option, select it from the list or type the

corresponding letter. Then select an entity in the graphics window
to automatically enter its specified value in the field.
Docking and undocking ribbon bars

You can undock a ribbon bar by doubleclicking in any gray space
area in the ribbon bar or singleclicking and dragging it to the
graphics window. Once the ribbon bar is undocked, you can easily
drag and drop it anywhere in the Mastercam window. You can dock it
again by dragging and dropping it in the toolbar section or by
doubleclicking the ribbon bar title bar.
Notes:
You can dock ribbon bars only in a horizontal position. This
differs from toolbars, which can be docked horizontally or
vertically.
If you undock and then close a ribbon bar (by clicking the x in
the upper right corner) it is removed from the Mastercam
window. This does not cause a problem; it will display the next
time it is required by the function.
Learning Mode
Learning mode is similar to a tool tip, but applies only to ribbon bars.
It provides information on the ribbon bar and its functions, including
the default shortcut keys. When Learning mode is active, it appears
when you place the cursor in any ribbon bar button or field.
Figure 1-10: Example: Learning mode
To turn Learning mode on or off, choose Settings, Configuration. In

the Configuration dialog box, choose the Screen properties page and
select/deselect the option to Use Learning Mode prompts.
AutoCursor and Visual Cues

You use the AutoCursor ribbon bar to:
Track cursor position

Manually enter X, Y, and Z coordinates
Detect and snap to points as you move the cursor over geometry on the screen
AutoCursor is active whenever Mastercam prompts you to select a
position in the graphics window. The AutoCursor ribbon bar works in
conjunction with the cursor to eliminate steps and make it easier to
select and enter points in complicated and congested geometry.
Figure 1-11: AutoCursor ribbon bar
When a position is detected, AutoCursor displays a visual cue to the

right of the cursor to identify the type of position. Endpoints and
midpoints of curves, lines, arc center points, and point entities are all
detected and highlighted by AutoCursor. In addition, AutoCursor can
snap to angle, nearest, tangent, perpendicular, horizontal, and
vertical conditions. For more information, see Using the AutoCursor
Ribbon Bar on page 116.
General Selection ribbon bar

For most Mastercam functions, you use the General Selection ribbon
barin addition to or in combination with standard Windows selection methodsto select entities in the graphics window. The General
Selection ribbon bar is also active any time you can select entities
prior to choosing a function.
The General Selection ribbon bar has a Standard Selection mode and
a Solids Selection mode. The default mode is Standard Selection. If
you initiate a Mastercam function that might apply to wireframe or
solid entities, you can use options to switch between selection modes.
Figure 1-12: General Selection ribbon bar
For more information on using general selection methods, see

Selecting Entities on page 124.
Sketcher
Sketcher is the suite of Mastercam X functions you use to create basic
geometry dynamically by moving the mouse and clicking in the
graphics window. Basic geometry includes points, lines, arcs, splines,
fillets, chamfers, and primitives. It does not include drafting, transform, modify, surfaces, or solids.
Figure 1-13: Sketcher toolbar
To sketch an entity, choose an entity type from the Sketcher toolbar

drop-down list or from the Create menu, set its ribbon bar or dialog
box options, and sketch the entity in the graphics window. For many
types of geometry, you also use the AutoCursor to create and edit
entity properties.
Live, fixed and phantom entities

Entities in Mastercam have three states: live, fixed, and phantom.
Live entities are those in the process of being created. You can
edit their properties using options in the selected function
ribbon bar or dialog box, remove them from the graphics
window, or fix them.
Entities become fixed entities when they have been accepted,
for example, when you press Enter or click OK or Apply to
complete a function.
When you create entities dynamically using the mouse, they
are drawn with a dashed white line. This is called the
phantom state. When you choose the final position to create
the entity, the entity becomes live.
Figure 1-14: Example: Phantom entity
Note: Lines always appear as solid.

After you create an entity using one of the Sketcher functions, it
remains live until you exit the function, start a new function, or create
another entity. Live entities are designated by a live entity color. When
you accept an entity, it changes to the normal entity color.
After entities become fixed, you can edit them using the Edit,
Analyze, and Xform menu functions.
TIP: To define Mastercam color defaults, choose Settings,
Configuration, and select the Colors properties page.
Chaining
Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so
that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. When
you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves (lines, arcs,
and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Chaining differs from
other selection methods because it associates order and direction to
the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect the way
Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.
Mastercam provides several chaining methods in the Chaining dialog
box, which opens whenever a function requires you to chain entities.
As you chain geometry, the entities appear highlighted in the same
color as selected entities.
The Chain Manager lists all the chains for the operation and provides
the utilities you need to rechain geometry. Since chaining determines
the cut order, tool rapid moves, and the direction of tool movement,
you may find that you need to modify the chaining after generating a
toolpath. For more information, see Chaining on page 134 and Toolpath Chaining Techniques on page 524.
Rightclick menus
Mastercam provides a number of rightclick menus. For example, in
the Toolpath Manager tab, rightclick to access an extensive list of
functions and submenus for working with machine groups, toolpath
groups, toolpaths, operations, setup sheets and more. In the Toolpath
parameters dialog box and tab, rightclick to choose from a number
of functions related to tools, tool libraries, and toolpath parameters
for the selected toolpath operation.
Figure 1-15: Examples: Rightclick menus
Toolpath Manager
Toolpath Parameters tab
Here are just a few of the places where you can use rightclick menus:
Levels Manager
View Manager
Toolpath Manager tab
Solids Manager tab
Tool parameters tab
Machine Definition Manager
Tool Manager
Materials List
Drill Point Manager

(Mill/Router)
Toolpath parameters tab

(Lathe)
Post Text page

(Control Definition)
Tool parameters tab

(Mill/Router)
Chain Manager
TIP: Rightclick menus are common to many Mastercam

functions; when in doubt, rightclick to see if one is available.
Two special types of rightclick menus include the customized rightmouse button menu (you configure this menu for quick access to your
favorite functions when working in the graphics window), and the
data entry shortcut menu, available in many numeric ribbon bar and
dialog box fields.
Shortcut keys
Mastercam provides special keyboard assignments you use, instead of
clicking icons, to access ribbon bar and dialog box options. These are
referred to as shortcut keys. For example, you can use the following
shortcut keys when working with the Point endpoints ribbon bar
function:
S - Save
D - Keep duplicates
E - Exit (fixes live entity and exits function)
You can view shortcut keys using tool tips and by activating Learning
mode. Mastercam help topics also list all available shortcut keys for a
specific function, ribbon bar, and dialog box.
Another type of shortcut key is associated with every Mastercam
function that appears in a menu or toolbar. You use this type of
shortcut to choose a function, instead of using the mouse to select it
from the menu or toolbar. Typically, function shortcuts are associated
with function keys (F1-F12), or a combination of Shift, Ctrl, Alt keys
and other alphanumeric characters.
IMPORTANT: The default keyboard shortcuts provided with
Mastercam X are consistent with those available in prior
versions of Mastercam. For information on mapping
Mastercam functions to your own, custom keyboard shortcuts,
see Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts on page 64.
Machine Definition / Control Definition Managers

Your Mastercam installation includes many default machine definitions, control definitions, and post processors. Use the Machine Definition Manager and the Control Definition Manager functions in the
Machine Type menu to customize or create your own machine and
control definitions, and to associate them with selected post
processor files.
A machine definition describes:
The components of the machine tool and their interrelationship.

A control definition that provides the post processor with the
information it needs to process toolpaths that meet the
control's requirements.
The post processor appropriate for the specific machine and
control combination.
Note: For more information on using, selecting, and editing
machine and control definitions, see The Role of Machine and
Control Definitions on page 100, Choosing a Machine and
Control Definition on page 367, and Power User Tips on page 565.
Toolpaths
In Mastercam, a toolpath represents the tool data and movements
used to remove material from stock. The toolpath contains a set of
rules that define the types of chains and parameters allowed, as well
as how they are applied to an operation. Each operation conforms to
the rules of a specific toolpath. An operation typically contains one or
more chains. Each toolpath you create displays as an operation in a
machine group that you can view and edit from the Toolpath
Manager tab.
To create a toolpath, you select a machine type, choose a function
from the Toolpaths menu or toolbar, and chain one or more pieces of
the parts geometry or select points, surfaces, or solids. You then select
the tool and enter other toolpath parameters. When you accept the
parameters, Mastercam generates the toolpath operation, which
appears in the Toolpath Manager tab under the active machine group.
TIP: You can also create different toolpath groups to organize
and manage operations.
Toolpaths and Associativity

Associativity in Mastercam refers to the relationship between geometry and the drafting entities, toolpaths or wirepaths that are created
from it. When you create a drafting entity, toolpath or wirepath,
Mastercam links it to the geometry. This association can be broken
only by deleting the drafting entity or the toolpath operation.
Mastercam warns you if you try to delete geometry used in a toolpath
or associated with a drafting entity.
Associativity lets you regenerate toolpaths or drafting dimensions

when the geometry changeswithout requiring you to redefine
them. When you change an operations's geometry or toolpath
parameters, use the Toolpath Manager to regenerate the operation.
When you change geometry associated with a drafting entity, use
functions in the Create, Drafting, Regen submenu to update the
drafting dimension, as necessary.
Libraries (operations, tools, materials)

Mastercam libraries are collections of files that define operations,
tools, or materials. Mastercam provides default tool and material
libraries to get you started, but you can customize the files and create
your own. Once you save a file to a library, it can be used and reused
in a Mastercam part file.
Operation Libraries
Operation libraries are collections of toolpath operations that have an
.OPERATIONS extension. To save an operation to a library, use the
Export function from the Toolpath Manager rightclick menu. You
can use the Import function in this menu to import a saved operation,
with or without its geometry, into the current part file, provided it can
be supported by the selected machine definition.
Tool Libraries
Tool libraries store tool definitions that have a .TOOLS extension. Tool
libraries are useful for storing common tools or for storing tools for
specific jobs. You can create a separate library for each machine tool
in your shop or for sets of machines that use similar tools. You can use
one of several tool libraries that come with Mastercam, or you can
create your own tool libraries. Use the Tool Manager to view and
manage libraries and tool definitions.
Note: Although you use different tool managers to define mill/
router and lathe tools, they are stored in a single tool library.
Material Libraries
Material definitions are stored in libraries, just like tool definitions.
When you select a material, Mastercam copies the definition to your
part file. Material definition files have a .MATERIALS extension and
consist of base feed rates and tables of adjustments for different operation types and tool types. When you select a material and a tool for
an operation, Mastercam can use the information in the material
definition to help calculate proper default feed rates and spindle
speeds for the selected operation and tool.
Mastercam Menus
In addition to using customizable toolbars and rightclick menus,
you can access most Mastercam functions through a series of standard, drop-down menus and submenus located across the top of the
Mastercam window. Primary menus include:
File (page 29)
Xform (page 35)
Edit (page 30)
Machine Type (page 35)
View (page 31)
Toolpaths (page 36)
Analyze (page 32)
Screen (page 37)
Create (page 33)
Settings (page 38)
Solids (page 34)
Help (page 39)
This section provides a summary of each menu and its functions.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus 29
File Menu
Use File menu functions to open, edit, print, and save files.
Mastercam provides seamless integration with most popular

CAD/CAM file formats. Converting files from and to non-Mastercam
formats occurs automatically when you open and save files in
Mastercam. When saving files, you can save all or only some of the
entities to a specified format, and include descriptive text and a
thumbnail image of the geometry with the file data.
You can also import and export files to and from specified directories,
and merge data into the current file from a pattern file (for example, a
nut or bolt you use repeatedly in Mastercam files).
Edit Menu
This menu provides access to functions you use to edit geometry,
such as the Join entities, Modify NURBS, Convert NURBS, and
Simplify functions, and the Trim / Break submenu functions. Other
Edit menu functions allow you to cut, copy, paste, delete, or select all
entities in the graphics window.
Use the Undo and Redo functions to reverse or repeat one or more
sequential events that occur as you work with a file. (An event is a
single function-based operation such as create line or transform entities.)
You can also use the Set Normal and Change Normal functions to set
the direction of multiple surface normals relative to the current
construction plane.
View Menu
The View menu helps you manage the appearance and orientation of
the Mastercam graphics window.
The Viewports submenu lets you choose a particular arrangement of

one or more (up to four) viewports. Viewports are partitioned areas of
the graphics window where you can assign different views.
Use other View menu functions to show or hide the Operations
Manager pane, and otherwise modify the graphics window appearance by fitting, repainting, panning, or zooming.
From the Orient submenu, you can change views, dynamically rotate
the current view, or flip coordinates to reorient the graphics window
view.
Analyze Menu
Use Analyze menu functions to view and edit entity properties.
Some analyze functions provide a report function that lets you save
the information to a file. You can also use analyze functions to modify
the color, line style and width, or point style attributes of a single
entity, or apply the same attributes to all the selected entities.
Create Menu
This extensive menu includes all Sketcher (Create Geometry), Curve,
Surfaces, and Drafting functions.
Use these functions to create points, lines, arcs, splines, curves, fillets,
chamfers, surfaces, drafting entities and basic geometry including
rectangles, rectangular shapes, polygons, ellipses, spirals, and helixes.
From the Primitives submenu, you can create a cylinder, cone, block,
sphere or tourus surface. If your installation includes Mastercam
Solids, you can also create solid primitive shapes.
Additional functions allow you to create letters, define a bounding
box, and convert a solid to a 2D profile.
Solids Menu
Functions in this menu are available only if your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Solids.
Use these functions to define a solid by extruding, revolving,

sweeping, or lofting chains of curves.
Once you create the base operation, you use other Solids menu functions to remove or add material, smooth or bevel edges, shell, and cut
entry holes. You can also perform Boolean functions (add solids
together, remove solids from one another, and find common solid
volumes), draft solid faces, and trim solids to a plane or surface.
Note: To define a solid using primitive (pre-defined) shapes, such
as a cylinder, cone, block, sphere, or torus, use the Create, Primitives functions.
Xform Menu
Use Xform (transform) functions to move or copy selected entities by
mirroring, rotating, scaling, offsetting, translating, stretching, and
rolling them.
With some functions, you can join the copied entities to the originals.
When you perform a transform function, Mastercam creates a temporary group from the original entities and a result from the transformed entities.
Machine Type Menu

Use this menu to select a machine type by choosing a machine definition. Your access to the different types of machine definitions in the
menu is based on the Mastercam products you have installed. For
example, you must have a Mastercam Mill license to choose a Mill
machine definition from this menu.
You can also use the Machine Definition Manager and the Control
Definition functions in this menu to set up or modify machine and
control definitions.
The machine type you choose modifies the Mastercam interface so
that only the toolpath options and limits supported by the machine,
control, and post processor are available. This prevents Mastercam
from creating tool motion that cannot be executed by the machine. In
a Mastercam part file, the machine definition is part of the machine
group properties you view and modify in the Toolpath Manager. As
soon as you select a machine type, only the toolpaths available for the
selected machine type are enabled in the Toolpaths menu.
Toolpaths Menu
Functions in this menu allow you to create and edit the toolpaths
required to cut the part using the specified machine definition. Toolpath functions appear in this menu only after you select a machine
definition from the Machine Type menu, or choose a machine group
from the Toolpath Manager. These functions vary based on the
machine type associated with the active machine group (Mill, Lathe,
Router). Here is an example of the Mill toolpaths menu:
When you create a toolpath, an operation is automatically created

and appears in the Toolpath Manager under the active machine
group.
Note: The machine group you are working with appears highlighted in the Toolpath Manager, indicating that it is active.
Screen Menu
This menu is where you specify default settings and manage the
display of geometry in the graphics window. The Clear colors option
lets you remove the group and result colors that result from
performing a transform function (Xform). Mastercam creates a
temporary group from the originals (red) and a result (purple) from
the transformed entities. You can set system attributes, and activate,
deactivate, or customize the appearance of the selection grid, which
is a matrix of reference points that the cursor snaps to when you
sketch a point.
You use other Screen menu functions to temporarily remove and

restore selected entities, repaint, regenerate, or copy images in the
graphics window, and combine all parallel views into a single view.
Settings Menu
Use the Settings menu functions to set up Mastercam to your specifications.
You can define, save, or load the default values and preferences
(Configuration) you want to work with. Other functions allow you to
create customized toolbar configurations and states, drop-down
menus, function key mappings, and a customized right-mouse
button menu. The configuration and customization parameters you
define can be saved to named files that you load when you need
them, even on other Mastercam installations.
You can also run third-party applications, VB scripts, and create, edit,
or run Mastercam macros. Other tools let you optimize your PCs
RAM management when running Mastercam.
Notes:
Although you can create multiple configuration .CONFIG files,
toolbars and states (.MTB), and key map (.KMP) files, each
containing different values, you can load only one of each file
type at a time.
Changes made to configuration settings apply only to the
current session unless you save them to a configuration file.
For more information on customization tools, see Customizing
Your Workspace on page 40, and Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on page 68.
Help Menu
This menu provides access to a variety of information about
Mastercam, including:
Mastercam Help
Mastercam X Reference Guide PDF (requires Adobe Acrobat
Reader)
Mastercam product information (licensing, version, installed
products, serial number)
Online updates
Mastercams corporate website
(www.mastercam.com)
Note: For more information on getting help with Mastercam, see
Mastercam Support and Services on page 8.
Customizing Your Workspace

Use the Settings, Customize function to set up toolbars so that the
functions that are most important to you are easily available, and
those that you do not work with, or use infrequently, do not display.
You can also create or modify the drop-down menus that appear in
toolbars, create your own toolbars, and set up a customized rightmouse button menu for quick access to the functions you use most
often.
Additional customization options allow you to remap default
Mastercam keyboard shortcuts to your own, custom key sequences.
This essential customization tool lets you ramp up quickly and maintain high productivity because you use the keyboard shortcuts you
already know and rely on.
IMPORTANT: If you are upgrading from a prior version of
Mastercam, the same keyboard shortcuts have been retained,
where possible to help you transition to Mastercam X.
TIP: Use the Settings, Macro Manager function to reduce the

number of keystrokes you type and ensure consistency when
performing repeated tasks. A macro is a series of Mastercam
functions, commands, keystrokes, and other actions that you
can record, save, and play back at any time. Macros can make
detail work flow more quickly and easily.
Customizing Toolbar Settings (page 41)

Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar files (page 45)
Customizing Toolbar Functions (page 45)
Customizing Drop-down Menus (page 50)
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu (page 57)
Creating and Saving Toolbar States (page 59)
Hiding / Showing Toolbars (page 60)
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts (page 64)
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Customizing Your Workspace 41
Customizing Toolbar Settings

Customized toolbar settings are stored as toolbar files (.MTB) in the
\CONFIG directory of the Mastercam installation location. Toolbar
files are completely portable and allow you to transform any
Mastercam installation in your shop into your own personal workstation.
Each Mastercam toolbar file you create contains the following information:
For each toolbar you define, a list of its functions, including

drop-down menus and submenus.
Functions in the right-mouse button menu.
All toolbar states that were created and saved to the .MTB file.
A toolbar state records the show / hide display status, physical orientation, size, and location, and docked / undocked
state of each toolbar at a specific point in time and is used to
reload this configuration.
Mastercam uses only one toolbar file at a time. However, when
running Mastercam, you can change the current toolbar file as often
as necessary.
This also applies to toolbar states. Although you can create and save
many named toolbar states in a single toolbar file, you load and work
with only one toolbar state at any given time. Creating separate
toolbar states for different job phases simplifies the interface and
helps you quickly locate the functions you need. For example, in your
toolbar file, you could create different toolbar states to facilitate
working with Design, 2D Mill, 3D Mill, Lathe, or Solids functions.
When you load a toolbar state, the workspace immediately changes to
the toolbar state configuration. You can also assign a toolbar state to a
machine definition in order to change the toolbar configuration each
time the associated machine definition is active in the Toolpath
Manager.
The following examples illustrate two toolbar states, Design and
Lathe.
Figure 1-16: Example: Design Toolbar State
CAM-related
toolbars hidden
Vertically docked
Sketcher toolbar
Figure 1-17: Example: Lathe Toolbar State
CAD-related
toolbars hidden
Vertically docked
Lathe Toolpaths toolbar
Mastercam provides a number of standard toolbar files. They are

located in the Mastercam \CONFIG directory.
TIP: To open and load a toolbar file, use the Settings,

Customize, Open file icon.
Note: When you start Mastercam, it opens the default toolbar file
specified in the configuration file. You set the toolbar and other
startup parameters in the Settings, Configuration function,
Start / Exit page. You will learn more about configuring
Mastercam defaults in Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on page 68.
To access the Customize dialog box, choose Settings, Customize
from the Mastercam menu. Fields and options in the Customize
dialog box are organized and displayed in two tabs: Toolbars (default)
and Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu.
Figure 1-18: Toolbars tab (Customize dialog box)
In the Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, you can:
Remove or add functions in toolbars

Create new toolbars
Rename toolbars
Delete toolbars
Note: Use the Toolbar States button to access the Toolbar States
dialog box. You can also access this dialog box directly from the
Mastercam Settings menu. For more information on working
with toolbar states, see Creating and Saving Toolbar States on
page 59.
To create or modify drop-down menus, including the right-mouse
button menu, click the Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu
tab.
Figure 1-19: Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu tab
(Customize dialog box)
In the Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu tab, you can:
Create new drop-down menus

Remove or add functions in drop-down menus
Rename drop-down menus
Delete drop-down menus
TIP: As you work with options in the Settings, Customize
dialog box, toolbars in the Mastercam window are updated so
you immediately see the results of changing the current
toolbar file. All Customize dialog box options interact with the
Mastercam window in this manner.
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar

files
Options in the lower left corner of the Customize dialog box allow you
to:
Open an existing Mastercam toolbar file. Use the Open file

dialog box options to locate and open the .MTB file you want
to load.
Use options in the Save as dialog box to save the current
toolbar settings to a specified location and .MTB file name.
Reset toolbars to the standard Mastercam defaults. These
settings are the factory defaults and are stored in proprietary Mastercam files. After loading the defaults, you can
customize them and use the Save as option to save them to
an external toolbar file.
Figure 1-20: Customize Toolbars: Open, Save, Reset
Open
Save as
Reset
Current Toolbar file
Customizing Toolbar Functions

In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, all functions are
grouped by category. To view functions, select a category from the
drop-down list:
Figure 1-21: Customize dialog box: Category list
IMPORTANT: Categories do not represent standard toolbars.

Standard toolbars typically correspond to fixed Mastercam
menus and submenus. Toolbar categories are more general
groupings of related functions.
When you choose a category from the list, a group of function icons
for the selected category displays in the Commands section of the
tab:
Figure 1-22: Example: Edit category functions (Customize
dialog box)
Selected
category
Selected
function
Function
description
(tooltip)
TIP: When you click the function icon, a brief description (tool
tip) of the function displays below the function list. You can
also display tool tips in the Mastercam window by moving the
cursor over toolbar icons, or buttons and fields in ribbon bars
or dialog boxes.
Use drag and drop methods to quickly add, delete, or rearrange the
functions in a toolbar.
Drag and Drop Visual Cues

When you drag a function from an existing toolbar or from the
Customize dialog box, Mastercam adds a visual cue to the cursor
pointer. Visual cues indicate what will happen if you drop the function in the current position. They include:
Drag / Drop
Visual Cues
Description
No drop zone: The dragged icon is in a location
where it cannot be dropped. If you drop it there,
no change occurs. The icon remains in the toolbar
from which it was dragged or, if dragged from the
Customize dialog box, it is not added to a new or
existing toolbar.
Add function: If you drop the dragged icon to this
location, the function is added either to a selected
toolbar or to a new toolbar. If you do not drop the
icon on an existing toolbar, Mastercam automatically creates the new toolbar.
Remove function: If you drop the dragged icon to
this location, it is removed from the selected
toolbar. This does not delete the function from
Mastercam; it is removed only from its position in
the toolbar.
Adding Functions and Toolbars

You can drag function icons from the Customize dialog box Toolbars tab and drop them in an existing toolbar. You can also create a
new toolbar by dropping the function anywhere in the Mastercam
window except on an existing toolbar.
For each new toolbar you create, Mastercam assigns a default
toolbar name using a unique numeric identifier, as necessary (for
example New Toolbar, New Toolbar1, New Toolbar2).
X To add functions from the Toolbars tab to a new or existing
toolbar:
1 Choose one of the following methods to access the
Customize dialog box:
Choose Settings, Customize from the Mastercam menu.

Rightclick in the toolbar area or when the cursor is in a
toolbar and select Customize from the Toolbar Display
menu.
2 In the Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, click the Category
drop-down arrow and choose a category to display its functions.

3 Choose a function by selecting it with the left mouse button.
Then hold down the button as you drag the function from the
Toolbars tab to a new location.
4 If you are adding the function to a new toolbar, skip to Step 5.
Otherwise, to place the function in a toolbar, drag and drop it

in a toolbar position.
TIP: If you drop a function in the wrong position, select it
again, then drag and drop it in a new position.
5 To create a new toolbar for the function, drag and drop the
function anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not

occupied by a toolbar. Mastercam automatically creates a
toolbar named New Toolbar and adds the function to it.
6 To add additional functions to the new toolbar, repeat Step 2
Step 4, as necessary. To rename the new toolbar, continue

with Renaming and Deleting Toolbars on page 49.
Moving Toolbar Functions

To rearrange toolbar functions in a toolbar, choose Settings,
Customize and just drag and drop the functions in the Mastercam
window from one position to another. Use the same technique to
move functions between toolbars.
Deleting Toolbar Functions

To delete a function from an existing toolbar, choose Settings,
Customize. Then drag the function from the toolbar and drop it in
anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not occupied by a toolbar.
Renaming and Deleting Toolbars

X To rename a toolbar:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, from the
Show these toolbars list, select the toolbar to rename.

TIP: Toolbars are listed in ascending alphabetical sequence.
2 Rightclick and choose Rename Toolbar from the menu.
3 In the toolbar name text field, type the new name, and then
press Enter to accept it and exit the name field.

X To delete a toolbar:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, select
the toolbar to delete from the Show these toolbars list.

2 Press Delete or rightclick and choose Delete Toolbar from
the menu. The toolbar is deleted from the current toolbar file
and no longer appears in the toolbar list or the Mastercam
window. If you delete a standard toolbar, Mastercam displays
a warning message on startup informing you that it cannot
find the toolbar. <<Reviewers: The error message happens
when starting up the daily. Will it happen in the commercial
release? Also, what happens to toolbar states created for the
MTB file? What if they are assigned to MD files? Can they be
deleted regardless?>>
TIPS:
To add the deleted toolbar back to the toolbar file, you must
recreate it using the procedure for Adding Functions and
Toolbars on page 48.
To remove the toolbar from the Mastercam window without
deleting it from the toolbar file, deselect the check box that
appears next to the toolbar name in the Show these toolbars list.
Customizing Drop-down Menus

In the Settings, Customize dialog box and Drop-downs /
Right-mouse button menu tab, the Menus list displays all standard
and custom drop-down menus that are configured for your
Mastercam installation.
Figure 1-23: Customize dialog box: Menus list
Drop-down menus are collections of functions you add as a group to

toolbars and other drop-down menus. When added, they appear in
the toolbar or menu as a single function icon with an arrow indicating
that it can be expanded.
Figure 1-24: Example: Expanded drop-down menus
Toolbar drop-down arrow

and expanded menu
Drop-down submenu arrow
and expanded submenu
TIP: You can configure Mastercam to always show the icon of

the most recently used function as the drop-down menu icon
in the toolbar. Or you can fix the positions of drop-down and
submenu functions. For more information on setting this and
other screen parameters in the Settings, Configuration function, see Screen on page 75.
Each function position in a Mastercam toolbar can support up to 10
levels of nested drop-down menus, with up to 50 items per dropdown menu. With this flexibility, a single toolbar could hold every
available Mastercam function!
By incorporating drop-down menus into your toolbar design, you can
present many functions in a very compact format. Creating your own
drop-down menus lets you organize functions based on your preferences and job requirements.
After creating drop-down menus, you use drag and drop methods to
add them to one or more toolbars in the Mastercam window or to
other drop-down menus in the Menus list.
You can also build your own right-mouse button menu, a special type
of drop-down menu that you access in the graphics window using the
right-mouse button.
In this section, you will learn to create a drop-down menu, rename it,
and add, remove, and rearrange its functions. You will also learn to
add a drop-down menu to a toolbar, add a submenu to a drop-down
menu, and delete drop-down menus.
For each new drop-down menu you create, Mastercam adds a
sequential counter to the default name, for example, New drop-down
menu, New drop-down menu(1), New drop-down menu(2) and so on.
This ensures that a unique name is assigned to each new drop-down
menu you create.
TIPS: Drop-down
menus that contain other
drop-down menus
(submenus) are indicated by a right arrow
icon.
To display a popup list
of functions in the
submenu, hold the
cursor over the
submenu title.
When adding a function or a drop-down
menu by dragging it
to another menu, if
the target menu is
contracted, you can
expand it by holding the cursor over it. This allows you to
drop the new items in a selected position. If you drop a function or submenu in a contracted menu, it is added to the end
of the menu.
Creating Drop-down Menus

X To create a drop-down menu:
1 Choose one of the following methods to access the
Customize dialog box:
Choose Settings, Customize from the Mastercam menu.

Rightclick in the toolbar area or when the cursor is in a
toolbar and select Customize from the Toolbar Display
menu.
2 In the Settings, Customize dialog box, open the Drop-
downs / Right-mouse button menu tab.

3 Press Insert, or rightclick in the Menus list and choose the
Add drop-down menu option. Mastercam automatically

assigns a unique new menu name and adds it in alphanumeric sequence to the Menus list.
4
To rename the new menu, continue with Renaming Dropdown Menus on page 53.
5 To add functions to the new menu, continue with Adding

Drop-down Menu Functions on page 54.
Renaming Drop-down Menus

X To rename a drop-down menu:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-downs /
Right-mouse button menu tab, from the Menus list, select

the menu to rename. (With the exception of the Right-mouse
button menu, you can rename any drop-down menu.)
TIP: Drop-down menus are listed in ascending alphabetical
sequence.
2 Rightclick and choose the Rename drop-down menu
option.
3 In the menu name text field, type the new name and then
press Enter to accept it and exit the name field.

Note: Renaming the drop-down menu is associative. When
viewing the Menus list, all references to the renamed menu are
also updated, (for example, the renamed drop-down menu is
used as a submenu in other drop-down menus). However, this is
not reflected in the current Mastercam session and occurs only
after you exit and restart Mastercam.
Deleting Drop-down Menus

You can delete drop-down menus only if they are not currently used
in toolbars or as submenus in other drop-down menus. Prior to
performing this procedure, you must first remove the drop-down
menu you want to delete from toolbars and other drop-down menus.
X To delete a drop-down menu:
Right-mouse button menu tab, from the Menus list, select

the menu to delete.
2 Press Delete or rightclick and choose the Delete drop-down
menu option. If the drop-down menu is used in a toolbar or

in another drop-down menu, a message informs you and it is
not deleted. Otherwise, Mastercam deletes the selected dropdown menu, removing it from the Menus list. <<Reviewers:
When deleting a drop-down that is in use, an error message
indicates that the drop-down is used in toolbars and/or other
drop-downs and instructs the user to remove these refer-
ences first. But it doesnt tell them how to find out where it is
used. Other than searching every toolbar / drop-down in
their configuration, can they open the .MTB file and search
for occurrences? If so, how? Please provide additional information on how can the user can find where the menu that
they want to delete is being used. >>
Adding Drop-down Menu Functions

X To add functions to a drop-down menu:
Right-mouse button menu tab, click the Category dropdown arrow and choose a category from the list to display its
functions.
2 Choose a function by selecting it with the left mouse button.
Then hold down the button as you drag the function to a

drop-down menu in the Menus list.
3 To add the function to a drop-down menu, drop it in the
menu. If the drop-down menu is not expanded, the new

function is added as the last function. Otherwise, it is
inserted below the function on which it is dropped.
TIP: If you drop a function in the wrong position, select it
again, then drag and drop it in a new position.
4 To add additional functions to the drop-down menu, repeat
Step 1Step 3, as necessary.

Notes:
Adding or removing drop-down menu functions is associative.
When you add, remove, or rearrange functions in the parent
drop-down menu, all of its submenus immediately change.
When you modify drop-down menus, you immediately see the
results in the current Mastercam session.
Moving Menu Functions

To rearrange functions in a drop-down menu, expand the menu in the
Menus list. Then drag and drop functions from one position to
another. The function you move is inserted below the function on
which it is dropped. Use the same technique to move functions
between drop-down menus.
Deleting Menu Functions

To delete a function from an existing drop-down menu, expand the
menu, select the function, then press the keyboard Delete key.
IMPORTANT: When deleting drop-down menu functions,
carefully choose one of the following options:
To delete a single function from the menu, select it and press
Delete.
To delete the entire menu, select it and press Delete or use
the rightclick menu option Delete drop-down menu.
Adding Drop-down Menus to Toolbars

To add drop-down menus to toolbars, or create a new toolbar, drag a
drop-down menu from the Menus list and drop it in a toolbar or
anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not occupied by a toolbar.
X To add a drop-down menu to a toolbar:
1 From the Menus list in the Customize dialog box Drop-
downs / Right-mouse button menu tab, with the left mouse

button, select the drop-down menu to add to the toolbar.
2 Hold down the mouse button and drag the drop-down menu
to an existing toolbar position. Then drop the menu in the

position.
TIP: To create a new toolbar for the drop-down menu, drop
the menu anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not occupied by a toolbar. Mastercam automatically creates a toolbar
(New Toolbar) and adds the drop-down menu to it. For more
information on configuring toolbars, see Customizing Toolbar
Settings on page 41.
Adding Submenus to Drop-down Menus

Mastercam supports up to 10 levels of nesting for drop-down lists and
submenus. First, define all submenus as drop-down menus (see
Creating Drop-down Menus on page 52). Then, in the Customize
dialog box Menus list, select and drag a drop-down menu to a
submenu position in another menu. When you drop it, Mastercam
creates a submenu item in the drop-down list.
Figure 1-25: Example: Nested drop-down menus
Figure 1-26: Example: Multi-level drop-down toolbar
Here are a few things to keep in mind when working with submenus:
Creating a submenu item does not move or otherwise change

the drop-down menu on which it is based; it creates only an
associative link, using the name of the submenu.
When you add, remove, or rearrange functions in the
parent drop-down menu, all of its submenus immediately
change.
To create multiple levels of submenus, begin with the last
drop-down menu in the series and work your way to the
highest menu level. For example, to create a three-level dropdown menu, first create all three drop-down menus. Then,
drag and drop the third level menu to the second level menu.
Next, drag the second level menu (which now includes a
submenu link to the third level menu) to the first menu.
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu

Mastercam includes a special type of drop-down menu that you
access with the right-mouse button any time the cursor is in the
graphics window. To create a convenient list of shortcuts, you can
add, remove, or rearrange functions and submenus in the
right-mouse button menu using the same procedures as with other
drop-down menus. For an alternate method of access, you can even
add the right-mouse button drop-down menu to a toolbar, or as a
submenu to another drop-down menu.
Figure 1-27: Example: Right-click mouse button menu
Note: You cannot delete or rename the right-mouse button menu

from Mastercam. To disable it, remove all of its functions.
Adding Separators to Toolbars / Menus

You can add vertical and horizontal separators to toolbars and dropdown menus to create a visual break, for example, to isolate a single
function, or group similar functions.
Figure 1-28: Example: Vertical and horizontal separators
Horizontal and
vertical separators
In the Customize dialog box, the Separator button

displays in the upper right section of each tab.
X To add vertical separators to toolbars:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars
tab, choose the Separator button with the left mouse button.
2 Hold down the mouse button and drag the separator to any
toolbar position in the Mastercam window.

3 Release the mouse button to drop the vertical separator in
the selected position.

X To add horizontal separators to drop-down menus:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-down /
Right-mouse button menu tab, expand the drop-down

menu in the Menus list.
2 Choose the Separator button with the left mouse button,
then drag it to a position in the expanded drop-down menu.

3 Release the mouse button to drop a SEPARATOR label in the
selected position. When viewing the drop-down menu in the
Mastercam window, a horizontal separator displays in the

SEPARATOR label position.
TIP: To reposition a separator, drag and drop it to a new position in the toolbar or drop-down menu.
X To remove separators from toolbars:
1 In the Mastercam window, select the toolbar separator to
remove.
2 Drag and drop it anywhere in the Mastercam window that is
not occupied by a toolbar.

X To remove separators from drop-down menus:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-down /
Right-mouse button tab, expand the drop-down menu in

the Menus list.
2 Select the SEPARATOR label to remove and press the
keyboard Delete key.
Creating and Saving Toolbar States

A toolbar state is a snapshot of the display status (show/hide), physical orientation, size, location, and state (docked / undocked) of all
toolbars in the Mastercam window at a specific point in time.
When you load a toolbar state, you restore a customized toolbar
layout to the Mastercam window in order to work with toolbars in a
certain configuration. For example, you might create and save
different toolbar states for working with 2D toolpaths and 3D toolpaths, or with Lathe, Mill, and Router machine definitions.
TIP: In the Machine Type, Machine Definition Manager dialog
box, you can assign a toolbar state to a machine definition.
When you open the machine in a machine group (for example,
to create toolpaths for it), the assigned toolbar state automatically loads in the Mastercam window.
Use the Settings, Toolbar States function to access the Toolbar States
dialog box where you can view, create, save, load or delete toolbar
states that are stored in the current toolbar file.
Note: You can also access this dialog box by choosing Settings,
Customize and clicking the Toolbar States button in the Toolbar
tab.
Figure 1-29: Toolbar States dialog box
TIP: To set a default toolbar state that loads whenever you

open the toolbar file or start up Mastercam, select a toolbar
state from the list. Then select the Default check box. An
asterisk displays next to the toolbar state name, indicating that
it is the default.
Although you use a separate function to work with them, toolbar
states are stored in binary format within a section of the current
toolbar file (.MTB). To open and load a toolbar file, use the Settings,
Customize function, and then click the Open file button , located in
the lower left corner.
Hiding / Showing Toolbars

Mastercam provides standard toolbars you can modify, rename, or
delete. You can also create an unlimited number of your own toolbars.
Use the Show these toolbars portion of the Toolbar States dialog
box to view all standard and custom toolbars that have been configured for your Mastercam installation, and to modify display status
settings. Only toolbars with a display status of show appear in the
Mastercam interface.
Figure 1-30: Toolbar States dialog box,

Show these toolbars list
Show
Hide
When creating or modifying a toolbar state, use the following

methods to set each toolbars display status (show/hide):
To show a toolbar in the Mastercam window, select the check

box next to the toolbar name (selected toolbars are indicated
with a check mark).
To hide a toolbar from display, clear the check mark next to
the toolbar name by deselecting it.
As you select / deselect toolbars, they display in, or are removed from,
the Mastercam window.
X To create a toolbar state:
1 Use one of the following methods to access the Toolbar
States dialog box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Settings, Toolbar

States.
In the Settings, Customize function and dialog box, click
the Toolbar States button.
2 Set the toolbar display status for all toolbars you want to hide
or show in the toolbar state.

3 In the Mastercam window, drag and drop toolbars to repo-
sition, resize, and dock or undock them.

4 To save the layout as a toolbar state, in the Toolbar States
dialog box, type the name of the new toolbar state in the
name field and choose Save. The new toolbar state is added
to the toolbar file and displays in the Toolbar States list.
X To load a toolbar state:

1 To view all toolbar states in the current toolbar file, use one of
the following methods to access the Toolbar States dialog

box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Settings, Toolbar

States.
In the Settings, Customize function and dialog box, click
the Toolbar States button.
2 In the Toolbar States list, select the name of the toolbar state
to load and click the Load button. The Mastercam window is

updated with the selected toolbar state.
3 To close the dialog box, click OK.
X To delete a toolbar state:

1 In the Toolbar States dialog box, choose one of the following
options:
To delete a single toolbar state, select the name of the

toolbar state to delete and click the Delete button. The
selected toolbar state is removed from the list.
To delete all toolbar states, click the Delete All button.
TIP: To restore deleted toolbar states, click Reset before
exiting this dialog box.
2 To close the dialog box, click OK.
Using the Toolbar RightClick Menu

From any position in the Mastercam window toolbar area, or when
the cursor is positioned in a toolbar, you can rightclick to access the
Toolbar Display menu and view a list of all toolbars and their display
status.
Figure 1-31: Toolbar Display rightclick menu
To change the current display status of a single toolbar and close the
menu, select it from the list. The selected toolbar changes to show or
hide in the Mastercam window, based on its initial setting.
Use other menu options to access the Customize and Toolbar States
dialog boxes, or to quickly select and load a toolbar state from the
current .MTB file.
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts

Use the Settings, Key mapping function and dialog box to map
Mastercam commands to your own keyboard shortcuts.
Figure 1-32: Key mapping dialog box
You can map any Mastercam function to a key sequence you define.
Rather than selecting a function from a menu or toolbar with the
mouse, use your custom keyboard shortcut to open the function.
Key map files have a .KMP file extension and reside in the \CONFIG
directory of the Mastercam installation location. You can load a new
key mapping file at any time during the Mastercam session. Key
mapping files are also portable. You can copy and use them on other
Mastercam workstations, provided you save them in the correct directory (\CONFIG).
The combinations of key sequences you can use to create keyboard
shortcuts are listed below (where Key is the alphanumeric character
or keyboard function keys F1-F12).
Alt+Key
Ctrl+Key
Ctrl+Alt+ Key
Shift+Alt+Key
Shift+Ctrl+Key
Shift+Ctrl+Alt+Key
F1-F12
Note: When mapping shortcut keys, you cannot use a single

alphanumeric key or one in combination with a Shift key. These
shortcuts are reserved and used by Mastercam for data entry
shortcuts, and ribbon bar and dialog box options.
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping files on page 65

Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments on page 66
Removing Shortcut Assignments on page 67
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping files

Options in the lower left corner of the Key mapping dialog box allow
you to:
Open and load an existing Mastercam key mapping file. Use

the Open file dialog box options to locate and open the .KMP
file you want to load.
Use options in the Save as dialog box to save the current key
map settings to a specified location and .KMP file.
Reset All key mappings to the standard Mastercam factory
defaults. After loading the defaults, you can customize them
and use the Save as option to save them to a new key
mapping file.
Figure 1-33: Key mapping: Open, Save, Reset
Reset
Open Save as
Current Key
map filename
Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments

X To add or modify a shortcut assignment:
1 Choose Settings, Key mapping from the Mastercam menu.
2 In the Key mapping dialog box, click the Category drop-
down arrow and choose a category from the list to display its
functions.
3 In the Commands section, select the icon of the function to
map. If a keyboard shortcut is already assigned, it displays in

the Current keys text field.
4 To assign a new shortcut, position the cursor in the Press
new shortcut key field and use the keyboard to type the key
sequence.
If Mastercam can assign the shortcut, the entered

sequence displays in the Press new shortcut key field, for
example, Alt+Shift+D.
If the shortcut you entered is already assigned to another
function, a message displays, similar to the example
below:
To reassign the key sequence to the selected function,

choose Yes and continue with Step 5.
b To keep its original assignment and reenter a different key
sequence for the selected command, choose No and

repeat Step 4.
5 To accept the new shortcut, choose Assign.
Note: If a shortcut is already assigned to the function, Mastercam

does not replace it. The new shortcut is added, allowing you to use
multiple shortcuts to access the function. All active shortcuts
display in the Current keys text field.
Removing Shortcut Assignments

X To remove a shortcut assignment:
1 Choose Settings, Key mapping from the Mastercam menu.
2 In the Key mapping dialog box, click the Category drop-
down arrow and choose a category from the list to display its
functions.
3 Select the Command associated with the shortcut to delete.
4 In the Current keys text field, select the shortcut and click
Remove. The shortcut is removed from its assignment to the

selected command and can now be assigned to another
command.
Setting Defaults and Preferences

(Configuration)
This section describes how to use the Configuration function in the
Settings menu to configure your Mastercam defaults and preferences, and how to save this information to a specified configuration
file (.CONFIG).
In this function, you configure Mastercams base unit of measurement (metric or inch), choose a graphics support platform such as
OpenGL, set default chaining options, activate Learning Mode for
additional ribbon bar support, define the number of functions you
want to view in most-recently used (MRU) toolbars and lists, and
much more.
This section includes information on:
Configuring Mastercam X (page 68)

Managing Configuration Files (page 69)
Merging Configuration Files (page 98)
Configuring Mastercam X
Mastercam default settings are stored as files with a .CONFIG extension in the Mastercam \CONFIG directory. Mastercam uses settings
from the configuration file as default values when you restart or
initialize operations, for example, when creating a new part, or
opening and importing existing parts.
Mastercam provides a number of standard configuration files with
your initial installation, in both inch and metric units. You can
customize them, create your own, and even merge configuration files.
If multiple users share a single Mastercam installation, each unique
user can automatically load a customized default configuration file
when logging in to the workstation and running Mastercam.
Mastercam uses only one configuration file at a time. However, when
running Mastercam, you can change the configuration file as often as
necessary.
Use the Settings, Configuration function and System Configuration
dialog box to review and set Mastercam default values, and to manage
the configuration files that store these values.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) 69
Managing Configuration Files

The changes you make to configuration settings can be temporary,
affecting only the current session, or you can save them to a configuration file for reuse. In the System Configuration dialog box, you can
modify and save changes to the current configuration file, create a
new configuration file, or open another configuration file and merge
selected settings into the current file.
Figure 1-34: System Configuration Save options
Save As
Merge
Current configuration file
Save As: Opens the Configuration name dialog box, which

lets you save the current configuration file using the same or
a different file name. You can also use the drop-down list to
select an existing configuration file to overwrite.
Note: The .CONFIG file type and a fixed save as location
(Mastercam \CONFIG directory) are required and cannot be
changed.
Merge: Opens the Configuration File Merge dialog box that

lets you merge configuration files and select which defaults
you want to retain in the resulting file.
Current: Displays the name of the configuration file currently
in effect and to which the defaults defined on all System
Configuration pages will be saved. To select a different
configuration file as the current file, click the arrow and
choose a file from the list. All .CONFIG files stored in the
Mastercam \CONFIG directory display in the list for selection.
Setting Default Values

The System Configuration dialog box consists of various properties
pages that group related default values and settings. To access a properties page, click its name in the list of configuration topics in the left
pane.
Figure 1-35: System Configuration dialog box
When you change a setting on a page, the question mark preceding its
name in the topic list becomes a check mark so that you can track
where you have made changes during an editing session. To save
these changes, you must save the configuration file. Otherwise, the
changes are applied to the current session and persist only until you
close and restart Mastercam.
In this section, you will learn to configure Mastercam by setting
parameters in the following properties pages:
Tolerances (page 71)
Files (page 73)
Converters (page 74)
Screen (page 75)
Colors (page 76)
Chaining (page 78)
Shading (page 79)
Solids (page 80)
Printing (page 81)
CAD Settings (page 81)
Dimension Attributes
(page 83)
Dimension Text (page 84)
Note Text (page 84)
Leaders / Witness (page

85)
Dimension Settings
(page 87)
Start / Exit (page 88)
Toolpaths (page 91)
Post Processing (page 93)
Backplot (page 94)
Verify (page 96)
Tolerances
The options you define in the Tolerance properties page control the
precision with which Mastercam performs certain operations, for
example, how close entities must be to be considered coincident or
chained, and how smooth curves and surfaces will be. Smaller tolerances produce more precise parts, but also generally create larger
files.
Figure 1-36: Tolerances properties page
(System Configuration)
Tolerance fields include:
System Tolerance: Define the maximum distance by which

two positions can be separated and still be considered coincident. This value also defines the minimum line length
because two endpoints that are closer than the system tolerance will be considered coincident.
TIP: To edit this field, select the check box.
Chaining Tolerance: Set the maximum distance that two

endpoints can be apart and still be chained. Mastercam stops
chaining and prompts for the next entity if the distance
between two adjacent entities exceeds the chaining tolerance.
Planar Chaining Tolerance: Specify the maximum distance
an entity can be separated from a plane and be considered to
lie in that plane. Cplane chaining uses this tolerance to determine which chained entities are planar. Mastercam uses
chained geometry to calculate toolpaths (contours or
pockets).
Minimum arc length: Define the smallest arc Mastercam can
create. An appropriate minimum arc length prevents
creation of very small arcs, for example, when pocketing or
creating fillets.
Curve minimum / maximum step size: Set the shortest and
longest distance Mastercam can step along a curve when
creating toolpaths or breaking a spline into arcs, and so on.
Curve chordal deviation: Define the maximum distance
allowed between a line segment or edge and a curve. It
controls how precisely curves, surfaces, and toolpaths fit
underlying geometry. You can redefine this tolerance when
you create flowline curves, and also net and swept surfaces.
Maximum surface deviation: Specify the maximum distance
by which a surface can be separated from its generating
curves.
Toolpath tolerance: Set the tolerance used to calculate toolpaths.
Files
Use the Files properties page to select the files you want Mastercam to
use as defaults, define the default data paths for saving different file
types, configure Most Recently Used (MRU) drop-down menu
settings, and set options for opening and saving files.
Figure 1-37: Files properties page (System Configuration)
The Data Paths column lists files formats you can save out from
Mastercam and allows you to set a default data path for saving each
type, for example, C:\Metric\MCX\.
The Files Usage column lists all the file types for which you can open
a default file during Mastercam processing, for example, libraries,
control and machine definitions, and post processors. Mastercam
opens the default files you set in this list, when necessary.
In the Data Paths and File Usage lists, first select an item in the list.
Then use the Selected item field, located below the list, to specify the
default value.
You also use this page to activate Mastercams AutoSave functions.
AutoSave lets you save the current geometry and operations automatically at specific time intervalsfor example, every 10 minutes and to
define other AutoSave behaviors. Use this option to reduce data loss
in the event of a hardware or power failure.
Converters
When you open part files that are not in the current .MCX Mastercam
format or when you save them to an external file format, Mastercam
automatically runs a conversion program, based on the selected file
type (for example, IGES, VDA, STEP, SAT, Parasolid, DWG, or DXF.)
In the Converters properties page, you set defaults for file conversions, including:
How solids are imported and exported

The level used for untrimmable surfaces
How units are converted
The method used to convert solids:
Convert the solid to a Mastercam solid (without operation history). If you do not have Mastercam Solids
installed, you can still machine the imported solid.
However, Mastercam Solids must be installed to
modify a solid, or create additional solids (with the
exception of primitives).
Convert each face to a trimmed surface. With either of
these options, you can elect to convert edges to curve
geometry (line, arc, or spline). With the Solids option,
you can also attempt to repair broken solids during
import.
Figure 1-38: Converters properties page
TIP: When converting files, use the File, Open function and
choose Options to override or set additional conversion
parameters.
Screen
Use the Screen properties page to set the graphics parameters that
control how Mastercam looks and operates, and to define your
personal display and selection preferences.
Figure 1-39: Screen properties page (System Configuration)
Screen appearance options

Select a graphics support platform (GDI or OpenGL) based
on your installed graphics card and acceleration. Hardware
acceleration is enabled You can optionally choose to disable
hardware acceleration.
Enable part information display, including world coordinate
axes and part scale.
Use large or small toolbar buttons.
Enable the most recently used (MRU) toolbar in the
Mastercam window and define how many buttons it can
display.
Enable drop-down toolbar menus to move the MRU function
to the top of the list so that it displays directly in the toolbar
for easy selection.
Display Learning Mode prompts when you move your mouse

pointer over certain interface elements to display extra
screen help.
Show or hide viewport and working coordinate system (WCS)
axis markers.
Show tooltips when the mouse hovers over icons, fields,
buttons and other interface elements.
Middle mouse button / wheel options

You can configure the action that occurs in the Mastercam window
when you hold down the middle mouse button / wheel and move the
mouse:
Pan: Maintains the current Gview, but drags the entities in

the graphics window in the direction of the mouse (the entities are not physically moved in space, only the display
changes).
Spin: Dynamically rotates the entities in the graphics
window in 3D space and changes the Gview settings.
Entity selection and display options

Set default selection grid parameters.
Allow pre-selection of screen entities.
Set Level Manager dialog display defaults.
Make the main level always visible.
Specify decimal place precision for the Analyze function.
Specify number of entities for dynamic rotation.
Notes:
To set default colors for Mastercam screen and entity display,
use the Colors properties page.
To set default shading parameters for Mastercam geometry, use
the Shading properties page.
Colors
You can set default colors for many different aspects of the
Mastercam interface, such as the graphics background (including
gradients), geometry, construction origin, grid, groups, and various
Mill, Lathe, Solids, and Surfaces components.
Figure 1-40: Colors properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
To preserve changes to default color settings for subsequent
Mastercam sessions, you must save the configuration file.
To temporarily change default colors for selected entities or
new entities you create during the current Mastercam session,
use the Color function from the Status Bar.
Chaining
Use this page to define the way Mastercam chains entities, including:
Chaining mask options

Methods for sorting multiple, nested chains
Default chaining mode and direction
The values you set in this page are used as defaults in the Chaining
dialog box. This dialog box displays whenever you are required to
chain geometry.
You chain entities in preparation for a function such as toolpath or
surface creation by selecting them in a specific order. Chaining
sequences the entities in the toolpath operation and determines the
direction of tool travel during machining. When creating surfaces and
solids, chained geometry makes up the surface sections or boundaries. You can use chaining as an efficient method for entity selection
in Analyze and Create functions.
Figure 1-41: Chaining properties page (System Configuration)
TIP: You can override the defaults you set in the

Settings, Configuration, Chaining properties page by
selecting the Chaining options button in the Chaining
dialog box.
Shading
Shading values determine how surfaces and solids appear when
shaded. Use this page to set default shading parameters such as color,
ambient lighting, spot lighting, hidden edges, and other properties.
Figure 1-42: Shading properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
To temporarily override default shading parameters during the
current Mastercam session, choose Shade Settings from the
Screen menu or Shading toolbar to open the Shading Settings
dialog box.
To make permanent changes to shading parameter defaults,
use the Settings, Configuration function and Shading properties page. Then save the changes to the .CONFIG file.
Solids
Options in this page allow you to pre-define how Mastercam creates
and displays solids, including:
Where to add new solids operations in the Solids Manager:

ahead of toolpath operations or in the order in which they are
performed.
Enable/disable the Auto-Highlight for Solids Manager.
Specify a radial display curve angle for circular faces.
Set defaults for stitching surfaces into solids.
Figure 1-43: Solids properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
You can also enable or disable Auto-Highlight from the Solids
Manager right-click menu.
To change default shading parameters for solids display during
the current Mastercam session, choose Shade Settings from
the Screen menu or Shading toolbar to open the Shading
Settings dialog box.
To set default shading parameters for Mastercam geometry,
including solids, use the Shading properties page.
Printing
Use this page to set initial, default parameters for printing part drawings, including line width, color printing, header name and date, and
solid shading.
Figure 1-44: Printing properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
When printing, use the Page Setup dialog box to change
default settings and to set other properties (paper size and
orientation, page margins, image scaling).
To change printer driver properties, choose Properties from the
Print dialog box.
CAD Settings
The CAD Settings properties page is where you set design and drafting
preferences, including defaults for:
Automating and formatting arc center lines

Center line attributes (line style, line width, point style)
Spline and surface creation type
Surface drawing density and back highlighting
Whether to update Cplane and Tplane when changing
Gviews
Xform preview settings

Managing duplicate entities created by Xform functions
Arc center point display
Entity Attribute Manager settings
Figure 1-45: CAD Settings properties page
Note: You can override many of these defaults using Status bar
options and when using functions to create, edit, and analyze
geometric and drafting entities.
Drafting Dimension Properties

Use the following properties pages to set parameters and defaults for
different types of drafting dimension entities:
Dimension Attributes on page 83

Dimension Text on page 84
Note Text on page 84
Leaders / Witness on page 85
Dimension Settings on page 87
TIPS:
As you modify options in the drafting dimension properties
pages, you immediately see their effect in the preview
diagram area of each page. Use the preview to verify your
selections.
To temporarily change drafting default parameters for the
current Mastercam session, choose Drafting Options from
the Create, Drafting submenu.
Dimension Attributes
You define the following defaults in the Dimension Attributes properties page:
Display format and scale

Text centering
Symbols or units used to display radius, diameter, and
angular dimensions
Tolerance settings for linear and angular dimensions
Figure 1-46: Dimension Attributes properties page
Dimension Text
The default text properties you can set for drafting dimensions in this
page include:
Text height, width, and

spacing
Line and borders
Text path or direction
Font
Point dimension text

display
Text alignment/
orientation
Ordinate dimension:
display negative sign
Slant and rotation
Figure 1-47: Dimension Text properties page

If you select the Factors option, dimension text height also determines tolerance text height, dimension arrowhead height and width,
and witness line gap and extension, based on factors you enter in the
Factors of Dimension Text Height dialog box.
If you do not select the Factors option, you can set these parameters
directly on the Dimension Text properties page (tolerance text height)
or the Leaders/Witness properties page (witness line and arrow head
parameters).
Note Text
Drafting notes and labels are blocks of text (one or more lines) that
you insert into a drawing. Notes are standalone blocks of text,
whereas labels have one or more leader lines used as pointers. When
you create note and label drafting entities, Mastercam uses the
following settings in the Note text properties page to format the text.
Text height, width, and

spacing
Lines and borders
Text path or direction
Font
Horizontal and vertical

alignment
Mirroring
Angle, slant, and rotation

Figure 1-48: Note Text properties page (System Configuration)
If you select the Factors option, note text height also determines
note/label arrowhead height and width, based on factors you can
enter in the Factors of Note Text Height dialog box. If you do not
select the Factors option, you can set the note/label arrowhead
height and width parameters directly in the Leaders/Witness properties page.
Leaders / Witness
In Mastercam, leader lines (drafting lines with single arrowheads that
function as pointers) most often point from a dimensions text to its
witness lines. Witness lines are lines that project from a dimensioned
object to indicate the extent of the leader lines. Use this page to set
the default properties for:
Leader lines: Style, visibility, and arrow direction
Witness lines: Visibility, gap, and extension

Arrows: style, Height, and width
Figure 1-49: Leaders / Witness properties page
Dimension Settings
The Dimension Settings properties page lets you associate dimensions, labels, leaders and witness lines with entities as the entities are
created. You can set the method Mastercam uses to regenerate associated drafting entities. You can limit the views in which entities can be
displayed, and define increments used for baseline dimensions.
Figure 1-50: Dimension Settings properties page
Use the Save/Get functions on this tab to save drafting parameters to

a .CAD file, get drafting parameters from a selected entity, load
parameters previously saved in a .CAD file, or get original, systemdefined default parameters.
Start / Exit
This page is where you set the default values to use during Mastercam
startup, and to automate certain functions when you exit Mastercam.
You can select the editor that launches when you edit NC files after
post processing, and specify the add-on programs that run when you
start or exit Mastercam.
Figure 1-51: Start / Exit properties page
Start/Exit properties you can customize include:
Startup configuration file: Select one of the startup configuration files included with Mastercam. The startup configuration file contains all the settings in effect when you start
Mastercam. The file name may indicate the Mastercam
product (for example, MILL) and the units (for example,
Metric).
Note: Mastercam provides two default configuration files that
display in the drop-list as DEFAULT (English) and DEFAULT
(Metric). The configuration files cannot be deleted.
Default toolbar and key map files: Set a default Mastercam

toolbar (.MTB) file to load stored toolbar settings and a
default key mapping (.KMP) file containing stored key
mappings. Custom key mapping files are created using the
Settings, Key mapping function. You can select any key map
file that is saved to the Mastercam \CONFIG subdirectory.
Default machine at startup: Select a machine definition from

the drop-down list to load at startup.
Default construction plane (2D or 3D mode): Select the
default construction plane (Cplane) where geometry is
created. The list options include: Top, Front, Right, Bottom,
Back, and Left. The +XZ, -XZ, +DZ and -DZ planes are used
only in Mastercam Lathe. You can also select a 2D (XY) or 3D
(XYZ) default Cplane.
Default file editor: Indicates the default editor that
Mastercam uses when you open external application files. To
change this setting, select another editor from the dropdown list. File editors included with your Mastercam installation are:
Mastercam Editor (default): A full-featured, proprietary text editor that offers menu, toolbar, and key
mapping customization tools, intelligent full-text
editingincluding support for specialized NC functions, flexible serial communications built on portable
XML machine configuration files, and faster performance when working with large NC files.
PFE32 - Programmer's File Editor (32-bit Edition).
CIMCOEDIT - An editor that provides utilities for
editing NC and NCI files along with transmission capabilities.
Notepad - The default editor for Mastercam's Draft
and Demo products.
To use any other editing application that may be available to
you, choose Other and use the Select an editor dialog box to
navigate to and select the executable file of the editor you
want to use. The selected editor is added to the Editor dropdown list and becomes your startup default editor.
Default communications program: Indicates the default

communications program that Mastercam uses to communicate with other devices. To change this setting, select another
program from the drop-down list.
Default MCX part file name: Specify a default Mastercam
part filename prefix, such as MyPart. This filename appears
as a default in Mastercam Save and Save as dialog boxes. The
default file extension is .MCX (MyPart.MCX).
Current configurations units: Indicates or lets you select
default configuration units, as follows:
Inch: When selected, indicates that the current configuration file units are English (inches).
Metric: When selected, indicates that the current configuration file units are metric (millimeters).
Note: These options are available only when a user-defined (not a
DEFAULT) configuration file is loaded.
Startup, exit, or default add-in programs: Set up a

third-party C-hook program (.DLL) that you want Mastercam
to run on startup or shutdown, and also define a default addin program (.DLL or .VBS) to associate with the Alt+C
keyboard shortcut.
Undo operations: To optimize your PCs performance, we
recommend that you limit the number of Undo events that
Mastercam saves in RAM for your session. When checked,
the Undo operations field enables fields that let you limit
Undo events by number as well as by the memory required to
store the states associated with these events.
Toolpaths
Use this page to configure how toolpaths are created, maintained,
and displayed, and to define the setup sheet program to use.
Figure 1-52: Toolpaths properties page
Default toolpath parameters you can set include:
Toolpath display during creation

How drive and check surfaces and tool containment boundaries are selected (for surface toolpaths)
Criteria for keeping or deleting recut files
Buffering size (the approximate maximum amount of
memory that Mastercam will use, on average, while making
lengthy toolpath calculations)
Prompting for a CAD file during toolpath creation
Options for associativity warnings, tools use when importing
operations, display of surface/plane intersections, wirepath
previews.
IMPORTANT: Tool display parameters affect how Mastercam
displays toolpaths as it generates them. It does not affect Backplot.
Notes:
To change tool display parameters for a selected operation,
click Parameters in the Toolpath Manager and choose Tool
Display in the Tool Parameters tab.
Although tool display defaults are in effect when Mastercam
starts, if you change them, subsequent toolpaths of the same
type that you create or import (for example, contour) use the
modified parameters for the duration of the Mastercam
session.
Post Processing
The default post processing properties you define in this page control
what happens when you run the post processor. These settings
include, for example, whether to save the NC file or to edit the existing
file. If you save the file, you can choose what to use for the NC file
extension, and whether to overwrite the existing file automatically or
request that Mastercam prompts you to verify the overwrite on each
save. You can also send the NC program to the machine automatically.
You can configure Mastercam to create an ASCII NCI file (called an
Operation file).
Figure 1-53: Post Processing properties page
Backplot
Use this property page to set parameters that affect how a tool moves
and appears on the screen during a backplot operation. These parameters include:
General Settings (Tool Motion)

Step speed and increments
Screen cleanup on operation and/or tool change
Milling tool display options
Tool Appearance
Tool color and material
Holder color and material
Motion colors
Figure 1-54: Backplot properties page (System Configuration)
The parameters you choose are for display purposes only and do not
affect the part when it is machined.
Although the General Settings display parameters are available for
each Mastercam toolpath type, the following options affect only the
display of milling tools during backplot:
Simulate Axis Substitution

Simulate Mill Cutter Compensation
Show move to/from Mill Home Position
Simulate Rotary Axis
Similarly, the following Tool Appearance options also apply only to the
display of milling tools during backplot.
Plain, Fluted, and Shaded tool options

Tool color and material
Show holder, holder color, and holder material
Verify
You set up default properties in this page for toolpath verification
operations initiated from the Toolpath Manager.
Figure 1-55: Verify properties page (System Configuration)
Parameters you can set include:
Stock settings: shape, initial size source, cylinder axis and

diameter, stock file, translucent stock
Tool profile
Tool and STL tolerances
Colors for stock, tool, collision, and cut stock for the first 10
tools
Miscellaneous options, including: use TrueSolid, display XYZ
axes, compare to STL file, remove chips, etc.
To change Verify configuration parameters during the current
Mastercam session, initiate a Verify operation, and then in the Verify
controls dialog box, choose the Options button to open the Verify
options dialog box.
Figure 1-56: Verify Configure button
Note: For more information on verifying operations, see Verifying

Operations on page 551.
Merging Configuration Files

The Merge button in the System Configuration dialog box lets
you combine system configuration settings from other files
with the current configuration file.
You can merge:
An entire startup or other configuration file

Standard inch or metric defaults
Specified sections of system configuration settings
Figure 1-57: Merge files dialog box (System Configuration)
Use this dialog box to select the configuration settings you want to
merge with the current configuration file and to specify which
sections to merge.
Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch)

When you open a part file that uses different units (metric or inch)
from those currently in use, Mastercam automatically displays the
System Configuration dialog box, which informs you that Mastercam
is switching units and loading an alternate default configuration file.
Figure 1-58: System Configuration
English (inch) / Metric dialog box
To complete the operation, you must select one of the following

options:
Units: Uses only the units from the new configuration file.
(default)
All settings: Loads all settings from the new configuration
file.
Note: You can also use the Current field near the bottom of the
System Configuration dialog box to switch current units by
selecting an alternate configuration file.
The Role of Machine and Control

Definitions
Machine Definitions (what they are and why you use them)
Control Definitions and Toolpath Defaults (page 102)
Working with Post Processors (page 102)
Mastercam machine definitions are virtual descriptions of the actual
machine tools you will use to cut a part. They determine the functions
and tool parameters you can choose when creating toolpath operations. With machine definitions, you generate more accurate NC
output because you define each machine tool and its unique characteristics.
Each Mastercam machine definition consists of:
Machine component groups and components

A control definition file
Control definitions that link a specific control type with a
post processor assignment
These three elements of the machine definition represent a single
machine tool.
Machine ComponentsThe component groups and components you
assemble define the machine tool architecture and how it moves. The
machine type (mill, lathe, or router) determines which component
groups are available for you to assemble.
Control DefinitionThe control definition provides the post
processor with the information it needs to process toolpath data so
that it meets the control's requirements. The control definition also
influences the operations you create using the control.
Post ProcessorThe post processor is tied to the control definition. A
control definition file can hold many control definitions, each linking
a specific control type (mill, router, lathe, mill / turn, wire) with a post
processor.
When creating machine definitions, you select the control definition
file and control definition/post combinations to use with the
machine. You are not limited to a single machine tool type.
Mastercam allows you to define virtually any functional machine
design.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Role of Machine and Control Definitions 101
The Machine Definition sets the control type in the control

definition.
The Control Definition provides valid post processors to the
Machine Definition for the machine product type.
Figure 1-59: Example: Machine Definition Manager
Edit general machine parameters

New
Open
Edit the control definition
Save
Edit axis combinations
Save as Set password protection
Control definition
Post processor
Machine
groups and
components
Graphical machine
configuration
Default toolbar
state (optional)
When you use the Machine Definition Manager to create and save
machine definitions, Mastercam assigns one of the following file
extensions, based in the selected machine type:
.MMD (Mill)
.LMD (Lathe)
.RMD (Router)
TIP: Use one of the following methods to access the Machine
Definition Manager:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Machine Type, Machine
Definition Manager.
From the Toolpath Manager, choose Files, and then click
Edit in the Machine - Toolpath copy section.
Note: By centralizing parameters and settings that were distributed throughout prior versions of Mastercam, machine and
control definitions make it easier for you to maintain this information. A centralized source also makes it easier to provide
machine layout and control information when requesting post
creation or customization.
Control Definitions and Toolpath Defaults

The control definition component of the selected machine definition
determines some of the default values for each toolpath. The toolpath
operation contains information on the approach to the part and
return to the machine reference. These conditions are different based
on the tool direction or spindle selection. Mastercam stores the toolpath defaults in separate files (.DEFAULTS files). Each control definition points to a selected .DEFAULTS file that provides some of the
default values for new operations created with that control.
Although the default file for each operation initially comes from the
control definition, when you create toolpath operations, the toolpath
defaults file becomes a property of the machine group. From that
point, you can use the Files tab from the Machine Group Properties
dialog box to select a different .DEFAULTS file at the machine group
level. You can also use this tab to create and edit new .DEFAULTS files.
Working with Post Processors

The Mastercam machine and control definition architecture gives you
a great deal of flexibility for organizing your post processors.
Each control definition record you define and save in a control definition file links a single control type (mill, lathe, router, mill / turn, and
wire) with a single post processor file. This file structure makes it easy
for you centralize all of the control and post processing information
required by a single manufacturer.
Note: You can change the control definition file used by the
selected machine type by choosing Files in the Toolpath Manager.
For more information, see Choosing a Machine and Control Definition on page 367.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Opening and Translating Files 103
Opening and Translating Files

Mastercam seamlessly translates files, importing from and exporting
to a variety of popular, proprietary CAD/CAM formats and common
file exchange formats.
Although options provide control of the conversion process, conversion occurs automatically when you use File menu functions to open
and save filesno pre- or post-formatting is required. This flexibility
makes it easy to work with non-Mastercam files, and with files saved
in a prior version of Mastercam.
Mastercam X supports the following file formats:
Mastercam
(V9, V8 and V7)
Parasolid
Pro/Engineering
SAT
(Save As Text)
VDA
(Verband der Automobilindustrie)
Rhinocerous 3D NURBS
SolidWorks
Solid Edge
AutoDesk Inventor
ASCII
(American Standard Code
for Information Interchange, comma delimited)
Catia V4 / V5
HPGL Plotter
(Hewlett-Packard Graphics
Language)
CADKey CDL
AutoCAD
STEP
(Standard for the
Exchange of Product
data)
IGES
(Initial Graphics Exchange
Standard)
Notes:
If you do not have Mastercam Solids installed, you can still
machine an imported solid. However, Mastercam Solids must
be installed to modify a solid, or create additional solids (with

the exception of primitives).
For more information on the conversion options available for
your Mastercam configuration, contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
Saving Files
When you save a Mastercam file to a native .MCX format, you automatically save all geometry, attributes, levels, views, planes, machine
definitions, control definitions, stock setup, machine groups, toolpath groups, and operations data.
You can optionally save a bitmap thumbnail image of the geometry,
add descriptive text, such as instructions for working with the file or
contact information, and set a default directory where the file will be
saved.
To define the options to use for saving files, choose Options
from the Save as dialog box. Use the following drop-down list
to select the options, and then click outside of the list to close
it.
You can also reduce the amount of navigation required to save files to
new filenames by presetting their directory paths. This is especially
helpful when working with large groups of related files. Choose one of
the following options:
Use Last Directory: Use the path that was set when any file of
any type was last opened or saved.
Use Default Directories: Use the file directory settings from
the Mastercam configuration file as the default directories for
each file type.
Use Project Directory: Resets the path to a specified location. Choose this option, and then click the Browse button
(...) to navigate to the destination path.
Note: You can also set the directory default and other options
using Options in the File, Open dialog box. The directory default
setting is applied globally to file open and save as functions.
TIPS:
To help you quickly identify the file you want to work with,
view the thumbnail image in the Open File dialog box. After
opening the file, use the File menu Properties function to
view its text description.
Another helpful function you can use to save only selected
entities is the File, Save Some function. When you choose
this function, use general selection methodsincluding
maskingto select only the entities to save from the current
file, and then save the entities to a new file.
Sharing Files with the Zip2Go Utility

Use Mastercams Zip2Go C-Hook utility to gather Mastercam part
data into a compressed .Z2G file. This utility makes it easy to provide
your Reseller or CNC Support Services with a file that contains the
information they need. Zip2Go scans the machine groups in your
current part file and captures information such as your Mastercam
configuration, machine definition, and post files. You can choose
which files to include. After creating the Zip2Go file, you can view its
contents and add / delete files as necessary.
In addition to the Mastercam part file, you can optionally choose to
add the following file types during the Zip2Go scan:
Current Mastercam configuration files (includes .CONFIG,

.MTB, .KMP, and .FT file types)
Machine definitions (.MMD, LMD, RMD)
Control definitions (.CONTROL)
Post processors ( .PST)
Toolpath operations (.NC)
Tool libraries (.TOOLS)
Material libraries ( .MATERIALS)
To run the Zip2Go utility, type Alt+C to open to the \chooks directory.
Open the \Zip2Go folder and doubleclick Zip2Go.dll.
Zip2Go also creates the following types of reports in a read-only .txt
format:
Zip2Go_[MCXPartFileName].txt: Contains a collection of

relevant files used by each machine group in the Mastercam
part file that was scanned.
Zip2Go_SystemReport.txt: Contains information on the
computer system on which the .Z2G was created. For
example:
The version of Microsoft Windows.
The amount of RAM memory on your computer.
A few details on the installed graphics card.
Registry setting data used by Mastercam (the CNC Software, Inc. registry keys under HKCU and HKLM).
Zip2Go_FileReport.txt: Contains information on all the files
for Mastercam. Only the application system folders are
scanned. The Mill, Lathe, Router, and Wire folders (and any
of their sub-folders) in the Mastercam install folder
(MCAMX) are not scanned. Furthermore, any part files found
in any folder that is scanned will not be is included in this list.
This is to ensure that the collection of data never includes
potentially confidential information.
Zip2Go_HASP.txt: Contains information from the
Mastercam HASP on all the files for Mastercam, including the
HASP Serial # and the products licensed on the HASP. It also
detects if Mastercam Maintenance is enabled, and if so, the
report includes the maintenance expiration date.
Opening Files with Other Applications

Use the File menu, Edit/Open External function to open a file with a
selected, external application in its own window.
Figure 1-60: Edit / Open External dialog box
In the Open as drop-down list, you can choose:
Text: Displays file content as plain text in the currently

selected editor.
Auto: Displays file content in the application associated with
the selected file type, provided the application is installed on
your computer. For example, a file with a .doc extension
opens in Microsoft Word.
Text files open using the default editor specified in the Settings,
Configuration, Start/Exit properties page. However, you can choose
to open any file in any editor.
X To select an editor:
1 In the Open dialog box, choose Editor.
2 In the Choose File Editor dialog box, use one of the following
methods to select the editor:
Choose an editor from the list and click OK.

Note: All of the editors provided with Mastercam display in the
list, along with the most recently used Other editors you have
selected.
Or, choose Other from the list and click OK. Complete the
following steps:
a Use options in the Select an Editor dialog box to navigate
to the location of the editor program, such as Microsoft

Excel or Word.
b Select the program .EXE file and click Open. This closes
the Select an Editor dialog box and returns you to the

Open dialog box.
3 In the Open dialog box, select the file to edit and click OK.
The editor you chose in Step 2 opens in its own window and
loads the selected file for editing.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Printing and Plotting 109
Printing and Plotting

You can print or plot entities in the graphics window using any
Windows-based driver that has been configured for your PC, and
optionally map colors to specific line widths and line styles.
You can configure Mastercam to use a GDI or OpenGL graphics type.
OpenGL is required to display shaded images in the graphics window.
These graphic types do not communicate directly with the printer
and cannot support the printing of shaded images. GDI does not
support the display of shaded images. However, because it communicates directly with the printer, it supports scaling and margin
controls.
The File, Page Setup function manages the display and printing limitations of each graphics type (GDI and OpenGL) by making the
options to scale or print shaded images mutually exclusive.
To print shaded entities in the graphics window as a bitmap

screen image, in the Options section, select the Shaded
check box . This option is unavailable if Scaling is active. You
may need to deselect Scaling first.
To print all entities in the graphics window as wireframes to a
specified scale, in the Scaling section, select Scale images to
and use the % actual size field to set the scale. If OpenGL is
configured, Mastercam temporarily switches to GDI graphics
mode to print the output, then switches back to the configured graphics support type.
Notes:
Use the Settings, Configuration function Screen properties
page to choose a graphics support type. To configure additional
settings, use the Printing and Shading properties pages.
Mastercam supports only Windows-based printer drivers.
X To print or plot entities:
1 From the File menu, choose the Print function to open the
Print dialog box.
2 Select the driver to use and specify the number of copies.

3 To view and modify the drivers default properties in the
Properties dialog box, choose the Properties button.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Printing and Plotting 111
4 To view and modify settings in the Page Setup dialog box,
choose the Page Setup button.
Complete the following steps:

a To map color to line widths, choose the Color / Width
map option and button.

b Use the Line Width Attributes dialog box options to map
the colors to specific line widths and styles.
c To apply the mappings and exit, click OK.
d In the Page Setup dialog box, set paper size, orientation,
margins, shading, scaling, color, and other options, as

necessary. To accept these settings and return to the Print
dialog box, click OK.
5 To view a sample of the printed output, choose the Print
Preview button. You can print directly from the Print Preview
dialog box, or close it to return to the Print dialog box where
you can make any necessary changes.
6 In the Print dialog box, click OK to print or plot the entities.
TIP: If you choose the Print Preview and Page Setup functions
from the File menu, the values for your PCs default printer
driver are used in the Print Preview and Page Setup dialog
boxes.
To set up default values for line width (including color to line width
mapping), and other printing options, use the Printing page in the
Settings menu, Configuration function. For more information, see
Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on page 68.
chapter 2
Design
This chapter introduces the concepts, functions, and techniques that
you use to create and modify geometry.
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Drawing and Design Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 116

Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 185
Modifying Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 226
Advanced Drawing and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 268
Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 343
Power User Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 357
Drawing and Design Basics

Drawing in Mastercam can be as free and dynamic as a pencil sketch
or as mathematically precise as you need it to be. The cursor and
mouse are your drawing tools, and the Create menu functions are
your primary drawing aids. Mastercam Design also provides many
other CAD functions to make your job easier.
With Mastercam Design, you can create wireframe, surface, and primitive and surface geometry. If your installation includes Mastercam
Solids, you also have extensive tools for creating solid models.
Note: For more information on working with Mastercam Solids,
see Solids on page 300.
This section takes you through the basic Mastercam drawing functions, including
Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar (page 116)

Selecting Entities (page 124)
Chaining (page 134)
Setting Attributes (page 138)
Setting Z Depth (page 146)
Working in 2D and 3D Mode (page 146)
Setting Planes / Views / WCS (page 150)
Editing Your Work (page 181)
Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar

The AutoCursor ribbon bar becomes active whenever Mastercam
prompts you to enter position data. It shows the current cursor position (XYZ coordinates) and also allows you to override the position
manually.
The AutoCursor ribbon bar makes it easier to select and enter position data in complicated and congested geometry. Use it to
Track cursor position.

Enter X, Y, and Z coordinates manually.
Detect and snap to specific types of positions as you move
the cursor over geometry on the screen.
DESIGN / Drawing and Design Basics 117
The AutoCursor ribbon bar is dockable. You can leave it docked in the
toolbar area or drag it to another position. When docked, it remains
visible even when inactive. When undocked from the toolbar area and
positioned elsewhere in the Mastercam window, it automatically
closes when it is not needed (inactive). When activated by your selections, it reappears where you last placed it.
When you move the cursor over geometry on the screen, you can
configure AutoCursor to display a visual cue when it detects a specific
position type (for example, origin, arc center, endpoint, or midpoint).
Visual Cues
Visual cues are graphic symbols that appear to the right of the cursor
when AutoCursor detects a specific position type. They identify the
type of position AutoCursor has highlighted to ensure that you select
the correct entity and position. For example, if you set AutoCursor to
detect and snap to the endpoints of existing entities, as soon as you
move the cursor close to an endpoint, it snaps to that position and the
visual cue for endpoints appears.
Mastercam visual cues include
Origin
Midpoint
Arc Center
Point
Endpoint
Quadrant
Intersection
Nearest
Horizontal /
Vertical
Tangent
Perpendicular
Note: AutoCursor does not recognize endpoints on surfaces.

You can limit the types of positions AutoCursor detects. For more
information, see Customizing AutoCursor behavior on page 120.
In complex geometry, there may be more than one position located
within the detection range of the cursor. In these cases, AutoCursor
uses the order shown below to detect and snap to positions.
Priority
Position Type
Point entities
Endpoints of curves or lines
Midpoints of curves or lines
Quadrant points of arcs
Centers of arcs
Real curve or line intersections

(not intersections projected by Mastercam)
Positions on the active selection grid
TIP: When AutoCursor is active, you can temporarily deactivate its snap-to settings by holding down the Ctrl key as you
click to select a position.
Entering Position Coordinates

Use the AutoCursor ribbon bar to enter coordinates when Mastercam
prompts you to enter position data.
Current cursor coordinates
FastPoint mode
AutoCursor settings
AutoCursor override
You can enter coordinates in several ways
Enter values into the X, Y, and Z fields by placing your cursor

in each field and typing a value. Press Enter or Tab to apply
the value and move to the next field (from left to right).
Press X, Y, or Z to open a field, and then type a value. You can
enter fractions or decimal values (example, 3/8 or .375) and
formulas, including addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), division (/), and parentheses.
Click the drop-down arrow to choose from a list of previously
entered values.
Right-click inside the field to access a menu of data entry
shortcut options you can use to define the coordinate value.
For more information on using data entry shortcuts, see
Entering values in fields on page 18.
Use FastPoint Mode.
Click in the graphics window to select a position.
Press Shift+click to create a new position relative to an
existing entity. For more information, see Using the Relative
ribbon bar on page 123.
Using FastPoint Mode to Enter Coordinates

Use the AutoCursor FastPoint Mode to replace the separate X, Y, Z
fields with a single, consolidated field. In this field, you can specify a
position by typing the XYZ coordinates separated by commas, or use
the data entry shortcuts or mathematical formulas.
To use AutoCursor FastPoint Mode whenever the AutoCursor ribbon
bar is active, do one of the following
Press the space bar on your keyboard.

Click the FastPoint button located on the AutoCursor ribbon
bar.
Figure 2-3: AutoCursor FastPoint Mode
FastPoint entry field
FastPoint button
To enter coordinates
Type the values separated by commas, for example, 2,2,5.

Press Enter to apply the value or Esc to cancel.
You can enter fractions or decimal values (example, 3/8 or .375). The
FastPoint field also accepts formulas, including addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), division (/), and parentheses.
TIP: Use algebraic notation when entering formulas. For
example, for a position of X6, Y3, Z0.5, enter
X(2*3)Y(5-2)Z(1/2), or 6,3,.5. The Fastpoint entry method is
consistent with prior versions of Mastercam.
Note: FastPoint mode is modal; when you activate it, you cannot
move outside of the field into any part of the application,
including other AutoCursor buttons, until you press Enter or Esc.
Customizing AutoCursor behavior

You can customize AutoCursor to detect only specific types of positions, or to snap to a specific angle, and to the nearest, tangent,
perpendicular, horizontal, and vertical positions. You have the
following options for customizing the way AutoCursor behaves when
you use it to select entities in the graphics window.
To configure settings that apply to all selections and remain

in effect until you reconfigure them, use AutoCursor
Settings.
To change behavior for a single position selection, use
AutoCursor Override.
Using AutoCursor Settings

X To customize AutoCursor
1 In the AutoCursor ribbon bar, click the AutoCursor Settings
button.
Figure 2-4: AutoCursor Settings button
AutoCursor settings
2 In the AutoCursor Settings dialog box, select the position
types to detect and snap to.
Figure 2-5: AutoCursor Settings dialog box
Note: If the position type is not selected, AutoCursor will not

detect it.
3 Click OK to accept your settings and exit. The AutoCursor
settings remain in effect until you use this procedure again to

change them.
In the following example, you will use AutoCursor Settings to create a
series of lines at 45 degrees from the axes.
X To create angular lines using AutoCursor
1 Choose Create, Line, Create line endpoint from the menu
bar at the top of the screen. Mastercam prompts you to

specify the first endpoint, and the AutoCursor ribbon bar
buttons become active.
2 Click ! in the AutoCursor ribbon bar to display the
AutoCursor Settings dialog box.

3 Click Disable All to clear all selections.
4 Select Angular, and then enter 45 in the field next to it.
5 Click OK.
6 In the graphics window, click any position to specify the first
endpoint.
7 Now move the cursor. Notice that the line snaps in 45-degree
increments as you move the cursor around the selected

endpoint. Move the cursor so that the line forms a 45-degree
angle up, and to the right of the first endpoint then click to
specify the second endpoint and create the line. The line is a
live entity at this point and can be edited.
8 Draw additional lines or, to fix the line and exit the function,
click OK.
TIP: Remember to clear AutoCursor settings when they are no
longer needed. If you forget that you have customized
AutoCursor behavior, you can experience unexpected results
when working with other Mastercam functions.
Using AutoCursor Override

You can temporarily modify AutoCursor settings for a single position
selection. To do this, when AutoCursor is active, click the AutoCursor
Override drop-down button in the AutoCursor ribbon bar.
Figure 2-6: AutoCursor Override button
AutoCursor Override
From the list, select the position type you want AutoCursor to snap to
(applies only to the current selection). This feature is particularly
useful when the geometry is crowded or confusing and you need help
identifying a specific entity and position type.
Figure 2-7: AutoCursor Override drop-down list
X For example, to create a line from the midpoint of another line

1 Choose Create, Line, Create line endpoint from the menu
bar.
2 Click two positions in the graphics window to define the
endpoints of a line.
3 For the next line, click the drop-down arrow next to the
AutoCursor Override button, and then click Midpoint. The

Override button changes to the midpoint icon and becomes
active. Rather than prompting you to specify the first
endpoint, Mastercam prompts you to select a line, arc, or
spline.
4 Click anywhere on the first entity. Mastercam snaps to the
midpoint and prompts you to choose the second endpoint.

At this point, the AutoCursor Override is inactive and the
standard AutoCursor settings are used.
5 Click a position to define the second endpoint of the second
line.
6 Click OK to fix the line and exit the function.
Using the Relative ribbon bar

When creating a new entity with a Sketcher function, you
can position any new point relative to an existing entity. To
do this, press Shift+click when choosing a position, or
choose Relative from the AutoCursor override list. The
current function ribbon bar or dialog box is suspended and the Relative ribbon bar displays.
De
lta
Figure 2-8: AutoCursor Override Relative ribbon bar
Distance and Angle
Length on a selected entity
Note: When you press Enter to apply the specified values, the
Relative Position ribbon bar closes. Use the current functions
ribbon bar or dialog box to select additional positions or modify
the live entity.
You can enter relative position values using one of the following
methods.
X To specify the new position using Delta coordinates
1 If you used the Shift+click method to select a position and
open the Relative ribbon bar, skip to Step 2. Otherwise, after
selecting Relative from the AutoCursor Override list, choose

an existing position to which the new entity will be relative.
2 In the Delta field, type the rectangular or polar XYZ coordi-
nates to position the new endpoint from the selected position.

X To specify a position using distance and length
1 If you used the Shift+click method to select a position and
open the Relative ribbon bar, skip to Step 2. Otherwise, after

selecting Relative from the AutoCursor Override list, choose
an existing position to which the new entity will be relative.
2 Type values in the Distance (vector length) and Angle fields
to establish the distance away from the selected position, and

the angle at which the new endpoint will be placed.
X To specify a position along an entity
1 In the Relative ribbon bar, click the Select button to activate
the Along mode and select a line, arc, or spline nearest to the
endpoint from which you will specify the along length.
2 In the Length field, type the distance from the selected entity
endpoint where you want to create the current position for

the new entity and press Enter. You can extend the new position along the selected entity and enter positive or negative
Length values.
IMPORTANT: When you select a closed arc (circle) in Along
mode, the endpoint is always the zero degree quadrant position. If you click the circle anywhere in the bottom half, the
along distance from the zero position is calculated in a clockwise direction. If you click the circle anywhere in the top half,
the along distance is calculated in a counter clockwise direction.
Selecting Entities
When creating geometry, you can use several selection methods to
select positions and other entities in the graphics window, including
Clicking with the left mouse button, usually at the prompting

of a function to choose one or more entities
Choosing General Selection ribbon bar options
Chaining (page 134)
Using the General Selection ribbon bar

Use the General Selection ribbon bar to select entities in the graphics
window. This ribbon bar operates in two different modes Standard
Selection and Solid Selection. The availability of either mode is based
on the types of entities that are in the current file and the functions
you choose from Mastercam menus and toolbars.
If you choose a Mastercam function specific to a solid entity, the
General Selection ribbon bar automatically switches to the Solid
Selection mode.
Figure 2-9: General Selection Solid Selection mode
Solid Selection options
Note: For more information on Solid selection techniques, see

Selecting Solids on page 304.
If there are no solids in your file, the Solid Selection mode is not available; you can use only Standard Selection options.
Figure 2-10: General Selection Standard Selection mode
Masking
Entity selection
Selection method list
Verify selection toggle

Cancel current selection
Accept current selection
If the General Selection ribbon bar is available for use when no other
function is active, you can select entities prior to choosing a function
by using the cursor or combinations of the cursor and keystrokes,
such as Shift+click. Then choose a function to apply to the selected
entities.
Some functions work in conjunction with the General Selection
ribbon bar. In these functions, the General Selection ribbon bar
becomes active when you are prompted to select entities for the function.
General Selection methods

From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose one of the following
Selection methods to lock the method in place and disable the others.
Chain Selects/chains entities that are connected to other
entities. For example, clicking one side of a rectangle
selects all four sides and clicking one line that is
connected to another selects both lines.
*Window Select entities by drawing a window around
them.
*Polygon Select entities by drawing a polygon around the
entities. Doubleclick to complete the polygon.
Single Select individual entities by clicking them with the
mouse.
Area Select multiple nested shapes with a single mouse
click.
Vector Select multiple entities by drawing a vector line
through them. All entities the vector intersects are
selected.
*The Window and Polygon selection methods are controlled by the
choices you make in the Entity selection settings drop-down list.
You will learn more about this in Entity selection settings on page
127.
Window and Single selection are Mastercams standard selection
methods; both are active at the same time. When these options are in
effect, you can use the mouse and either a single click or Shift+click to
select one or more entities, or drag a window and select all entities
that are completely inside the window.
TIP: You can switch from any selection method to Window by
holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the first window position in the graphics window.
When you choose a selection method from the drop-down list, it
remains set until you perform one of the following actions
Click the Standard Selection button in the General

Selection ribbon bar to reset it to the Window
method.
Choose another method from the list.
Hold down the Shift or Alt keys to override the default (see
Tips below for override details.)
TIPS:
In Standard selection mode, you can switch from the
Window method to Vector selection by holding down the Alt
key.
To override any selection method and toggle between the
Chain and Area selection methods, hold down the Shift key
when selecting an entity or a position. If you place the
cursor on an entity while holding down the Shift key, the
Chain method is active; otherwise, the Area method is
active.
Entity selection settings

The Entity selection field in the General Selection ribbon bar determines how the Polygon and Window selection methods choose to
include entities. Before selecting entities with these methods, use this
field to choose one of the following
In / Out
Select only entities that lie completely inside or

outside the window.
In + / Out+
Select entities that lie completely inside or

outside and entities that intersect the window.
Intersect
Select only entities that intersect the window.
Masking
A selection mask is a defined set of criteria you use to quickly select
entities in the graphics window. Using a selection mask with a
complex part file ensures that you select only and all of the specific
entities you want.
When working with selection masks, you can
Define a selection mask to use once and discard (default).

Make the selection mask active until you turn it off or exit the
Mastercam session.
Save the selection mask criteria to a file (.MASK) that you can
later open and reuse.
Open an existing selection mask file and apply it.
To use a mask for selection, click the All or Only buttons in the
General Selection ribbon bar.
Choosing All opens the Select All dialog box. Use this dialog
box to define and apply a mask that automatically selects all
entities in the current file that match the mask criteria. You
can choose to apply the criteria and select all entities, or only
entities in a specified group, including groups created by
Xform functions.
Choosing Only opens the Select Only dialog box. Use this
dialog box to set restrictions on the entities that are available
for selection in the graphics window. When you apply the
Only mask, you use other General Selection methods to
select only those entities that match the mask criteria you
define. Until you clear the mask, you are restricted from
selecting entities that are excluded from the mask.
Figure 2-11: Masking Select All / Select Only dialog boxes
In the Select All or Select Only (Masking) dialog box, you can open an
existing mask file to apply or choose the mask criteria, including any
combination of entity types, colors, levels, line styles, line widths,
point styles, arc diameter, or line lengths that match a specified value
and filter.
Here are some examples of how you can create and apply All and Only
masks. To use these examples, you must open or create a part that
contains lines and entities in more than one color.
Selection Examples Select All

X To select and delete all line entities in the current part file
1 From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose All.
2 To view and edit the Entities mask criteria, choose the Enti-
ties button.
3 In the Entities criteria, doubleclick the Lines check box
(under Wireframe) to immediately apply the mask and exit

the dialog box.
4 All line entities are selected in the graphics window. To delete
all lines from the part, press the keyboard Delete key.
X To select all entities of a specific type and color in the current
part file
1 From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose All.
2 In the Select All dialog box, choose the Entities button.
3 In the Entities criteria list, select one or more entity types to
include.
4 To set the Colors criteria, choose the Colors button.
5 Select the check box next to the color of the entities to
include.
6 Click OK to apply the mask and exit the dialog box.
7 All entities of the specified type and color are selected in the
graphics window. Continue with the current function, if

applicable, or choose a function to perform on the selected
entities.
TIP: If you are creating a mask using multiple criteria, to
quickly apply the mask and exit the dialog box, hold down the
Ctrl key and doubleclick when selecting the last criteria item.
Selection Examples Select Only

X To restrict the entities you can select to only line entities
1 From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose Only.
2 In the Select Only dialog box, choose the Entities button.

3 In the Entities criteria, doubleclick the Lines check box
(under Wireframe) to immediately apply the mask and exit

the dialog box.
4 In the graphics window, select the lines you want to work
with. Until you clear the mask, you cannot select any other
entity type.
5 Use one of the following methods to clear the mask
Complete the selection.

Reopen the Select Only dialog box and clear the selections.
TIP: Use the Maintain check box in the Select Only dialog box
to apply a mask until you close the Mastercam session or
choose to deselect the Maintain check box.
Entity Selection Tips

In this section, you will learn to quickly and efficiently select entities
in the graphics window by reviewing techniques for
Selecting Single Entities on page 131

Selecting Multiple Entities on page 131
Selecting All Entities on page 132
Selecting Entities as Chains on page 132
Using Area Selection on page 133
Ending Entity Selection on page 133
Unselecting Entities on page 133
Selecting Single Entities

Click an existing entity to select it. When selected, Mastercam highlights the entity in the selection color (default is yellow).
Selecting Multiple Entities

To select multiple entities, click individual entities. Notice
that selected entities are highlighted, indicating selection.
To select multiple entities using the Window selection
method, click an area of the graphics window that is not
directly on an entity to anchor the first point. Then draw a
rectangular window by moving the mouse around the enti-
ties you want to select. Click to set the final position. All entities completely contained within the window are selected.
To select multiple entities using the Vector selection method,

hold down the Alt key, and then click and drag a line through
the entities you want to select. All entities that the line intersects will be selected
To select multiple entities using the Area selection method,

hold down the Shift key and click inside the outermost entity,
but outside the inside entities. Make sure that the cursor is
not close enough to an entity to highlight it before you click.
TIP: To improve your view of the selection area when using
the Window selection method, after selecting the first window
point, use the Pan, Zoom or Fit to screen function before
selecting the second point.
Selecting All Entities

To select all entities in the graphics window, hold down the
Ctrl key and press A.
In the General Selection ribbon bar, choose All. Then click
the All Entities button in the Select All dialog box.
Selecting Entities as Chains

Use the chain selection method to temporarily link connected entities
in order to perform a function with them collectively.
Note: This selection method does not physically create a chain in
the Mastercam database or otherwise link the entities. It is used
only to simplify the selection of connected entities.
To select a chain of entities, hold down the Shift key to activate Chain selection and select an entity that is connected to
other entities, such as a line used in a rectangle. All
connected entities are automatically selected in a single
chain (in this example, the entire rectangle). Continue to use
this method to select other connected entities as chains.
Alternatively, you can lock in the Chain option from the

General Selection ribbon bar drop-down list then select
connected entities.
To select a partial chain of connected entities, activate the

Chain selection method using either method described
above and select an entity connected to others. Then click
again in the location where you want to chain selection to
end. The remainder of the entities in the chain are automatically unselected.
Using Area Selection

The area selection method allows you to select multiple nested
shapes with a single mouse click.
Instead of drawing a box around the entities to be selected (as with
the Window method), area selection selects all closed boundaries
around the position where you click the mouse.
To use the area selection method, hold down the Shift key and click
inside the outermost entity, but outside the inside entities. Make sure
that Mastercam is not close enough to an entity to highlight it before
you click.
Figure 2-12: Examples Area selection (nesting on and off)
2
1
Click here to select the set of curves

marked 1, 2, and 3 (infinite nesting in
area chaining is off). Selected curves
are shown in bold.
Click here to select all of the curves

marked within and including the
outermost boundary (infinite nesting in
area chaining is on). Selected curves
are shown in bold.
TIP: To enable the selection all of the shapes or chains within a

closed boundary, in the Settings, Configuration, Chaining
properties page, you must selection the option for Infinite
nesting in area chaining.
Ending Entity Selection

To end any of the selection methods, press Enter or choose
the End selection option in the General Selection ribbon bar.
Unselecting Entities
Use one of the following methods to cancel or unselect entities.
Click a single entity again to unselect it.
Choose another selection method. All entities selected in a

single action, such as Window selection, are unselected.
Choose the Unselect all option in the General
Selection ribbon bar to clear all selections.
Chaining
Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so
that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. This
fundamental Mastercam concept has important applications in both
design and machining functions.
When you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves
(lines, arcs, and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Chaining
differs from other selection methods because it associates order and
direction to the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect
the way Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.
When chaining is required for a selected function, Mastercam
displays the Chaining dialog box. If the current part file contains wireframe and solid entities, you can use the buttons at the top of the
dialog box to choose the type of entities you want to chain. Otherwise,
the entity type is pre-selected.
Figure 2-13: Chaining dialog box, selection type buttons
Select wireframe entities
Select solid entities
Figure 2-14: Chaining dialog boxes
Wireframe
Solid
Chaining Wireframe Geometry

Chaining wireframe entities is similar to using the standard mode in
General Selection. The entities you select when chaining appear in
the selection color. Use options in the Chaining dialog box to choose:
Geometry plane: You can chain entities only in 3D or the

current construction plane (Cplane). Chaining in 3D allows
the chain to span planes. Cplane chaining is
two-dimensional; all entities must lie in a single plane.
Selection method: Like General Selection, chain selection
methods include chained entities, single entity, window,
polygon, and vector selection. You can also chain a series of
non-adjacent points (useful in spline and surface creation)
and create partial or open chains consisting of all adjacent
entities between a start point and an end point. The Window
and Polygon methods allow you to control whether entities
are selected inside or outside of the selection area.
Use the following functions in the Chaining dialog box to change or
correct chains as you create them.
Last: Reselect the last chain of entities you
created. For example, choose this option when
correcting chains for a surface that did not
generate properly. Mastercam rechains the entities so that you can edit the chains and correct
chaining direction or order without having to
manually rechain all the entities.
Unselect: Unselect all selected entities.
End Chain: End a chain but remain in the

chaining function.
Reverse: Reverse the chain direction.
Start / End of chain: Use these buttons in the

Start and End fields to move the start or end of
the chain from one entity endpoint to another.
Note You can move the chain Start position only
on open chains. The option to move the chain
End position is available only for open and
partial chains.
Dynamic move start/end of chain: Change the
start or end points dynamically by using the
cursor to move them.
Chaining Solids
In Solids mode, the Chaining dialog box provides options to chain
solid entities. The chain solids buttons act as toggles, allowing you to
include or exclude certain types of solid elements from chain selection, including
Edge: Select solid edges on a model or exclude them
from selection.
Face: Select solid faces on a model or exclude them
from selection.
Loop: (available only when chaining solids for toolpath creation) Create a closed chain (with no branch
points)in which you select an edge, a reference
face, a resulting loop, and a start point.
Partial Loop: (available only when chaining solids for
toolpath creation) Create an open chainin which
you select a starting edge, a reference face, and an
ending edge.
From back: Select solid edges or faces only on the
back of a model. When deactivated, you can select
solid edges or faces only on the front of a model.
Use other options in this dialog box to unselect and re-select solid
chains, reverse chaining direction, and move the start of a chain.
Wireframe Chaining Tips

To quickly select a chain of entities, hold down the Shift key
and click a boundary.
Use Partial chaining to create open chains. Click the first
entity for a chain. Then, click the last entity in the chain.
Intersecting entities cannot be chained unless there is a
break at the intersection, which creates a branch point for the
chain.
If the chain stops unexpectedly, choose Analyze Chain from
the Analyze menu to check for overlapping entities. You can
then use trim functions in the Edit menu to trim adjacent
entities together in order to chain them.
Setting Attributes
All Mastercam entities have basic attributes (physical characteristics).
Based on the entity type, attributes can include:
Color
Point style
Line style and width
Level
Note: You set default attributes in the CAD Settings page of the
System Configuration dialog box and save these settings to a
Mastercam configuration file (from the Mastercam menu, choose
Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings). When you run
Mastercam, attribute settings are loaded, along with other configuration parameters, and appear as default values in the Status
bar fields.
Changing physical attributes when you are working with complex
parts is a very powerful technique you will use often to organize your
work. Use the Status bar fields to quickly and easily select new entity
attributes.
Figure 2-15: Status bar
Set attributes
Set main level
Configure Status bar fields

Status bar help
Setting Attributes for New Entities

Changing Entity Attributes (page 142)
Setting Attributes for New Entities

The attributes you set using the following methods are automatically
applied in the current Mastercam session to the new entities you
create. You can set new entity attributes in several ways.
X To use an existing entity to set color, line, point, and level
attributes:
Press Alt+X on the keyboard and select an entity in the
graphics window. The Status bar color, point style, line style,
and line width fields are changed to the selected entitys

attributes.
X To set a specific attribute:
1 Choose one or more attribute fields and specify the value.
a Color: Choose Select from the System color
drop-down list and select an entity in the

graphics window. Or, click the current color
field to select a color from the Colors dialog box. (For
more information, see Setting/changing color on page
144.)
b Point Style, Line Style and Line
Width: Select new values from

the drop-down lists.
c Level: To set the main level:
Type the level number in the

field.
Click the arrow and choose a
level from the most recently used list.
Click Level to open the Level Manager dialog box and
select an existing level, or create a new level.
(For more information, see Setting the main level on page
145.)
d Attributes: Click to open the Attributes
dialog box where you can specify color,

level, point and line styles, and line width.
Click OK to accept the new attributes and close the dialog
box.
Figure 2-16: Attributes dialog box
TIP: You can also access the Entity Attributes Manager from
the Attributes dialog box to specify attributes by entity type.
X To set attributes for specific entity types (such as points, lines,
arcs, solids, surface, and drafting dimensions):
1 Click the Attributes button in the Status Bar.
2 In the Attributes dialog box, select the EA Mgr (Entity
Attributes Manager) check box, and then click the EA Mgr

button.
3 In the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box, select the entity
types and set the attributes you want to use in the current
Mastercam session.
Figure 2-17: Entity Attributes Manager dialog box
To open the Color palette dialog box and choose a color,

doubleclick the color sample.
Note: You can also use the EA Mgr to apply attributes to files you
convert from other programs. Select the option to Include entities
created during File-Open.
4 When all entity attributes are set, click OK to accept them
and return to the Attributes dialog box.

IMPORTANT: If you deselect the EA Mgr check box in the
Attributes dialog box, the Entity Attribute Manager dialog box
settings are not used.
Changing Entity Attributes

Use the following methods to change the attributes of existing entities.
Note: These methods do not change the values that appear in the
Status bar attributes fields; they apply only to the entities you
select.
X To change attributes using the rightmouse button:
1 (optional) Use general selection methods to select the enti-
ties to change.
2 Rightclick the attribute Status bar field you want to change.
TIP: To change multiple attributes, rightclick the Status bar

Attributes button.
3 If you selected entities in Step 1, skip to step Step 4. Other-
wise, when prompted to select the entities to change, use

general selection methods to select the entities. Then press
Enter or choose End selection in the General selection
ribbon bar.
4 Based on the attribute you chose in Step 2, use one of the
following dialog boxes to make the necessary changes:
Figure 2-18: Attributes

dialog box
Figure 2-19: Line Style

dialog box
Figure 2-20: Line Width

dialog box
Figure 2-21: Point Style

dialog box
Figure 2-22: Change

Level dialog box
5 Click OK to apply the change to the selected entities and
close the attribute dialog box.
X To change the attributes of all of a specific type of entity (such

as all points, or splines):
1 In the Status Bar, click the Attributes button.
2 In the Attributes dialog box, select the EA Mgr (Entity
Attributes Manager) check box, and then click the EA Mgr

button.
3 In the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box, select the entity
types and attributes to use when creating new entities in the

current Mastercam session.
4 To update all of the selected types of entities that exist in the
current file and close the dialog box, click Apply to existing
entities.
Note: To continue to use these attributes for new entities, leave the
EA Mgr check box selected in the Attributes dialog box. To use
different attributes, deselect the check box.
TIP: You can also use Analyze functions to modify entity

attributes and other properties. For more information, see
Analyzing Entities on page 253.
Setting/changing color
Mastercam supports a palette of 256 colors, which you can customize.
You can reduce the palette to 16 colors by choosing the 16 Colors
button in the Colors dialog box, or by deselecting the Show 256
colors check box when setting up system configuration parameters in
Settings, Configuration, Colors.
Use one of the following methods to access the Colors dialog box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Screen, Geometry

Attributes and select the colors palette button.
Click the System Colors field in the Status bar.
Figure 2-23: Colors dialog box
To select a color:
Type its ID number in the Current color field.

Click the color in the color palette.
Choose the Select button and click an entity in the graphics
window with the color you want to use.
Choose the Customize tab and use the fields to create a
custom color.
Setting the main level

Levels are a primary organizational tool in Mastercam. For example, a
Mastercam file can contain separate levels for wireframe, surfaces,
drafting entities, and toolpaths.
You are always drawing on the main level. The main level is not a fixed
level, it is only the level you choose to work with at any given time. To
help you keep track of the current main level, it appears in the Status
bar Level field which is always visible in the Mastercam window.
Use the Status bar Level fields to set the main level to work with in the
graphics window.
To set the main level:
Type the level number in the Level field.

Click the drop-down arrow and choose one from the most
recently used list.
Click the Levels button to open the Level Manager dialog box
where you can select an existing level, or create a new level.
Note: For more information on levels, see Working with Levels on
page 357.
Setting Z Depth
Use the Z field in the Status bar to set the Z depth value for the geometry and toolpaths you create. Set the Z depth using one of the
following methods:
Type a value in the field.

Click the drop-down arrow and choose one from the most
recently used list.
Click the Z label and select a position in the graphics window
to use its Z depth value.
Working in 2D and 3D Mode

When creating geometry, use the 2D / 3D Status bar toggle button to
set the drawing mode. The default setting is 3D. Click this button to
switch between drawing modes.
In 2D mode, all geometry is created parallel to the current

Cplane and, unless specified, at the current Z-depth setting.
You can override the Z-depth setting by typing coordinate
values that include a Z-depth value different from the current
Z-depth setting.
In 3D mode, the X, Y, and Z coordinates are all read from
AutoCursor when sketching dynamically. The Z-depth setting
in the Status Bar is not used. When working in a 3D environment, you can create entities whose points lie in different
planes, or create entities (such as arcs or 2D splines) in
planes other than the predefined planes.
In both modes, use AutoCursor or the selected function ribbon bar or
dialog box fields to enter coordinate values. There are some exceptions to this that apply to specific entity types.
IMPORTANT: The 2D / 3D setting has no effect on analyze
and toolpath functions.
The following functions always provide 3D solutions, regardless of the

Status bar 2D / 3D setting:
Fillets and chamfers
Surfaces and solids
Convert to NURBS
Close Arc
Control Points NURBS
Simplify
Xform: Translate, Translate 3D,

Mirror, Rotate, Rectangular Array, Scale
Notes:
In 3D mode, if you choose to bisect two lines that are not in the
same plane or are not parallel to the current Cplane, a message
informs you that a 3D solution does not exist and asks you to
specify the Z-depth to use for the 2D solution.
When editing entities using the Trim or Break functions, all
solutions are calculated based on the current Cplane setting. If
the entities cannot intersect in the current Cplane through a
2D projection, they cannot be modified using these functions.
TIP: Overlooking the current Cplane and Z depth is a common

source of error, which can cause you to create the geometry in
unintended orientations. To avoid this mistake, set the graphics
view (Gview) to the same setting as the Cplane or to Isometric.
Changing the Graphics Window Display

The View menu and toolbar provide several functions and methods
you can use to change the appearance of the geometry and toolpaths
in the graphics window. In addition to the functions listed below, this
section includes information on using zoom and unzoom techniques,
and setting up multiple viewports in the graphics window.
Fit geometry to screen: Maximizes your view of visible
geometry in the graphics window. This function positions
and sizes the displayed geometry to fill as much of the
graphics window as possible.
Pan: Imagine the graphics window as a camera lens

through which you view geometry. Using the keyboard
arrow keys, move the lens left or right, or up and down
over the geometry. Or, if you have set the Middle Button /
Wheel use field to Pan in the Settings, Configuration,
Screen properties page, press and hold the mouse wheel
to drag the image in any direction.
Set screen center: Repositions the center of the graphics
window, based on the new center point you specify.
Repaint screen: Refreshes the graphics window to restore
images that appear incomplete or distorted. This may
occur as the result of frequent changes to entities, particularly where they overlap. The quality and stability of
images in the graphics window is influenced by the
graphic capabilities of your PC, and the amount of available memory.
Note: If Repaint does not completely restore the
graphics window, use the Screen, Regenerate
Display List function to rebuild the display list.
Regenerate screen: Rebuilds the display list at the current
screen scale. Regenerating the display list may also
improve display speed and performance.
Zooming
Mastercam also offers a number of zoom functions, including:
Zoom window: Magnifies a portion of the graphics
window. Click an area of the graphics window that is not
directly on an entity to anchor the first window point.
Then draw a rectangular window by moving the mouse
around the entities you want to zoom. Click to set the final
position and fill the graphics window with the contents of
the selection window.
Note: To improve your view of the selection area when
using this method, after selecting the first window
point, use the Pan, Zoom target, or Fit to screen
function before selecting the second point.
Zoom target: Expands a specific area defined by two

selected points. The first position you select indicates the
center of the target area. As you move the cursor to select
the second position, you draw and drag a rectangular area
that defines the target boundary. When you select the
second position, everything in the target area expands to
fill the graphics window, centered around the first point
you specified.
Unzoom: Reduces the size of the displayed geometry to
50% of its original size. You can reduce the display size of
geometry a maximum number of eight times using this
function.
Zoom in/out: Dynamically zooms in or out from a selected
point. First, select a focal point in the graphics window.
Then use one of the following techniques to zoom:
Slide the mouse forwards and backwards

Spin the mouse wheel in either direction
Consecutively press the Page Up and Page Down
keys
Zoom selected: Works only with pre-selected entities.
Automatically scales the entities you select to fit the
graphics window.
TIP: You can use the mouse wheel or middle button any time
without selecting a functionto dynamically spin or pan the
contents of the graphics window. You set the spin or pan
behavior using the Settings, Configuration, Screen properties
page and Middle Button/Wheel use field.
Setting Viewports
A viewport is an area within the graphics window that displays a
particular graphics view of the geometry you are working with. A
viewport configuration is an arrangement of one or more (up to four)
viewports. By default, Mastercam displays geometry from the top
view in a single viewport that occupies the entire graphics window.
To divide the graphics window into multiple viewports, or panes, each
capable of displaying a different graphics view, choose an option from
the View, Viewports menu.
Mastercam offers four viewport configurations. The following graphic

shows the default views assigned to each viewport configuration.
VP1
VP1
VP1
VP1
VP2
VP3
VP4
VP2
VP2
VP1 = Top view
VP2 = Isometric view
VP3 = Front view
VP4 = Right side view
X To change the view that appears in a viewport:

1 Use the cursor to select the pane, then use one of the
following methods to choose a different view:
Choose View, Standard Views. Then select a standard

graphics view from the drop-down list.
Choose View, Orient, Named Views. In the Views Selection dialog box, select a named view from the list of standard and custom defined views.
From the Status Bar, click Gview and select the view from
the list.
2 In the active pane of a multi-viewport configuration, move
the mouse over the axes coordinate display until the cursor
changes to an arrow. Click the axes marker to enlarge the
viewport and make it the only visible viewport.
TIP: To change the size of the viewport panes, grab and drag
the vertical or horizontal inside edge.
Setting Planes / Views / WCS

The Work Coordinate System (WCS) is the active coordinate system in
use by Mastercam at any given time. It contains the orientation of the
X-Y-Z axes plus the location of the zero point (the origin). Manipulating the WCS, and setting planes and views to simplify the creation
of geometry, solids, and toolpaths are essential Mastercam skills you
will use often. In this section, you will learn about:
Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems on page 151

Displaying Coordinate Information on page 159
Understanding the Top View on page 161
Managing Views on page 161

Measuring View Origins on page 163
Changing View Origins on page 164
Creating Views from Selected Entities on page 166
Creating Views By Rotating on page 167
Creating Views from Normals on page 168
Change the Tplane or the WCS? on page 169
Using WCS and Tplanes to Set Up Toolpaths (page 175)
Lathe Coordinate Systems (page 177)
TIP: Mastercam saves the most recently used plane, view, and
WCS selections for each machine group, and restores them
whenever you activate the machine group. For example, if one
machine group has toolpaths on the front of the part, and
another machine group has toolpaths on the side of the part,
whenever you activate either machine group, Mastercam will
automatically activate whichever views and planes you were
using the last time the group was active.
Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems

Mastercam uses a 3D Cartesian coordinate system to locate your work
in three-dimensional space. The positions of geometry and toolpaths
are expressed in terms of three coordinate axes: X, Y, and Z. Each axis
is signed to indicate a positive (+) and a negative (-) direction.
+Z
+Y
-X
+X
-Y
-Z
Machining jobs often require you to work with coordinate locations in

sophisticated ways. Mastercam includes several useful tools you can
use to transform, overlay, slice, and otherwise manipulate the coordinate system so that you can draw and machine a part any way you
choose.
To apply coordinate systems in Mastercam, you use functions to set
specific views. A view consists of two main parts:
A plane, or slice through the coordinate system

An origin, or zero point
You can use views as graphics views (Gviews) to view the part, as
construction planes (Cplanes) to orient geometry, and as tool planes
(Tplanes) to orient toolpaths.
Gviews define the perspective from which you view the part
in the graphics window.
Cplanes represent the planes in which you create new geometry.
Tplanes are the cutting planes for the toolpaths you define.
Standard and custom views have assigned names, are saved with the
part information (making them portable), and can be selected as you
work with the part to change its orientation in 3D space.
TIPS: Use the following mouse and keyboard methods to
quickly change the Gview:
To zoom in and out, spin the mouse wheel forward and
backwards.
To dynamically rotate the image, hold down the Alt key and
press down on the mouse wheel to grab it. Continue to
press down while moving the mouse to spin it.
To move the image around, use the up, down, left, and right
keyboard arrow keys.
To spin the image, hold down the Alt key and use the up,
down, left, and right arrow keys.
Standard Views
Every Mastercam part includes standard views that correspond to the
six faces of a cube (Top, Front, Back, Right, Left, Bottom) plus an
Isometric view. Standard views are available in all Mastercam files.
Their names and coordinates cannot be modified.
Figure 2-24: Standard Views
The Status bar Gview, Planes, and WCS menus provide options you
use to select standard views, create custom views, and set the Gview,
Tplane / Cplane, and WCS.
Use options in the Gview menu to orient the graphics view

and control the perspective from which you view the part.
You can also use options in the Mastercam View menu to
modify the graphics window display.
To draw geometry or create toolpaths on a specific plane, use
options in the Planes menu options to change the construction plane and tool plane. The options in this menu set both
the construction plane and the tool plane at the same time.
Each function in this menu lets you set both the planar orientation and the origin.
TIP: To set the Cplane and Tplane independently, you must
use the Status bar setup option (!) to add a Cplane and Tplane
pane to the Status bar. In the Customize status bar dialog box,
use the rightclick menu to insert the Tplane and Cplane fields.
After saving the changes, use the Tplane and Cplane Status bar
menus to set each plane to a specific orientation.
The WCS menu options allow you to align the work coordinate system with a specific view. You can select a standard
view, access the list of saved views, or create a new view
based on part geometry or by manipulating the current view.
Because Mastercam breaks views and planes into separate functions,
you can maintain the plane selections for each function independently. For example, you can be looking at the part in an isometric
view (Gview = Isometric) while drawing geometry on the front of the
part (Cplane = Front).
Note: For simple 2D geometry, the Top Tplane / Cplane (default)
corresponds to the standard XY plane .
Using the Gview / Planes / WCS Status bar Menu Options

Many of the same options are available from the Status bar Gview,
Planes and WCS menu. Use these options in a similar manner to set
the specified plane.
Figure 2-25: Gview / Planes / WCS Status bar menus
Gview
Planes
WCS
If you configure the Status bar to include separate Cplane and Tplane
panes, these menus also share many common fields.
Figure 2-26: Cplane and Tplane Status bar menus
Cplane
Tplane
To help you become familiar with using view, planes, and WCS Status
bar menu options, descriptions and tips for each option are provided
below.
Standard views: Select Top, Front, Back, Right, Left,

Bottom, or Isometric to quickly set a standard plane. When
selecting a standard view from the Gview or Planes menus,
the plane you set is relative to the current WCS (this is why
(WCS) is part of the standard view name in these menus).
Standard planes line up with a cube which has been shifted
so that it is parallel to the WCS axes.
TIP: To reset the Gview or Cplane / Tplane to the default Top
system view, regardless of the WCS setting, select Named then
choose Top from the View Selection dialog box.
Named: Orients the selected plane with a view you select

from the View Selection dialog box. This dialog box displays
all the views that have been saved with the part, including
standard and custom views.
Geometry: Aligns the selected plane with geometry that you

select from the graphics window. For example, if you select a
face of the part, the plane is oriented as if you are looking
straight down on a line normal to the part face. When you
choose this option, you must select an arc, two lines, or three
points to define the plane.
Solid face: Similar to the Geometry option, but aligns the
plane to a selected solid face.
Note: For step-by-step instructions on using the Geometry and
Solid face functions, see Creating Views from Selected Entities
on page 166.
Rotate: Creates a new view by rotating the current view

about any or all of the axes by a specified number of degrees.
Dynamic: (Gview only) Creates a new view by rotating the
view perspective as you drag the mouse.
Note: For step-by-step instructions on using the Rotate and
Dynamic functions, see Creating Views By Rotating on page 167.
Last: Sets the plane equal to whatever it was oriented to

before the current selection.
Normal: Creates a new view using a selected line that is
normal to the desired plane. You must also select the orientation of the coordinate system relative to the normal line. For
step-by-step instructions, see Creating Views from Normals
on page 168.
= Gview: Sets the selected plane with the same view as the
current Gview.
=Tplane, =Cplane: Aligns the selected plane with the same
view as the current Tplane or Cplane.
= WCS: (Planes only) Sets the Tplane and Cplane equal to
the same view as the current WCS.
Always = WCS: (Planes only) Links the Tplane and Cplane
to the WCS so that if you change the WCS, it will also update
the Tplane and Cplane. Selecting this option disables the
other options in the menu.
Origin: Displays the origin of the selected view / plane and, if
enabled, allows you to click and change it. Using this method
to change the origin automatically creates a new view that
you can name and save to the view catalog. You can also use
the View Manager to change the origin of an existing view
and update the origin of all planes that are linked to the view,
including the WCS.
Saved as: Indicates whether the new view has been saved
and displays its name.
Save: (Gview only) If the current view has not been saved, use
this option to open the New View dialog box where you can
set parameters and save the custom view. (If the current view
has not been saved, Mastercam displays Gview: Not Saved in
the graphics window.)
Setting the Tplane Different from the Cplane

You can set the tool plane and construction plane to the same view at
the same time using the Planes function on the Status bar. However,
some applications may require you to set these planes independently.
Use one of the following methods to accomplish this:
From the Status bar, choose WCS, View Manager. Use the
View Manager dialog box to select different views for each
plane. Use other dialog box options to customize the origin
and assign work offsets.
Figure 2-27: View Manager dialog box
When creating a toolpath, choose the Planes button in the

Toolpath parameters tab. Then use the Toolpath Coordinate
System dialog box to select the different views.
Figure 2-28: Toolpath Coordinate System dialog box
Note: Using this method affects only the current toolpath.
Choose the Status bar configure option (!) and use the right
click menu to insert separate Cplane and Tplane panes into
the Status bar. Then use the Status bar Cplane and Tplane
menu functions to set the planes independently.
Work Coordinate Systems

You can shift and move the Mastercam coordinate axes to create a
work coordinate system (WCS). Defining a WCS lets you easily move
the coordinate system to your part when creating geometry, solids, or
toolpaths. Using this technique eliminates the need to perform
complex calculations, or otherwise transform the part to the coordinate system. Instead of moving the part, you are moving its orientation.
Gviews, Cplanes, and Tplanes are all measured relative to the WCS
and its origin. However, you change the WCS in exactly the same way
that you change other views: create a view which captures the orientation and origin that you want to work with, then set the WCS equal
to it.
X To realign or create a new work coordinate system:
From the Status bar, choose WCS. Then select an option

in this menu to align the WCS with a different view. You
can select a standard view, access the list of saved views,
or create a new view based on part geometry or by manipulating a current view.
Note: From the WCS Status bar menu, choose the View Manager
option to access the View Manager dialog box. This dialog box
provides a central location for working with all views that have
been created for the part. You can modify existing views, create
new ones, and set the Cplane, Tplane, and the WCS to selected
views.
Coordinate Systems and Machine Definitions

The WCS and custom views are not used to model your machine tool
or axis orientation. Instead, the properties of the machine definition
are used to accomplish this.
Mastercam maintains a separate coordinate system, called the world
coordinate system, to model the machine tool. The machine definition
defines how the axes of the machine tool are physically laid out and
oriented, for example, the orientation of the Z axis on a horizontal
mill. When you create a toolpath and select its tooling, the machine
definition provides the necessary information on axis combinations,
turret and spindle orientations, and how the machine tools are
mounted. This information is available to the post processor.
You can move a part file transparently from a vertical mill to a horizontal mill, or from one spindle of a lathe to another, without having
to manually transform the coordinate system in the part file.
Displaying Coordinate Information

Mastercam integrates several different status indicators into the
graphics window so you can tell at a glance how your work is oriented.
The following information always displays in the lower left corner of
the graphics window.
The picture of the coordinate axes (the gnomon) shows the orientation of the current Gview.
The lower line displays the name of the views aligned with the Gview,
WCS, Cplane, and Tplane.
Note: The Tplane view information displays only when a
machine definition or machine group is active.
The following picture shows the same display when a machine is
active. In this example, the Tplane and Cplane are set to the same
view (the front of the part):
The following picture shows the same display when the Tplane and
Cplane are oriented differently. In this case, both are set to align with
different custom views:
Displaying Coordinate Axes

At any time, you can press F9 to display the coordinate axes and
origin. The default color for these axes is brown. The axes for the
Cplane and Tplane views also display, if they are different (the
Cplanes axes in blue, and the Tplane axes green).
To see an enhanced axis display that includes additional gnomons,
press Alt+F9:
In the upper left corner of the graphics

window, a gnomon shows the Cplane
orientation.
In the upper right corner, another
gnomon shows the Tplane orientation.
A third gnomon displays at the WCS

origin to indicate its orientation. It
appears in the color assigned to the WCS
view in the View Manager.
Understanding the Top View

When you work in the default WCS, the Top view is parallel to the XY
plane. If you have simple 2D geometry, you are looking straight down
on it in the Top view. This perspective gets more complicated when
the WCS is aligned with a different view. Remember, the Gview,
Tplane, and Cplane are all measured relative to the WCS. When the
WCS changes, the Top plane also changes to remain parallel to the
WCS.
You can work with the Top view in the following ways:
Regardless of the current WCS setting, you can always return

to the standard, pre-defined Top view. In the example below,
the T/Cplane is set to Top. Whenever you see Top displayed
in this way, whether it is for a Cplane, Tplane, Gview, or WCS,
it is in reference to the standard Top view.
Use the View Selection dialog box to select the standard,

pre-defined Top view. You can choose this view without
affecting the view used to align the current WCS. For
example, if the WCS is aligned to a custom view but you want
to draw geometry in the default XY plane, from the Status bar,
choose Planes, Named. Then select Top from the View
Selection dialog box.
To select the Top plane relative to the WCS, from the Status
bar, choose Planes, Top (WCS). When you look at the status
area, instead of Top, the same view name as the WCS
displays, instead of Top, indicating that the top plane is now
parallel to the WCS instead of to the system XY plane.
If you create 2D geometry in this orientation, it will be

parallel to the WCS view, not the XY plane.
Managing Views
The View Manager dialog box is a central point where you can select,
edit, create and manage views.
Figure 2-29: View Manager dialog box
Some of the tasks that you can accomplish here include:
Applying selected views to the Cplane, Tplane, and the WCS

Editing the origin of a view
Assigning a work offset to a view (when you select the view
for a toolpath, the work offset code is automatically generated)
Creating a new view relative to existing views or by copying
existing views
The list contains all of the views that have been defined in the current
part file. Click a view to select it, then use the buttons in the Set
current view and origin section to apply it to the WCS, Cplane, or
Tplane.
Right-click menu options

The View Manager rightclick menu provides quick access to additional view management options, including:
Rename: Change the name of a custom view; you cannot

rename a standard view.
Delete: Permanently remove a custom view from the view list
and part file; you cannot delete a standard view.
Import: Import views from another part and add them to the
view list. First, choose a part file that contains the views to
import. Then, in the View Selection dialog box, select one or
more views to import. The selected views are added to the

current file.
Info: Display a report with detailed information about all the

views in the view list.
Measuring View Origins

When you work with the origin of a view, you often see its location
expressed in view coordinates. The coordinate values of the origin
express a vector from the original system origin to the view origin,
which is measured along the view axes.
This might be easier to understand with an example. Consider the
following rectangle, anchored at the point indicated in the following
graphic. The anchor point has coordinates X2, Y1.5, Z0.
Using this example, suppose we create a view aligned with this rectangle, with its origin at the anchor point. If the axes of the new view
are parallel to the system axes, its origin in view coordinates is the
same as the original coordinates of the point (as displayed in the View
Manager).
Next, create another view anchored on the same point but with the X
and Y axes flipped. In the View Manager, you will see that the coordi-
nate values for its origin are reversed.
Finally, consider what happens if you rotate the rectangle 25 degrees

about its edge closest to the X axis, and create a new view. The anchor
point has not moved, but the axes are aligned, as shown below.
In this example, the X axis orientation is the same as the standard

system view, but the Y and Z axes are rotated. The X coordinate of the
origin is X=2, and the Y and Z coordinates reflect the axis rotation.
Changing View Origins

You can use several techniques to change the origin of a view. You can
use the View Manager to edit the origin, or you can select a new origin
for the Tplane or Cplane. When you do this, you can apply the new
origin to the view which is currently mapped to those functions, or

create a new view.
Note: When you change the origin for an existing view,
Mastercam automatically updates the tool origin for any toolpaths created in that view. These toolpaths will need to be regenerated before they can be posted.
X To change the origin from the View Manager:
1 From the Status bar, choose WCS, View Manager.
2 In the View Manager dialog box, select a view from the list.
3 Enter the coordinates of the new origin in any of the
following ways:
Type the coordinates directly into the fields.

Use the Select button to select a location from the
graphics window.
Click the Reset button to reset the coordinates to 0,0,0.
4 Click OK to save the changes and exit the function. The
origins of any functions that are currently aligned with the

view (such as the Tplane or Cplane) are immediately updated
to reflect the new origin.
X To change the origin from the Planes menu:
1
From the Status bar, select Planes, Origin.
2 In the graphics window, select the point for the new origin.
3 In the Update Origin or Create New View dialog box,
choose one of the following options:
To modify the origin of the view currently assigned to the

Cplane / Tplane, click Update. This completes the procedure.
To create a new view at the new origin, click Create new
and continue with the next step.
4 In the New View dialog box, use the following steps to define
a new view:
a Type in a new name for the view.
b Reset the origin for the view, as necessary, by clicking the
Select button and picking a point in the graphics window.

c To associate a work offset with the view, select the Work
Offset check box. Then type the number of the offset in
the field, or choose Get unique to assign the next unused

offset number.
d To immediately align the work coordinate system to the
new view, choose the Set as WCS option.

e Click OK to save the new view and add it to the view
catalog stored in the part file.
Creating Views from Selected Entities

Use these steps to create a new view from entities you select in the
graphics window. The steps are similar whether you create the view
from wireframe or surface geometry, or a solid face.
X To create a new view from wireframe or surface geometry:
1 From the Status bar Planes or WCS menu, select Geometry.
2 Select sufficient geometry to define a plane. Select either:
Three points (these must be individual point entities, not

locations based on other entities, like endpoints,
midpoints, or intersections)
Two intersecting lines
A flat 2D entity, such as an arc or flat surface (not a solid
face)
Note: Use general selection methods to select entities in the
graphics window. To select a hidden face, use the Select from
back option in the General Selection ribbon bar (available only in
Solids mode).
3 Use the following steps in the Select View dialog box to
select the positive directions for the axes:

a Click the arrows to preview different sets of axis combina-
tions.
b Click OK to accept the displayed axis combination.
4 Use options in the New View dialog box to define the new
view.
Mastercam displays default origin coordinates based on

the selected geometry, but you can use the Select button
to choose a different location.
Select the Set new origin check box to align the Cplane,
Tplane, and/or the WCS origins relative to the view origin
when applying the view. If unselected, when you work in
the view, its planar orientation is applied to the WCS,

Tplane and Cplane functions, but their origin does not
change in.
To make the view associative with the geometry that you

just selected, select the Associative check box. If selected,
when the geometry moves, the definition and origin of the
view are automatically updated.
5 Choose OK to save the view. It is immediately applied to the
function that was active when you started this process. For
example, if you started from the WCS menu, the new view is
applied to the WCS.
X To create new Gviews from geometry
You can also create a new graphics view from selected geometry using one of the following methods:
From the Gview Status bar menu, select Geometry.

From the View menu, choose Orient, View by Entity.
The new view is created and applied to the Gview immediately after you select geometry or an entity, but it is not
named or saved. To save the new view, choose Save from the
Gview Status bar menu. Then use options in the New View
dialog box to name the view, set the origin and other parameters and save it to the part file.
Creating Views By Rotating

You can create new views by rotating the current view either a fixed
angular amount in each axis, or dynamically.
X To rotate a view by a fixed amount:
1 From the Planes or WCS Status bar menu, select Rotate.
2 In the Rotate View dialog box, type the angle of rotation
about each of the axes and choose OK. A preview of the

orientation displays in the graphics window as you enter
each value and tab to a new field (you might need to move
the dialog box to see it).
3 Use options in the New View dialog box to name the view,
set the origin and specify other parameters.

4 Choose OK to save the view. It is automatically applied to the
function that was active when you started. For example, if

you started from the Planes menu, the new view is applied to
the Tplane /Cplane.
Note: You can also select Rotate from the Gview Status bar menu.
To name and save the new view you create using this method, you
must choose Save from the Gview Status bar menu and complete
the fields in the New View dialog box, as described.
X To rotate a view by dragging it in the graphics window.
1 Use one of the following methods to select the Dynamic
Rotation function:
From the Mastercam menu, choose View, Orient,

Dynamic Rotation.
From the Gview Status bar menu, choose Dynamic.
Rightclick in the graphics window and choose Dynamic
Rotation from the rightclick menu.
2 Set a rotation point by clicking a point in the graphics
window.
3 Drag the mouse to rotate the Gview about the selected point.
4 To fix the view and exit the function, click the mouse again.
The status display in the graphics window should read

Gview: Not saved:
To cancel the rotated view, from the Gview Status bar

menu, choose Last.
To save the rotated view, from the Gview Status bar menu,
choose Save. Complete the fields in the New View dialog
box and click OK to save the view and exit the function.
Creating Views from Normals

The normal of a line is perpendicular (90) to it. Use the Normal function in the Planes and WCS Status bar menus to quickly create a new
view by defining a plane perpendicular to a selected line. The Z axis
lies on the line that you select. Use the New View Orientation ribbon
bar and the Select View and New View dialog boxes to:
Specify a rotation value

(to fix the angular position of the X Y axes about the Z axis)
Choose an axis orientation
Set the rotation point
Name and save the new view
X To define a new normal view:

1 From the Planes or WCS Status bar menu, select Normal.
2 In the graphics window, select the normal line and press
Enter to set the Z axis parallel to the selected line.

3 In the New View Orientation ribbon bar rotation field, type
a value used to fix the angular position of the X and Y axes

about the Z axis. The rotation value that you enter here will
be relative to the currently displayed axes.
4 Use the Select View dialog box to cycle through the possible
axis orientations and choose the one you want. Click OK to

accept the view orientation.
5 If you entered a rotation value in Step 3, you are prompted to
select a rotation point for the selected axes orientation. Click

a point in the graphics window and drag the mouse to
preview the axis orientations at different index positions. For
example, if you entered an angle of 30 degrees in the ribbon
bar, drag the mouse around the rotation point to see the axes
at every 30 degree position. Press Enter to fix the axes in position.
6 Use options in the New View dialog box to name the view,
set the origin and specify other parameters.

7 Choose OK to save the view. It is automatically applied to the
function that was active when you started. For example, if

you started from the WCS menu, the new view is applied to
the WCS.
Note: You can also create a normal view from the Gview functions. You can select Normal from the Gview Status bar menu, or,
from the Mastercammenu, choose View, Orient, Normal. To
name and save the new view you create using these methods, you
must choose Save from the Gview Status bar menu and complete
the fields in the New View dialog box, as described.
Change the Tplane or the WCS?

To machine a part that is not lying flat in the XY plane, do you change
the tool plane or the WCS to get the correct NC output? To help you
answer this question, this section uses examples to illustrate the practical differences between each approach. An important difference to
consider is that changing the Tplane typically results in a rotary
motion code (A, B, or C) when you post the toolpath (assuming that
you are using a post processor configured for rotary output), while
changing the WCS does not.
The part we are using in this example consists of a contour toolpath
around a block that sits at a 20-degree angle about the Y axis.
A custom view has been created which aligns with the rectangle; it has
been named SLANT 20 DEG and saved to the view list. The examples
which follow show the effect of changing the Tplane or the WCS to
align the toolpath with the part geometry.
Example 1: Changing the Tplane

In the first example, you will not modify the WCS. Instead, you will
align the Tplane with the part. Click Planes on the status bar, choose
Named, and select the SLANT 20 DEG view. The status display in the
graphics window should look like this.
Next, create a simple contour toolpath around the rectangle. In the

Toolpath Parameters tab, click the Planes button to open the Toolpath Coordinate System dialog box and verify the plane settings.
Figure 2-30: Example 1 Toolpath Coordinate System dialog

box
When you backplot the toolpath, you can see that the tool axis is
normal to the part geometry.
When you post the part with a 5-axis post processor, a B20 code is
output, rotating the tool axis or table 20 degrees before the part is cut.
The Tplane selection is what triggered the rotary motion.
Example 1 NC Code:
...
N140 (
1/4 FLAT ENDMILL
LEN. - 0
TOOL - 1
DIA. OFF. - 0
DIA. - .25 )
N150 T1 M6
N160 G0 G54 G90 X1. Y-1.125 C0 B20. S2139 M3
...
If the part will be mounted on a rotary fixture, this would be the
proper approach.
Example 2: Changing the WCS

In this example, you will create the exact same toolpath on the same
part as in Example 1, but instead of setting the Tplane to the SLANT
20 DEG view, you will set the WCS to this view. (Click WCS on the
status bar, then Named and select SLANT 20 DEG from the list). After
setting the WCS, click Planes in the status bar and choose Top (WCS).
The status display in the graphics window should look like this.
The T/Cplane displays SLANT 20 DEG because the Top view that you
selected for the T/C plane is relative to the WCS. Since this matches a
named view from the catalog (SLANT 20 DEG), Mastercam displays
the view by name.
Next, you will create the same contour toolpath. In the Toolpath
Parameters tab, click the Planes button to verify the plane settings.
Figure 2-31: Example 1 Toolpath Coordinate System dialog

box
The Tplane matches Example 1, but the WCS is different. Select the
Display relative to WCS option to see the relationship between the
Tplane and the WCS.
When you backplot the toolpath, the toolpath and tool orientation
look exactly the same, but when you post it, there is no rotary motion.
Example 2 NC Code:
...
N140 ( 1/4 FLAT ENDMILL
LEN. - 0
TOOL - 1
DIA. OFF. - 0
DIA. - .25 )
N150 T1 M6
N160 G0 G54 G90 X1. Y-1.125 C0. B0. S2139 M3
...
If the part will be mounted flat on the table instead of a rotary fixture,
this would be the proper approach.
Why is there a difference?

In Example 1, selecting the Tplane told Mastercam that it needed to
produce the rotary motion. In Example 2, the Tplane was the same.
However, because the WCS was set to the same planeand
Mastercam measures tool and construction planes relative to the
WCS, the part appeared to be lying flat in the XY plane and so no
rotary motion was created.
Use the Tplane technique described in Example 1 when the part, or a
portion of the part, will be physically mounted at an angle or rotated
in the machine tool, for example, when tilting the tool axis, or rotating
a fixture or table. Tombstoning applications also require you to

change Tplanes for each face of the fixture to produce the proper
rotary output.
Use the WCS technique in Example 2 when the part will be machined
flat but the part geometry is at an angle and you do not want to, or
cannot, transform it. Use the WCS to bring the coordinate system to
the part, instead of the other way around.
Using WCS and Tplanes to Set Up Toolpaths

In this section, you will review common machining situations and
examples of how you might use WCS and Tplanes to set up specific
jobs. While the details of your specific machining problems are
unique, reviewing this information can help you determine when to
create a new WCS and when to use Tplanes.
General Guidelines
Program moves that the machine can accomplish in one
setup with one WCS. If you have to manually change the part
orientation in the machine, use a different WCS.
For most common milling applications on a 3-axis knee mill
or VMC, leave the WCS aligned to the Top view and use the
Top tool plane for your work.
If you have a rotary axis, do the following:
If the fixture rotates continuously while cutting the part,

leave the WCS and Tplane alone, and use the Rotary
options from the Toolpath parameters tab.
If the fixture must rotate to a fixed position before the
toolpath starts to machine a regular 2D or 3D toolpath, set
the Tplane to the desired plane before creating the toolpath.
For 5-axis machines and multiaxis toolpaths, use tool
planes to work on the various faces.
Horizontal Machining Center / Tombstoning

If you are machining a block on the B axis of an HMC, as you work
your way around the block for each toolpath, set the Tplane equal to
the Front, Right, Back and Left views accordingly, with respect to the
WCS. You do not need to change the WCS when using a horizontal
rather than vertical machine; the axis orientations in the machine
definition describe this for Mastercam.
Moving the Coordinate System to the Part (Machining Flat)

In this example, a part must be machined lying flat on the table, but
the drawing in the Mastercam file is oriented in a non-standard plane.
For some reason, you cannot rotate, transform, or move the geometry
in the file.
To address this situation, create a new view aligned with the part
geometry. Choose WCS from the Status bar menu, select Geometry,
and select either two lines from the contour or one of the arcs. Use the
New View dialog box to assign a name, locate the origin at a suitable
point, and, optionally, assign a work offset for the view. Click OK to
save the new view.
Select the new view for the WCS, and then align the Tplane and
Cplane to it. Choose Planes from the Status bar, then Top (WCS).
Create a 2D toolpath as usual. When you post the part, 2D tool motion
commands are dimensioned from the part origin, as if the part is lying
flat.
Machining Two Parts on Different Fixtures

In this example, you must create operations to machine two different
parts. Each part is mounted on a different fixture on the table.
In this situation, assign a different work offset to each fixture. Then,

when you create the toolpaths for each part, include the offset
number in each toolpath. By basing each toolpath on an offset
number instead of a coordinate position, you can run the job without
worrying about how the fixtures are positioned on the table. Before
running the job, the operator needs only to touch off the parts properly to set each offset position in the control.
To accomplish this in Mastercam, choose View Manager from the
WCS Status bar menu and use the View Manager dialog box to create
a new view for each fixture. To create each view, click on the Top view,
and choose Copy. Then type a name for the new view and enter the
offset for the fixture. To define an origin for the view, in the Origin
section, choose Select and pick a point on the fixture as shown in the
above picture.
Before creating operations for each part, choose Named from the
Planes Status bar menu, and select the view you created for the
fixture. When you post the operations, Mastercam automatically
outputs the correct offset codes and creates tool positions relative to
the origin specified for each fixture.
Lathe Coordinate Systems

Traditional lathe applications use a very different coordinate system
from milling applications. Instead of a 3D, XYZ space, a typical lathe
coordinate system is 2D with the tool axis perpendicular to the
spindle (Z axis) instead of parallel to it.
Lathe 2D, XY
Mill 3D, XYZ

+Z
+X
-Z
+Z
+Y
-X
-X
+X
-Y
-Z
Mastercam includes a number of functions you use to create lathe

parts and toolpaths for different types of lathes. These tools include
machine definitions, Cplanes, and the WCS. In the following sections
you will learn techniques for working with lathe coordinates.
Lathe Tool and Machine Definitions

Tool and machine definitions provide important information that
allows Mastercam to interpret the lathe coordinates.
The machine definition describes where the spindle and tool

turrets are mounted, and the direction and orientation of
each of the machine axes, including the angle of a slant-bed
lathe. For sophisticated multi-turret and multi-spindle
lathes, where individual axes can exist on several compo-
nents, you can set up axis combinations that link the axes of
specific components together.
The tool definition specifies the turret/spindle where the tool

is mounted, its orientation, and mounting direction. When
you select a tool (and axis combination, if applicable) for an
operation, the turret, spindle, and tool orientation are read
from the tool definition.
For the most part, axis orientation information from the machine
definition is not used by the Mastercam interface; it is read by the post
processor. You use standard views and planes to work with part
geometry. When you post operations to create the NC code, the post
processor reads machine-specific axes information from the machine
definition.
Rotating Lathe Tool Axes

Mastercam supports B-axis lathes where the tool is mounted on a
rotary axis (typically B) similar to a mill. The rotary axis can be swiveled to change the angle at which the tool is used. The tool can also be
rotated about its long axis to a specific orientation; this allows you to
use the same tool on both the main and sub-spindles.
To generate the proper rotational output, rather than change the
Tplane as you might with a mill, for a lathe toolpath, enter the tool
angle by clicking the Tool Angle button in the Toolpath parameters
tab.
Note: This option is available only if the appropriate rotary axes
have been defined in the active machine definition.
Use the Tool Angle dialog box to enter the angle of the tool. You can
enter the angle directly in the field, or select a line parallel to the Feed
Direction or Plunge Direction by clicking the appropriate button.
Then, enter the rotation angle of the tool about its axis. You can select
0 or 180, or choose Other and type the desired angle in the field.
TIP: You can also store a tool angle in the tool definition. Typically, this is done to support lathes without a B-axis, to create
tools that are at an angle to the primary axes. For lathes with
true B-axis capability, you enter a tool angle of 0 in the tool
definition so that the tool is parallel to the axis for compatibility
with a tool changer. Then use the Tool Angle dialog box to set
the desired tool angle for each operation.
IMPORTANT: The angle entered in the Tool Angle dialog box

is measured relative to any tool angle stored in the tool definition; it does not simply replace or overwrite it.
Lathe Cplanes
Mastercam provides special lathe construction planes that allow you
work in familiar lathe coordinates. For conventional 2D turning applications, use the Status bar Planes menu to select the coordinate
system. Select Lathe Radius or Lathe Diameter coordinates, then
specify the desired X and Z directions.
This sets the Cplane and Tplane; there is no need to change the WCS.
For conventional 2D turning applications, you can leave the WCS as
the system Top view.
Vertical Turret Lathes

Mastercam includes a special system-defined view which transforms
the lathe coordinate system for a vertical turret lathe. From the Status
bar, choose WCS, View Manager. Then select LATHE Z = WORLD Z.
Click the WCS icon to align the work coordinate system with this view
and choose OK. This maps the lathe Z axis so that it is vertical. You
can now choose a diameter or radius coordinate system from the
Planes menu. When you work with the part in the graphics window, it
is oriented vertically, as it will be on the machine.
Note: In prior versions of Mastercam Lathe, when you generated a

lathe turning toolpath, Mastercam automatically wrote the coordinates to the NCI file in terms of a typical lathe coordinate
system. Instead of using the standard X-Y-Z axes like Mastercam
Mill, the coordinates in the NCI file were written using standard
lathe axes.
This is no longer true. In Mastercam Lathe, you can still work in
familiar lathe coordinate systems (either radius or diameter) by
selecting them from the Planes menu on the status bar:
However, if you are a post writer and familiar with creating posts
for earlier versions of Mastercam Lathe, your post processors may
now need to perform this initial coordinate transformation rather
than just reading it from the NCI file.
For more information on MP post processors or detailed information about the NCI file, see the MP Post Processor Reference
Guide, available on CD from your Mastercam reseller.
Editing Your Work

Functions in the Edit menu allow you to undo / redo and delete /
undelete actions you perform when working with CAD functions. You
will use these functions often, particularly when you are learning to
use Mastercam.
Undo / Redo
You can undo and redo one or more sequential
events that occur while working with the current file
and design functions.
An event is defined as a function-based operation. There is no difference between creating a single line or using an Xform function that
creates 100 lines. Each is a single event.
By default, Mastercam can save up to 2 billion undo / redo events,
restricted only by the amount of random access memory (RAM) available on your PC. To enhance your PC performance, you can configure
Mastercam to store only a specific number of events and allocate a
maximum amount of RAM to the undo / redo functions. For more
information, see Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on
page 68.
Notes:
Each time you open a part file or create a new file, the list of
undo / redo events is cleared from memory. However, saving or
merging the current file does not clear this list.
Due to the complex and associative nature of creating and
modifying toolpaths and solids, you cannot undo or redo toolpath- and solid-related functions.
The events you can undo and redo are limited to Mastercam CAD
functions, including those you use to create or edit geometry, drafting
entities, file annotations, and entity attributes.
The following CAD functions are not saved as events:
Editing live entities. However, fixing the entity by exiting the

function is saved as an event. If you undo this type of event,
you delete the entity.
Delete / undelete
Blank / unblank
Hide / unhide
Setting system attributes (color, level, point and lines styles)

Status bar functions (Gview, Cplane, Tplane, WCS, Z depth,
Levels, Groups, 2D / 3D construction)
Zooming or panning images in the graphics window
Delete / Undelete
The delete and undelete functions in the Edit , Delete submenu allow
you to permanently remove or restore one or more selected entities
from the graphics window and from the part file. You can also use the
Delete Duplicates (simple) and Delete Duplicates - Advanced functions to find and automatically delete duplicate entities in the current
file. This section describes each delete and undelete function and
how and when to use it.
Deleting duplicate entities

Duplicate entities make files larger than necessary and interfere with
chaining. Mastercam provides a number of options you use to delete
duplicate entities.
File Open: Configure Mastercam to automatically find and

delete duplicate entities every time you open a file, and
provide an online summary of the types and number of
duplicate entities that were deleted. For more information,
see Start / Exit on page 88.
Translate /Join: When you translate and join entities, duplicate lines sometimes result. You can configure Mastercam to
automatically delete all duplicate lines created during join
operations. For more information, see CAD Settings on page
81.
Editing: Use the Delete duplicates and Delete duplicates
(advanced) functions in the Edit menu to find and delete
duplicate entities in the current file. Each function is
described below.
Delete Duplicates (simple)

You can automatically delete duplicate entities based on
their XYZ position and entity type. If you select entities
before choosing this function, Mastercam searches only for
duplicates that match the selected entity types. Otherwise,
it locates and deletes all duplicates for all entity types. An online
summary informs you of the entities that were deleted.
Figure 2-32: Example: Delete Duplicates summary
2
Delete Duplicates (advanced)
Use this function to find and delete duplicate entities in the
current file based on their XYZ position, selected entity
type, and the entity attributes you specify, including:
Color
Line Style
Level
Line Width
Point Style
This function also provides an online summary of the entities that

were deleted.
Delete entity
You can use different methods to delete entities, based on
whether you select entities before or after choosing the
Delete function.
First use the General Selection ribbon bar options

to select entities. Then press the Delete key on your PC
keyboard or choose the Delete entity function from the Edit
menu.
First choose the Delete entity function. Then select the entities to delete and press the Enter key or choose the End selection button in the General Selection ribbon bar.
Notes:
To recover the entities you delete in error, use the Undelete or
Undo functions.
To temporarily remove selected entities from the graphics
window, use the Hide or Blank functions. For more information, see Hiding Entities on page 361 and Blanking Entities on
page 361.
Undeleting Entities
Use the Undelete functions to restore one or more deleted entities to
the current file. You can undelete only the entities you deleted while
working with the current file. For example, if you delete entities from
File 1, you can undelete them only until you open File 2.
Undelete functions include:
Undelete entity: Restores the last entity you

deleted. You can continue to select this option to
incrementally undelete entities.
Undelete # of entities: Restores the number of
specified entities by reversing the sequence in
which they were deleted. For example, if you
deleted 20 entities and wanted to only delete the
first 15, choose this function and type 5 in the field. The last 5
entities that were deleted are undeleted and restored to the
part file.
Undelete entities by mask: Opens the Selection
mask dialog box where you can specify the criteria
you want to use to select the entities to undelete.
TIP: To recover the entities you delete in error, you can also
use the Undo function.
DESIGN / Creating Geometry 185
Creating Geometry
This section introduces the functions and ribbon bars you use to
create a broad range of geometric entities. You will learn to create
geometry and work with essential Mastercam CAD functions,
including:
Using the Sketcher Toolbar on page 185

Editing Live Entities on page 186
Creating Points on page 188
Creating Lines on page 191
Creating Arcs and Circles on page 195
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes on page 200
Creating Fillets and Chamfers on page 213
Creating Splines on page 216
Creating Primitives on page 219
Using the Sketcher Toolbar

Sketcher is the suite of Mastercam functions you use to dynamically
create basic geometry by moving the mouse and clicking in the
graphics window. Basic geometry includes points, lines, arcs, miscellaneous shapes (such as ellipse, polygon, helix, letters), fillets, chamfers, splines, and primitive surfaces and solids.
The Sketcher toolbar groups the Sketcher functions in drop-down
lists, organized by each entity type.
es
i ti v
Pri
m
et
s /c
Fil
l et
Ge
om
Ar
cs
Po
in
ts
Lin
es
ric
sh
ap
es
ha
mf
Sp
er
s
lin
es
Figure 2-33: Sketcher toolbar
TIP: Other toolbars, such as the Solids and Surfaces toolbars,

offer additional functions for geometry creation. You can
access all of these functions and more from the Create menu.
Sketching basic geometry in either 2D or 3D mode is free-form, fast,
and easy. Simply select a Sketcher function from the drop-down list,
and then use the mouse to click in the graphics window and create
the entity. For many Sketcher functions, you also use the function
ribbon bar or dialog box options to define or edit the live entity. If you
prefer keyboarding, you can use shortcut keys to access most ribbon
bar options.
Notes:
For many types of geometry creation, you use the AutoCursor in
conjunction with the selected Sketcher function to create and
edit entities. For more information, see Using the AutoCursor
Ribbon Bar on page 116.
You can customize the Sketcher toolbar by adding or removing
functions. For more information, see Customizing Toolbar
Functions on page 45.
Sketcher functions do not include drafting, transform, modify,
surfaces, or solids (with the exception of primitives).
Editing Live Entities

Mastercam provides flexible options for editing basic entities. When
you first create an entity, it is considered live and can be edited within
the ribbon bar or dialog box function you used to create it. The live
color is light blue by default, although you can customize it. Once the
entity becomes fixed, you must use other functions to edit it.
Note: For more information, see Editing Entities on page 226.
X For example, to create a line and edit it while it is live:
1 Choose Create, Line, Create line endpoints from the menu
bar at the top of the screen. The Create line endpoints ribbon
bar displays.
2 To create the endpoints of the new line entity, click two posi-
tions anywhere in the graphics window. The line appears in

the live entity color.
Ho
riz
on
ta
l
Ta
ng
en
t
Ve
rti
ca
l
Lin
ea
ng
le
Lin
el
en
gt
h
Ed
it
en
dp
oin
ts
M
ult
i-li
ne
3 Click the #1 edit endpoint button.

4 Move the cursor to a new position for the first line endpoint,
and then click again.

5 Click the #2 edit endpoint button.
6 Move the cursor to a new position, then click again.
7 Repeat Steps 36 until you are satisfied with the endpoints.
8 To change the line length:
a Press L or click the Length button.
b Type a new length and press Enter.
9 To change the angle:
a Press A or click the Angle button.
b Type a new angle and press Enter.
10 Use one of the following methods to fix the entity:
To stay in the function and continue to create lines, pick a

position in the graphics window as the first endpoint of a
new line, or click Apply in the ribbon bar.
To exit the function, press Esc, click OK or choose another
function.
Creating Points
In this section you will learn to create points using the following functions:
Create point position

(page 188)
Create point dynamic

(page 189)
Create point node points

(page 189)
Create point segment

(page 189)
Create point endpoints

(page 190)
Create point small arcs

(page 190)
You access the point functions from the Sketcher toolbar point dropdown list, or from the Create, Point submenu.
TIP: Sketcher Points drop-down list To exit a function:
Click OK
Press the Enter key
Press the Esc key
Choose another function
Create point position

For simple point creation, use the Point Position function to
sketch individual points by using the mouse to click and
create point positions in the graphics window. While a point
is live, use AutoCursor to set its position.
Ed
it
po
int
Figure 2-34: Create point position ribbon bar
Note: When you choose the next point position, the prior point
becomes a fixed entity.
Create point dynamic

Choose this function to create one or more points anywhere
along an existing entity. When you select an entity in the
graphics window, a dynamic arrow appears along the
selected entity. For each point you want to create, move the
cursor to slide the arrow to the new point position then click.
Of
fse
e
Di
sta
nc
Ed
it
po
int
Figure 2-35: Create point dynamic ribbon bar
Use the ribbon bar Offset field to create the point perpendicular to
the selected entity, offset by a specified distance.
Use the Distance field to specify the distance along the entity from its
nearest endpoint where you want to create the point. You can use the
this field independently or in conjunction with the Offset field.
When you are placing a point along a line or an arc, you can create it
beyond the selected entity, extended in either direction.
Create point node points

This function allows you to create points at the node points
of existing splines. When you choose the Create point node
points function, no ribbon bar appears but the point node
points function is active and you are prompted to select a
spline.
IMPORTANT: When you choose this function, the node
points are immediately created as fixed entities and the function ends.
Create point segment

You can quickly create multiple, uniform points along an
existing entity with this function. Just select an entity in the
graphics window and enter the number of points to posi-
tion along the entity or enter the distance to create between each
point.
TIP: You can also set the distance or number of points before
selecting an entity.
r
Nu
m
be
Di
sta
nc
Figure 2-36: Create point segment ribbon bar
When you enter a number or distance value, Mastercam automatically calculates the necessary point positions.
If you use the Number field to create points, Mastercam always places
points on each endpoint of the entity. However, if you use the
Distance field, Mastercam creates the first point at the endpoint
nearest where you selected the entity, and then, at multiples of the
specified distance. It is possible that a point may not be created at the
final endpoint.
Note: This function creates points only along the physical entity.
No points are created on an extended projection of the entity.
Create point endpoints

Use this function to automatically create point entities at
the endpoints of all visible lines, arcs, and splines. This is
especially useful for determining the boundaries of an individual curve in a chain of curves.
TIP: To quickly remove all endpoints created by this function,
from the Mastercam menu choose File, Undo Event.
Create point small arcs

Creating points at the exact center of arcs and/or circles is
fast and easy when you use this function. You define the
maximum size of the arcs you want to use, select the arcs,
and press Enter.
s
let
arc
arc
s
De
Pa
r ti
al
M
ax
rad
ius
Figure 2-37: Create point small arcs ribbon bar
To create points at the center of arcs and circles, choose the Partial
arcs option. If this option is not selected, point will be created only in
the center of circles (closed arcs).
To delete the selected arcs and circles after the points have been
created, choose the Delete arcs option.
Creating Lines
Mastercam offers a variety of flexible functions you use to quickly
create lines, including:
Create line endpoint

(page 191)
Create line closest

(page 193)
Create line bisect

(page 193)
Create line perpendicular

(page 194)
Create line parallel

(page 195)
To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Line
drop-down list, or from the Create, Line submenu.
Figure 2-38: Sketcher Line drop-down list
Create line endpoint

Use this simple but powerful function and ribbon bar to
create a variety of different line types with two endpoints,
including:
Angular and polar

Horizontal and vertical
Multiple lines connected at their endpoints

Lines tangent to arcs and splines
nt
al
Ta
ng
en
t
riz
o
Ho
Ve
rti
ca
l
ng
le
Lin
ea
el
en
gt
h
Lin
Ed
it e
nd
po
int
s
M
ult
i-li
ne
Figure 2-39: Create line endpoint ribbon bar
To dynamically create endpoints, click in the graphics window, or

type values in the Line Length and Line angle fields and then click in
the graphics window to position the line. Use AutoCursor to precisely
define the line endpoint positions.
Creating Angular and Polar Lines

To create lines with specific angles, hard lock a value in the Line
angle field before you create the line. You can set polar angles in
this field. The angle is calculated in a counterclockwise direction
from the positive horizontal axis that runs through the known
point in the current construction plane. To calculate angles in a
clockwise direction, enter a negative value.
For angular lines, you can also set the AutoCursor to snap the
angle of the line by a specified number of degrees while selecting
the second endpoint. This is referred to as the angular mode. To
do this, in the AutoCursor ribbon bar, click the Option button to
open the AutoCursor dialog box, select the Angular option, and set
the degrees to snap in the Angular field (shown below).
This value is applied in increments. For example, using a 5 degree

angular mode causes lines to snap every 5 degrees (5, 10, 15, 20, 25,
and so on). The snap to angular mode remains set for the duration
of the Mastercam session unless you manually change it.
Creating Horizontal and Vertical Lines

Before creating the line, choose the Horizontal or Vertical option
in the Create line endpoint ribbon bar to define the line orientation. Then use AutoCursor to draw the line. After picking the
second endpoint, you are prompted to enter the X or Y coordinate
of the line.
You can easily create horizontal and vertical lines without
choosing the Horizontal or Vertical options if AutoCursor is set to
detect and snap to points. (For more information, see Customizing
AutoCursor behavior on page 120.) After you define the first
endpoint and begin creating the line, when the line comes close to
a horizontal position, the horizontal / vertical visual cue appears
next to the cursor, indicating that you can click to snap the
endpoint to that position.
Regardless of the method you use to create the line, it remains live
after you choose the second endpoint so you can use the Line
Length field to specify an exact length, or use the AutoCursor
fields to specify an exact position. The entity becomes fixed when
you press Enter or click the Apply button.
Creating Multiple Lines

To create connected multiple lines, choose the Multi-line option,
then click in the graphics window to set each of the connecting
endpoints. To complete the last line, doubleclick the final
endpoint or press Esc.
Create Tangent Lines

Use the Tangent option to create lines that are tangent to arcs and
splines. These lines can be tangent at an angle or arcs.
Note: When creating a tangent line, including lines that are
perpendicular to a line and tangent to an arc, you can create the
line on an extended portion of the selected entity.
Create line closest

You can quickly create a line between two entities at the
position at which they are closest. When you choose the
Create line closest function, no ribbon bar appears but the
function is active, allowing you to create a single line by
selecting two entities.
IMPORTANT: When you choose this function, the line is
immediately created as a fixed entity and the function ends.
Create line bisect

Use this function to create a bisecting or midline line
between two line entities. For intersecting lines, Mastercam
creates a bisecting line. For parallel lines, Mastercam
creates a midline, which begins midway between the start
of the first selected line and the closest endpoint of the second
selected line.
Under certain circumstances, Mastercam creates multiple possibilities for bisecting lines and you must select the one to keep.
Le
ng
t
Figure 2-40: Create line bisect ribbon bar
To set the length of the bisecting line, enter a value in the Length field,
press Enter, then select the two lines to bisect.
Create line perpendicular

To create a line perpendicular to existing entities, choose
this function, select an existing line, arc, or spline and
create the perpendicular line endpoint by clicking in the
graphics window.
t
Ta
ng
en
ng
th
Le
Ed
it e
nd
po
int
Figure 2-41: Create line perpendicular ribbon bar
To set the length of the perpendicular line, type a value in the Length
field and press Enter. Then select the entity and a position.
You can also use this ribbon bar to create a line perpendicular to a line
and tangent to an arc by choosing the Tangent option and selecting a
line or arc and then an arc or line. In this circumstance, Mastercam
creates multiple possibilities for perpendicular lines and you must
select the one to keep.
Notes:
To use the tangent feature of this ribbon bar, you must have at
least two entities in the graphics window, and one of them
must be an arc.
When creating lines perpendicular to arcs, you can create the
line on an extended portion of the selected arc.
When creating lines perpendicular to arcs or splines, select the
entity close to the area from which you want to draw the line.
Create line parallel

Choose this function to create a line parallel to an existing
line by selecting a line and clicking a point in the graphics
window. You can also use the ribbon bar fields to create a
line parallel to a line and tangent to an arc by selecting an
existing line and then an arc.
t
Ta
ng
en
Di
sta
nc
e
Fli
p
Ed
it e
nd
po
int
Figure 2-42: Create line parallel ribbon bar
The parallel line is created at the same length as the existing line. To
offset the parallel line, enter a value in the Distance field then indicate
the offset direction.
Use the Flip option to set the position of the parallel line relative to
the primary line. This button has three toggle states:
Selected: (default) Creates a parallel line on the selected side

of the primary line.
Opposite: Creates a parallel line opposite the selected side of
the primary line.
Both: Creates a parallel line on both sides of the primary line.
Note: When creating tangent lines, you can create the line on an
extended portion of the selected entity.
Creating Arcs and Circles

When creating arcs and circles, you can choose from a variety of timesaving functions, including:
Create circle center

point (page 196)
Create arc polar

(page 196)
Create circle edge

point (page 197)
Create arc endpoints

(page 198)
Create arc 3 points

(page 198)
Create arc polar

endpoints (page
199)
Create arc tangent

(page 199)
IMPORTANT: Mastercam calculates circles in a counterclockwise direction.
Choose a function from the Sketcher toolbar Arc drop-down list, or
from the Create, Arc submenu.
Figure 2-43: Sketcher Arcs drop-down list
Create circle center point

This function makes it easy to create full circles from a
center point. Click in the graphics window to set a center
point and then click again to set an edge point.
Ta
ng
en
t
te
r
Di
am
e
Ra
diu
s
Ed
it c
en
te
r
po
int
Figure 2-44: Create circle center point ribbon bar
Alternatively, you can enter a value into either the Radius or Diameter
field to set the size of the circle and then click in the graphics window
to set the center point to position the circle.
You can use AutoCursor to position the center point and/or the edge
point of the arc. You can also create circles tangent to other entities.
Create arc polar

To create polar arcs, choose this function and click in the
graphics window to set a center point. Then click to set two
edge points that define the radius, start point, and end
angle. To create a full circle with the start position at 0
degrees, doubleclick the first edge point (you are not prompted to
select a second edge point).
nt
Ta
ng
e
En
da
ng
le
an
gle
St
art
er
Di
am
et
Ra
diu
s
Fli
p
Ed
it c
en
te
rp
oin
t
Figure 2-45: Create arc polar ribbon bar
Alternatively, you can manually enter values in the ribbon bar fields to
set the circle size, start angle, and end angle. You can then select the
center point in the graphics window to position the arc and use
AutoCursor to position any or all of the three points of the arc.
You can also create arcs tangent to curves and points.
TIP: Use the Flip option to set the direction of the arc. This
button has two toggle states; clockwise (left) and counterclockwise (right).
Notes:
If you choose the Tangent button in the ribbon bar, you must
select an entity as the first edge point selection (radius and arc
start point). The selected entity is the tangent entity for the
resulting arc.
To create a full circle, enter 0 for the start angle and 360 for the
end angle.
Create circle edge point

Use this function to create circles with two or three edge
points. To create circles with two edge points, click in the
graphics window to select the first edge point and double
click to select the second point. Alternately, you can press
the Two point button and single click each edge point.
The circle is created with the two points acting as the equator. To
create circles with three edge points, click the first, second, and third
edge points in the graphics window. You can also create circles
tangent to curves and points, and use AutoCursor to position any or
all of the three edge points of the arc.
t
en
Ta
ng
te
Di
am
e
diu
s
int
Ra
Ed
Tw
o
it e
po
dg
ep
oin
ts
Figure 2-46: Create circle edge point ribbon bar
Create arc endpoints

You can create arcs with defined endpoints and one edge
point using this function. Click in the graphics window to
set the endpoints and then click to set the edge point.
t
Ta
ng
en
er
Di
am
et
Ra
diu
s
Ed
it e
nd
po
int
Figure 2-47: Create arc endpoints ribbon bar
You can also create arcs tangent to curves and points, and use
AutoCursor to position any or all of the three points of the arc.
Notes:
If you choose the Tangent button in the ribbon bar, Mastercam
accepts any locations for the first two positions but you must
select an entity for the third position. The selected entity is the
tangent entity for the resulting arc.
You can select up to two collinear points.
Create arc 3 points

To create three point arcs, choose this function and click in
the graphics window to set each of the three edge points.
You can create arcs tangent to curves and points, and use
AutoCursor to set the position of any or all of the three edge
points of the arc.
Ta
ng
en
t
Ed
it e
dg
ep
oin
ts
Figure 2-48: Create arc 3 points ribbon bar
Create arc polar endpoints

You can create polar arcs from either a defined start or end
point. Choose this function and click in the graphics
window to set the first point. Then enter values in the
ribbon bar fields to define the radius/diameter, start angle, and end
angle.
En
da
ng
le
an
gle
St
art
er
Di
am
et
Ra
diu
s
Create arc tangent

Use this flexible function to create arcs with the following
tangent conditions:
Tangent to another entity

Tangent through a point
Tangent with a centerline
Dynamically tangent (dynamically draws the arc with your
cursor movement)
op
Sn
ap
t
Di
am
et
er
oin
Figure 2-50: Create arc tangent ribbon bar
Ta
ng
e
Ta nt 1
ng e
Ta ent ntit
ng po y
Dy ent int
na ce
mi nte
c t rli
an ne
ge
nc
y
Ra
diu
s
Ed
it e
nd
po
int
St
art
p
En oint
dp
oin
t
Figure 2-49: Create arc polar endpoints ribbon bar
To set the size of the arc, enter a radius or diameter in the corresponding ribbon bar field, choose the tangent condition you want to
use, and follow the prompts to create the arc. Under some circumstances, Mastercam displays four possible arcs and you must select
the one you want to keep.
Note: When choosing lines to create an arc, those lines cannot be
parallel to one another.
Guidelines for Creating Arcs Tangent to Entities

Here are some guidelines to keep in mind when creating arcs tangent
to entities:
You can create arcs on an extended portion of the selected

entity.
If the point you enter for an arc to be tangent with does not
lie on the selected line or arc, Mastercam projects the point
along the normal vector of the selected entity.
When creating a circle tangent to two curves, the radius of
the circle must be greater than or equal to half the distance
between the closest points on the two curves.
When creating an arc tangent to a line or arc with a defined
edge point, the radius of the arc must be greater than or equal
to half the distance between the selected entity and point at
the closest pass between them.
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes

The Create menu offers a number of functions you use to create
complete geometric shapes. Mastercam generates all the entities in
the shape collectively; you do not have to draw the individual entities.
When using the Rectangle, Polygon, and Ellipse functions, you can
choose to create surfaces in addition to wireframe geometry. Wireframe entities and a surface are created when you select the Surface
check box in these dialog boxes.
Use other functions in the menu to create bounding boxes and letters.
If Mastercam Solids is installed, you can also extract 2D geometry
from a 3D solid.
In this section, you will learn to create basic shapes using the
following functions:
Create rectangle
(page 201)
Create rectangular
shapes (page 202)
Create polygon
(page 203)
Create ellipse
(page 204)
Bounding box
(page 205)
Letters
(page 207)
Create spiral
(page 208)
Create Helix
(page 209)
Solid to 2D profile
(page 210)
To choose a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Miscellaneous Geometry drop-down list, or from the Create menu.
Figure 2-51: Sketcher Miscellaneous Geometry drop-down list
Create rectangle
This commonly used function lets you quickly create a rectangle by defining two points. To draw the rectangle, click to
set the base point that anchors the rectangle. Then drag the
anchor point and click to set the second corner. You can use
AutoCursor to precisely position the two points on the rectangle.
An
ch
o
Cr r to
ea ce
te
n
su ter
rfa
ce
He
igh
t
h
W
idt
Ed
it p
oin
ts
Figure 2-52: Create rectangle ribbon bar
Use other ribbon bar fields to draw the rectangle from a center point,
or create it as a surface within the rectangle. The rectangle remains a
live entity until you click the Apply button or click to start drawing
another rectangle.
TIP: To quickly create multiple rectangles using the same

dimensions, lock the Width and Height fields in the ribbon bar.
Each time you click in the graphics window, a complete rectangle of the defined dimensions is created.
Create rectangular shapes

Use this function to dynamically create a rectangular shape
(rectangle, obround, single D, or double D), by choosing one
from the Shape section in the expanded dialog box.
Figure 2-53: Rectangular shapes dialog box (expanded)
Note: The rectangle is the default type.
You can create the shape using a base point or 2-point method. The
dialog box options change, depending on the method you select.
However, both methods let you set a corner fillet, rotation angle,
general shape, and surface creation.
Base point method

Choose this method and select an anchor position on the rectangle for the base point. After you sketch the base point,
Mastercam uses it as an anchor as you draw the rectangle from
that position. Use the AutoCursor to dynamically change the base
point position, length, or width before fixing the rectangle.
2-point method
Choose this method and sketch a corner base point, then draw the
rectangle and sketch the second point. Use the AutoCursor to
change either the base point or second point.
Note: The default rectangle creation method is Base point.
Create polygon
This function allows you to quickly create a polygon as wireframe geometry and, optionally, a surface. Use the Corner
or Flat options to determine whether the radius is
measured from the base point to a corner, or to the
midpoint of a side.
Figure 2-54: Create polygon dialog box (expanded)
Create ellipse
You can create an ellipse as wireframe geometry and,
optionally, a surface, using this function and dialog box. To
create a partial ellipse, enter a start angle greater than 0
degrees and/or an end angle less than 360 degrees.
Figure 2-55: Create ellipse dialog box (expanded)
Bounding box
Use this function to check the overall dimensions of a part
by creating a rectangular or cylindrical boundary around
selected entities. You can create the boundary as wireframe
geometry, a solid model, or a stock model.
Figure 2-56: Example: Bounding box
Bounding box
Figure 2-57: Create bounding box dialog box (expanded)
Rectangular
Cylindrical
TIP: To enable the Stock and Solid options in the Create

section, enter a value for Expand Z (for a rectangular shape) or
Expand Radius (for a cylindrical shape). These option may be
used if all the selected geometry is 2D and lies in the same
plane.
Letters
The Create Letters dialog box allows you to add alphanumeric characters consisting of lines, arcs, and NURBS
splines to your file. You can use one of the fonts provided by
Mastercam, including special drafting fonts, or choose from
any TrueType font installed on your PC.
Figure 2-58: Create letters dialog box
Mastercam fonts
Mastercam contains predefined letter fonts, including Block, Box,
Roman, and Slant, and a number of specialized drafting fonts, such as
Dayville, European, Hartford, Old English, and more. You can also
choose a custom font for letters by selecting Other from the font list
and navigating to the folder where your font is stored to select it.
When you select a drafting font, you can choose the Drafting Options
button and format letters using the Drafting Options dialog box and
Note Text options. The Note Text parameters you define will overwrite
the Font and Height settings that appear in the Create Letters dialog
box.
TrueType fonts
You can choose any TrueType font installed on your PC to format the
letters you create in Mastercam files. To use one of these fonts, choose
the TrueType button, select one from the Fonts dialog box and click
OK.
TIP: When using TrueType fonts, the height of the actual letters
may not match the value that you entered for letter height
because Mastercam scales the letters based on all of the information encoded into the TrueType font, including blank space
around the letters. Use the Xform, Scale function to resize
them as needed.
Create spiral
Use this flexible function to create spiral geometry as a
series of NURBS splines. You can specify the initial and final
pitch in both the XY and Z planes, set the number of revolutions or height, and choose the direction (CW/CCW).
Figure 2-59: Create spiral dialog box
Figure 2-60: Example: create spiral
2
Note: To create a spiral with a taper angle, use the Create, Helix
function.
Create Helix
This function lets you create a tapered spiral as a continuous NURBS spline. You can define the inward and starting
angles, radius, number of revolutions or height, pitch, and
direction (CW/CCW).
Figure 2-61: Create helix dialog box
Figure 2-62: Example: create helix
Note: To create a helix using dimensions in the XY and XZ planes,

use the Create, Spiral function.
Solid to 2D profile
If you work with 3D solid models for manufacturing
purposes, you can use this function to easily extract 2D
geometry from a 3D solid in order to create the necessary
toolpaths.
The Solid to 2D Profile function blends together incremental 2D
profiles, or perpendicular slices, taken as the 3D solid is rotated along
a specified axis. The incremental cross-sections are blended together
to create one set of curves that represent the net outermost and
innermost 3D shape. You use the ribbon bar options to define the axis
of rotation, the incremental distance along the axis for creating each
profile, and the type of 2D output (lines/arcs, points, or spline).
ep
St
Ty
pe
Ax
is
Se
lec
t
Figure 2-63: Create Solid to 2D profile ribbon bar
The resulting 2D wire frame can be trimmed to allow for chaining and
used with other Mastercam functions.
You can view the resulting slices on the solid model before accepting
the 2D profile, and modify the increment and axis until you create an
acceptable result.
IMPORTANT: Mastercam defines sharp corners as those that

are more than 30 degrees and less than 150 degrees. If sharp
corners are detected, an arc is fit using the system chordal
deviation tolerance.
Create Relief Groove

Use this function and dialog box to create DIN standard
relief grooves. You can create thread relief grooves or plain
shaft relief grooves, and , optionally, trim all horizontal and
vertical lines that intersect the endpoints of the groove to
these endpoints.
X To create a relief groove based on DIN standards:
1 From the Mastercam menu, choose Create, Create Relief
Groove.
2 In the DIN Relief Groove Parameters dialog box Shape
section, select the shape of the groove you want to create.

The graphic in this section changes to illustrate your selection.
Figure 2-64: DIN Relief Groove dialog box
3 Choose the Select From Table button. In the Relief Groove
Table dialog box:

a Choose a relief groove measurement from the table of
standard relief grooves. This table corresponds to the

selected shape.
Note: If you are working in English (inch) units of measure, the

converted English values in the table approximate the metricbased DIN standards.
b Click OK to accept your selection and return to the DIN
Relief Groove Parameters dialog box. The Dimensions and

d position fields update, based on the table selection.
4 Set an orientation and indicate whether to trim or break the
horizontal and vertical lines that intersect the endpoints of

the groove geometry.
5 Set the relief groove position.
Note: To view the relief groove in the graphics window before

geometry is created, choose Preview Groove. Press Enter to end
the preview.
6 To create the relief groove geometry, click OK.
Creating Fillets and Chamfers

Creating fillets and chamfers in entities or chains is fast and efficient
in Mastercam. In this section, you will learn to use the following functions:
Fillet entities
(page 213)
Fillet chains
(page 214)
Chamfer entities
(page 214)
Chamfer chains
(page 215)
To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Fillets and

Chamfers drop-down list, or from the Create, Fillet and Create,
Chamfer submenus.
Note: AutoCursor is unavailable during the use of fillet and
chamfer functions.
IMPORTANT: Sketcher Fillets and Chamfers drop-down

list For each fillet / chamfer function, you define whether to
trim the filleted / chamfered entities by selecting the Trim or No

Trim options in the function ribbon bar.
Fillet entities
Before you select the entities to which you will apply the
fillet, use the Fillet ribbon bar fields to define the fillet style
(normal, inverse, circle, clearance) and enter the necessary
radius value. You can also define whether to trim the
selected lines to the fillet. Trimming is set as the default so if you do
not want the entities trimmed, just deselect the Trim button.
No
Tri
m
Tri
m
St
yle
Ra
diu
Figure 2-65: Fillet entities ribbon bar
When you move you mouse near an entity, Mastercam displays a

preview of the fillet, if one can be created with an adjacent entity. To
immediately create the fillet as a fixed entity, click one of the
previewed entities.
Note: This function does not recognize chains. Use the Fillet
Chain function to fillet chained entities.
Fillet chains
Use this function to fillet entities that have sharp corners
and can be recognized as a single chained entity (i.e., rectangles and polygons). The ability to fillet only inside or
outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful
during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies).
These parts often require different radius values on inside and outside
corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance.
When you choose this function, the Fillet Chains ribbon bar displays
and the Chaining dialog box opens. Use the dialog box options and
cursor to chain the entities to fillet. When you close the Chaining
dialog box, a preview of the chained entities appears in the graphics
window with the fillet entities highlighted.
Tri
m
No
Tri
m
St
yle
Di
re
cti
on
Ra
diu
s
Ch
ain
Figure 2-66: Fillet chains ribbon bar
To edit the resulting fillets, use the ribbon bar fields. To accept them,
click Apply.
Chamfer entities
Use this function to apply chamfers to existing entities.
Before you select the entities to chamfer, choose the
chamfer method and enter the necessary distance and
angle values.
Tri
m
No
Tri
m
An
gle
St
yle
e2
Di
sta
nc
Di
sta
nc
e
Figure 2-67: Chamfer entities ribbon bar
Select the first entity. As you move the mouse over the second entity, a
preview of the chamfer displays. When you select the second entity,
the chamfer is immediately created as a fixed entity.
Notes:
To chamfer chained geometry, use the Chamfer Chains function.
You can chamfer arcs using the 1 Distance and 2 Distance
methods.
Chamfer chains
This function allows you to chain entities and create chamfers at sharp corners. When you choose this function, the
Chamfer Chains ribbon bar appears and the Chaining
dialog box opens. Use the dialog box options and cursor to
chain the entities to chamfer. When you close the Chaining dialog
box, a preview of the chained entities appears in the graphics window
with the chamfer entities highlighted.
No
Tri
m
Tri
m
e
St
y
Di
sta
nc
e
Ch
ain
/w
idt
Figure 2-68: Chamfer chains ribbon bar
To edit the resulting chamfers, use the ribbon bar fields. To accept
them, press the Apply button.
The Style field in the Chamfer Chains ribbon bar is a multi-purpose
field that is used in conjunction with the Distance/Width field, which
is also a multi-purpose field. You use these fields to set both the
chamfer distance and width.
To set the chamfer distance, choose 1 Distance from the

Style field list, then type the distance to use in the Distance/
Width field.
To set the chamfer width, choose Width from the Style field
and type the width in the Distance/Width field.
Creating Splines
Mastercam provides a number of functions that define the method
used to create a spline. Their corresponding ribbon bars allow you to
further define the resulting geometry. Spline functions include:
Create manual spline

(page 216)
Create automatic spline

(page 217)
Create curves spline

(page 219)
Create blended spline

(page 219)
Choose the function from the Sketcher toolbar Splines drop-down

menu, or from the Create, Spline submenu.
TIP: Sketcher Splines drop-down list When a spline is live,
use the ribbon bar fields to edit it.
Notes:
To set the default spline type (Parametric, NURBS, curvegenerated) choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings,
and select a Spline / Surface creation type.
You use the AutoCursor to specify point positions only with the
Manual spline function.
Create manual spline

Choose this function to manually create a spline by clicking
in the graphics window to define each of the splines control
points.
IMPORTANT: To further define the spline by setting the

tangency of its endpoints, before you click in the graphics
window to create the spline, you must choose the Edit End
Condition button in the Manual Spline ribbon bar. When you
finish defining the spline, doubleclick on the last point, choose
Apply or press Enter. The function ribbon bar closes and the
Spline End Conditions ribbon bar appears, allowing you to set
the spline endpoint tangencies. For more information, see
Using the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar on page 218.
To position any spline control point, use AutoCursor to enter coordinates before creating the next node point.
dit
ion
s
en
dc
on
Ed
it
Ba
ck
up
on
ep
oin
t
Figure 2-69: Create manual spline ribbon bar
To end spline creation and fix the spline entity:
Doubleclick the last point.

Choose Apply in the ribbon bar.
Press Enter.
Create automatic spline

You can automatically create a spline from a string of points
(three or more) that lie in a defined pattern. Choose this
function, then define the spline by clicking three points in
the graphics window. The spline passes through the first
two points that you select then through all other points that lie within
the pattern until it reaches the third selected point.
TIPS:
You can create a closed spline by selecting the same point
for the first and last points.
Mastercam uses a combination of distance and direction
from point to point to place the points in a sensible order. To
avoid distorting the intended shape of the spline, delete or
blank extraneous points.
Using the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar

Use this ribbon bar to set endpoint tangencies when creating splines
with the Manual Spline or Automatic Spline functions.
IMPORTANT: To use the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar to
set the spline endpoint tangencies, before creating a spline,
choose the Edit End Condition button in the function ribbon
bar.
The Spline End Conditions ribbon bar appears after you
finish defining the spline only if you choose the Edit End
Condition option in the function ribbon bar before you
create the spline.
ec
tan
ge
nc
yv
Fli
p
En
dp
oin
t
ho
d
tm
et
En
dp
oin
an
gle
r
ec
to
yv
nc
ge
an
Fli
pt
po
int
an
gle
d
St
art
po
int
me
th
o
St
art
to
r
Figure 2-70: Spline end conditions ribbon bar
Use the Start Point and End Point fields to define the tangent vector
of the splines endpoints. Choose from the following selections.
3 Pt Arc: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to the endpoint of

an arc Mastercam calculates from the splines first or last
three points, based on whether you are defining the Start or
End point condition.
Natural: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to Mastercams
calculation of the optimal tangency condition that results in
a minimal curve length. This is the default end condition.
To entity: Sets the endpoint tangent vector based on the
tangent vector of a curve at the point that you select it.
To end: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to the endpoint of a
selected curve. Be sure to select the curve close to the
endpoint whose tangent vector you want to use.
Angle: Sets the endpoint tangent vector based on the value
you enter in the Angle field.
Create curves spline

To create a spline based on the geometry of existing curve,
choose the Curves Spline function. After chaining the
curves you want to work with, Mastercam creates a separate
spline for each chain that you select.
Le
ve
ur
ve
s
Or
igi
na
lc
Ch
ain
De
va
itio
n
Figure 2-71: Create curves spline ribbon bar
You can set a deviation tolerance that determines how closely each
resulting spline matches the selected curves, and you can choose to
keep, blank, or delete the original curves once the splines have been
created, or move them to a different level.
Create blended spline

Choose this function when you want to create a spline
tangent to two curves. You use the ribbon bar fields to set
the magnitude and trimming options, then click on existing
curves in the graphics window to define the spline. After
selecting each curve, when prompted, slide the arrow to the tangent
position on the curve.
Se
le
ct
Fir first
st
c
cu urve
rve
ma
gn
itu
de
Se
lec
t
Se seco
co
nd nd c
cu urv
rve e
m
ag
nit
ud
Tri
e
m
Figure 2-72: Create blend spline ribbon bar
Creating Primitives
Mastercam makes it easy to create primitive surfaces by sketching in
3D, by entering values, or by using a combination of these techniques.
If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, you can optionally
create solid primitives. In this section, you will learn to use the
following functions to create primitive shapes.
Create block (page 221)
Create cone (page 222)
Create cylinder (page

223)
Create sphere (page 223)
Create torus (page 224)

To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Primitives
drop-down list, or from the Create, Primitives submenu.
Figure 2-73: Sketcher Primitives drop-down list
Guidelines for Working with Primitives

To create multiple copies of a primitive, lock the ribbon bar
fields. To lock a field, click the button next to it. The field
turns red when locked, and the value remains constant until
you change it. Mastercam stores the most recently used
values entered in locked fields. Click the drop-down arrow to
select previously used values.
To view all available options for creating the primitive, choose the dialog box Expand button. By
default, the dialog box appears in a contracted
format.
Setting the start angle to 0 and the end angle to 360 creates a
fully revolved primitive. Varying the start and end angles
creates one or more quadrants of the primitive. For example,
entering a start angle of 90 and an end angle of 180 creates
one quarter of the cylinder.
You can use the mouse to set the height of three-dimensional
primitives provided that the Mastercam window is set to an
Isometric Gview or a similar view.
After creating a solid primitive, use the Solids Manager to
change its name. For more information, see Solids on page
300.
Create block
Use this function create a block primitive as a solid or
surface model. To draw the block, click in the graphics
window to set the base point, drag outward to set the length
and width, then drag up or down to set the height.
While the block is live, use the dialog box fields to adjust the dimensions, extend it in any of the three directions, select a new base point,
rotate it, or change the primary axis.
Figure 2-74: Create primitive block dialog box (expanded)
Create cone
To create a cone primitive as a solid or surface model,
choose this function. To draw the cone, click in the graphics
window to set the base point, drag outward to set the radius,
then drag up or down to set the height. While the cone is
live, use the dialog box fields to adjust the dimensions, extend it in
two directions, select a new base point, change the primary axis, set
the top radius, or change the sweep to create a slice of a cone.
Figure 2-75: Create primitive cone dialog box (expanded)
Create cylinder
You can create a cylinder primitive as a solid or surface
model using this function. To draw the cylinder, click in the
graphics window to set the base point, drag outward to set
the radius, then drag up or down to set the height. While the
cylinder is live, use the dialog box fields to adjust the dimensions,
extend the cylinder in two directions, select a new base point, change
the primary axis, or change the sweep to create a slice of a cylinder.
Figure 2-76: Create primitive cylinder dialog box (expanded)
Create sphere
This function allows you to create a sphere as a solid or
surface model. Draw the sphere by clicking in the graphics
window to set the base point. Then drag outward to set the
radius. While the sphere is live, use the dialog box fields to change the
base point, radius, and sweep angle.
Figure 2-77: Create primitive sphere dialog box (expanded)
Create torus
Choose this function to create a torus as a solid or surface
model. Draw the torus by clicking in the graphics window to
set the base point, and dragging outward to set the major
radius. After setting the major radius, drag the minor radius
to the position you want then click to set the minor radius and create
the torus. While the torus is live, use the dialog box fields to change
the base point, major and minor radius, sweep angle and the axis.
Figure 2-78: Create primitive torus dialog box (expanded)
Modifying Geometry
Mastercam offers a variety of functions and techniques you use to
modify geometry. In this section, you will learn about:
Editing Entities
Transforming Entities on page 235
Analyzing Entities on page 253
Changing Entity Attributes on page 266
Editing Entities
You access basic editing functions from the Edit menu or Trim / Break
toolbar in order to:
Modify or join lines, arcs, splines, and drafting entities.

Convert certain types of entities to NURBS splines and
NURBS surfaces.
Simplify splines by breaking them into arcs and lines.
This topic introduces these functions and includes examples of how
to use them.
TIP: To trim a surface, choose one of the Trim Surface functions from the Create, Surface submenu. For more information
on working with surfaces, see Surface Creation on page 274.
Trim / Break submenu

From the Edit menu, the Trim / Break submenu provides various
functions you use to trim entities. These functions trim entities by
cutting them back or extending them at their intersections.
Note: Splines are not extended beyond their original endpoints.
DESIGN / Modifying Geometry 227
IMPORTANT: If the 2D / 3D Status Bar toggle is set to 2D, the

entities you choose to trim or break must lie in the same
Cplane. If the intersection between two entities offers variable
solutions, be sure to select each entity on the part you want to
keep. When trimming or breaking entities in 3D, the curves
must have an actual intersection, otherwise a message informs
you that the entities do not intersect and cannot be modified.
In this section, you will learn about each Trim / Break submenu function, including:
Trim / Break / Extend (page 227)

Trim Many (page 231)
Break at Intersection (page 231)
Break Many Pieces (page 232)
Break Drafting into Lines (page 232)
Break Circles (page 233)
Trim / Break / Extend

Use this flexible function and ribbon bar to:
Trim 1, 2 or 3 selected entities

Trim to a selected point or position
Trim, break or extend an entity to a specified length
Divide entities, based in the nearest intersection
Break and automatically extend selected entities
Tri
m
Br
ea
k
en
gt
h
to
l
Tri
m
Tri
m
Tri 1 e
m nti
Tri 2 en ty
m ti
Di 3 e ties
vi n
Tri de titie
s
m
to
po
int
Figure 2-79: Trim / Break / Extend ribbon bar
When this ribbon bar appears, you can begin trimming to one entity
by selecting the entity to trim then selecting an entity in the location
you want to trim to. Or, you can trim two entities by selecting the first
entity then doubleclicking the second. For other ribbon bar options
(for example, Trim 3 entities, or Trim to length), choose the option,
then select one or more entities and specify parameters, as necessary.
Trim 1 EntityThe following examples illustrate how to use the Trim
1 option to select and trim a vertical line to a horizontal line. The
result varies depending on where you select the vertical line (the
entity to trim) before selecting the horizontal line (the entity to which
you are trimming). The visual cue (+) in the left-most image shows
where you select the vertical line; the right-most image shows the
resulting trim after you select the horizontal line.
Example 1
Example 2
Trim 2 EntitiesThe next examples show how to use the Trim 2

option to select and trim two lines to their intersection. Again, the
result varies depending on where you select the lines.
Figure 2-80: Example Trim 2
2
Trim 3 EntitiesThe following example illustrates how to use the

Trim 3 option. The first two entities that you select are trimmed to the
third, which acts as a trimming curve. The third entity is then
trimmed to the first two. This function is useful for trimming two lines
to a circle that is tangent to both lines. You select the arc last, and the
results vary depending on whether you click the top or the bottom of
the arc (the portion you want to keep).
Divide EntitiesWhen you choose the Divide function and select an

entity in the graphics window, Mastercam uses the nearest two intersections on each end to divide the entity. It trims the line or arc into
two disjointed segments by removing the segment that lies between
two dividing intersections. The following example shows a line
trimmed between two arcs.
Figure 2-83: Example Trim Divide
Note: If only one intersection exists, the selected entity is trimmed

to the single intersection. If no intersection is found on the
selected entity, no change occurs.
Trim to PointUse this option to trim or extend an entity to a point
or any defined position in the graphics window. If the point that you
enter does not lie on the selected entity, Mastercam calculates the
closest position on the entity and trims the entity to that point. The
following example shows an arc that is trimmed (in this case,
extended) to a point that does not lie on the curve.
Figure 2-84: Example Trim to Point
Trim to LengthThis option makes it easy to trim or extend a

selected entity based on a specified length. To use this option, first
type a value in the Length field. Then select an entity endpoint in the
graphics window. The specified value will be added to or subtracted
from the endpoint of the selected entity .
To extend the entity beyond the selected endpoint, type a

positive number.
To trim the entity from the selected endpoint, type a negative
number.
Note: If you select the entity before setting a value in the Length
field, the default value is used (0.1 inch or 1 mm, based on the
current configuration unit setting).
Trim / BreakUse these buttons to toggle between trimming or

breaking the entities you have selected in the graphics window.
Selecting Break automatically extends selected entities that do not
intersect.
Trim Many
The Trim Many function and ribbon bar lets you trim (or
break) multiple lines, arcs, or splines to a selected entity
without modifying the trimming curve.
Tri
m
Br
ea
k
Fli
p
Se
lec
Figure 2-85: Trim Many ribbon bar
After choosing this function, select one or more entities to trim. Then
choose the entity to trim to and indicate the side of the trimming
curve you want to keep. You can preview the results before accepting
the changes. Before accepting the change, you can also flip the results
from one side of the trimming curve to the other, and switch the
results between trimming or breaking the selected entities. The
example below shows four arcs that are trimmed to a line. The dashed
line shows the portion of each arc that is trimmed, which varies
depending on which side of the curves you select to keep.
Note: When you choose the Break option rather than Trim, it
disables the Flip function and the option to select a side of the
trimming curve to keep.
Break at Intersection
Use this simple function to select one or more intersecting
line, arc, or spline entities and break them at each intersection. First, select one or more intersecting entities to break.
Then, press Enter or choose the end selection function in
the General Selection ribbon bar to break the selected entities where
they intersect.
Break Many Pieces

Use this function to break selected lines, arcs, and splines
into uniform segments based on the specified number of
segments or the distance between them (segment length).
Use the Lines / Arcs ribbon bar option to switch between
breaking the selected entity into multiple lines or arcs.
Lin
es
/
Ar
cs
Ke
e
De
let
e/
ce
ran
To
le
nc
e
Di
sta
Nu
mb
er
p/
Bla
nk
Figure 2-86: Break Many Pieces ribbon bar
When breaking an entity, you choose to delete, keep, or blank the

underlying geometry. For more information on using the Blank
feature, see Blanking Entities on page 361.
For splines, you can enter a segment number and distance or you can
specify a tolerance based on chord height.
Break Drafting into Lines

You can break selected drafting entities into geometric entities in a manner similar to the Break Many Pieces function.
Choose the Break Drafting into Lines function when you
want to:
Break drafting dimensions, notes, labels, witness lines, and

leader lines into lines, arcs, and NURBS splines.
Break lines in a crosshatch pattern into line entities. The
newly created lines retain the same line style as the crosshatch pattern.
Break a copious data entity into points or lines, based on the
original form of the copious data entity.
CAUTION: Numbers and letters break into small, individual
lines, arcs and splines that, typically, are not collinear and
cannot be rejoined.
To break the selected drafting entities, press Enter.
Break Circles
This last function in the Trim / Break submenu allows you
to break circles into any number of equal length segments
you specify. After choosing the function, select one or more
circles to break, type the number of arcs you want to break
the circles into and press Enter.
TIP: Use the Close arc or Join entities functions to join arcs
into circles.
In addition to the trim / break /extend functions, the Edit menu also
includes the following functions you use to join and modify entities.
Join entities
This function is useful when you want to join collinear lines,
arcs that have the same center and radius, or splines that
were originally created as the same entity.
Note: If the two entities you select to join have different attributes,
Mastercam creates a new entity using the attributes of the first
entity you select. For example, if you select a dashed line and a
solid line, the lines are joined to create a single dashed line.
Close arc
Use this function to select and convert all arcs that are less
than 360 degrees to complete circles by extending their
ends to close the arc.
Convert NURBS
This function allows you to:
Convert lines, arcs, and parametric splines to

NURBS splines.
Convert curve-generated and parametric surfaces to NURBS
surfaces.
When you choose this function, no ribbon bar appears but the function is active and you are prompted to select a line, arc, spline or
surface to convert to a NURBS entity. After selecting one or more entities, press Enter to convert them.
TIP: To change the shape of a NURBS entity, use the Modify

NURBS function.
Modify NURBS
You can change the shape of the NURBS entity by modifying control point positions on a NURBS spline or surface.
When you choose this function, you first select a NURBS
entity. All of the entity control points appear highlighted,
and remain visible for as long as you work with the selected entity.
To modify the NURBS spline or surface, click and drag a control point.
The modified shape or surface is drawn using a dashed line style in
the highlight color so you can easily distinguish it from the original.
Before accepting a change, you can preview the modification based
on the new control point position. To accept the new position, just
click again to release the control point, then continue to select control
points or exit the function.
Simplify
You can create arcs based on the geometry of circularshaped splines by using the Simplify function to convert
them to arcs. When working with arcs instead of splines,
you can more easily and accurately reference the centers of
the circular geometry or dimension the circles.
You can also use this function and ribbon bar to convert splines that
define lines into line entities.
Ke
e
e/
let
De
To
ler
an
ce
Se
lec
t
p/
Bla
nk
Figure 2-87: Simplify ribbon bar
Notes:
Use this function when working with file conversions if geometry that is supposed to denote circles, arcs, or lines appears as
splines.
The Xform menu provides additional functions you can use to
modify entities. For more information on using Xform functions, see Transforming Entities on page 235.
Transforming Entities
Transforming entities is similar to editing, but offers more advanced
functions for manipulating fixed entities. In a single operation, you
can move selected entities and optionally create copies of them by
mirroring, rotating, scaling, offsetting, translating, stretching, rolling,
and dragging. With some transform functions, you can also join the
copied entities to the originals to quickly and easily create more
complex geometry.
When transforming entities, you can preview and modify the results
before accepting them. Previewing lets you view a detailed live image
of the move, copy, or join results set in the graphics window, placed in
the position you choose in the function dialog box or ribbon bar. To
conserve resources when transforming, scaling, mirroring, or rotating
larger models (for example, those containing multiple solids and
surfaces or a large number of entities), instead of detailed entities, the
preview image is a 3D cube or a 2D rectangle sized in proportion to
the results set area.
You access transform functions from the Xform menu or toolbar. In
this section, you will learn to use the following functions to modify
geometry:
Xform Translate (page

237)
Xform Translate 3D
(page 239)
Xform Mirror (page 240)
Xform Rotate (page

241)
Xform Scale (page 243)
Xform Offset (page 244)
Xform Offset Contour

(page 245)
Xform Project (page

247)
Xform Rectangular
Array (page 249)
Xform Roll (page 250)
Xform Drag (page 252)
Xform STL (page 252)
When you perform a transform function, Mastercam creates a temporary group from the original entities and a result from the transformed entities. The system-generated group and result are indicated
by a color change that stays in effect only until you use the Screen,
Clear Colors option or perform another transform function. The
default colors are red for the original group and purple for the result.
TIP: When you translate and join entities, duplicate lines
sometimes result and can interfere with chaining. You can
configure Mastercam to automatically delete duplicate lines
created during a join operation by setting this default in the
CAD Settings page of the System Configuration dialog box. For
more information on this and other configuration options, see
Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on page 68.
Assigning New Attributes to Transformed Entities

The Use New Attributes checkbox is available in each Xform dialog
box. When you select this option, the Level and Color fields that
display allow you to assign a unique level and color to the transformed entities.
Creating the transformed entities on a different level and in a different

color from the original entities can make them easier to identify. To
create transformed entities using the attributes of the original entities, deselect this option.
Xform Translate
Choose the Xform Translate function to move, copy or join
entities within the same view (plane) without altering their
orientation, size, or shape. You can translate all geometric
and drafting entity types using:
Rectangular coordinates (X, Y, Z)

Polar coordinates (vector and length)
Between two points (base and new base)
When translating entities, if intersecting entities have been partially
selected using a window selection method, you can optionally stretch
(lengthen or shorten) selected lines. Lines are stretched when they
cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. The line
endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated, while
the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their
original positions.
Figure 2-88: Xform Translate dialog box
The translation result remains live until you accept it. This flexibility
allows you to preview and flip the direction of the results, or create
results in both directions.
Stretching Transformed Entities

The following examples show a rectangle that is stretched out of its
original shape using the Transform function . First, use the
AutoCursor window selection method to select two of the rectangles
intersecting lines. In the Translate dialog box, select the Stretch check
box and specify the translation position for the selected entities.
Figure 2-89: Example 1, Windows selection
2
Figure 2-90: Example 2, Transform Stretch
Note: To translate between different views (planes), use the Translate 3D function.
Xform Translate 3D
Use this function to move or create copies of selected entities between views (from one plane to another) without
altering their orientation, size, or shape.
Figure 2-91: Xform Translate 3D dialog box
To move, rotate, and translate geometric and drafting entity types in

3D, select the two views you want to work with and define a translation vector using the distance and angle between any two points you
choose in the graphics window. Mastercam automatically calculates
the vector between the views. The first point that you choose is relative to the first view (source plane). The second point is relative to the
second view (destination plane).
Xform Mirror
You can create mirror images of geometric and drafting
entities with this function. The entities are reflected
symmetrically with respect to the axis you choose,
including:
Horizontal axis of the current construction plane

Vertical axis of the current construction plane
Specified angle
Selected line
Theoretical line defined between two points
TIP: If your selection contains one or more drafting notes or

labels, select the Mirror label and note text check box to
mirror the text relative to the selected positions. To prevent
mirrored text from being turned upside down or reversed,
deselect this option.
Figure 2-92: Xform Mirror dialog box
When mirroring entities, you can move, copy or join the original entities within the drawing. First, choose the entities you want to work
with. Then, select the type of mirror image to create. If necessary, you
also select specific reference points in the graphics window where you
want to place the mirrored entities.
Xform Rotate
This function makes it easy to move, copy, or join selected
geometric and drafting entities around a center point. You
can translate or rotate the entities around the selected
center point by a specified angle. Translating will rotate the
transformed entities without changing the axis orientation. Rotating

transformed entities changes the axis orientation.
Figure 2-93: Xform Rotate dialog box
The angle is calculated relative to the horizontal axis of the current

construction plane. Entering a positive angle results in a counterclockwise rotation, and a negative angle results in a clockwise rotation.
When creating more than one copy of the selected entities, you can
apply the specified angle between each copy, or to the entire sweep of
copies. You can also choose to remove selected copies from the results
set.
Figure 2-94: Example Translate rectangle
2
Figure 2-95: Example Rotate rectangle
Xform Scale
Scaling allows you to increase or decrease the size of entities
by a factor or percentage relative to a defined point. You can
scale all geometric and drafting entity types using either a
uniform or XYZ scale method.
Uniform: Scales the entities by a single factor or percentage

on all three axes. The entities change size while maintaining
their original shape.
XYZ: Applies a different scale factor or percentage to each of
the axes (XYZ). The entities not only change size but may
change shape as well, appearing to be stretched or squeezed
from their original shape.
Figure 2-96: Xform Scale dialog box
When scaling selected entities, you can also choose to move, copy or
join them.
Xform Offset
Use this function to offset one entity at a time. You can
move or copy a single entity parallel to the original;
displacing it by a defined distance and direction. The direction is perpendicular to the entity along every point, and
relative to the current construction plane.
Figure 2-97: Xform Offset dialog box
You can create multiple copies and use the Direction button to create
parallel entities on either side of the selected entity or on both sides.
Xform Offset Contour

Use the Xform Offset Contour function to move or copy one
or more chained entities; displacing them by a defined
distance and direction and, optionally, a depth.
Offsets are created perpendicular to the selected entity
chains at every position, relative to the current construction plane.
Figure 2-98: Xform Offset Contour dialog box
The offset direction is controlled by the chaining selection

sequence. If the preview shows offset results that are in the
wrong direction, use the Direction button to reverse the
results.
Choose one of the following Corners options to manage the
gaps that result when you offset a chain of curves outward:
None: Extends the entities until they connect when offsetting the boundary outward.
Sharp: Creates arcs at sharp corners to connect the entities when offsetting the boundary outward. A sharp
corner has 135 degrees or less.
All: Creates arcs at all corners to connect the entities when
offsetting the boundary outward.
Note: When you offset the boundary inward, the system trims the
boundary at corners.
Xform Project
When you choose this function, Mastercam offers a variety
of different methods you can use to project selected entities, including:
Depth: Projects selected entities to the Z-depth you

choose in the current construction plane.
Plane: Projects selected entities in various positions in 3D
space and squashes them into a flat, 2D plane. Mastercam
converts NURBS splines if they are not parallel to the
construction plane.
Surface: Projects curves onto surfaces and solids.
Figure 2-99: Xform Project dialog box
When projecting points onto surfaces, select the Points / Lines check
box and button to access the Project Points dialog box.
Figure 2-100: Project Points dialog box
Use this dialog box to optionally:
Create additional points and lines from the preview

Specify line length
Flip the results of the lines without having to flip the surface
normal or use a negative value for the length
Output the results to a named APT or XYZ file format
Xform Rectangular Array

This function makes it easy to quickly create an array (grid)
of entities by copying selected entities simultaneously in
one or two directions, relative to the construction plane. For
each direction, you can specify a unique number of copies
to create, and the offset distance and angle.
Figure 2-101: Xform Rectangular Array dialog box
Xform Roll
Use the Xform Roll function to wrap lines, arcs, and splines
about an axis as though around a cylinder, or unwrap rolled
entities to make them lie flat.
Figure 2-102: Xform Roll dialog box
To roll or unroll entities, Mastercam breaks the entities relative to a

specified angle tolerance or two points you select in the graphics
window. The points are used to calculate the translation distance of
the rolled / unrolled entities.
The new geometry, called target geometry, is created based on the
break points. Use the Type field to choose the type of target geometry
to create, for example Line / Arcs, Points, or Splines.
Note: The rotation axis is relative to the current construction
plane.
Xform Drag
Use the mouse with the Xform Drag function and ribbon
bar options to select entities and dynamically move, or copy
them to a new position by dragging and translating or
rotating them.
h
St
re
tc
Tra
n
Ro slate
ta
te
ov
Co e
py
Se
lec
t
Figure 2-103: Xform Drag ribbon bar
When translating entities, if intersecting entities have been partially

selected using a window selection method, you can optionally stretch
(lengthen or shorten) selected lines. Lines are stretched when they
cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. The line
endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated, while
the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their
original positions.
Notes:
You cannot drag shaded surfaces.
The Translate, Rotate and other Xform functions offer more
advanced and precise transformation methods than are available by dragging entities.
Xform STL
STL is an acronym for StereoLithography, a 3D model file
type developed by 3D Systems, Inc. An STL file is a large
collection of oriented triangles that represent surface and
solid models. If you work with STL files, you use this function to mirror, rotate, scale, offset, and translate STL files.
Select the Bounding Box check box and button to access the
Bounding Box dialog box, and create rectangular or cylindrical
boundary around the STL file.
Figure 2-104: Xform STL dialog box
You can save the results to the same file or to a new file.
Analyzing Entities
Use the Analyze menu functions to retrieve analytical data for most
elements that appear in the graphics window. This includes information on entity properties, positions, distances, 2D and surface areas,
solid properties, chains, contours, angles, and entity database properties. For most functions, you can modify some or all of the information in analyze dialog box fields.
This topic defines each analyze function and provides you with
general instructions for its use. Analyze menu functions include:
Analyze Entity Properties (page 254)
Analyze Position (page

256)
Analyze Distance
(page 256)
Area / Volume submenu

(page 257)
Analyze Chain (page

259)
Analyze Contour (page

260)
Analyze Angle (page

261)
Analyze Dynamic (page

262)
Database / Number
submenu (page 263)
Test Surfaces and Solids

submenu (page 265)
Analyze Entity Properties

Use the Analyze Entity Properties function to view entity
properties and edit some or all of the data, based on the
entity type. You can select one or more entities before or
after choosing the Analyze function. You can analyze the
following entity types:
Lines, arcs, points, and splines (parametric and NURBS)

All surfaces and solids
Drafting entities
Figure 2-105: Example: Analyze Entity Properties dialog box
When you select more than one entity to analyze, a single properties
dialog box appears for the first entity type. The left and right arrow
buttons in the dialog box indicate that you are analyzing more than
one entity, and allow you to cycle through the previous or next entity
in the selection group.
The Analyze function remains active until you press the Esc key or
close the properties dialog box, allowing you to select and analyze
additional entities.
Entity attribute fields for Level, Color, line Style and Width, or Point
style appear in all properties dialog boxes. Use these fields to modify
the attributes of a single entity, or use the Propagate Attribute
Changes apply button to assign the same attributes to all selected
entities. (This button is available only when multiple entities are
selected or when attributes are changed.)
Analyze Position
You can view the XYZ coordinates of a selected position or
point entity using the Analyze Position function.
Figure 2-106: Analyze Position dialog box
This function remains active until you close the dialog box so you can
continue to select and analyze different points or positions.
TIP: This function provides read-only information. To modify
the point or position XYZ values, use the Analyze function.
Analyze Distance
Use this function to analyze the distance between two
selected entities or positions by creating one or more theoretical lines.
Figure 2-107: Analyze Distance dialog box
Based on your selections, you can view information on the point positions (XYZ coordinates), angle between points or entities, and either
the 2D and 3D lengths or, the minimum and maximum distance. The
3D XYZ delta values (differences) between the selected points or entities also displays.
Note: This function does not create geometry or update the properties of the selected entities.
Area / Volume submenu

This submenu offers functions for analyzing 2D and surface areas
and, if Mastercam Solids is installed, for analyzing solid properties.
Analyze 2D Area
Use this function to analyze an area you define by selecting
curve boundaries relative to a specified chord height tolerance.
Figure 2-108: Analyze 2D Area dialog box
You can view details on the boundary and perimeter areas, center of
gravity, and moment of inertia about the X and Y axes and about the
center of gravity. You can save the data to a specified file type, filename, and location.
Analyze Surface Area

You can generate information on the total surface area of
the surfaces and solid faces you select, relative to the chord
height tolerance you specify.
Figure 2-109: Analyze Surface Area dialog box
You can optionally save the resulting data to a specified file type, filename, and location.
TIP: A smaller chord height tolerance value results in a more
precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area.
Analyze Solid Properties

If Mastercam Solids is installed, this function lets you
analyze data on the solid volume and mass relative to a
defined density, the center of gravity, and the moment of
inertia relative to a selected axis line.
Figure 2-110: Analyze Solid Properties dialog box
2
In addition, you can save the solid data to a file.
Analyze Chain
This function allows Mastercam to analyze the chains you
select in order to identify one or more subtle problems that
might be overlooked, including:
Only overlapping entities that are adjacent or all overlapping

entities, regardless of their relative position.
Positions where the chain reverses direction by a value that
exceeds the minimum angle you specify.
Short entities; those with a length smaller than the maximum
length value you define.
Figure 2-111: Analyze Chain dialog box
After analyzing the selected chains, Mastercam reports the number of

each type of problem it finds and highlights the problem areas in the
graphics window.
Figure 2-112: Example: Analyze Chain summary
You can optionally create geometry to mark problem areas as they are
detected during the analyze process. This geometry helps you zoom
in on problem areas in order to fix them. Mastercam creates red arcs
(circles) for overlapping entities, yellow point entities for direction
reversals, and blue arcs (circles) for short entities.
Note: To avoid missing overlapping or short entities, we recommend that you use the Window chaining method when selecting
the chains you want to analyze.
Analyze Contour
Use the Analyze Contour function to generate a text report
containing the properties of all the entities in one or more
chained curves. The curves can contain lines, arcs, or points
(no splines). You can analyze either 2D or 3D contours. For
2D contours, you can analyze a contour which is offset from the
chained curve, and which uses cornering options, simulating a simple
contour toolpath.
Figure 2-113: Analyze Contour dialog box
Figure 2-114: Example: Analyze Contour summary
The generated report opens in your default text editor and lists the
properties of each entity in the chained curves. Before saving the file
to a specified location, you can view and edit the data or add
comments, as necessary.
Analyze Angle
This simple function lets you analyze the angles between
two lines or three point that you select in the graphics
window. Mastercam displays values for the first angle and
the supplementary angle.
Figure 2-115: Analyze Angle dialog box
You can also choose a method for measuring the angle:
Cplane: Shows the angle based on the current Cplane.

3D: Shows the actual angle of the lines in the plane they
define.
Note: If the lines do not lie in the same plane and do not intersect,
only the Cplane option is available; the 3D option is unavailable.
Analyze Dynamic
You can dynamically view information on any position you
choose along an entity. When you select the entity, you use
the cursor to move the arrow endpoint that appears along
the entity to the position you want to analyze.
Figure 2-116: Analyze Dynamic dialog box
The information that appears in the dialog box fields for the selected
entity type includes:
LinesPoint and tangent XYZ coordinates.

Arcs and splinesPoint and tangent XYZ coordinates and
the radius of curvature.
Surfaces and solid facesPoint XYZ coordinates, the normal
XYZ coordinates, and the minimum radius of curvature.
In the Vector section, you can type a length to view the corresponding
endpoint XYZ coordinates of the vector.
Database / Number submenu

This submenu offers functions you use to view information based on
an entitys database properties. Each function and its use is described
below.
Analyze Number
Use this function to easily identify and view the properties
of an entity using only the entity number (a database property automatically assigned to all entities).
Figure 2-117: Analyze Database Number dialog box
When you type the number of the entity you want to analyze and
choose OK, the properties dialog box for the entity appears and the
selected entity is highlighted in the graphics window.
Notes:
You can also use the Analyze Entity Properties function to
select one or more entities to analyze in the graphics window.
To identify the entity number of a specific entity, use the
Analyze Database function.
Analyze Database
This function provides database-related information about
a selected entity. You can view the entity number, creation
date and time, and number of references for associations to
the entity including:
Geometry (surfaces and dimensions)

Solids
Toolpaths
Figure 2-118: Database Properties dialog box
This function remains active until you close the dialog box, allowing
you to continue to select and analyze the database properties of
different entities.
Test Surfaces and Solids submenu

This submenu allows you to analyze surfaces and solids. You can test
the integrity of surface and solids models using customized parameters.
Analyze Test Surfaces

Use this function to perform one or more of the following
analyses on a surface model.
Check model: Checks for self-intersections,

backups, and internal sharp ridges against a tolerance you
specify.
Small surfaces: Checks for surfaces that lie on top of other
surfaces with the area size you define.
Normals: Analyzes the normal vector of the selected surfaces
and reports the number of bad surfaces whose normal vector
reverses direction abruptly in one or more locations.
Base surfaces: Checks for base surfaces and allows you to
optionally blank or unblank them in the graphics window.
Figure 2-119: Test Surfaces dialog box
Analyze Check Solids

If Mastercam Solids is installed, you use this function to
identify error conditions that may pose problems in solid
modeling operations. If errors are detected, the Check Solid
dialog box appears and lists the default maximum number
of errors (10).
Figure 2-120: Check Solids dialog box
If no errors are detected, a confirming message appears. When errors

are detected, you can select an error from the list to highlight its location in the graphics window.
TIP: It is possible that there are more errors than can be
displayed, based on the maximum number of errors you set in
this dialog box. Reset the Maximum number of errors to a high
value and recheck the solid to see if additional errors exist.
Changing Entity Attributes

Entity attributes are physical characteristics you assign to an entity
that include its color, level, line style, line width, and point style.
When working with complex geometry, assigning entities to different
levels, colors, line styles and widths helps you quickly locate and
isolate points, lines, arcs, and other entities, and simplifies your
design and machining processes. You have several options for
assigning and changing entity attributes.
X To store initial entity attributes in a configuration file:
Use the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box
(choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings). After saving
entity attributes, when you start a new drawing session or open a
new file, initial attributes are loaded from the Mastercam configuration file.
X To set entity attributes only for the current drawing session:
Access the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box by choosing
Attributes from the Status bar. Then, choose the EA Mgr button in
the Attributes dialog box. The changes you make will override the
initial configuration parameters and apply to all entities created
during the remainder of the current drawing session.
X To modify entity attributes for one or more selected entities,
use one of the following methods:
In the Status bar, position the cursor in the attribute

field you want to modify; this activates the rightclick
mouse option, indicated by a change in the mouse pointer.
Rightclick to choose the option, then select the items to
change. When you press Enter, the dialog box for the selected
attribute displays, allowing you to make and apply changes
to all selected entities.
Use the Analyze function. Entity attribute fields for level,
color, line style and width, or point style appear in all analyze
properties dialog boxes. You can modify the attributes of a
single entity, or use the Global apply button to apply the
attributes to all selected entities.
X To modify solid entity attributes:
Choose the Solids tab from the Operations Manager pane. Select a
solid, right-click on the selected solid, then choose Attributes.
TIP: You can also use the Status bar Color, Point style, Line
style, Line width, and Level fields to modify the specific
attribute for selected entities, or for entities you will create in
the current session.
Advanced Drawing and Design

This section provides information on Mastercam functions and
concepts that are required to create more complex parts. You will find
information on:
Displaying Surfaces and Solids

Surface Creation on page 274
Solids on page 300
Displaying Surfaces and Solids

You can display both surfaces and solids in two ways:
wireframe (unshaded)
shaded
Figure 2-121: Example: Wireframe and shaded display options
The following additional options that appear in the Shading toolbar

area available for Solids only:
dimmed wireframe
no hidden wireframe
outlined shaded
Figure 2-122: Example: Shaded with outline
DESIGN / Advanced Drawing and Design 269
Figure 2-123: Example: Shaded with hidden lines removed
2
X To display surfaces and solids as wireframes:
Choose the Wireframe button on the Shading toolbar (or
Dimmed Wireframe or No Hidden Wireframe if shading
a solid).
X To set the parameters that control shading for the current
Mastercam session:
Choose the Shade Settings button the Shading toolbar,
or choose Screen, Shade Settings. For more information, see Shading Settings on page 269.
X To shade surfaces and solids:
Choose the Shaded button on from the Shading toolbar
(or Outlined Shaded if shading a solid), or choose
Screen, Shade Settings, and select Shading Active.
TIP: Press [Alt+S] to toggle shading on or off. This shortcut key
does not affect the type of shading, nor the wireframe outline
setting.
X To set the default shade settings, choose Settings,
Configuration, Shading. See Shading Settings below for
information on these options.
Shading Settings
Shading settings control the appearance of shaded surfaces and
solids. The Shading Settings dialog box provides this control. Choose
Screen, Shade Settings to open the Shading Settings dialog box:
Figure 2-124: Shading Settings Dialog Box

Activate or deactivate
shading; shade all entities
or only selected entities.
Define or edit material
appearance.
Enable Mouse dynamics to

move shaded images;
disable to move wireframe
images.
Define characteristics of
and turn on/off spot lights.
The angle between radial

display lines used to
represent the surfaces of
closed, circular solids.
Entity Selection
You can shade all surfaces and solids in the current job or only
selected entities.
X To shade all entities:
1 Choose Screen, Shade Settings.
2 Enable both Shading active and All Entities.
X To shade only selected entities:

2 Enable Shading active and disable All Entities. Mastercam
prompts you to select entities for shading.

3 Select entities.
4 End selection to shade the selected entities.
TIP: If you want to shade all surfaces of a three-dimensional

object, make sure you select all surfaces.
Colors
To control the shading color, choose Screen, Shade Settings, and
then:
To use the color of the entity as the shading color, choose

Entity color.
To select a shading color from the color palette, choose
Select color. The current shading color displays. To change
it, choose the Colors button, and then select a color from the
palette.
To use a material color, choose Material, and then select a
material from the list. You can create or edit material color
settings using the Material dialog box.
Defining material colors

You can define shading colors that simulate materials. Several standard material definitions are provided (brass, bronze, chrome,
copper, gold, silver, various colors of plastic and rubber). You can edit
the standard materials and create new ones.
The material color definitions consist of amounts of red, green, and
blue for each of three kinds of light: ambient, specular, and diffuse.
You can also define a shininess value.
X To define material colors for use in shading:
2 Make sure Shading active is enabled.
3 In the Colors group box, choose Material.
4 Choose the Materials button.
a To edit an existing material, choose the material from the
list, and then choose Edit Material.

b To create a new material, choose New Material.
5 Enter the desired values and name.
Parameters
Note: Shading active must be enabled to set these parameters.
To set the tolerance used to calculate shading, enter a Chord

height. A smaller chord height results in smoother shading.
You can control how Mastercam moves the shaded image
during dynamic rotation. To maintain a shaded appearance
during rotation, enable Mouse dynamics. To rotate images
as wireframes and reapply shading after rotation has ceased,
disable Mouse dynamics; this option permits faster display
of complex surfaces.
You can make shaded entities translucent, which allows you
to see through them so that entities behind them are partially
visible. Enable Translucent to display them this way.
Lighting
Mastercam provides many lighting options that allow you to create
shading effects:
Ambient light is diffuse light shining onto the entity from all
directions.
Spot lights are directional lighting. Spot lights can
simulate the diffuse light from a light bulb, or a
focused cone of light from a conventional spot
light. You can light the entity using multiple spot
lights.
You can control the intensity and color of both ambient and spot
lighting.
X To control shaded entity lighting:
2 Make sure Shading active is enabled.
3 In the Lighting group box, use the slider or enter a value
between 0 and 1 to control the intensity of ambient light.

4 To create spot lighting, choose the Spotlight button.
5 Choose the spot light angle you want to activate:
Figure 2-125: Shading Spot Lights
2
6 To turn the spot light on, enable Power:
Figure 2-126: Shading Spot Light Options
7 Choose a light type, intensity, and color.
Note: You can turn on more than one spot light at a time. A yellow
image in the spot light angle display indicates that the light is on.
Surface Creation
Mastercam X offers a wide range of surface creation functions:
Creating ruled or
lofted surfaces
Creating net
surfaces (page
(page 277)
281)
Creating revolved
surfaces (page 278)
Creating fence
surfaces (page
283)
Creating offset
surfaces (page 279)
Creating draft
surfaces (page
283)
Creating swept
surfaces (page 280)
Creating extruded
surfaces (page
285)
TIP: You can create simple surfaces using the Create, rectangle, rectangular shapes, polygon, ellipse, and Primitives
functions. See Creating Miscellaneous Shapes on page 200.
In this section, you will learn more about surface modification functions, including:
Filleting Surfaces
(page 286)
Removing Boundaries
from Trimmed Surface
(page 295)
Trimming Surfaces
Untrimming surfaces
(page 289)
(page 296)
Creating a surface
from a solid face (page
Splitting surfaces (page
295)
291)
Filling holes with
surfaces (page 293)
Blending surfaces (page
296)
Surface Representation
Mastercam can represent surfaces in three ways:
parametric
NURBS
curve-generated
Not all surface types are appropriate for all surface creation methods.
A parametric surface is analogous to a parametric spline. A parametric surface expands each curve segment in another direction,
resulting in a patch. A patch is a surface area bounded by four
segments of the generating curves. A parametric surface requires a
large amount of data storage.
A NURBS (non-uniform rational B-splines) surface is analogous to a
NURBS curve or spline. A NURBS surface expands a string of control
points in another direction, resulting in a grid. It requires less space
than a parametric surface but takes longer to process.
A curve-generated surface stores a direct reference to the original
curve. It requires less space than either a parametric or a NURBS
surface. Swept, Net, and Blend surfaces cannot be curve-generated.
Note: You control the default surface type by setting a system
parameter. Choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings, and
select a Spline/Surface creation type.
Maximum surface deviation

The maximum surface deviation determines how precisely a parametric or NURBS surface fits its generating curves. A smaller deviation results in a surface that fits the curve more closely but requires
more memory.
Note: You control maximum surface deviation by setting a system
parameter. Choose the Settings menu, Configuration function,
Tolerances topic. The default is 0.001 inch.
Base surface
When Mastercam creates a trimmed surface (for example, fence
surface or flat boundary surface), it also creates an untrimmed,
blanked base surface or parent surface. It uses the base surface for
future modifications of the surface. In some cases (flat boundary
surfaces, for example), the base surface boundaries may extend
beyond the visible surface boundaries.
In most cases, you will not use or be aware of the base surface. The
sections that follow note occasions when the base surface has an
effect on an action.
TIP: To display a base surface, unblank it by choosing Screen,
Unblank entity. To redisplay the trimmed surface, choose
Screen, Blank entity.
Figure 2-127: Example: Surface and base surface
Surface
Base surface
Surface Display
In addition to the shading settings, you can control the appearance of
surfaces and solids by setting:
Surface drawing density

Highlight on the back of surfaces (wireframe only)- Displays
the side opposite the surface normal in a different color (the
surface background color)
Surface background color - Used in wireframe display to
highlight the side of the surface opposite the surface normal
Surface motion color
Surface Drawing Density

Surface drawing density is the concentration of display curves (not
geometric entities) used to show wireframe (unshaded) surfaces and
solids in the graphics window. Mastercam determines the appropriate number of curves for a density value based on the composition
of the surface. Surface density settings do not affect shaded surfaces.
Surface drawing density is measured by a value between 1 (least
dense) and 15 (most dense). Entering a density of zero displays the
outline of the surface and one curve in each of the surface directions.
X To set the surface drawing density:

1 Choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings.
2 Enter a value between 1 and 15.
Highlighting Surface Backs

Highlighting the backs of surfaces (the side opposite the surface
normal) makes it easier to visualize and work with surfaces.
X To highlight the backs of surfaces:
1 Choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings.
2 Select the Draw highlight on back of surfaces check box.
X To select the color to be used for background highlighting:

1 Choose Settings, Configuration, Colors.
2 Select Surface back side color from the entity list.
3 Select a color.
Creating ruled or lofted surfaces

A ruled or lofted surface is created by blending a minimum of
two curves or chains of curves. Although they are similar, a
ruled surface is a linear blending of the curves, while a lofted
surface is a smooth blending of the curves.
Ru
led
Lo
fte
d
Ch
ain
Figure 2-128: Ruled/lofted surface ribbon bar
Figure 2-129: Example: Loft surface
Figure 2-130: Example: Ruled surface
When you select curves for a ruled surface, the selected ends of each
pair of curves (curve one and two, two and three, and so on) compose
one edge of the surface. When you select a curve or chain of curves, a
temporary arrow displays at the closest endpoint to show which end
is selected.
TIPS:
To better match curves, or chains of curves, select the
curves using the Sync chaining method (Chaining Options
dialog box). This method allows you to match curves manually or by entity, branch, node, or point.
As long as the surface is live, you can rechain the curves and
switch the surface between ruled and lofted.
Creating revolved surfaces

A revolved surface is created by revolving one or more
chains of profile curves about a single line axis of rotation.
You can control the start angle and the sweep of the revolution to
create a partial revolution.
En
da
ng
le
an
gle
St
art
Fli
p
Ax
is
Pro
file
Figure 2-131: Revolved surface ribbon bar
Figure 2-132: Example: Revolved surface
Creating offset surfaces

An offset surface is a surface created at a distance and direction relative to the surface normal of a selected surface. It is
identical point for point to the original surface. You can
switch the normal of the original surface, or flip the offset surface to
be opposite the normal. You can also create a copy of the original
surface or delete the original surface and keep only the offset surface.
ist
e
ov
M
Co
p
td
fse
Of
Fli
p
le
/
Cy
c
le
f
Sin
g
Se
l ec
t
lip
Ne
xt
an
ce
Figure 2-133: Offset surface ribbon bar
Figure 2-134: Example: Offset surface
Creating swept surfaces

A swept surface is created by sweeping chains of curves
along a path. The chains that you select to sweep are called
across chains. These chains define cross-sections of the
resulting surface. The chains that define the path or trajectory of the sweep are called along chains.
Tra
n
Ro slate
tat
e
Ch
ain
Figure 2-135: Swept surface ribbon bar
You can define a swept surface using the following combinations of

across (section) and along (path) chains.
1 across/1 along - Mastercam sweeps one section chain

along one path chain. You have the option to translate or
rotate the cross-section chain along the path.
2 or more across/1 along - Mastercam transitions from one
section chain to the next in the order in which you defined
them while following one path chain. This is known as a
linear blend.
1 across/2 along - Mastercam proportionally scales one
section chain between two path chains.
Figure 2-136: Example: Swept surface, 1 across/2 along
2
Figure 2-137: Example: Swept surface, shaded
Creating net surfaces

A net surface is created from a network of intersecting
curves, generally a minimum of two across curves and two
along curves; there is no maximum. The curves need not be
trimmed, and may be chained in any order. You can also
define an apex point, which is necessary when two or more of the
curves meet at a single point.
St
yle
Ap
ex
p
Ch
ain
oin
t
Figure 2-138: Net surface ribbon bar
Figure 2-139: Example: Net surface
Guidelines for Creating Net Surfaces

When creating a net surface where all of the across contours
meet at one or both ends, the net surface to be created will
have more than one possible apex point. Therefore you must
manually position the apex point of the net surface. In these
cases, you must have the ApexPoint button selected before
you chain the curves.
A curve may or may not be trimmed in order to create a net
surface. For contours that are not trimmed, the net surface
will be created by trimming the curves appropriately to form
the net of curves.
You can chain the contours in any direction and in any order.
The Net Surface function will sort the chains out for accurate
results.
You can create a net surface closed in one direction if the
across contours are all closed. A mix of open and closed
across contours will not create a new surface.
There is no maximum limit to the number of contours you
select.
Mastercam does not allow sharp cornered surfaces to be
created. Instead, it creates different surfaces along the sharp
corners.
Note: The maximum angle allowed in chaining is 10 degrees. This
will prevent partial chaining from succeeding if you enter an
angle value of more than 10 degrees. A warning message will
display and you will need to create smoother chains (10 degrees or
less for a maximum angle).
Creating fence surfaces

A fence surface is a ruled surface that originates from a curve
lying on a surface, emanating in a direction perpendicular to
the surface for the length of the curve. You can create three
kinds of fence surfaces:
a constant distance and angle relative to the curve

a linear taper where you define the start and end distance
and angle
a cubic blend where you define the start and end distance
and angle
You can also flip the surface, which creates the same curve but in an
opposite direction from the base surface normal.
ng
le
En
da
St
art
an
gle
En
dh
ei g
ht
St
art
he
igh
t
nd
me
th
od
Ble
Ch
ain
Se
lec
ts
urf
Fli
ac
p
e
Figure 2-140: Fence surface ribbon bar
TIP: If the curve used to create the fence surface is not

trimmed to the base surface, the fence surface will not be
trimmed. Trim the curve before creating the fence surface.
Figure 2-141: Example: Fence surface, cubic blend,
untrimmed
Creating draft surfaces

A draft surface is an angled extruded surface or tapered wall
created from one or more chains of curves. You can create a
draft surface in two ways:
Define an angle and a length (perpendicular to the chain) or

run length (length after the angle is applied)
Terminate the surface at a plane.
You can also flip the surface, reversing the taper angle relative to the
chain, and split the draft surface, which orients it at midplane relative
to the chain.
Figure 2-142: Draft Surface dialog box
Note: The resulting draft surfaces are not trimmed nor filleted.
Figure 2-143: Example: Two draft surfaces
Creating extruded surfaces

An extruded surface appears to be forced or extruded
through the chained geometry of existing entities perpendicular to the plane of the entities. You control the resulting
surface by specifying the height and direction of the extrusion (positive, negative, or both), and the axis orientation of the extrusion.
You can also apply a taper angle to the extrusion, and rotate it, scale it,
and offset it. All transformations are applied relative to the base point,
which is the approximate center of gravity.
Figure 2-144: Extruded Surface dialog box
Filleting Surfaces
In this section, you will learn to use the following functions in the
Create, Surface, Fillet Surface submenu to fillet selected surfaces:
Fillet Surfaces to Surfaces (page 286)

Fillet Surfaces to Curves (page 288)
Fillet Surfaces to a Plane (page 288)
Fillet Surfaces to Surfaces

Use this function to create one or more fillet surfaces,
each of which is tangent to two surfaces. You are
prompted to select two sets of surfaces.
Mastercam attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each

surface in the first set with each surface in the second set. You can
select one set, but it must contain at least two surfaces. With one
set, the system attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each
surface in the set with every other surface in the set.
Figure 2-145: Fillet Surfaces to Surfaces dialog box
In some cases, having only one set of surfaces could prove more
time-consuming. For example, if you have multiple surface walls
and a single surface floor all in a single set, the system looks for
intersections between all walls and the floor. If, however, you
select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second
set of surfaces, the system looks for intersections only between
each wall and the floor.
Fillet Surfaces to Curves

Use the Fillet Surfaces to Curves function to create one
or more fillet surfaces, each of which has a defined
radius, lies on a curve or chain of curves at a rail location,
and is tangent to one or more selected surfaces.
Figure 2-146: Fillet Surfaces to Curves dialog box
Select the surfaces you want to fillet and press Enter. Chain the
curve to which you want the surface to be filleted. Click Apply or
Enter when done.
Fillet Surfaces to a Plane

This function allows you to create one or more fillet
surfaces, each having the following characteristics:
A defined radius
Lies on a curve or chain of curves at a rail location
Is tangent to one or more selected surfaces
Figure 2-147: Fillet Surfaces to a Plane dialog box
Select the surfaces you want to fillet and press Enter. Select the
plane to which you want the surface to be filleted. Click Apply or
Enter when done.
Trimming Surfaces
In this section, you will learn to use the following functions in the
Create, Surface, Trim Surface submenu to trim selected surfaces:
Trimming Surfaces to Surfaces (page 290)
Trimming Surfaces to Curves (page 290)

Trimming Surfaces to a Plane (page 291)
When trimming a surface, the trimmed surface is created as a new
surface and you choose to keep or delete the original (base) surface.
Trimming Surfaces to Surfaces

Use the Create, Surface, Trim Surface, Trim Surfaces to
Surfaces function to trim surfaces at intersections
between two sets of surfacesone of which must
contain only one surfaceand trim one or both of the
sets of surfaces.
1(
tr
2 ( im fi
tri rst
Bo m se sur
th co fac
(tr nd e s
im s et
bo urfa )
th ce
su se
rfa t)
ce
se
ts)
Ke
e
De p
let
e
Fir
st
s
Se urfa
co ce
nd
su
rfa
ce
Figure 2-148: Surface to Surface ribbon bar
Use current construction attributes
When you choose this option, you are prompted to select the first
set of surfaces you want to trim. When you finish selecting
surfaces, press Enter. Repeat these steps on the surface to which
you want the first one to be trimmed. Use the ribbon bar options
to modify the selections and click Apply or press Enter when done.
Trimming Surfaces to Curves

To trim surfaces to curves (lines, arcs, splines, or surface
curves), choose Create, Surface, Trim Surface, Trim
Surfaces to Curves. Then use the Surface to Curve
ribbon bar to trim surfaces to curves.
al
Vie
w
No
rm
Ke
e
De p
let
e
Se
le
S e ct s
l e c u rf
t c a ce
urv s
es
Figure 2-149: Surface to Curve ribbon bar
2
Select the surface you want to trim and press Enter. Chain the
curve to which you want the surface to be trimmed and click the
part of the surface you want to keep. Click Apply or Enter when
done.
If the trimming curves do not lie directly on the surfaces,
Mastercam projects them onto the surfaces in order to calculate
the intersection where the surface will be trimmed.
Trimming Surfaces to a Plane

Choose Create, Surface, Trim Surface, Trim Surfaces to a Plane.
mo
l it
Sp
Ke
ep
De
le t
e
Su
r fa
Pla ce
ne
de
Figure 2-150: Surface to Plane ribbon bar
Delete surfaces on other side of plane

Use this ribbon bar to trim surfaces to a plane. Select the surface
you want to trim and press Enter. Select the plane to which you
want the surface to be trimmed and click the part of the surface
you want to keep. Click Apply or Enter when done.
Creating a surface from a solid face

The Create, Surface, Create Surface from Solid function
uses existing solid entities to extract surface information,
and then creates a separate NURBS surface for each solid
face you select. The solid remains unchanged.
You can create surfaces from a single solid face, or from the entire
solid body. When you move your mouse over the solid during selection, Mastercam displays a visual cue next to the cursor. This icon
changes depending on whether Mastercam is identifying the entire

solid body or a single solid face.
Solid single face
Solid body
TIP: Make sure you have the correct visual cue (either face or
entire solid body) before you make your selection.
Creating a surface from a flat boundary

Flat boundary surfaces are trimmed NURBS surfaces
created within a boundary defined by a closed, flat chain.
You create flat boundary surfaces by chaining existing entities. Mastercam creates the surface and trims it to the
boundaries of the chained entities.
Note: When it creates the trimmed flat boundary surface,
Mastercam also creates a blanked, untrimmed base surface that
extends beyond the boundary of the trimmed surface. Although
you will rarely use this base surface, it can affect how holes are
filled in trimmed surfaces. For more information, see Filling holes
with surfaces on page 293.
A single closed chain defines the outer boundary of the flat boundary
surface. Chains nested entirely within this boundary form holes in the
surface. If chain is not completely enclosed within the first boundary
chain, Mastercam creates a separate surface. You can create multiple
surfaces by selecting chains that are not nested.
If you select open chains, Mastercam prompts you to close them
automatically. You can close the chains or remove the open chains
from calculation of the trimmed surface. If you close the open chains,
Mastercam calculates (but does not create) a curve between the two
open endpoints for the purpose of defining the closed boundary.
Se
lec
tn
ew
ch
Ad
ain
dc
s
ha
ins
M
an
ua
lC
ha
in
Figure 2-151: Flat Boundary Surface ribbon bar
TIP: When you create a flat boundary surface, Mastercam

keeps the entities chained to create it and places the new
surface in the same location as those entities. To work with or
view the new flat boundary surface more easily, either delete,
hide, or move the original entities, or move the new surface.
In the Flat Boundary Surface ribbon bar, click Manual Chain
(
) to open the Chain Manual ribbon bar.
Ga
pT
ole
Se
lec
t
ran
ce
Figure 2-152: Chain Manual ribbon bar
Use this ribbon bar to select surface edges and curves, and to set a gap
tolerance between flat boundary surfaces.
Filling holes with surfaces

You can fill holes in a trimmed surface using the Create,
Surface, Fill Hole with Surfaces function.
The holes may be internal holes (those that lie completely
within the outer boundary of the surface) or external holes (those that
lie along the trimmed outer boundary of the surface). If the surface
contains multiple internal holes, you can fill all holes or only selected
holes.
Mastercam fills the hole by creating a new trimmed surface within the
boundary defined by the hole. The surface Mastercam creates is separate from the original surface, even though it appears to be part of it
when you display it as a wireframe.
Se
lec
t
Figure 2-153: Fill Holes with Surfaces ribbon bar
When filling holes in a flat boundary surface, if you select the outer
boundary as the boundary to be filled, Mastercam fills the area
between the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface and the
blanked base surface, which extends beyond the flat boundary
surface.
Guidelines for filling holes in a trimmed surface

If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface
contains multiple internal boundaries, a warning dialog box
displays. To fill all holes, choose Yes. Otherwise, choose No to
fill only the selected hole.
Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary, this dialog
box does not display. Mastercam closes the hole by creating a
trimmed surface within it.
If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and

that boundary does not touch the outer boundary of the
untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base
surface is currently displayed or is blanked), the hole that
gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and
the untrimmed boundaries, as shown in the following
example.
This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because

the base surface of a flat boundary surface always extends
beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface.
If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and
that boundary does touch the outer boundary of the
untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base
surface is currently displayed or is blanked), the hole that
gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and
the untrimmed boundaries but only along the selected
trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary, as

shown in the following example.
Note: The Fill Holes with Surfaces function differs from the
Remove Boundary from Trimmed Surface function in which
Mastercam removes the trimmed boundaries and recreates the
surface; it does not create a new surface to fill the holes.
Removing Boundaries from Trimmed Surface

Use this function to fill internal holes (those that lie
completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and
external holes (those that lie along the outer boundary of
the surface). For each hole that you select to fill, Mastercam closes the
hole by removing the trimmed boundary and retrimming the surface
using the base surface.
If the surface contains multiple internal holes, you can fill all holes or
only selected holes. If the trimmed surface contains only one hole,
Mastercam closes it by removing the trimmed surface and replacing it
with the untrimmed base surface.
Splitting surfaces
When you split a surface, you break it along one of its
constant parameter directions, which are the two directions
Mastercam uses to generate the surface. Mastercam then
creates two trimmed surfaces within the same boundary. If the break
point you select permits the surface to be broken in two ways,
Mastercam prompts you to select the direction along which you want
to split it.
Figure 2-154: Split Surface ribbon bar
Flip split direction
Use this ribbon bar to break a surface at a fixed position along one of
the surface directions. Select the surface to split. Mastercam displays
a temporary arrow on the surface.
(You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view.)
Use the cursor to move the base of the arrow to the position you want
the split to pass through on the surface (the fixed position), then click
to set the position. The surface is split when you click Apply or OK.
TIP: Use wireframe display to visualize the surface directions.
Untrimming surfaces
When you untrim a trimmed surface, Mastercam returns
the surface to its base surface.
Ke
ep
Di
sp
os
e
Figure 2-155: Untrim Surface ribbon bar
Use this ribbon bar to untrim previously trimmed surfaces. As soon as

you select a trimmed surface, Mastercam untrims it and returns its
base surface to the graphics window. Use the Keep and Dispose
buttons to set whether to keep or disposed of the trimmed surface.
Blending surfaces
In this section, you will learn to create blended surfaces using functions in the Create, Surface submenu to . These functions allow you
to smooth out part of a surface model by eliminating unwanted
features.
Creating Two-surface and Three-surface Blends

Use the Create 2 Surface Blend and Create 3 Surface Blend functions to blend surfaces by creating an additional surface that is
tangent to two or three selected surfaces. The new surface is created
tangent to the selected surfaces.
Figure 2-156: Surface Blend dialog boxes
2 Surface Blend
3 Surface Blend
After selecting one of these blend function, you are prompted in the
graphics window to select the first surface. After selecting the surface,
use the arrow that displays in the selected surface to define the location and width of the tangent surface. Move the base of the arrow to
the location where you want to blend the new surface to the existing
surface, then click to set the blend location. Mastercam creates a
temporary surface between the blending splines. Use the Flip button
to set the blend direction, and the other dialog box options to further
define the surface blend. Repeat this sequence for the second, and, if
applicable, the third surface you want to blend.
The following examples illustrate blends created from the same two
surfaces using different parallel and perpendicular blend directions.
Parallel blend direction
Perpendicular blend direction
TIPS:
To select a blend location at an existing point, type S to activate
snapping. Move the base of the arrow over the desired point,
then left-click to snap to it.
Choose Options (
)in the selected surface blend function
dialog box to set filleting parameters. In the Fillet Surface
Options dialog box, you define:
the type of entities to create
how closely each resulting fillet surface fits the surfaces to
which it is tangent
whether Mastercam trims the surfaces
other parameters that further affect the resulting geometry
Creating a Three-fillet Blend

Use the Create 3 Fillet Blend function and dialog box to blend three
intersecting fillet surfaces by creating one or more surfaces that are
tangent to the first three surfaces.
Figure 2-157: Create 3 Fillet Blend dialog box
2
This function is useful for rounding the corners of a filleted box. It is
similar to blending three surfaces. However, the location where the
blend surface(s) are tangent to the fillet surfaces is calculated, not
selected. When you choose this option, you are prompted to select
the three intersecting surface fillets in the graphics window. before
blending the selected filleted surfaces, use options in the 3Fillet Blend
dialog box to:
reselect the three surface fillets, as necessary

indicate whether to create a blend surface with 3 or six sides
optionally trim surfaces and keep lines
Solids
Unlike wireframe and surface models, which consist of multiple
curves and surface entities, a solid model is a single entity, regardless
of its complexity. However, a solid model may consist of several solid
bodies.
You work with a solid model as a whole, like molding a piece of clay.
For example, whether you add fillets to a solid, hollow it out, or
combine it with another solid, the resulting solid model remains a
single entity. Each Mastercam function you perform on a solid entity
is saved as a separate operation on the solid. You can view a complete
history of the operations used to create a solid, and move, edit, or
delete them.
Because a solid is a closed, organized model, Mastercam manages the
interior and exterior of the model for you, handling the complexities
of the model behind the scenes. This makes it easy to work with
solid modeling. When you create or edit operations on a solid,
Mastercam automatically determines the surfaces to keep or trim in
order to maintain the solid as a single entity.
Basic solid model functions include extrude, revolve, sweep, loft,
fillet, and shell. This section provides an overview of how to create,
select, and perform operations on solid models. You will also learn to
use the Solids Manager and its rightclick menus to manage and
modify solids and their operations. Topics in this section include:
Creating a Solid Model: Process Overview on page 300

Solids Associativity on page 302
Selecting Solids on page 304
Combining Solid Operations on page 305
Working with Solid Functions on page 306
Solids Manager on page 331
Editing Solid Models on page 337
Creating a Solid Model: Process Overview

Through a few easy steps, you can create and machine a solid model
in Mastercam. The steps outlined below give you an overview of the
process. You can then adapt these steps to create your own solid
model.
X To create a solid model:
1 Create a base operation.
A solid is defined by one or more operations. The first operation, called the base operation, creates the solid. You can
create a base operation by taking one of the following
actions:
Define a solid by extruding, revolving, sweeping, or lofting

chains of curves.
Define a solid using pre-defined primitive shapes, such as
a cylinder, cone, block, sphere, or torus.
Import a solid from an external file format, such as ParaSolid, SAT, Solid Works, Catia, ProE, Step and others.
IMPORTANT: A base operation is always listed as the first
operation under the solid in the Solids Manager. It cannot be
repositioned, or deleted from the operation list.
2 Create additional operations.
Once you create the base operation, you perform subsequent

operations to modify the solid, including:
Remove material by making one or more cuts on a target

solid.
Add material by creating one or more bosses on a target
solid.
Smooth solid edges by adding a radius (fillet).
Bevel (chamfer) solid edges.
Hollow out (shell) solids and optionally cut entry holes.
Perform Boolean functions: add solids together, remove
solids from one another, find common solid volumes.
Draft solid faces.
Trim solids to a plane or surface.
3 Manage solid operations.
The Solids Manager tab, located in the Operations Manager

pane of the Mastercam window, lists the operations you used
to define the solid. Use the Solids Manager to check the location of an operation in the model, edit operation components (geometry and parameters), check a solid model at
various points in its development, and regenerate all or individual solids.
4 Machine the solid.
You use Mastercam Mill, Lathe, and Router to create toolpaths directly on solid geometry by choosing a machine defi-
nition from the Machine Type menu. Then use functions in

the Toolpaths menu to create the necessary toolpaths.
For more information, see Machining on page 365.
Solids Associativity
Solids associativity is the dependent relationship between a solid, the
operations that define it, and any geometry selected in its definition.
When you perform a solid operation such as extrude, fillet, or draft
face, Mastercam associates it with the solid that it creates or modifies.
This association can be broken only by deleting the operation.
Because an operation is associated with the solid that it creates or
modifies, you cannot copy operations or move them to a different
solid. For example, when rechaining a fillet operation, all of the new
edges that you select must be on the same solid where the operation
was originally defined. To fillet edges on a different solid, you must
create a new fillet operation on that solid.
Associativity eliminates the need to recreate a solid each time you
modify it. After editing an operations components (geometry and
parameters), you can regenerate the solid to incorporate your
changes. The following terms describe a solid operation and the
current state of its associativity.
Clean: An operation whose defining parameters and geometry match the associated solid. This condition applies to all
newly created operations and to operations that have been
successfully regenerated. For a solid to be stable and current,
its operations must be clean.
Dirty: An operation whose defining parameters and/or
geometry have changed and no longer match the associated
solid. Mastercam marks each dirty operation and its associated solid with a red X in the Solids Manager. You correct
dirty operations by regenerating them.
Invalid: An operation that fails due to a problem in its geometry and/or parameters, which prevents it from being regenerated. Deleting geometry that defines an operation is a
common cause of invalid operations. Mastercam marks each
invalid operation and its associated solid with a red question
mark (?) in the Solids Manager. You can try to correct an
invalid operation by editing the operations parameters and/
or geometry, then regenerating the operation.
Figure 2-158: Example: Solid Manager operation states
Clean operation
Dirty operation
Invalid operation
Associativity also exists between some solid operations. For example,

if a cut operation results in a new face and you subsequently fillet that
face, the fillet operation is dependent on the cut operation. If you
delete the cut operation, Mastercam deletes the fillet operation as
well because the edge that defined the fillet operation no longer
exists. In the Solids Manager, a defining operation always precedes a
dependent operation in the operation list.
Unless solids in the same file are used in Boolean combinations,
associativity does not exist between individual solids in a Mastercam
file. When you perform a Boolean operation, Mastercam associates
the tool body with the target body if possible, provided you do not
perform a non-associative Boolean Remove or Common regions
operation.
A target body is the solid that is the target of a specific action

or operation, such as when cutting material from a body,
adding bosses to a body, or performing a Boolean operation.
When one of these operations is performed, the target body
is the surviving body that can be worked on.
A tool body is the body or bodies that are added to, removed
from, or used to keep a common region with a selected target
body during a Boolean operation. Once a solid is designated
a tool body, it becomes part of the target body. In the Solids
Manager, a tool body is listed under the solid and Boolean
operation that it helps to define, and its icon is marked with
the letter T.
Note: When you delete a Boolean operation, Mastercam restores

the operation's tool bodies as distinct, active solids. You can also
duplicate a tool body to obtain an active copy of the solid.
Selecting Solids
Use the General Selection ribbon bar to select entities in the graphics
window. This ribbon bar operates in two different modes: Standard
Selection and Solid Selection. The availability of either mode is based
on the types of entities that are in the current file and the functions
you choose from Mastercam menus and toolbars.
If there are no solids in your file, the Solid Selection mode is not available; you can use only Standard Selection options.
Figure 2-159: Standard Selection mode
Note: For more information on Standard Selection techniques, see

Selecting Entities on page 124.
If you choose a Mastercam function specific to a solid entity, the
General Selection ribbon bar automatically switches to the Solid
Selection mode. Mastercam solid selection is very flexible. In Solid
Selection mode, you can choose from a variety of solid selection
options, including select edge, select face, select body, select from
back, and select last.
Figure 2-160: Solid Selection mode
Solid Selection options
Note: The Verify, UnSelect All, End Selection, and Help options
are always available, regardless of the current selection mode.
If you choose a Mastercam function that applies to different types of
entities (wireframe, surfaces, or solids), use the following methods to
switch between selection modes and select entities:
To switch from the default Standard Selection

mode to the Solid Selection mode, choose the
Activate Solid Selection button.
To switch from Solid Selection mode to the Standard
Selection mode, choose the Standard Selection
button.
For example, if the part file you are working with contains a surface
and a solid entity, and you want to create toolpaths for both entities,
choose a toolpath function from the Toolpath menu. Then use the
Activate Solid Selection and Standard Selection options to toggle
between the two modes and select the appropriate entities.
TIP: When creating toolpaths in files that contain both solids
and other entity types, the order in which you select and chain
entities is defined by the options you choose in the Surface
options dialog box.
Combining Solid Operations

When you create a new cut or boss operation by extruding, revolving,
or sweeping chains of curves, instead of creating a separate operation
for each chain, you can combine operations on multiple chains into a
single operation. You choose this option by selecting the Combine
Operations option in the Extrude Chain, Revolve Chain, or Sweep
Chain dialog box. You can combine operations only when creating
new cuts or bosses on an existing body.
You cannot combine operations when creating a new solid body or
modifying parameters from the Solids Manager. You can, however,
combine operations when modifying the geometry of existing
Extrude, Revolve, or Sweep Cut/Boss operations by adding new
chains, even if the Combine Operations option was not selected when
the operation was created.
You can also combine appropriate operations when you create operations as part of finding features on a brick solid. In this case,
Mastercam aggregates operations on selected chains (for holes) or
edges (for fillets) into a single operation.
Note: A brick is a solid body with no history. Brick solids may be

imported, may be the result of a file conversion or translation
from other solid modeling software, or may be created by trim or
Boolean (Remove, Common) operations that result in a body
being split into more than one piece. In the Solids Manager, a
brick is identified as a solid in which the word Body is the first
entry in its operation history (added when a brick is edited).
Combining operations makes it easier to modify similar or repetitive
operations involving multiple chains, since you only have to edit
parameters once from the Solids Manager.
Working with Solid Functions

This section introduces the functions you use from the Solids menu
to create solids and operations, including:
Solid Extrude (page

306)
Solid Trim (page 317)
Solid Revolve (page

309)
Solid Thicken (page 318)
Solid Sweep (page

310)
Remove Solid Faces (page

319)
Solid Loft (page 311)
Draft Solid faces (page 319)
Solid Fillet (page

312)
Boolean Operations
(page 324)
Solid Face-Face fillet

(page 313)
Solid Find features

(page 325)
Chamfer functions
(page 314)
Solid From surfaces

(page 327)
Layout (page 328)
Solid Shell (page
316)
Solid Extrude
The Solid Extrude function allows you to extrude planar
chains of curves and create:
One or more new solid bodies

Cuts on an existing body
Bosses on an existing body
Mastercam extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the

curves along a linear path using a specified direction, distance, and
other parameters that further define the results. The number of
resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains that
you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine
operations, and what construction method you use.
Figure 2-161: Solid Extrude dialog boxes
Setting the extrusion direction

The extrusion direction is the direction that the system drives the
shape of the selected chains of curves to form an extruded solid, cut,
or boss. The default extrusion direction is normal to each chain of
curves that you select to extrude. The sense of the normal vector is
determined by the chaining direction and the right-hand rule. It is set
so that the chain is counter-clockwise about the normal vector.
TIP: The right-hand

rule is a simple device
many machinists use to
orient themselves to the
axes positions. Holding
your hand as shown, the
thumb represents the X
axis, the index finger
represents Y, and the
middle finger, pointing
up,
represents Z.
Notes:
With both thin-wall and non-thin-wall extrusions, you can
reverse the normal direction.
The extrusion direction cannot be parallel to the plane defined
by the selected chains of curves because you cannot extrude a
chain sideways.
Editing geometry for Extrude operations
You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define an
extruded solid, cut, or boss. In addition, you can edit the faces that
an extruded cut or boss is trimmed to, provided that the Trim to
selected faces parameter was selected when you initially defined
the operation.
Notes:
The Extrude operation can have more than one chain only if
there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary
around the other chains, and all of the nested chains are in the
same plane. The chains that are nested within this boundary
form cutouts in the solid. You cannot use the thin-wall
construction method in this case.
You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves, which defines the outer boundary, or
cross section, of the solid.
Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the
creation of a new operation or solid.
Solid Revolve
You can revolve planar chains of curves to create one or
more new solid bodies, cuts on an existing body, or bosses
on an existing body. This function revolves chains of curves
by driving the shape of the curves about a selected axis,
using the start and end angles, and other parameters you provide. The
number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of
chains that you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you
combine operations, and what construction method you use.
Figure 2-162: Solid Revolve dialog boxes
Selecting a rotation axis

The rotation axis is the line about which Mastercam revolves the
chains of curves to form a revolved solid. You can select any line in
the graphics window to use as the rotation axis, including a line on
the selected chain of curves. The axis line is associative; therefore,
you must regenerate the solid to update the association between
the line and the solid if the line changes.
The default rotation direction is determined when you select a line
to use as the rotation axis. The endpoint closest to the cursors
position where you select the line defines the base point of the axis
direction vector. The start and end angles are measured in a positive sense about the axis, which sets the rotation direction.
Note: The rotation direction follows the right-hand rule, with the
axis direction vector representing the positive Z axis.
Editing geometry for Revolve operations

You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define a revolved
solid, cut, or boss.
Notes:
You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves, which defines the outer boundary, or
cross section, of the solid.
The Revolve operation can have more than one chain only if
there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary
around the other chains. The chains that are nested within this
boundary form cutouts in the solid and lie in the same plane.
You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case.
To edit the rotation axis of a revolved solid, cut, or boss, you
must edit the solids parameters.
Solid Sweep
Use the Solid Sweep function to sweep closed, planar
chains of curves, called section chains, to create one or more
new solid bodies, cuts on an existing body, or bosses on an
existing body. Mastercam sweeps chains of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of
a single chain of curves, called the path chain. The angle between the
section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each
resulting swept solid. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses
depends on the number of chains that you select, whether the chains
are nested, and whether you combine operations.
Figure 2-163: Solid Sweep dialog box
Editing geometry for Sweep operations

Each Sweep operation has two editable geometry components: the
underlying chains of curves (section chains) that define a swept
solid, cut, or boss and the chain of curves (path chain) that defines
the path along which the section chains are swept to form the
solid, cut, or boss.
Notes:
You cannot delete the base chain.
The Sweep operation can have more than one section chain
only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed
boundary around the other chains. The chains that are nested
within this boundary form cutouts in the solid.
Solid Loft
You can loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid
body, a cut on an existing body, or a boss on an existing
body. When you use this function, Mastercam performs a
loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains
of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or
ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first
and last chains with solid faces. The start point of each chain and the
sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how
Mastercam aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them.
Figure 2-164: Solid Loft dialog box
For a Loft operation to succeed, the selected chains of curves must

meet the following criteria:
Each individual chain of curves must be planar; however, the

set of chains that you select does not have to be planar.
Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary.
All of the chains that you select must follow the same
chaining direction.
You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a

given loft operation.
A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect.
Editing geometry for Loft operations
You can edit the chains of curves that define the cross sections of a
lofted solid, cut, or boss. There must be a minimum of two closed,
planar chains to define a lofted operation.
Time-saving tips for creating lofted solids
Lofted solids sometimes require a large amount of processing time,
especially when the lofted solid is defined by many chains or if some
or all of the chains contain splines. You can increase the calculation
speed for lofted solids by trying one or more of the following actions:
Limit the number of chains to four or five and select the

chains that provide the most accurate overall definition for
the solid.
Create the lofted solid as a ruled solid, which takes less time
to calculate, by selecting the Create as Ruled parameter on
the Loft Chain dialog box.
Use a sync method when selecting the chains. By indicating
how the chains should be aligned, you reduce the time it
takes for Mastercam to calculate the solid.
Create the lofted solid in multiple operations using four or
five adjacent chains at a time. Create the first lofted solid as a
separate body, then create each additional lofted solid as a
boss on the first body.
Solid Fillet
Solid filleting is a type of edge blending that results in a
rounded edge by introducing new faces that are tangent to
the edges adjacent faces. A fillet is also referred to as a
rolling ball blend because it has a circular cross section, as if
a ball is rolled along each selected edge and material is either added
to or removed from the balls path to form the smooth edge. When
using the Fillet function, you determine the extent of the fillet by
specifying the radius of the rolling ball or cross section. You can
define the fillets radius using a constant radius value or by varying the
radius value along the edge. For fillet operations using a variable
radius, you can also specify radius positions and values along a solid
edge.
Figure 2-165: Solid Fillet dialog box
IMPORTANT: Fillets that you create on the edges of selected

faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If you add edges to
or remove them from a filleted face or body, the entire face or
body remains filleted, regardless of the change.
Solid Face-Face fillet

Use this function to create fillets across solid faces. When
creating a face-face fillet, you select two faces or two sets of
faces.
Figure 2-166: Example:
The faces within each set need not be contiguous with each other nor
adjacent to the faces in the other set. The resulting fillet blends the
first face in each of the two sets and continues across other faces in
the sets to the extent that a single continuous fillet can be created.
Figure 2-167: Example: Face-Face fillet across non-adjacent

face
Figure 2-168: Example: Face-Face fillet over embedded entity
The Face-Face Fillet Parameters dialog box options allow you to

create both rolling-ball and constant curvature fillets by selecting the
constant radius, constant width, constant width-ratio, single hold line
or double hold line methods. Use other options to propagate fillets
along tangent faces and designate a Help Point.
Figure 2-169: Face-Face Fillet Parameters dialog box
Chamfer functions
A chamfer, or beveled edge, is a type of edge blending that has a linear
cross section. You chamfer solid edges by introducing new faces that
add material to or remove material from the selected edges and that
are not tangent with the adjoining faces of the original edge. You
determine the extent of the chamfer by specifying distances and,
optionally, an angle to offset the chamfer from the selected edge on
the adjoining faces.
Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole
solid bodies are associative. If edges are added to or removed from a
chamfered face or body, the entire face or body remains chamfered,
regardless of the changes.
Mastercam provides three functions you can use to define where the
chamfer is positioned along the edge faces:
One Distance
Two Distances
Distance and Angle
If you create a chamfer using either the Two Distances or the

Distance and Angle function and you select an edge to chamfer, you
must also select a reference face to be used to calculate the resulting
chamfer. The reference face can be either one of the two faces that are
adjacent to the selected edge, also referred to as edge faces.
Mastercam uses the reference face to make the following calculations,
according to the chamfer method that you select:
For chamfers created using the Two Distances function, the

reference face is used to measure the value of the Distance 1
parameter from the selected edge. Mastercam then applies
the second value (Distance 2) to the other edge face.
For chamfers created using the Distance and Angle function,
the reference face is used to measure the specified distance
and angle from the selected edge.
When you select an edge to chamfer, Mastercam highlights the
default reference face and displays the Pick Reference Face menu to
give you the option to select the other edge face.
You are not required to select a reference face in the following cases:
For selected faces. Mastercam chamfers all edges associated

with the face and uses the face itself as the reference face for
all of the edges. If you select two faces that share an edge, the
first face that you select defines the reference face for the
shared edge.
When the One Distance chamfer function is used. A chamfer
created with this method is symmetrical, and the same
chamfer distance is used for both edge faces.
Note: A solid body cannot be selected when creating a two
distances or distance angle chamfer.
Solid Shell
To hollow solid bodies with the Solid Shell function, choose
the material to remove and, optionally, select the faces you
want to remain open. The remaining faces are thickened by
the amount you specify. You can re-select the geometry that
defines a shell operation for editing.
Figure 2-170: Shell Solid dialog box
Note: When editing the geometry that defines a shell operation,

changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or
solid are not supported.
If you select individual faces on a solid, Mastercam hollows the solid,
opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid, and
thickens the remaining faces to form the solids shell.
If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces, Mastercam
removes the material from the interior of the solid, which leaves a
void, and thickens the solids faces to form the solids shell.
When you shell whole solids, there are no entry holes into the solid,
and you cannot see into the solid if it is shaded. However, you can
view the void in the interior of the solid if you use translucent
shading. Similarly, you can turn on the display of hidden lines to
distinguish the solids inner walls. For more information, see
Displaying Surfaces and Solids on page 268.
Solid Trim
Use the Solid Trim function to trim selected solids to a
plane, to a surface, or to an open sheet body. You can also
choose whether or not to keep what was trimmed as new
bricks (solid bodies with no history) and change the trimming direction.
Figure 2-171: Trim Solid dialog box
Solid Thicken
The Solid Thicken function allows you to thicken an open
sheet solid and thereby convert it into a closed solid body.
You can use this function in conjunction with the From
Surfaces (stitch surfaces into solids) function to turn
selected surfaces into a solid that can be managed like any other solid
created in Mastercam.
Note: For more information on stitching surfaces into solids, see
Solid From surfaces on page 327.
Figure 2-172: Thicken sheet solid dialog boxes
Remove Solid Faces

This function removes selected faces from a solid, resulting
in an open sheet body. You can remove faces from either a
closed solid body or a sheet entity. Typically, you use this
function to remove faces that have problems identified by
the Check Solid function or to remove faces so that new surfaces can
be constructed and then stitched using the From Surfaces function.
Removing one or more faces from a solid can result in the same kind
of sheet solid as Stitching from surfaces whose edge gaps are too large
to create a closed solid body.
Figure 2-173: Remove Faces from a solid dialog box
Draft Solid faces

Drafting solid faces is the process of tilting the faces by a
defined angle and direction. When you add draft to a solid
face, it has the effect of creating a tapered wall, which is
particularly useful for mold making. The Draft Solid faces
function makes it easy to add, change or remove face draft.
Figure 2-174: Solid Draft Faces dialog boxes
You can draft virtually any solid face, regardless of whether the solid
was created in Mastercam or imported from an external file format.
For example, a filleted face can be drafted, which changes its geometry from cylindrical to planar, like a chamfered face.
When a face is drafted, the adjacent faces are trimmed and/or
extended to accommodate the new geometry of the drafted face. If
the adjacent faces are unable to accommodate the new geometry, the
operation fails. Failure is more likely to occur with larger draft angles
or if adjacent faces are tangent (or near tangent) and are not also
being drafted. In some cases, drafting results in faces being deleted
from the solid.
The Draft Faces function provides various methods you can use to
draft solid faces. The method that you choose determines where a
drafted face hinges. Each method is described below.
Draft to Face: Drafts solid faces using a planar reference face.

You select the planar reference face that is used to calculate
where the drafted face hinges and the draft direction. The
drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the
face selected to be drafted) and the reference face. The hinge
point can be located on or off the solid. The draft direction is
perpendicular to the reference face, and the draft angle is
measured with respect to the direction.
Figure 2-175: Example 1: Draft to Face

Hinge point
Arrow and cone-shaped

graphic showing draft
direction and how draft angle
is calculated to the direction
Face to be
drafted
Planar reference face
Figure 2-176: Example 2: Draft to Face

Hinge point
Drafted face
Original face (replaced

by drafted face)
Faces extended to
accommodate
drafted face
Draft to Plane: Drafts solid faces using a defined reference

plane. You define the reference plane used to calculate where
the drafted face hinges and the draft direction. The drafted
face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face
selected to be drafted) and the reference plane. The hinge
point can be located on or off the solid. The draft direction is
perpendicular to the reference plane, and the draft angle is
measured with respect to the direction.
Figure 2-177: Example: Draft to Plane
Draft to Edge: Drafts solid faces using one or more reference

edges. You select one or more edges on each face being
drafted. The reference edges that you select define the hinge
points for the drafted faces. The draft direction is defined by a
selected linear edge or planar face. For a linear edge, the draft
direction follows the edge. For a planar face, the draft direction is perpendicular to the face. The draft angle is measured
with respect to the direction. The following examples show a
face that is successfully drafted using multiple reference
edges that were selected along the bottom of the left-most
face.
Figure 2-178: Example 1: Draft to Edge
Figure 2-179: Example 2: Draft to Edge
Draft Extrude: Drafts solid faces for an extrude operation.

This option is enabled when all of the faces in your selection
are lateral faces (walls) swept out during an extrude operation. You select these lateral faces. The drafted faces hinge at
the intersection of the original faces (the faces selected to be
drafted) with the planar chains of curves that defined the
original extrude operation. The draft direction follows the
extrusion direction, and the draft angle is measured with
respect to this direction. The following examples show an
extruded solid whose lateral faces have been drafted along
the extrusion direction. The curves that defined the original
extrude operation form the hinges for the drafted faces.
Figure 2-180: Example 1: Draft Extrude
Figure 2-181: Example 2: Draft Extrude
Selecting the draft direction

If you draft solid faces using the Draft to Face, Draft to Plane, or
Draft to Edge methods, the draft direction is determined by the
reference geometry that you specify. With the Draft to Face
method, the draft direction is perpendicular to the planar reference face that you select. With the Draft to Plane method, the draft
direction is perpendicular to the plane that you define. With the
Draft to Edge method, the draft direction either follows a linear
edge or is perpendicular to a planar face, depending on the geometry that you select to define the direction.
Boolean Operations
You can construct a solid using combinations of two or more existing
solids using Boolean functions to add solids together, remove solids
from one another, and find the common region defined by overlapping solids. For a Boolean Remove or Common operation, you can
choose whether or not to maintain associativity.
Boolean operations are a set of functions (Add, Remove, and
Common) that enable solid construction using combinations of two
or more existing solids. Solids can be added together, and removed
(subtracted) from one another. Common regions defined by solids
can be kept while all other material is removed. For each Boolean
function, a target body and one or more tool bodies must be selected.
The result of a Boolean operation is always a single solid, regardless of
the number of tool bodies selected.
To initiate a Boolean operation that maintains associativity,

choose Boolean Add, Boolean Remove, or Boolean
Common from the Solids menu.
Boolean Add
Boolean Remove
Boolean Common
To initiate a non-associative Boolean operation, choose Nonassociative from the Solids menu, then choose Remove NA
or Common regions NA from the submenu.
Remove NA
Common regions NA
Whichever function you choose, you must then identify a target body.
This is the solid that material is added to, removed from, or overlapped. Next you select one or more tool bodies, which are the solids
that are added to, removed from, or overlapped with the target body.
To perform the operation, choose the End selection option from the
General selection ribbon bar.
IMPORTANT: Regardless of the number of tool bodies, the
result of each Boolean operation is always a single body.
If you perform a non-associative Boolean Remove or Common
regions operation, use options in the Solid non-associative Boolean
dialog box to choose whether to keep the original target and tool
solids in addition to the new solid created by the Boolean operation.
Figure 2-182: Solid Non-associative Boolean dialog box
In Mastercam, you cannot create disjoint bodies and maintain associativity between them. If a Boolean Remove or Common regions
operation fails because it would create a disjoint body, you are
informed and asked if you want to create a non-associative Boolean (a
brick solid). To continue the Boolean operation and display the Solid
non-associative Boolean dialog box, choose Yes. To cancel the
Boolean operation, choose No.
Solid Find features

Use the Find Features function to quickly locate holes or
fillets on imported bricks or other solid bodies whose base
operation in the history is Body. When you select a feature
to detect, you also specify whether to remove detected
instances of the feature or to recreate the operations and any associated geometry needed to reconstruct the detected instances of the
feature. Removing features is useful when creating toolpaths that
precede or ignore the features. Creating solid operations adds them to
the solids history tree, where they can be modified using the Solids
Manager. When you create operations, you can also indicate whether
to combine selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a
single operation.
Figure 2-183: Solid Find Features dialog box
When operating on a brick, the Find Features function modifies the

solid by removing features and adding operations to its history, while
maintaining the modified brick as a solid body at the top of the
history tree. The Find Features function only recognizes features on
imported brick solids or on brick solids created in Mastercam from
stitching, Boolean, or trim operations.
IMPORTANT: The Find Features function does not recognize
solid bodies with dirty, invalid, or suppressed operations.
Regenerate these solids and restore them to a clean state
before using the Find Features function. For more information
on using the Solid Manager Suppress function, see Suppress
solid operations on page 333.
Finding, removing, and creating fillets on a solid body
You can detect, remove, and create constant-radius fillets on brick
solids. Only fillets whose radius falls within a specified range are
detected. Combining operations fillets similar edges as one operation in history.
Finding, removing, and creating holes on a solid body
You can detect, remove, and create through holes and blind holes
(pass through solid in one direction) on brick solids. Only holes
whose radius falls within a specified range are detected.
Combining operations aggregates multiple chains into one

extrude cut operation.
When finding and recreating holes in a single face, Mastercam
recognizes the contours of the face the hole cuts through. If a hole
cuts through multiple faces, Mastercam will try to extend one face
and cap the hole in a single plane. If Mastercam cannot recreate
the hole, the operation fails.
Solid From surfaces

This function allows you to create one or more solids from selected
surfaces by stitching them together. If you select all surfaces, and edge
gaps between surfaces are within a specified tolerance, a closed solid
body is created. Otherwise, an open sheet body is created. You can
also select sheet solids and change an open sheet into a closed body
by continued use of the stitching function.
This function is useful for working on imported files
containing surface representations of a solid or for
converting newly constructed surfaces that may have been
created to replace problem surfaces. Stitching surfaces can result in
the same kind of sheet solid as removing one or more faces from a
closed solid body.
Figure 2-184: Stitch Solid from Surfaces dialog box
If Mastercam cannot create a closed solid body, a message asks if you

want to create edge curves on open edges.
To select a color for the edge curves and create an open sheet
body with edge-curve geometry, choose Yes.
To create the open sheet body without edge-curve geometry,

choose No.
You can change an open sheet body into a closed solid body by using
the Thicken function to thicken it. For more information, see Solid
Thicken on page 318.
TIP: To set default stitching parameter values for the Stitch
Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box, from the Mastercam menu
choose Settings, Configuration, Solids.
Layout
To create a layout of different views of solids in the current
file (for example, top, side, front, and isometric), use Layout.
You can choose from the following standard layouts.:
4View DIN: bottom, front, left, and isometric views

4View ANSI: top, front, right, and isometric views
3View DIN: bottom, front, and left views
3View ANSI: top, front, and right views
Or you can use create your own layout containing up to four named
views.
Figure 2-185: Create Solid Drawing Layout dialog box
Once you create the basic layout from this dialog box, you can use the
Edit Solid Drawing Layout dialog box options to customize it further
by editing settings such as Hidden Lines, Paper Size, or Scale Factor.
You can also add, remove, and modify views.
Figure 2-186: Edit Solid Drawing Layout dialog box
To add a cross-section view to the drawing layout, choose the

Add Section button. You can define the cross-section view
based on a straight horizontal or vertical line through any
point in the part, a zigzag cross-section, or a 3D plane. In
addition to selecting the point(s) or plane where you want
the section to divide, you can set a color, scale factor, and
location for the section view. When you create a section view,
short line segments are added to all the applicable views,
showing the precise location and orientation of the section.
Use the Add View button to add a defined view to the
drawing layout, and optionally, choose a color and scale
factor for the new view.
The Add Detail button allows you to create detail drawings

that zoom in on small sections of a part. You can define a
detail view using a rectangle or circle. In addition to defining
a zoom area for the detailed view, you can set the color, scale
factor, and location of the new view.
Figure 2-187: Example: Solids Drawing Layout
Mastercam places the new drawings on a new level so you can easily
keep them separate from your original part. The default level is 255,
but you can specify a different level before saving the layout.
TIP: You can use the Layout function multiple times, for the
same solid or for different one. Each time you create a new
layout, make sure you select a new level for it (unless you want
to replace the existing layout).
Solids Manager
Use the Operations Manager pane in the Mastercam window to
access the Solids Manager tab and view information on each solid in
the current file.
Figure 2-188: Solids Manager
You can expand the tree structure of a solid to view all operations that
were performed to construct the solid and any toolpaths that were
created on the solid.
In addition to listing the operations that define a solid, the Solids
Manager tab provides options for managing and editing solids and
solid operations. To access these options, rightclick a solid or operation in the list. The following section describes how to use the Solids
Manager and some of the functions you can perform.
Note: Solids that you import from other applications have no
operation history and are referred to as bricks; the list reflects
only the operations that you perform on the imported solid once it
is in Mastercam.
IMPORTANT: You cannot use the Undo Event function, available from the Edit menu, to reverse a change you make from
the solid operation history tree.
Topics in the next section introduce the tools you use to work with
solid models, including:
Checking Solid Models (page 333)

Viewing and Naming Solid Models on page 335
Editing Solid Models on page 337
Checking Solid Models

You can check solid models for errors using the following tools:
Analyze Check Solids (page 266)

Suppress solid operations (page 333)
Roll back a solid (page 334)
Suppress solid operations

The Suppress function lets you build a solid without factoring in
selected operations. This enables you to check the model in various
states without having to delete and recreate operations.
X To suppress an operation:
1 From the Solids Manager tab, select the solid operation to
suppress.
2 Rightclick and verify that the operation is not already
suppressed (no check mark appears next to this option in the

menu).
3
Choose Suppress. This activates the feature for the selected

operation and removes the operation from view in the
graphics window. In the rightclick menu for the selected
operation, a check mark indicator appears next to the
Suppress function and the icon in the Solids Manager
appears unavailable.
To restore a suppressed operation, select it from the Solids Manager,

rightclick and choose Suppress from the menu. Mastercam restores
the operation to the graphics window and removes the check mark
from the function in the menu.
IMPORTANT: Use the Suppress function only as a temporary

measure of the models integrity, and pay careful attention to
the actions you take while operations are suppressed. Due to
the dependent nature of solid operations, your actions could
render the model invalid when you restore the suppressed
operations.
Notes:
While an operation is suppressed, you cannot edit its parameters or geometry or select it for use in any other operation.
This function is not available for base operations.
If an operation does not appear in the graphics window but
does not have a check mark next to the Suppress option, it is
dependant on a prior operation and that operation is
suppressed. The dependant operation can be viewed (unsuppressed) only by unsuppressing the operation on which it is
dependent.
Roll back a solid

To mark the end of the operations that define a single solid entity, all
solids listed in the Solids Manager, including tool bodies, end with a
stop operation (Stop Op) icon.
To roll back (revert) a solid to an earlier stage in its development, you can move the Stop Op icon to a different position
in the solids operation list. When a solid is in a rolled back
state, Mastercam rebuilds the model only to the stop point.
All operations beyond the stop point are suppressed and appear
unavailable in the operation list.
The roll back feature is commonly used to identify and fix invalid
operations or to build a model one operation at a time when you are
editing operations.
TIP: When a solid is rolled back, operations that you perform

are added to the end of the active operations in the model
(before the stop point) instead of at the end of the operation
list. Therefore you may find the roll back function a useful way
to insert an operation in the middle of the operation list instead
of adding it to the end of the list and then dragging to the
correct position, which sometimes fails due to operation
dependencies.
Notes:
The stop operation is inserted after the operation on which you
release the mouse button.
To return the solid to its original state, drag the Stop Op icon to
the last operation in the list. When you release the mouse
button, the operation is inserted after the final operation in the
list.
Viewing and Naming Solid Models

Use the following tools to view and name solid models:
Rename solids and solid operations (page 335)

Highlight solid operations (page 336)
Identify a solid operation based on its geometry (page 336)
Expand and contract solid operation details (page 336)
Rename solids and solid operations

The names you assign to solids and their operations can help identify
them when viewing the Solids Manager list. When you perform a solid
operation, you can assign it a unique name or accept the default
name, which reflects the operation type (for example, Extrude Cut,
Boolean Remove, Fillet).
Unlike solid operations, solids cannot be assigned unique names
when you create them. However, you can rename both solids and
solid operations at any time using the Rename option in the Solids
Manager rightclick menu.
X To rename a solid or operation:
1 From the Solid Manager tab, select the solid or operation to
rename.
2 Rightclick and choose Rename.
3 Type the new name and press Enter or click elsewhere in the
Mastercam window.
Note: You can also rename an operation by editing the operations
parameters and entering a new name in the Name field.
Highlight solid operations

Use the Auto-Highlight feature to quickly identify the faces of wireframe geometry associated with a solid operation. This feature can
help you verify that the correct operation has been selected, prior to
editing.
Auto-highlighting is a toggle setting you access from the Solids
manager tab rightclick menu. Its status is on (indicated by a check
mark in the list) or off (no check mark).
If auto-highlighting is on, whenever you select an operation

in the Solids Manager, the solids wireframe geometry in the
graphics window changes to the Solid Face Select Color that
was set in the Settings, Configuration, Colors properties
page. The geometry remains highlighted until you select a
different operation or leave the Solids Manager.
If Auto-Highlight is turned off, manual highlighting is
enabled. In this state, the highlighting lasts for only a couple
of seconds then disappears.
Note: For more information on configuring colors for your
Mastercam installation, see Colors on page 76.
Identify a solid operation based on its geometry

You can identify an operation in the Solids Manager by choosing
Select and selecting geometry (a solid face) in the graphics window.
Mastercam matches the selected geometry with the operation
defined by the geometry.
This function is particularly useful when you are working on a
complex solid that has a large number of operations. You can quickly
identify the operation you are looking for rather than checking
multiple operations using highlighting.
Expand and contract solid operation details

The Solids Manager lists the operation history for each solid in the
current file. You can expand or contract the tree structure of a solid to
show or hide a list of operations that define the solid. Likewise, you
can expand or contract the tree structure of each operation to show or
hide its editable components (for example, parameters and geometry).

Figure 2-189: Solid Manager views, contract and expand
To expand or contract a tree structure, click the plus (+) or minus

(-) sign preceding a solid or solids operation (or double-click the
item).
Note: Imported solids have no operation history. The tree structure of an imported solid lists only the operations that have been
performed on the solid since it was imported into Mastercam.
Editing Solid Models

The Solids Manager provides a number of tools and functions for
editing solid models. In this section, you will learn to:
Edit solid parameters (page 337)

Edit solid attributes (page 339)
Delete solids and solid operations (page 339)
Regenerate solids (page 340)
Duplicate solids (page 341)
Change the order of solid operations (page 341)
Edit solid parameters

You can edit the parameters that define a selected operation. Some of
the original defining parameters, however, may not be editable. For
example, you cannot change an extrude, revolve, sweep, or loft operation from a create to a cut or boss, but you can change any of these
operations from a cut to a bossprovided the change would not
create disjoint bodies. There are no parameters available for editing
Boolean and Trim operations. For these operations, you can edit only
their geometry. To change the actual Boolean and Trim operations,

you must delete and recreate them.
X To edit solid parameters:
1 From the Solids Manager tab, use one of the following
methods to access the operations parameters dialog box for a

selected operation:
Click the Parameters tab in the operation list.

Select the operation, rightclick and choose Edit Parameters. Mastercam opens the dialog box you use to define
the operation parameters.
2 Use the dialog box fields and options to edit parameters, as
necessary.
3 To accept your changes and close the dialog box, click OK.
IMPORTANT: Changing operation parameters or geometry

may require you to regenerate the operation (indicated by a
red X on the solid and the operation icons), or may result in an
invalid operation (indicated by a red question mark on the solid
and operation icons). Take the appropriate steps to restore the
operation and solid status to clean.
Edit solid geometry

You can edit solid operations that are defined by geometry, for
example, chains, or edges. Each solid operation is associated with the
solid on which the operation is performed. Changes that you make to
an operations geometry (for example, adding or deleting selections)
affect only the selected operation and its associated solid. Mastercam
does not support edits that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid, but does support the creation of brick solids by Trim
and Boolean (Remove, Common) operations.
X To edit solid geometry:
1 From the Solids Manager tab, use one of the following
methods to access the edit geometry functions for a selected

operation:
Click the Geometry tab in the operation list.

Select the operation, rightclick and choose Edit Geometry.
If you select an Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Loft operation,
Mastercam opens the Solid Chain Manager dialog box.
If you select any other solid operation, the cursor is positioned in the graphics window. Use the prompts work with
the operations geometry.
2 Save your changes using the available options.
Note: Geometry cannot be edited for Boolean (Add, Remove,

Common) or Primitive (Cone, Block, Cylinder, Torus, Sphere)
operations.
Edit solid attributes

You can edit a solids attributes by accessing the Solid Attributes
dialog box from the Solids Manager.
X To edit solid attributes:
1 From the Solids Manager, select a solid name from the list.
2 Right-click and choose Attributes.
3 Use the Solid Attributes dialog box fields and options to view
and edit one or more of the following attributes of the

selected solid
Level
Color
Note: Although they appear in the dialog box, the Line Style and
Line Width fields are not currently used with solid models.
4 To accept your changes and exit the dialog box, choose OK.
TIP: You can also use the Analyze function from the Analyze
menu to edit the level and color attributes of a selected solid.
For more information, see Changing Entity Attributes on page
142.
Delete solids and solid operations

When you delete a solid, Mastercam automatically deletes all operations associated with the solid. When you delete an operation, all
dependant operations are also deleted. For example, if you delete an
extrude operation on which a fillet operation has been performed, the
fillet operation is deleted with the extrude operation.
Base operations or tool bodies cannot be deleted. However, if you

delete a Boolean operation, its tool bodies are restored as distinct
solids that are no longer associated with the target body.
IMPORTANT: Deleting a solid operation is a permanent
change. You cannot use the Undo Event Or Undelete entity
functions to reverse the deletion.
X To delete a solid or solids operations:
1 From the Solids Manager, select the solid or solid operation
to delete.
2 Press the Delete key or rightclick and choose Delete.
Note: When you delete operations, Mastercam marks the corresponding solid with a dirty status. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.
Regenerate solids
Regeneration is the process of rebuilding a solid so that it matches its
associated operations. Regeneration is required when a solid
becomes dirty or invalid due to changes that you make to the parameters and/or geometry of one or more of the solids operations. When
you regenerate a solid, Mastercam incorporates your changes into the
solid and restores the solid to a clean state, if possible. Regeneration
fails if a solid has one or more invalid operations. You must edit and
correct invalid operations before you can successfully regenerate
them.
TIP: When making many changes to a model, regenerate
often. Then, if regeneration fails, you will have to make fewer
corrections to return the operation to a valid state. In the Solids
Manager, you can use the right-click menu to regenerate a
selected solid.
X To regenerate a dirty solid:
1 From the Solids Manager tab, select a solid or any compo-
nent operation.
2 Rightclick and choose Regen Solid.
If Mastercam cannot restore the solid and/or operation to

a clean status, error messages indicate the nature of the
problem and you must make the necessary corrections.

Then repeat this procedure.
If the regeneration is successful, the solid and the operation appears clean in the Solid Manager list.
TIP: To regenerate all operations, choose the Regen All button
in the Solids Manager or choose Regen All Solids from the
rightclick menu.
Duplicate solids
You can make exact copies of solids, including tool bodies. Each copy
is an active solid that you can select and edit. This function is particularly useful if you want to use the same tool body to affect different
target solids.
X To duplicate a solid:
1 From the Solids Manager, select the solid to copy.
2 Rightclick and choose Duplicate Solid. The duplicate solid
and all operations appear directly below the original in the

Solid Manager tree.
Note: The Duplicate Solid option appears in the rightclick menu
only when you have selected a solidnot a solid operationin
the Solid Manager.
3 Use Rename and other functions to edit the cloned copy of
the solid, as necessary.
Change the order of solid operations

The Solids Manager lists the operations that define each solid in the
current file. The operations are listed in the order in which they are
performed on the solid. You can change the order by dragging operations to new positions in the operation list. Mastercam automatically
rebuilds the solid based on the new operation order.
The selected operation is inserted after the operation on which you
release it. As you drag an operation, the cursor changes to a downward arrow if the move is allowed or to a circle with a slash through it
if the move is not allowed.
Observe the following guidelines, when repositioning operations:
A base operation cannot be repositioned; it is fixed as the first

operation in the list. No other operation can precede it.
If you move an operation that is dependant on one or more

operations, it must occupy a position below its parent
operations.
If you move an operation on which other operations are
dependant, you must position it above its dependant operations.
DESIGN / Drafting 343
Drafting
Use functions in the Create, Drafting menu and its submenus to work
with drafting entities. In this section, you will learn to create and
modify different types of drafting entities, and apply them effectively.
This section contains information on:
Drafting Dimensions on page 343

Smart Drafting Dimensions on page 344
Baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions on page 345
Working with Ordinate Dimensions on page 347
Non-Dimensioned Drafting Entities on page 349
Associating drafting entities with geometry on page 352
Defining Drafting Options on page 355
Drafting Dimensions
Drafting dimensions measure the size of geometric entities or the
distances or angles between entities. All dimensions contain text, up
to two leader lines, and/or up to two witness lines.
Figure 2-190: Drafting dimensions
To create drafting dimensions for geometric entities, you use functions in the Drafting Dimension and Ordinate submenus. Mastercam
supports linear, angular, and radius/diameter dimension formats,
and for each format, a variety of dimension types.
Linear dimensions measure the length of a line or the

distance between two points and include the following
dimension types: horizontal, vertical, parallel, perpendicular,
baseline, chained, and tangent. You can also use horizontal
and vertical dimensions to measure the radius or diameter of

arcs and circles.
Radius/diameter dimensions display rotating leader lines

and measure the radius or diameter of arcs and circles.
Angular dimensions measure the angle formed by any of the
following: two non-parallel lines, two points and a line, three
points, or by a line and a horizon (a virtual line is defined by
specifying an angle relative to the X axis of the Cplane).
Note: For more information on baseline, chained, and ordinate
drafting entities, see page 345.
TIP: You can assign drafting entities to their own level, which
makes it easy to filter the display of drafting entities, as necessary.
Smart Drafting Dimensions

Smart Drafting Dimensions is an intelligent, modal drafting
environment you use in conjunction with the Dimension
ribbon bar to quickly create and edit dimensions applied to
geometric entities. To activate Smart Drafting Dimensions,
choose the Smart Drafting Dimensions function in the Create,
Drafting submenu.
Most of the singular dimension functions that appear in the Create,
Drafting, Dimensions and Ordinate submenus (such as Horizontal,
Vertical, Parallel) can be accessed directly from the Dimension ribbon
bar.
Witness
Position
Format / Type
An
gl
Al e
ign
Qu
ad
ran
t
Ad
dl
Re ead
mo ers
ve
lea
Op
de
rs
ti o
Up ns
da
te
Ho
riz
Ve onta
rti l
c
Lo al
ck
Or
ien
ta
tio
n
Fo
nt
Te
xt
He
ig
Nu ht
m
Di ber
am
Ra ete
di r
Bo us
x
W
it
Ce ness
nt
Ar ered
row
s
Figure 2-191: Dimension ribbon bar
Alignment
Leaders
Options
With Smart Drafting Dimensions, you can dynamically create and

edit dimensions for lines, circles, and arcs using select, drag, and draw
techniqueswithout selecting any other Drafting menu functions.
You can also edit and reposition notes and labels.
Dimension Ribbon Bar Shortcut Keys

All Dimension ribbon bar functions have shortcut keys, making it
easy to modify the type and format of drafting entities. For example,
when dimensioning a closed arc in Smart Drafting Dimensions, the
default dimension type is diameter (D). To change to radius, type R
after selecting the dimension, or as you drag and draw the dimension.
To change it back to diameter, type D.
TIP: To become familiar with ribbon bar shortcut keys, activate
Learning Mode in the Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings
page. When Learning Mode is active, you can view all shortcut
keys associated with ribbon bar options by moving the mouse
over the ribbon bar.
Baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions

Baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions are similar in that they
reference other dimensions and are created as a series of dimensions.
These dimensions are useful in applications such as sheet metal
design, where you specify a grid pattern for drilling holes.
To create these types of dimensions:
From the Create, Drafting, Dimension submenu,

choose Baseline Dimension.
From the Create, Drafting, Dimension submenu,
choose Chained Dimension.
Choose a function from the Create, Drafting,
Dimension, Ordinate submenu (For more information, see
Working with Ordinate Dimensions on page 347.)
Dimensions that reference a single base point (baseline or ordinate)
or an adjacent dimension (chained) and highlight the distances
within or between entities can be easier to understand and to
program than dimensions that measure individual geometry.
There are some differences in how baseline, chained, and ordinate
dimensions measure and display distances. These differences are
discussed below and may affect your choice of which dimension is
most appropriate in a given situation.
Figure 2-192: Baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions
Baseline Dimensions
Baseline dimensions reference an existing linear dimension which
becomes the base, or zero point, for all baseline dimensions in the
series. Baseline dimensions inherit their orientation from the initial
dimension but are not associated. Create baseline dimensions when:
Associativity is not important

Stacked display and orientation suits the rest of the
drawing
Measurement from a common reference point is desired
Chained Dimensions
Chained dimensions, like baseline dimensions, are linear. However,
instead of referencing a single base point, each dimension in a chain
references the previously created dimension. Chained dimensions
inherit their orientation from the initial dimension but are not associated. Create chained dimensions when:
Relative associativity is important

Stacked display and orientation suit the rest of the drawing
Measurement of interval between points is desired
Ordinate Dimensions
Ordinate dimensions reference an initial base ordinate dimension
that you create or select and whose position Mastercam designates as
zero. Because they are not linear, ordinate dimensions give you
greater flexibility with regard to positioning, alignment, and orientation. Base (parent) or secondary (child) ordinate dimension may be
associated with geometry. Create ordinate dimensions when:
Associativity is important
Non-linear display and flexible positioning, alignment, and
orientation suit the rest of the drawing
Measurement from a common reference point is desired
Working with Ordinate Dimensions

While non-linear in format, ordinate dimensions can display tolerances. The base dimension is an initial ordinate dimension that you
create or select and whose position Mastercam designates as 0.0000.
For each child dimension, Mastercam calculates its distance from the
base dimension to determine its text value. Base or child ordinate
dimensions may be associated with geometry independently of each
other. However, if a change in geometry causes an associated base
ordinate dimension to become dirty, all children of that dimension
become dirty as well. (For more information, see Associating drafting
entities with geometry on page 352.)
Use the following options from the Drafting menu to create and
modify ordinate dimensions.
Ordinate, Horizontal Ordinate Dimension

Choose this function to create horizontal ordinate dimensions that measure the horizontal distance, from a common
base point, along the X axis of the current Cplane.
Figure 2-193: Ordinate, Horizontal Ordinate
Dimension
Ordinate, Vertical Ordinate Dimension

This function allows you to create vertical ordinate dimensions that measure the vertical distance, from a common
base point, along the Y axis of the current Cplane. The
following example shows a vertical ordinate dimension.
Figure 2-194: Ordinate, Vertical Ordinate Dimension
Ordinate, Parallel Ordinate Dimension

With this function, you can create parallel ordinate dimensions that measure the distance, from a common base
point, along the axis formed by two points that you enter.
The following example shows a parallel ordinate dimension.
Figure 2-195: Ordinate, Parallel Ordinate Dimension
Ordinate, Add to an Existing Ordinate Dimension

Use this function to add secondary, or child, ordinate
dimensions to an existing ordinate base dimension that you
select and which Mastercam designates as 0.0000.
Ordinate, Window Ordinate Dimension

To create multiple sets of ordinate dimensions from a
common origin (base point), choose the Ordinate, Window
function. Then set parameters for dimensioning the selected entities

in the Ordinate Dimension: Automatic dialog box.
Figure 2-196: Drafting, Ordinate Window dialog box
Once you set a base point and other dimension parameters,

Mastercam automatically creates a base (parent) dimension and all
possible child dimensions relative to this point based on the selected
parameters and entities.
You can create horizontal and/or vertical ordinate dimensions, and
create dimensions at the center points of arcs, the endpoints of arcs,
and/or the endpoints of lines, splines, and surface curves. Using this
method saves time because you create many ordinate dimensions at
once, eliminating the need to enter individual points.
The ordinate dimensions you create using this method are not associated with any geometry; however, child dimensions are associated
with the base point.
Ordinate, Align Ordinate Dimension

Choose this function to select, reposition, and align the text
of all related ordinate dimensions along a common axis.
Aligning ordinate dimensions can improve neatness in a
drawing while highlighting their relatedness. However, if
aligning the ordinate dimensions interferes with other entities in the
drawing, you can use the Dimension Ribbon bar Align option to move
a selected ordinate dimension independently from the others.
Non-Dimensioned Drafting Entities

Non-dimensioned drafting entities do not measure the size of
geometric entities or the distances or angles between entities. They
consist of freestanding witness and leader lines, notes, and hatch
patterns. Each Drafting function you use to create non-dimensioned

drafting entities is described below.
Create Witness Line

Use this function to create freestanding witness lines. You
can associate freestanding witness lines with the geometry
you select during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity, such as midpoints, endpoints, center
points, or quadrant points.
Create Leader Line

In Mastercam, leader lines (drafting lines with single arrowheads that function as pointers) most often point from a
dimensions text to its witness lines. Unless you turn off the
display of leader lines, Mastercam creates leader lines automatically when you create dimensions. You can use this function to
manually add leader lines with or without note text to create labels or
freestanding leader lines.
Create Note
This function allows you to create drafting notes and labels,
and as an alternative way to create freestanding single,
segmented, or multiple leader lines. Drafting notes and
labels are blocks of text (one or more lines) which you can
insert into a drawing. Notes are standalone blocks of text, whereas
labels have one or more leader lines used as pointers.
Figure 2-197: Drafting Note dialog box
You enter note or label text by typing it or by loading it from an ASCII

file. You can also create line and paragraph breaks within a block of
note or label text.
Create X-Hatch
To fill a selected closed curve boundary with a specific
hatch pattern, use the Hatch function and choose from
standard and user-defined patterns.
Figure 2-198: Drafting Hatch dialog box
Figure 2-199: User-defined Hatch dialog box
You can also customize the spacing, and rotation angle of the selected
pattern.
Note: Hatch patterns fill closed boundaries, with the exception of
nested chains which form holes in the pattern.
Associating drafting entities with

geometry
In Mastercam, you can associate drafting entities (dimensions, labels,
leaders, and witness lines) with geometric entities. If the geometry
changes size or position, you use functions in the Drafting, Regen
submenu to regenerate associated drafting entities to reflect the
change. Regenerating associated drafting entities eliminates the need
to recreate new drafting entities each time the geometry changes.
Note: Use the Settings, Configuration, Dimension Settings
properties page to activate drafting associativity and further
define its parameters. For more information, see Drafting Dimension Properties on page 82.
Read the following topics for more information on:
Creating Associated Drafting Entities (page 352)
Changing Associated Drafting Entities (page 353)

Associated Drafting Entity Status (page 353)
Regenerating Associated Drafting Entities (page 354)
Creating Associated Drafting Entities

You can configure Mastercam to turn associativity on or off for
drafting sessions. For most drafting applications, you work with associated entities because of their labor-saving benefits.
You can associate labels, freestanding leader lines and witness lines,
and the following dimension types:
horizontal
vertical
parallel
perpendicular
baseline
angular
circular (diameter, radius)
ordinate (base only)
tangent
point
Notes:
Chained dimensions cannot be associated with geometric entities.
For more information on setting drafting configuration
parameters, see Defining Drafting Options on page 355.
To be associated, you must use Mastercam to create a drafting entity
for a selected geometric entity when the Associativity parameter is
selected (active) for the drafting session.
TIP: For preliminary drawings, it may be easier to work with
non-associated drafting entities when geometry is frequently
changing, parts are not drawn to scale, precise or current
dimensions are not essential, or you want to lock original
dimensions in place.
Changing Associated Drafting Entities

Once a drafting entity is created, you cannot change it from associated to non-associated, or vice versa. You can only delete the existing
drafting entity and create a new one that has the desired property. If
you delete geometry with an associated drafting entity, Mastercam

prompts you to delete the associated entity or dissociate it.
Associated Drafting Entity Status

The status of an associated drafting entity is clean or dirty, depending
on whether it currently matches its associated geometry. Each status
is defined below.
CleanThe drafting entity's position and value (if a dimension)
match the geometry. This status applies to a newly created or regenerated dimension.
DirtyThe drafting entity's position and/or value do not match the
geometry. This status occurs if you move or resize an object without
regenerating associated dimension. Dirty dimensions are highlighted
in a specific color (red is the default color).
Regenerating Associated Drafting Entities

When you create associated drafting entities, changing the size or
position of geometry changes the status of associated drafting entities
from clean to dirty.
Regenerating the drafting entity updates its position and/or value so
that they match the geometry. You typically regenerate associated
drafting entities after you:
Resize an entity to update the associated dimensions value.

Move an entity to also move the associated dimension.
Modify / trim an arc so that a dimensioned quadrant point is
no longer valid. Mastercam prompts you to convert the
dimension to a radius/diameter format or to dissociate it.
Notes: Use one of the following methods to specify regeneration
parameters:
Dimension Settings page from the Settings, Configuration
function.
Settings tab of the Drafting Options dialog box (Create,
Drafting, Drafting Options).
To regenerate associated drafting entities, choose one the following
Regenerate options from the Create, Drafting, Regen submenu.
Automatic Dimension Regen

Use this function to regenerate all associated drafting entities automatically during the current drafting session,
whenever a change in geometry requires it.
Select Dimension for Regen

This function allows you to select the associated drafting
entities you want to regenerate.
Regen All Dimensions

Choose this function to immediately regenerate all associated drafting entities.
Validate Dimension Regen

This function lets you regenerate all drafting entitiesassociated and non-associated. It runs each entity through the
regeneration process, recreating or reformatting the entity
based on the Drafting Options parameters used in the
current drafting session.
Note: Only associated drafting entities can be regenerated.
However, you can validate both associated and non-associated
drafting entities.
Defining Drafting Options

To edit parameters that define drafting entities, choose the Drafting
Options or Dimension Multi-Edit function from the Create, Drafting
menu. Both functions open the Drafting Options dialog box.
However, you use the Options function to make changes that apply
only to all new drafting entities that you create. Use the Multi-Edit
function to change the characteristics of existing drafting entities that
you select in the graphics window.
Figure 2-200: Drafting Options dialog box
Another important difference between these functions is that the

Options function lets you view and modify all Drafting Options pages,
(Dimension Attributes, Dimension Text, Notes Text, Leaders/
Witness/Arrows, Setting).
With the Dimension Multi-Edit function, you view and modify only
the pages with parameters that are associated with the drafting entities you select. For example, if you do not select drafting entities that
are notes, the Notes Text page does not appear.
To set drafting parameters in the Drafting Options dialog box, define
parameters in each page: Dimension Attributes, Dimension Text,
Notes Text, Leaders/Witness/Arrows, and Settings.
IMPORTANT: The changes you make using the Drafting
Options and Dimension Multi-Edit functions apply only to the
current Mastercam session. To save drafting parameters with
your Mastercam configuration file, use the Settings, Configuration function.
DESIGN / Power User Tips 357
Power User Tips

Power user tips go beyond design basics to help you master advanced
Mastercam CAD features, including:
Working with Levels (page 357)

Hiding Entities (page 361)
Blanking Entities (page 361)
Copying Entities (page 362)
Working with Levels

A Mastercam file can contain separate levels for wireframe, surfaces,
drafting entities, and toolpaths. By organizing your files into levels,
you control the areas of the drawing you want to be visible at any time
and the entities you can select. This control makes it easier to work
with the file, and helps prevent you from affecting areas of the
drawing you do not want to change.
Setting the Main Level

Using the Level Manager Rightclick Menu (page 359)
Creating Level Sets (page 359)
Setting the Main Level

In Mastercam, you can create and name up to 2 billion levels and set
any one to be the main level. For each level you create, you assign a
unique number and, optionally, a name. The main level is the current
working level. Any geometry that you create is always placed on the
main level. There can be only one main level at a time but you can
change the main level as often as necessary to work with the part. The
current main level appears in the Level field in the Status bar to help
you keep track of the level you are working in.
To set the main level using the Status bar
Level field:
Type the level number in the field.

Click the drop-down arrow in the Level field and choose a
level from the MRU list.
Click the Levels button to open the Level Manager dialog box.
Figure 2-201: Level Manager dialog box

Column sorting arrow
Visible level indicator
Hidden level
Main level
Set main level by typing the number
Set main level by selecting an entity

in the graphics window
In the Level Manager dialog box, the main level is highlighted

in yellow. Take any one of the following actions to set the
main level:
Click once on the level number in the Number column.

Choose a level to select it, then rightclick and choose
Make Main.
Type a number in the Main Level Number text box.
Choose the Select button. The Levels Manager dialog box
minimizes so that you can return to the graphics window
and select an entity on the level that you want to use.
When you select the entity, the Level Manager dialog box
expands and shows the main level set to the level of the
selected entity.
Using the Level Manager Rightclick Menu

The Level Manager offers an extensive rightclick menu you can
choose from, including:
Make Main: Use this option to set the selected level as the
main level.
All Selected On: This option acts as a filter and makes all entities in the levels you select in the Level Manager dialog box
visible in the graphics window.
All Selected Off: Similar to the previous option, choose this
option to suppress all entities in the selected levels from view
Get Named Levels: Use this option to load a previously saved
.CSV (comma separated value) file containing a level and
level set naming scheme into the current file.
Save Named Levels: Allows you to save all levels and level set
names in the current file as a .CSV file for reuse in other
Mastercam files.
Report: This option creates a text-based report of all level
details defined in the Levels Manager dialog box. You can
edit, print, and save this report to a file.
The following options are available only when you right-click in the
Level Set column.
All Level Set On: This option lets you view a set of levels
based on their Level Set name.
All Level Set Off: Use this option to hide a set of levels based
on their Level Set name.
Creating Level Sets

Creating sets of levels helps you to organize levels. Only one set name
can be assigned per level.
X To create a set or assign a level to a set:
1 In the Levels Manager dialog box and Level Set column,
double-click to access an editable cell.

2 Type the level set name.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all levels you want to assign to the
same named set.
Notes:
To sort all levels by set name, click the Level Set column
heading.
To show or hide a set of levels based on their Level Set name,
right-click in the Level Set column cell of one member of the
set and choose All Level Set On or All Level Set Off.
Reusing Level Names (Save/Get)

Use the Get Named Levels and Saved Named Levels functions
(available in the right-click menu of the Levels Manager dialog box) to
save all levels and level set names and reuse them in other Mastercam
files. This allows you to standardize a naming scheme and use it in
other Mastercam files without having to manually recreate it in each
file. This standardization makes it easier to share files between work
stations, other departments in your organization, and with other
companies.
X To save all levels to a file:
1 After you define levels and set names in the Levels Manager
dialog box, right-click in any column and choose Save

Named Levels.
2 Use the fields in the Save as dialog box to save the named file
to a specified location.
Notes:
The CSV file format is compatible with many applications,
including Microsoft Excel.
You can also manually create a CSV file in Excel. An Excel CSV
file usually contains three columns of information: level
number, level name, and level set name. Level number and
level name columns are required, while the set name column is
optional.
X To get saved levels from a file:
1 Rightclick in any column in the Level Manager and choose
Get Named Levels.

2 Use the fields in the Open file dialog box to navigate to the file
location and select the .CSV file to use.
3 Click Open to copy the levels and level set names defined in
the specified file to the current file.
Hiding Entities
To temporarily remove and restore selected entities in the graphics
window display, use the following Hide and Unhide functions, available from the Screen menu.
Hide Entity
Use this function after selecting the entities you want to
keep in the graphics window. It temporarily removes all
unselected entities from view in the graphics window,
allowing you to focus on a small amount of geometry. If
hidden entities already exist in the file, this function acts as a toggle to
unhide them.
Hide more entities

This function is available only if hidden entities already
exist in the file. It allows you to select additional entities
from the current display and remove the unselected entities, hiding even more entities from view.
Unhide some
You use this function only if you are already working with a
file that contains hidden entities. It displays only the entities that are hidden and allows you to select the entities you
want to unhide and add back to the graphics window
view.
Blanking Entities
You use the following Blank and Unblank Screen menu functions to
selectively remove and restore a limited number of entities from the
graphics window view.
Blank Entity
To reduce the complexity of the screen display, choose this
function and select the entities to remove from view in the
graphics window. You can select entities on any level.
Unblank Entity
If blanked entities exist in the file, use this function to
unblank them and restore all previously blanked entities
to the graphics window.
IMPORTANT: There are important differences between the
Blank and Hide functions:
With Hide, you select the entities that will remain in the
graphics window; all unselected entities are removed.
With Blank, you select only the entities to remove.
You can save blanked entities with a file; hidden entities are
not saved.
Choose Hide to remove many entities from the display, or to
quickly restore hidden entities.
Choose Blank to selectively remove and restore a limited
number of entities from the display.
Copying Entities
The Edit menu provides you with basic Cut, Copy and Paste functions.
You can also access these functions using their keyboard shortcuts,
Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V, respectively. These functions allow you
to cut, copy, and paste selected entities between different Mastercam
files.
IMPORTANT: Only geometry and drafting entities are copied
between files. Toolpath operations and machine, control, and
toolpath-related data are not transferred with the selected entities.
X To cut, copy, and paste entities:
1 Use general selection methods to pre-select the entities to
cut or copy.
2 Choose the Cut or Copy function or type Ctrl+X or Ctrl+V.
This places a copy of the selected entities in the Windows

clipboard.
Note: Cut entities to remove them from the existing file. To leave
the existing file unchanged, Copy the entities.
3 To save the selected entities to another file, choose one of the
following methods:
Close the current file, open a new or existing file, and

choose Paste or type Ctrl+V to paste the entities.
Open another Mastercam session and file (new or
existing), and choose Paste or type Ctrl+V to paste the
entities. When you paste the selected entities, they are
live.
4 Use options in the Paste ribbon bar to override the entity
attributes for color, level, line style, point style and line width.
Se
tt
om
ain
Se
c
tt
o m olor
ain
Se
li
tt
o m ne s
tyl
a
Se
e
t t in p
o m oin
ts
a
Se
t t in lin tyle
om e
ain wid
lev th
el
Figure 2-202: Paste ribbon bar
5 To exit the paste function, press the Esc key, or choose
another Mastercam function.
chapter 3
Machining
This chapter describes the creation of NC code using Mastercam X,
beginning with an overview of the Mastercam machining process. You
will learn about selecting machine and control definitions, which determine the functions and toolpaths available in the interface. You will also
review the different toolpath operations you can create, their application, verification, and the Mastercam X post processing process.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Machining Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 366

Choosing a Machine and Control Definition . . . . . . . page 367
Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files . . . . . . . . . page 413
Setting Machine Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 421
Creating Toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 439
Backplot and Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 548
Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 558
Machining Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-page 564
Power User Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 565
366 MASTERCAM X/ Reference Guide
Machining Process Overview

This outline represents an overview of the Mastercam CAM workflow.
It identifies each major step in the process.
1 Choose a machine type and machine definition that will be
used to cut the part.

2 Open or import a part file.
3 Set the machine group properties, including file, tool, stock,
and safety zone settings.

4 Create toolpaths and apply them to geometry.
5 Verify and edit the toolpaths using the Toolpath Manager,
Backplot and Verify functions.

6 Post process selected machine group operations.
Note: For an overview of Machine Definitions, Control Definitions and Post Processors, and their relationship, see The Role of
Machine and Control Definitions on page 100.
MACHINING / Choosing a Machine and Control Definition 367
Choosing a Machine and Control Definition

Mastercam machine definitions allow you to run multiple Mastercam
product types, such as Mill, Lathe, and Router, from a single
Mastercam window. You can work with one or more of these products
within the same part file simply by choosing a different machine definition from the Machine Type menu.
Figure 3-1: Example: Machine Type Menu
3
32
3
34
The machine definition files you create for each product have unique
file extensions that represent the selected machine type:
.MMD (Mill)
35
.LMD (Lathe)
.RMD (Router)
In a Mastercam part file, the machine definition is part of the
machine group properties in the Toolpath Manager. When you select
a machine type, a new machine group and toolpath group are created
and the Toolpaths menu changes. It lists only the toolpath functions
you can use with the associated machine definition.
The machine definition used with the machine group also determines
which Mastercam product is active in the workspace. For example,
selecting a mill machine definition activates Mastercam Mill and
makes mill toolpaths available under the Toolpaths menu.
Note: Each machine group can have only one machine definition.
Mastercam creates a separate machine group and toolpath group
each time you choose a machine type from the Machine Type
menu.
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-2: Example: Toolpath Manager

Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager tabs
Toolpath Manager
functions
For each selected machine

definition, a separate
machine group is created.
You can create one or

more toolpath operations
per toolpath group.
Toolpath Manager
list. Right-click in
the list to access
an extensive menu
of functions.
Insert arrow
The machine definition you access from the machine group is a local
copy of the master machine definition. The master machine definition is stored in an external file. The copy is created from this external
file when you select the machine definition and is stored locally
within the part file. There is no associative link between the master
machine definition file and the part file copy. This independent,
portable structure allows you to move the part to another Mastercam
workstation and transfer the required machine and control definition
information. You can also modify aspects of the machine definition in
a machine group without affecting the machine definition and
control definition files stored in Mastercam.
IMPORTANT: A copy of the post processor is not stored with
the part file. If you move the part file to another Mastercam
workstation, you must also transfer the post processor.
Selecting a Machine Definition (page 369)

Editing Machine Definitions (page 371)
Working with Control Files and Control Definitions (page 374)
Selecting a Machine Definition
32
Before creating toolpaths, you must first choose a machine definition.

X To select a machine definition and create a new machine group:
1 From the Machine Type drop-down menu, choose Mill,
Router, or Lathe to open a submenu of existing machine

definitions for the selected machine type. Then perform one
of the following actions:
If the machine definition you want to use appears in the

submenu list, select it.
Otherwise, choose the Select option. From the Open
dialog box, navigate to the location of the machine definition file you want to use and select it.
3
34
35
2 When you choose a machine definition, Mastercam auto-
matically creates a machine group and a toolpath group in

the Toolpath Manager. The machine definition becomes
active and the toolpath group appears selected.
36
37
Use the Toolpath Manager to modify the machining properties including Files, Tool settings, Stock setup, and Safety
zone parameters.
38
3 Use Toolpaths functions to create toolpath operations for the
active machine group.

Note: You will learn more about Setting Machine Group Properties on page 421 and Creating Toolpaths on page 439.
39
310
X To change an existing machine groups machine definition:

1 From the Toolpath Manager pane, open the active machine
group and click Files.

2 In the Machine Group Properties dialog box Files tab, click
Replace in the Machine - Toolpath Copy section.
Use options in the Open Machine Definition File dialog box

to select another machine definition.
To accept the selected machine definition and exit the dialog

box, click Open.
4 To copy the selected machine definition to the current part
file and active machine group, click OK. This closes the
Machine Group Properties dialog box .
5 Mastercam interrogates each toolpath operation in the active
machine group for compatibility with the selected machine

definition and, for each, takes one of the following actions:
Not compatible: The machine definition change cannot

be accepted. For example, this condition would apply if
you selected a 5-axis mill and created 5-axis toolpaths,
then attempted to change to machine definition to a 3-
axis mill. No change is made to the machine group

machine definition.
Compatible, but requires change: A warning informs you

that the machine and control definition are compatible
but changes must be made to the operation. For example,
you create a contour operation using a machine definition
that supports using cutter compensation in the control
definition then change the machine definition to one with
a control that does not support cutter compensation. You
can let Mastercam automatically replace the machine
definition with one that is compatible and modify one or
more operations as necessary, or you can choose not to
replace the machine definition.
3
32
3
If you choose to have Mastercam replace the machine

definition, you can select the Details button to preview
the changes Mastercam will make to the operations.
After changing the machine definition, you may need
to regenerate operations.
34
Note: To manually override the changes, edit the operations after

changing the machine definition.
35
If you do not allow Mastercam to make the changes,

the operation status remains dirty, and you must
manually correct the problem before regenerating the
toolpath.
36
Fully compatible: The operation is fully compatible with

the selected machine and control definition. The toolpath
status remains clean and no regeneration is necessary.
Editing Machine Definitions

You can use different methods to edit a machine definition, including:
37
38
Machine Definitions Manager function

Machine Group Properties, Files tab
39
310
CAUTION: The method you use to edit a machine definition

determines whether you update only the local copy saved with
the part file, or the master version stored in an external file.
Before you make any changes, carefully review the information
in this section.
Machine Definition ManagerChoose one of the following methods
to edit only the master machine definition. This does not automatically affect any local copies of the machine definition stored in the
part file. However, if you are working with a part file that contains a
machine group, when you save any changes to the master machine
definition, you can also choose to save them to the local copy.
Choose Machine Definition Manager from the Machine

Type menu.
Choose Machine Definition Manager from the Machine
Definition toolbar
Both access methods allow you to edit only the master machine definition file that is stored as an independent file; changes are not made
to the local copy of the machine definition stored in the part files.
Machine Group Properties File tabChoose one of the following

methods to edit only the local copy of the machine definition in the
part file (this does not affect the master machine definition stored in
the Mastercam database):
From the Toolpath Manager list, open the machine group

and choose Files.
From The Machine Group Properties dialog box, select the

Files tab.
Then click Edit in the Machine - Toolpath Copy section to open the
Machine Definition Manager.
3
32
3
There are some things you cannot change when editing the local copy
of the machine definition and control definition. These include:
Modifying the list of post processor files available from

control definition.
Editing the axis combinations.
34
35
Removing a rotary axis (typically a C axis) from a lathe.

Modifying the machine definition in a manner that makes it
totally incompatible with operations in the machine group.
If the changes you make require operations to be modified, or would
make the machine incompatible with operations in the machine
group, Mastercam performs an integrity check requiring actions
similar to those described for changing a machine group's machine
definition on page 370.
Notes:
When you access the Machine Definition Manager from the
Machine Group Properties Files tab, notice that its menu bar
does not include a Save option. This is because any changes
you make to the machine definition apply only to the part file
and are automatically saved when you save the part.
You can use the Files tab in the Machine Group Properties
dialog box to modify the machine definition and control definition, and even select a different machine and control definition, provided they support existing toolpaths in the machine
group.
36
37
38
39
310
Working with Control Files and Control

Definitions
The Control Definition Manager is your tool for working with control
definitions. Use it to:
Create and edit control definitions that represent the

machines control properties
Define default data paths and file locations for operations
based on the control
Define default post processing settings and communication
Settings
Write post text and miscellaneous values to the post
processor
Create and modify toolpath defaults and save them to
.DEFAULTS files
Store all of these settings in a control file (.CONTROL)
Each Mastercam control file is a library of individual control definitions that you create and save in the file using the Control Definition
Manager. Each control definition consists of two components:
A selected control type. Control types are predefined by

Mastercam and include mill, lathe, router, mill/turn, and
wire (mill/turn represent a lathe machine definition with a
rotary axis).
A selected post processor file (.PST). You determine the post
processors that are available for each control type by making
their location and filenames known to the Control Definition
Manager.
Note: The selected post processor file is not saved in the
.CONTROL file, only its data path and file name are saved as a
reference to the external .PST file. However, in the .PST file, a
unique subrecord is stored for the text you define in the Control
Definition Manager Text properties page.
After choosing the control type and post processor, use the Control
Definition Manager Control properties pages to configure properties
for the control definition such as tolerances, work system preferences,
NC output, text entries, and more. When you save the control definition, Mastercam stores all of this information in the control file as a
single control definition for this unique control type/post processor
combination.
A single control definition file can store one or more control definitions for each control type. For each control type, you can create as
many control definitions as necessary, provided that they use
different post processors.
If you are a new Mastercam user, you may find it easiest to define only
one control definition per .CONTROL file. Advanced users can
leverage the .CONTROL architecture to store libraries of applicationspecific posts for individual controls, configure generic controls for
multiple machines, and support other sophisticated applications.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Accessing the Control Definition Manager

Use one of the following methods to open the Control Definition
Manager dialog box.
From the Machine Type menu, choose Control Definition.

From the Machine Definition toolbar, choose Control
Definition.
From the Machine Definition Manager dialog box, choose

the Edit Control Definition option from the menu bar.
Editing Options
When you access the Control Definition Manager with an active
machine group in the Toolpath Manager list, your editing and
creation options are limited. This is because you are restricted to
working on the local copy of the machine and control definition,
which is part of the machine group and is stored in your part file. In
this case, you can save changes only to the local copy stored in the
machine group; you cannot save any changes to the .CONTROL file,
nor can you create a new control definition, or select a different
.CONTROL file.
You can change the control type and define a new control definition if
no toolpaths exist in the current part file when you access the Control
Definition Manager (either from the Machine Type menu or the
Machine Definition toolbar). Otherwise, because you are working
with the local copy of the control definition, the control type is
already defined and this field cannot be selected for change, as illustrated in the following example. In some situations, the Post processors button may also be unavailable.
Figure 3-3: Example: Control Definition Manager dialog box
View a list of all control

definitions that have been
saved in the .CONTROL file.
Create a new control definition by

selecting a control type and post
processor from the drop-down lists.
3
32
View and edit the list of

post processors for the
selected control type.
View and edit

properties pages for
the control definition
by choosing a Control
topic from the list.
Enter descriptive information

about the .CONTROL file.
Enter descriptive information

about the control definition.
Properties page information displays

here for the selected control topic.
View interactive tips about the selected

Control Definition Manager properties page.
Editing a Control File

IMPORTANT: Before editing controls, you need detailed
knowledge of the control and access to the control programming manual from the machine / control manufacturer.
X To edit a .CONTROL file:
1 From the Machine Type menu, choose Design.
3
34
35
36
37
38
2 From the File menu, choose New.

3 From the Machine Type menu, choose Control Definition to
open the Control Definition Manager dialog box.
39
310
4 In the Control Definition Open Options dialog box, choose
Open:
5 In the Open dialog box, select the control file you want to edit
and click Open.

6 Use the steps below to edit an existing control definition:
a Click the Existing definition button to list all control defi-
nitions in the selected .CONTROL file .

b In the Existing Definitions List dialog box, select a control
type from the list and click OK.

TIP: You can also edit a control definition by using the Control
type and Post processor drop-down lists to select it.
7 To change the post processor for the selected control, choose
one from the drop-down list. If the post processor you want
does not appear in the list, click the Post Processors button
to add it. (You will learn more about this in Building the Post
Processor List on page 379.)
Note: When you change either the control type or the post
processor, Mastercam searches the .CONTROL file and checks if
that control definition has already been created. If it already
exists, Mastercam loads it. If not, it is created when you save your
changes.
8 Modify descriptive information for the control file in the
Manufacturer field, and, for the selected control definition,

in the Description field, as necessary.
9 Use the Control topics list to select a properties page or sub-
page and set various control file properties. For more information, see Working with Control Properties on page 383.
10 Use one of the following methods to save changes to the
control definition:
To save the modified control definition to the

current .CONTROL file and exit the Control
Definition Manager, choose OK.
To save the modified control definition to the
current .CONTROL file and remain in the
Control Definition Manager, choose Save.
To create a new control file by saving all
existing control definitions, including the one
you modified, to a new .CONTROL filename,
choose Save as. Then choose Yes to confirm
your selection and continue with Step 11.
11 This step applies only if you chose the Save as option. In the
3
32
3
34
Save as dialog box, complete the following steps:

a The original filename prefix displays in the File name
field. Type the name you want to assign to the new

.CONTROL file.
35
b To save the file to a location other than the default
(\cnc_machines\ in the Mastercam installation location),

use options to navigate to the target location.
c Choose Save to create the new control file and exit the
36
Save as dialog box.

IMPORTANT: When you use the New option to create a new
control file, select the control type before doing anything else.
If you select the control type after entering other data,
Mastercam assumes that you are changing the control type for
the current control (based on the active machine group),
instead of creating a new one.
Building the Post Processor List

Use the Post processors button in the Control Definition Manager
dialog box to manage the list of post processors that are compatible
with the selected control. This list displays in the Control Definition
Manager (post processor drop-down list), and in the Machine Definition Manager when choosing the control definition for a machine
definition. In some situations, for example, when working with a local
control definition stored in a part file, this button is not available.
37
38
39
310
Note: To learn about posting operations, see Post Processing on

page 558.
X To add post processors to the list for a selected control type:
1 Use one of the methods described in Accessing the Control
Definition Manager (page 376) to open the Control Definition
Manager dialog box.

2 In the Control Definition Manager dialog box, click the Post
processors button.
3 In the Control Definition Post List Edit dialog box, choose
Add files.
4 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of one or
more post processor files to add to the .CONTROL file. Then

use Windows standard methods to select the files and choose
Open.
5 To continue adding post processors, repeat Step 3Step 4.
Otherwise, click OK to exit the Control Definition Post List

Edit dialog box.
X To delete post processor from the list for a selected control
type:
1 Use one of the methods described in Accessing the Control
Definition Manager (page 376) to open the Control Definition
Manager dialog box.

2 In the Control Definition Manager dialog box, click the Post
processors button.
3 In the Control Definition Post List Edit dialog box, use
Windows standard selection methods to select one or more

post processor files to delete from the list. Then choose
Delete files. The selected files are deleted only from the list,
removing their association with the selected control definition. They are not deleted from the hard drive. When you exit
the Control Definition Manager, the control definitions
assigned to the deleted post processors are also deleted from
the .CONTROL file.
X To view a list of all control definitions that have been stored in
the current control file:
1 In the Control Definition Manager dialog box, choose
3
32
3
Existing definitions.
34
35
36
2 To load a control definition, choose one from the Existing
Definitions List dialog box and click OK.

Note: The control definition that is loaded into the machine
group and saved with the part file is only the individual control
definition for a single control type-post combination, not the
entire contents of the .CONTROL file.
Validating the Control File / Post Processor

Before you can create an NC program using a particular post
processor (.PST file), it must be properly configured. A properly
configured post processor file meets the following criteria:
A control definition that associates the post processor with a

specific control type has been created and saved to a
.CONTROL file.
37
38
39
310
Using the information in the control, Mastercam has verified

the location of the .PST file that is stored on your system and
has verified that it is actually there.
A subrecord header exists in the .PST file with the control
type and name of the .CONTROL file followed by the post text
for the control. This header is automatically created when
you set up the control. The format of the header is:
[Product key | Control Key]
where
Product key =
CTRL_MILL, CTRL_MT_MILL,
CTRL_LATHE, CTRL_MT_LATHE,
or CTRL_ROUTER
Control Key =
.CONTROL filename
When you select a post processor for a control definition, the icons
that display next to each post processor indicate its status for meeting
these criteria. The following table defines each possible status icon
you may see in this list:
The .PST file exists and the post processor has been properly configured in the control definition. Status is OK for
posting. This is the only status that is approved for posting!
Mastercam cannot find the .PST file and the post processor
has not been configured in the Control Definition Manager
properties pages.
The .PST file exists and the post processor has been added.
You see this icon when you first add a post processor to the
list and have not yet saved the control definition. Save the
control definition to the .CONTROL file to change its status
to OK.
The post processor has been configured in a control definition, but Mastercam cannot find the .PST file. This status
can appear if you move the part file to another workstation
that does not have the necessary .PST file loaded on it, or
the file is not in the specified location.
The .PST file exists but has not been configured for use
with a control definition. Select the post processor and
create a control definition with it. You can use it after you
save the control definition to the .CONTROL file.
Unknown; Mastercam is unable to determine the post
processor status. Try saving the control definition to see if
this corrects the problem and restores the status.
IMPORTANT:
The post status icons do not indicate that a post has been
properly customized for a particular machine or application.
Creating a control definition and configuring the post as
described here is not a substitute for writing, editing, and
properly testing the .PST file to make sure that its output is
compatible with a particular machine. That must be done in
addition to the steps described here, and is outside the
scope of this documentation. For more information, contact
your Mastercam reseller or see the MP Post Processor
Reference Guide.
In previous versions of Mastercam, you could select a post
processor whenever you posted an operation. In Mastercam
X, the machine definition encompasses the control definition and the post processor. This expanded architecture
replaces the post you used in prior versions, allowing you to
target a specific machine for your output. To change post
processors in Mastercam X, simply choose a different
machine definition. Mastercam interrogates the operations
against the post and machine dynamics associated with the
selected machine definition, allowing you to make automatic
or manual changes, as necessary.
3
32
3
34
35
Working with Control Properties
36
The Control Definitions Manager provides a number of different

properties pages you use to define controls. In this section, you will
learn about the settings in each page, including:
37
Tolerances (page 384)
Arc (page 396)
Communications
(page 385)
Rotary (page 398)
Files (page 386)
Feed (page 399)
NC Dialog (page 387)
Cutter Compensation
(page 400)
NC Output
(page 389)
Machine Cycles
(page 401)
Subprograms (page 405)
Miscellaneous
Integer / Real Values
(page 390)
38
39
310
Work System (page

392)
Operation Defaults (page

406)
Tool (page 393)
Text (page 408)
Linear (page 395)
Tolerances
The properties you define in this page are used to set pre-defined post
processing variables. You can also record the controls minimum
tolerance requirements for creating surfaces, splines, and other
geometry. The minimum and maximum arc radius values may be
used by the toolpath filtering functions.
Figure 3-4: Tolerances properties page
(Control Definitions Manager)
Note: Only Mastercam CAM functions use the tolerances you

define here. To set tolerances for CAD functions, use the Settings,
System Configuration function and dialog box. For more information, see Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on
page 68.
Communications
Use the Communications page to configure the serial communications settings between the control and the computer running
Mastercam.
Figure 3-5: Communications properties page
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Files
Use this page to specify the location of the files needed by the control
definition and to establish default settings for saving different types of
files. You can change the default operations file (.DEFAULTS), tool
library (.TOOLS), or the operations library (.OPERATIONS) for a
particular machine group, assign a default .SET Setup Sheet template,
and set post and C-Hook / NET-Hook program .DLLS.
Use the other option groups in this page to configure the posting
process, including how to log post processing errors and messages,
setting up Post Processing dialog box defaults, and defining how to
manage NC parameters.
Figure 3-6: Files properties page
The File usage and Data paths fields list the different types of items
for which defaults can be set. Select an item to see the current default
displayed in the field next to it. Choose the Folder or File cabinet
icons to select a new value.
Other options allow you to define how Mastercam logs errors and
display messages when using the control.
Notes:
When creating a new control definition, the default names and
paths of the toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) files are read from
the Settings, Configuration, Files properties page settings. For
more information, see Files on page 73.
Use the Control Definition Manager, Tool properties page to
edit and create new toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) files. For
more information, see page 393.
NC Dialog
Use this page to enable different options in the Toolpath parameters
tab for Mill, Router, and Lathe. Deselect any features that are not
supported by the control.
Figure 3-7: NC Dialog properties page
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Notes:
The Rotary axis button is enabled through the Machine Definition Manager.
All control types use this page, but not all options appear for
each type.
NC Output
You can set a number of options that affect how the NC code is
formatted and presented, including:
Absolute/incremental, Post file debug, Comments in NC (page

389)
Sequence numbers (page 389)
3
32
Spaces and end-of-block characters (page 390)

Figure 3-8: NC Output properties page
3
34
35
36
37
All control types use this page.
38
Absolute/incremental, Post file debug, Comments in NC

The selections you make in these sections are defaults you can
override when using the control. For example, you can modify NC
comments using the Files tab in the Machine Group Properties
dialog box.
Sequence numbers
All of the information in this section is written directly to the
control definition. Mastercam supports both integer and real
39
310
values for sequence numbers. To activate this feature, choose Use

decimal sequence numbers. When decimals are enabled, you can
enter real numbers in sequence numbers fields, limited by the
Number of places you specify.
You can override the Initial sequence number and Increment
sequence number fields using the Files tab in the Machine Group
Properties dialog box.
Note: This section centralizes information that was set in several
locations in previous Mastercam versions.
Spaces and end-of-block characters

The values you set in this section are read directly by the post
processor.
Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values

Miscellaneous values are custom variables that you can define in your
post processor. Use this page in combination with the Text properties
page to create sets of custom variables or parameters you can use
within toolpath operations for the selected control. You can enter
more specific values for them when creating a toolpath. You can also
create different default values for specific operation types and store
them in the .DEFAULTS file.
TIP: For most toolpaths, you can access an option to Automatically set to post values when posting by choosing the
Misc values button in the Toolpath Parameters tab. When you
select this option, the values stored in the post are read automatically. This effectively disables all the other miscellaneous
values controls and prevents you from changing or overriding
them for a single operation.
You can create a set of integer variables, and a set of real

(decimal) variables.
Each set can include up to 10 different variables.
The variables you define display in the Miscellaneous values
dialog box, where you enter specific values for each operation.
TIP: Use the Control Definition Manager, Text properties page

to customize the descriptions and default values for fields that
display in the Miscellaneous text and values section of the
Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values properties page. For more
information, see page 408.
Figure 3-9: Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values properties page
3
32
3
34
35
36
The descriptions and defaults you define in the Text properties page
are saved in the text section of the post processor file (.PST). The
Control Definition Manager reads the .PST file to display this information in the Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values properties page.
The values you set in the Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values properties page for the selected control are saved in the post processor file.
The field labels are set in the Text properties page, and the values are
defined in the Misc. Int / Real page.
This data structure allows you to quickly customize a set of miscellaneous values using an existing post processor.
37
38
39
310
IMPORTANT: If no description is provided for a miscellaneous integer field in the Text properties page, default text
appears in the corresponding entry field in the Miscellaneous
Integer / Real Values properties page. To disable a field, use
paired double quotes ().
For mill/turn controls, you can define two sets of miscellaneous variables, one for milling and one for lathe operations. To enable this
feature, choose the Use separate mill and lathe text and values
option. Separate mill and lathe Misc. Int/Real topics display under
Text in the Control topics list.
Notes:
Use the NC Dialog page to enable or disable the Misc values
button that displays in the Toolpath parameters tab. You can
use post text to change the label that appears on the button.
You can also configure Mastercam to run a C-Hook when the
Misc values button is pressed. Use the Settings, System
Configuration function Files tab to specify the C-hook. You
can specify a different C-Hook for each Mastercam product
(Mill, Lathe, Router and Wire). For more information, see Files
on page 73.
Work System
The Work system page lets you select the work coordinate system
used by the control:
Setting
Typical post interpretation
Home position
G90/91
Local work offsets
G92
Work offsets
G54, E1
Other
Custom
Note: In previous versions of Mastercam, these parameters were

typically set in the Miscellaneous values dialog box (by entering 0,
1, or 2).
Figure 3-10: Work System properties page

3
32
3
34
35
Use the Tplane field to assign work offsets to all Tplanes or just those
which are being transformed.
Tool
Use the Tool subpages to set the defaults for tool offsets, numbering,
and home positions that apply to mill, lathe, router, and mill/turn
control types (some of the field labels are slightly different for lathe).
For mill/turn machines, you can access separate subpages for mill
and lathe tools.
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-11: Tool properties page

Tool offsetsChoose one of the following methods used to transmit

tool offset information to the post processor:
Read tool offsets directly from the tool definition

Create an offset number based on the tool number plus the
number you enter here
Note: You can override the tool offset default in the Tool Settings
tab of the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
Tool numbersSelect the options that describe how the post
processor handles tool numbers and head/station numbers.
Home positionThe home position is where the tool goes for tool
changes. You can set the home position in several different places,
including:
Machine Definition
Tool Definition (Lathe)
Toolpath Parameters for an individual operation
Use this section to set the default source of the home position. You
can always override the home position default on an operationspecific basis.
Linear
This page applies to Mill, Lathe, Router, and Mill/Turn control types.
(Only Lathe machines have corner rounding options.) Use these
options to define how the control interpolates 3D linear motion.
Note: For Mill/Turn controls, separate linear subpages for Mill
and Lathe are provided so you can configure these settings separately.
Figure 3-12: Linear properties page
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
For each plane, choose one of the following options:
Do not break linear motion. Allow 3D interpolation for both

rapid and feed rate moves.
Break rapid moves in two components (for example, an X-Y
move component followed by a Z move component), but
allow 3D interpolation for feed rate moves.
Break all moves, including both rapid and feed rate (the post
is responsible for breaking the feed motion).
38
39
310
TIP: To link duplicate fields in each plane control section and

make them easier to maintain, select the option to Automatically set duplicate dialog items the same. This allows you to
change only one field and update all duplicate fields in this
page.
IMPORTANT: Plane definitions apply to the tool direction, not

the linear axis direction.
After setting the linear motion for each plane, use the Corner
rounding / Exact stop fields to define how the control handles corner
rounding. Before selecting the exact stop mode for corner rounding,
verify that this mode is supported by the post processor.
Arc
This page allows you to define how the control supports arcs and
helixes.
Figure 3-13: Arc properties page
Lathe controls share the same page with Mill/Router controls, except
that for Lathe, there is only one plane available and no options for
helix support. For Mill/Turn controls, you will see separate subpages
for Mill and Lathe settings. Mastercam uses this information when
filtering toolpaths.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Rotary
Use the settings in this page to further customize the rotary axis
parameters from the machine definition. You can choose to break
rapid rotary moves when they exceed the rotary axis limits set in the
machine definition. You can also allow Mastercam to calculate
bi-stable solutions for rotary axis positions. This allows the post
processor to attempt the second solution in order to stay within limits
or reduce machine motion. Depending on conditions and the post
processor, this may cause a tool retract and reposition.
Rotary properties page
Select the planes in which the control can create arcs.

Settings in this page are disabled for unselected planes. For
mills, indicate whether helixes are supported and, if so, in
what planes.
For each plane in which arcs are supported, choose how the
control defines the centerpoint. Select a method from the
drop-down list.
Indicate whether the control allows 360-degree arcs. If it does
not, define whether to break the arcs at quadrants or
180-degree increments.
Select the error check routines to process when posting.
Feed
The options in this page allow you to define how Mastercam interprets the feed rate values that are entered for each toolpath operation
created using the control.
Figure 3-14: Feed properties page
3
32
3
34
35
36
Set feed and rotary options for each axis group that applies to
the control: 3-axis, 4-axis, and 5-axis.
37
Define how the units for the feed rate are dimensioned. Set
the dimensions separately for linear and rotary feed rates.
You can also choose to output rapid moves as linear moves at the
maximum feed rate and, if necessary, adjust feed rates for arc moves.
38
Notes:
Make sure that the control has the internal logic to support the
options you select.
To set maximum and minimum feed rates, use the Machine
Definition Manager.
39
310
Cutter Compensation
Use this page to define how the control implements cutter compensation, and to enable the compensation options when the control is
used.
Figure 3-15: Cutter Compensation properties page
The first check box defines whether the control supports cutter
compensation at all. Select this option to enable and set other options
in this group. These options include:
Whether the control allows you to activate cutter compensation on arc moves.
Wear compensation features (when you use this control to
create toolpaths, the wear compensation features you
selected for the control appear in the list of available
compensation types).
Whether the control turns cutter compensation on/off above
the part (this feature is implemented in the Lead In/Out
dialog box).
Use the second group of options to set cutter compensation when
simulating toolpaths. These settings affect the Toolpath Manager
Backplot and Verify functions.
Machine Cycles
Use the subpages of machine cycle properties to define how the
control implements different machining cycles.
Figure 3-16: Machine Cycles properties page
3
32
3
34
35
36
For mill/turn machines, an additional option is added to this page:

Use separate mill and lathe drill cycle enable options. When
selected, this option creates separate subpages for mill and lathe drill
cycles, allowing you to independently set and maintain their options.
37
All control types use the same version of this page. In the following
section, you will learn to use additional detail pages to set more
specific options for drill cycles and lathe canned cycles, including:
38
Drill cycles
Lathe canned cycles (page 403)
39
310
Drill cycles
Select all drill cycles that produce canned cycle output. The drill
cycles that you do not select in this page can still be used in the toolpaths you create with this control. However, using them results in
long-hand NC code.
Figure 3-17: Mill Drill Cycles properties page
Note: Custom drill cycles always result in long-hand code.
Figure 3-18: Lathe Drill Cycles properties page

3
32
3
34
35
For mill/turn machines, you can maintain separate versions of this

page for mill and lathe drilling operations. There is a separate page for
activating and configuring lathe canned cycles.
36
The options you set in this page affect the following lathe toolpath
tabs:
Lathe drill cycle parameters tab

Mill/Router drill cycle parameters tab
Note: To edit the name / label of each cycle, and to specify parameters for each cycle, use the Control Definition Manager, Text
page. For more information, see page 408.
Lathe canned cycles

You can also define how the control supports other canned cycles
besides drilling. To enable each toolpath type supported by the
control, select the corresponding check box. When using the control,
if you try to create a non-supported toolpath, an error message
displays. If the canned thread cycle is not selected in this properties
page, you can still create a thread toolpath when using the control.
However, the option to generate canned cycle code is not available.
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-19: Lathe Canned Cycles properties page

(Control Definitions Manager
Groove and thread toolpaths also have a number of secondary

options for supporting specific features. These correspond directly to
options and fields that appear in the parameters tabs when using the
control with the selected machine type to create toolpaths. Options
that are not enabled in this properties page are disabled or hidden.
The options you set in this page affect the following lathe toolpath
tabs:
Canned groove shape parameters tab

Canned groove rough parameters tab
Thread cut parameters tab
Subprograms
Mastercam uses subprograms in two ways:
Transform subprograms are created by toolpath transform

operations.
Non-transform subprograms are created by depth cuts and
drilling operations. Non-transform subprograms are available only with Mastercam Mill and Router.
In the Subprograms properties page, you define how the control
supports both types of subprograms.
Figure 3-20: Subprograms properties page
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
Options in the Mirror / rotate routines section apply only to transform subprograms. Select the transformation types for which the
control can create subprograms. When transforming toolpaths, you
can still use the options you did not select in this page. However,
Mastercam will create long-hand output rather than subprograms for
the unselected options.
39
310
Operation Defaults
Use this page to create and edit sets of toolpath operation defaults.
These defaults are stored in files with a .DEFAULTS extension. Each
file contains default settings for all Mastercam toolpath types. The
number of operation defaults files you can create is virtually unlimited. When creating toolpaths, you can override and further
customize the operation default settings that are loaded from the
.DEFAULTS file.
Figure 3-21: Operation Defaults properties page
TIP: Use the Control Definition Manager, Files page to assign

a .DEFAULTS file to the control definition. This assignment sets
the default values for any operations created while the control
is active. For more information, see Files on page 386.
Separate Inch and Metric pages let you create and maintain individual default files for inch and metric operations.
Note: Use the Settings, Configuration function to define whether

inch or metric mode is the preferred Mastercam default. This preference is not defined in the control definition. For more information, see Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on
page 68.
3
32
Editing and saving a .DEFAULTS file on page 407

Creating a new .DEFAULTS file on page 407
Editing and saving a .DEFAULTS file

X To edit and save changes to a .DEFAULTS file:
1 Click the Operation Defaults, Inch or Metric subpage under
34
the Operation Defaults heading in the Control topics pane.

2 Choose the Open button to select a .DEFAULTS file to edit.
Mastercam looks for .DEFAULTS files in the path that has

been set in the Control Definition Manager, Files page.
35
3 Select the file to edit. The operations tree displays in the
control definition dialog box where you can edit individual

operation settings.
36
4 Choose Save to write the changes to the file. If the control
definition is not used in the active machine group, choose

Save As to create a new file.
37
Creating a new .DEFAULTS file

X To create a new .DEFAULTS file:
1 In the Control Definition Manager dialog box, choose New
38
from the menu bar.

2 Select the unit type (Inch or Metric) for the new defaults file.
Mastercam displays a tree listing of prototypes for each operation. The current control type determines which operations
are listed.
3 Edit the parameters for each operation as desired. You can
also create subgroups to create multiple saved settings for

individual toolpath types.
39
310
4 Choose Save when you are done. Mastercam writes the
.DEFAULTS file to the directory specified in the Files page.
Text
Use the individual subpages under the Text heading in the Control
topics pane to create, view, and edit post processor text entries in a
number of categories.
Prior to Mastercam X, posts were divided into two files:
A .PST file, which contained post variables, questions, and

other processing logic
A .TXT file, which contained text data used by the post
processor and which was frequently used to customize the
Mastercam interface with machine- or control-specific
parameters.
In Mastercam X, all of the post controlled text in the .TXT file has been
brought into the control definition, and its text strings are now part of
the .PST file. Instead of editing the .TXT file directly, you now use the
Text page in the Control Definition Manager to access the text data in
the .PST file.
Note: Most subpage categories correspond to the standard headers
previously used in the .TXT files before Mastercam X; others are
new categories added by Mastercam X to the .PST file.
Mastercam's control definition architecture means that each .PST file
can have several sections of post text. Every time you configure a post
processor for use with a specific control definition, Mastercam writes
a new post text record and appends it to the .PST file. The records are
separated by headers which contain the name of the control and type
of machine. For example, the header:
[CTRL_MILL|BPT-DX32]
refers to a Mill control definition which is stored in a control file
named BPT-DX32.CONTROL. This means that in a single .PST file,
you can store different sets of post text with unique values for
different controls.
In addition, there is a section in the .PST file that contains default post
text. Use the rightclick menu in any of the Text subpages to import
post text sections from other control definitions in the same .PST file
or from completely different .PST files, or to restore values from the
defaults.
Figure 3-22: Text properties page

3
32
3
34
35
Choose a topic from the list to view its text entries in a spreadsheetlike interface. To enter or edit a value, doubleclick in a field and type
the new value.
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-23: Example: Text properties subpage
Note: For misc. ints/reals, the default values are embedded in the
text string. For more information, see Miscellaneous Integer /
Real Values on page 390.
Rightclick Menu Options

For more editing options and to import text from other sources, use
the following options that display when you rightclick in the Text
properties page.
IMPORTANT: The rightclick menu is available only when you
rightclick in a row that is in use and in a column other than
Description.
Import: Import to an entire sheet, a category, a single cell, or

all text pages from another post processor, or import an
entire sheet from a .TXT file created with a prior version of
Mastercam.
Default: Choose the source of the default values for the
current sheet, category, cell, or all text pages, either systemwide default values, or the post processor default. The post
processor default is the generic text as was originally found in

the post text file.
Restore: Replace the contents of a sheet, category, cell, or all

text pages with the system default values.
Export: Write the current sheet to a delimited text (.TXT) file.

Save as Default: Select this option to save the post text under
the Post text header in the specific control file and under the
default header for post text. The default text is used as the
source of the default text values, as defined above for the
rightclick menu Default option. It is also used as the source
of default text values when you select the post processor in
the Control Definition Manager.
How Mastercam processes the entries

The following table shows how Mastercam processes different types
of entries.
32
3
34
Type of text entry
What Mastercam writes

to the PST file
35
Text field is empty; no

default values.
Any empty fields are not written to

the .PST file. If all fields under a
header are empty then the category
header is not written. System default
text is displayed where the text is used
in Mastercam.
36
Text field is empty;

non-zero default
values.
System default text is displayed where

the text is used in Mastercam. A category header is generated.
(Misc int/real default values are
written to the .PST file.)
two double quotes;

no default values
two double quotes;

non-zero default
values
is written to the .PST file with

default values of 0. The entry field in
the control definition properties page
is disabled. A category header is
generated.
is written to the .PST file along with
the default values. The entry field in
the control definition properties page
is disabled. A category header is
generated.
37
38
39
310
Type of text entry

Any text
What Mastercam writes

to the PST file
If the entered text exactly matches the
system text, no text is written to the
.PST file. This reduces the amount of
text stored in the post processor file.
When using this post processor on a
workstation set to another language,
the system text from the local
computer displays.
If the entered text does not match the
system text, it is written to the .PST
file and a category header is generated.
MACHINING / Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files 413
Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files
32
Using Open dialog box options (page 413)

Opening and Importing Files (page 416)
Merging Pattern Files (page 418)
Using Open dialog box options

When you choose the File menu Open and File Merge / Pattern functions, the same Open dialog box displays. Before using the procedures
in this section to open, import, and merge files, take a few minutes to
become familiar with the basic features and functions of the Open
dialog box.
Figure 3-24: Open dialog box
Current path
Options
34
35
36
37
38
39
Use the Files of type drop-down list to choose the format of the files
you want to view and select from. This limits the files you can view to
only files in the selected format.
310
If you select a non-Mastercam file type from the Files of type list, an
Options button displays next to the field:
Use this button to open a dialog box of read parameters for the
selected file type. The parameters are used to import and convert the
file you choose to open. The example below illustrates options for
opening and importing an SAT file type:
Note: The default values in read parameters dialog boxes are

based on settings defined in the Settings, Configuration,
Converters properties page. For more information, see Setting
Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on page 68.
To navigate to the location of the file you want to open, use the Look
in drop-down list located at the top of the Open dialog box. Or use
additional options in this dialog box to view and select the file:
Up one level: Navigate and view files in the next highest
level directory / subdirectory.
View desktop: Navigate and view files saved to the
computer desktop.
List: List only file names in the current directory.
Details: List file names in the current directory and other

file details such as file type, and modified date.
Preview: Split the dialog box into two vertical panes. As
you select a file in the left-most pane, a thumbnail image
of the files geometry displays in the right-most pane.
Bitmap: Display a single page containing all thumbnail
images and file names in the current directory (use the
horizontal scroll bar to view the contents of the list).
Options: Opens a dialog box of options you can use to
reduce the load time, and the amount of navigation
required to open and save files. (The directory default
you set is applied to both file open and file save functions.)
3
32
3
34
Setting File Open Options

When you choose Options from the Open dialog box, use the
following drop-down list to select the options, and then click
outside of the list to close it.
35
36
37
Restore entire NCI file on Open
Deselect this option to defer loading the entire .NCI file until a
toolpath regeneration, when it is automatically loaded and
updated.
Select this option to load the entire .NCI file at the same time
you open the part file.
You can also reduce the amount of navigation required to open files
used with Mastercam by presetting their directory paths. This is especially helpful when working with large groups of related files. Choose
one of the following options:
Use Last Directory: Use the path that was set when any file of
any type was last opened or saved.
38
39
310
Use Default Directories: Use the file directory settings from

the Mastercam configuration file as the default directories for
each file type.
Use Project Directory: Resets the path to a specified location. Choose this option, and then click the Browse button
(...) to navigate to the destination path.
Note: You can also set the directory default and other options
using Options in the File, Save as dialog box. The directory
default setting is applied globally to file open and save as functions.
Switching Units of Measure

When opening a file, if the selected file does not use the same unit of
measure (English or metric) as the current configuration file, the
System Configuration (switch units) dialog box displays. This dialog
box informs you that Mastercam must switch units by loading the
alternate default configuration file.
Select one of the following options to switch units and open the
selected file:
Units: Uses only the units defined in the new configuration file. (default)
All settings: Loads all settings from the new configuration
file.
Opening and Importing Files

Use the File, Open function to open files including Mastercam
formats such as .MCX, .MC9, or .MC8, and a number of supported
neutral file formats such as .IGES, .DWF, .STL and others. Supported
file formats are immediately converted to the current Mastercam
format (MCX) when you open the file in Mastercam.
Notes:
If you do not have Mastercam Solids installed, you can still
machine an imported solid. However, Mastercam Solids must
be installed to modify a solid, or create additional solids (with
the exception of primitives).
You can also save .MCX files out to any supported file format.
For more information on the files types you can import and
export, see Opening and Translating Files on page 103.
X To open a native Mastercam part file:
3
32
3
1 From the Mastercam menu, choose File, Open.

2 In the Open dialog box, use the Files of type drop-down list
and select MCX, MC9, MC8 or MC7.

3 Use other options to navigate to the file location, select the
34
file, and choose Open.

4 If the selected file uses the same unit of measure (English or
metric) as the current configuration file, skip to Step 5.

Otherwise, in the System Configuration (switch units) dialog
box, choose Units or All settings to switch units and load an
alternate default configuration file.
5 When opening the selected file, Mastercam automatically
runs an integrity/efficiency check to remove instabilities in

the file. It verifies the information stored in the file, such as
associativity, machine and toolpath groups, operations,
tools, and more.
35
36
37
If the file passes the integrity check, you can begin

working with it.
If problems are detected, Mastercam reports detailed
information on all errors it finds. In some cases, you can
choose to have Mastercam fix the errors, or use the
Details option to view, print, and optionally save the error
details to a file. Before working with the file, you must
manually correct any reported problems.
38
39
310
TIP: If you also want Mastercam to check for and delete duplicate entities at the same time, use the Settings, Configuration
function Start / Exit properties page to set this default. Duplicate entities interfere with entity selection, particularly
chaining.
X To import a non-Mastercam file:
1 From the Mastercam menu, choose File, Open.
and select a non-Mastercam file format.

3 To set import parameters:
a Choose Options.
b In the read parameters dialog box for the selected file
type, complete the fields as necessary.

c To accept the parameters and return to the Open dialog
box, click OK.

4 Use other Open dialog box options to navigate to the file
location, select the file to import, and choose Open.

The selected file is imported and converted to the current
Mastercam format (MCX) using the settings in the Configuration, Converters properties page and, if applicable, the
import read parameters you defined in Step 3. In most cases,
the default machine definition is assigned to the imported
file.
Merging Pattern Files

You can import entities from another file and merge them into the
current file. The File menu File Merge / Pattern function and ribbon
bar allow you to quickly add entity features, such as nuts or bolts, that
are used repeatedly in the part. Rather than recreate an entity each
time you need it, just import it into the current file as many times as
necessary.
Note: In addition to geometric entities, such as lines, surfaces, or
solids, you can import annotated data, such as drafting dimensions. However, toolpaths cannot be imported due to their
complex nature.
X To merge a pattern file into the current file:

1 From the Mastercam menu, choose File, File Merge /
Pattern.
and other options to navigate to the file location.

3 Select the file containing the entities you want to add to the
current file and choose Open. The entities in the selected file
are added to the file in the local origin position (X0, Y0, Z0)
and the Top view. The merged entities are live so that you
can edit them.
4 Use options in the Merge / Pattern ribbon bar to select a new
32
3
base point for placing the merged entities and to define their
scale, rotation angle, and mirror axis (X, Y, or Z).
34
en
t
Cu
rr
M
irr
or
Ro
ta
te
Sc
ale
Se
lec
t
at
tri
bu
te
Figure 3-25: Merge / Pattern ribbon bar
Notes:
Use the Select option to create a point that positions the center
of the pattern file.
Pattern entities are created in the current Cplane.
You can also choose to assign the current attributes in the
Status bar fields to the imported entities. Because the merged
entities are live, as you choose values for the Merge (file)
ribbon bar fields and options, the results show immediately
35
36
37
38
5 To accept the new entities and continue importing the same
set of entities from the pattern file to a different location in

the current file, click the Apply button.
6 To accept the new entities and exit the File Pattern function,
39
press Esc, or choose another Mastercam function.
310
IMPORTANT: Each time you merge a set of pattern entities

into the current file, Mastercam identifies the entities as a
group in the database for future use. Mastercam names the
group using the pattern file name and a sequential number to
ensure the uniqueness of the group name.
TIPS:
Consider storing the files containing pattern entities in a
separate directory, such as \Patterns, so they are easy to
locate when you use this function.
To remove merged entities in the order in which they were
added to the current file, choose Undo from the Edit menu
or toolbar.
MACHINING / Setting Machine Group Properties 421
Setting Machine Group Properties
32
Working with the Toolpath Manager (page 421)

Using the Insert Arrow (page 423)
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups (page 424)
Setting Machine Group Properties (page 427)
Working with the Toolpath Manager

The Toolpath Manager is a central location where you manage all the
elements of the current job. You access it from the Toolpaths tab in
the Mastercam window Operations Manager pane.
3
34
Figure 3-26: Example: Toolpath Manager
35
Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager tabs
Toolpath Manager
functions
For each selected machine

definition, a separate
machine group is created.
37
You can create one or

more toolpath operations
per toolpath group.
Toolpath Manager
list. Right-click in
the list to access
an extensive menu
of functions.
Insert arrow
36
38
39
310
Note: If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, use the

Solids tab to access the Solids Manager. In addition to listing the
features that define a solid, the Solids Manager tab provides
options for managing and editing solids. For more information,
see Machining Solids on page 564.
Use the Toolpath Manager to generate, sort, edit, regenerate, verify,
backplot, and post selected operations, including associative and
non-associative toolpaths.
The Toolpath Manager list is a nested hierarchy of folders that organize the following types of information:
Machine group
Machine (machine group properties)
Toolpath group
Toolpath group operations
Toolpath subgroup
Toolpath subgroup operations
Machine and operations folders have additional levels of properties
and attributes that you can modify. You will learn more about this in
the following sections on Setting Machine Group Properties (page
427) and Editing Operations (page 541).
TIP: When you position the cursor in the Toolpath Manager, its
options become active; any keyboard commands you enter
are executed in the Toolpath Manager. This focus is deactivated when you move the cursor outside of the Toolpath
Manager pane.
Using the Insert Arrow

In the Toolpath Manager list, you use the insert arrow to indicate
where to create any operation you define. The machine group in
which the insert arrow is positioned is referred to as the active
machine group. The active machine group defines the options you
can choose from the Toolpath Manager, its rightclick menu, and the
Mastercam Toolpaths menu. It also identifies the source and target of
selected options, such as the addition of setup sheets, or the import or
export of operations.
The default position for the insert arrow is at the end of the Toolpath
Manager list. To reposition the arrow, use the left mouse button to
select it and continue to hold down the mouse button as you drag
and drop it to a new position in the list. You can also select the insert
arrow, and then use the keyboard up and down arrow keys or the
insert arrow buttons in the Toolpath Manager menu to reposition it.
3
32
3
34
TIPS:
Mastercam saves the most recently used plane, view, and
WCS selections for each machine group, and restores them
whenever you activate the machine group. For example, if
one machine group has toolpaths on the front of the part,
and another machine group has toolpaths on the side of the
part, whenever you activate either machine group,
Mastercam will automatically activate whichever views and
planes you were using the last time the group was active.
35
To activate a machine group when working in Mastercam

Design (choose Machine Type, Design): select it in the Toolpath Manager, rightclick and choose Make machine group
active. This loads the associated Mastercam application
(Mill, Router, Lathe).
37
36
38
39
310
Figure 3-27: Toolpath Manager Insert Arrow

Move up one item.
Move down one item.
Position below last item in the selected operation / group.

Scroll Toolpath Manager view to insert arrow position.
Active machine group
Drag and drop the insert

arrow to a new position,
or use the arrow buttons
to reposition it in the list.
Insert arrow indicates the active

machine group and the position of
the next operation you create.
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath

Groups
In the Toolpath Manager, you use machine groups to centralize and
organize machining properties and toolpath information. Each
machine group is associated with a single machine type (Mill, Lathe,
Router, or Wire). The machine group stores important job setup information like the stock model, safety zone, material selection, tool
offset preferences, and feedrate and spindle speed preferences. All
toolpath operations you create in the machine group are posted to
the same NC file unless you override this setting (for more information on changing this setting for one or more selected operations, and
on using other functions to modify operations, see Editing Operations
on page 541).
Machine groups allow you to:
Organize your machining operations into logical groups.

Link toolpaths to specific machine and control definitions.
Access and modify the local copy of the machine and control
definition to make part- or job-specific changes.
Link sets of machining operations directly to job information.
X To create a machine group for a selected machine definition:
From the Machine Type menu, choose a machine type and
machine definition.
3
32
3
34
X To create a machine group using a default machine definition:

In the Toolpath Manager, rightclick and choose Groups,
New Machine Group, and a machine type (Mill, Lathe,
Router, or Wire).
35
36
37
When you use either method, Mastercam creates a new machine

group for the selected machine definition and a new toolpath group
directly below the new machine group. The new machine group and
toolpath group are inserted at the end of the Toolpath Manager list.
Both groups are assigned a unique default name, such as Machine
Group 1, Machine Group 2, Toolpath Group 1, Toolpath Group2, and
so on.
IMPORTANT: The machine definition in the machine group is
actually a local copy of the machine definition file. For more
information on selecting and editing machine and control definitions, see Choosing a Machine and Control Definition on page
367.
38
39
310
You can create as many different machine groups as you need in the
same part file. By using machine groups to organize operations, you
can include toolpaths for different machines in the same part file,
even for different machines types. For example, if some part features
will be cut on a mill and others on a lathe, you can include all of the
operations in the same Mastercam file by creating different machine
groups for each set of mill and lathe operations.
You can also create groups of toolpaths on the same machine that you
will want to post separately. To do this, use the Toolpath Manager
rightclick menu Groups functions to create toolpath groups. Toolpath groups inherit all the properties of the parent machine group.
The parent machine group is defined as the machine group that is
positioned immediately above the toolpath group in the Toolpath
Manager list.
Parent machine path group Properties
apply to all levels of subordinate
toolpath groups.
You can nest toolpath groups to create an operations hierarchy with

several different layers of operations.
X To create toolpath groups for the active machine group:
To add a new toolpath group at the highest level, select the
machine group in the Toolpath Manager. Otherwise, to nest
the new toolpath group, select the next highest toolpath
group in the list. Then rightclick and choose Groups, New
Toolpath group.
The new toolpath group is added to the machine group,
based on the selected position, and assumes the machine
group properties.
Renaming Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups

You can rename a machine group or toolpath groups using one of the
following methods:
To use standard mouse techniques, click once on the

machine group or toolpath groups in the Toolpath Manager
list to select it. Then click again to change the name to an

editable text field.
To use the Toolpath Manager rightclick menu, select the

group to rename. Then rightclick in the Toolpath Manager,
choose Groups, Rename, and edit the name.
Setting Machine Group Properties

When you select a machine definition to create a new machine group,
default machining properties are automatically assigned, based on
the configuration settings and the machine / control definition
settings. A new toolpath group is automatically created directly below
the new machine group in the Toolpath Manager list.
In the Toolpath Manager list, machine group properties are organized
as property types you can display by expanding the Properties folder.
3
32
3
34
35
Each property type corresponds to a tab in the Machine Group Properties dialog box. To open the Machine Group Properties dialog box,
select a property type from the Toolpath Manager list. Then use the
tabs in the dialog box to view and edit the settings.
36
In this section, you will learn to set parameters in each of the

following Machine Group Properties dialog box tabs:
37
Files tab
(page 428)
Tool settings tab

(page 430)
Stock setup tab (page

434)
Safety zone tab (page

437)
38
39
310
Files tab
Use the Files tab to view and define the file names and data paths
used by operations in the selected machine group. These settings
affect default values, posting, and tool and operation libraries.
The default tool library is set in the active machine definition as part
of the General Machine Parameters. However, you can use the Files
tab to change the default library for the selected machine group.
Note: Many of the default paths and filenames that display in the
Machine Group Properties, Files tab are values you initially set in
the Control Definition Manager, Files and Operation Defaults
properties pages. For more information, see Files on page 386 and
Operation Defaults on page 406.
Figure 3-28: Files tab (Machine Group Properties dialog box)
To learn more about the Files tab, review the following information:
Defining the Toolpath (NC File) Name (page 429)

Setting up Machine Group Files (page 429)
Editing the Machine Definition (page 429)

Setting up Comments (page 430)
32
Defining the Toolpath (NC File) Name

In the Toolpath name field, type the default path and filename of the
NC file you want to create when posting operations from this
machine group, or choose the Open button to select a file. You can
post only operations from a single machine group at one time
although you can select one or more operations in the group you
want to post.
Note: The combined length of the NC file name plus its path (for
example, c:\mcamx\nc_files\program.nc) cannot be more than
120 characters.
3
34
35
Setting up Machine Group Files

Use the Machine definition, Tool Library, Operation Library, and
Operation Defaults sections to choose the files that Mastercam will
use for the machine group and its operations. For each type of file,
you can:
Set the data path and folder for the files

Select a specific file to use from the drop-down list
Edit the file by choosing the Edit button, located to the right
of the file name
36
37
38
Editing the Machine Definition

By default, the Machine section displays the name of the machine
definition that was active when the machine group was created. You
can choose a different machine in the same way as choosing other
types of files.
When you select a new machine, Mastercam loads a copy of the
machine definition in your part file .When you click the Edit button to
view or make changes to the machine definition, you are changing
only the local copy stored in your part file, not the master machine
definition file.
39
310
IMPORTANT:
If you select a different machine for the machine group, the
files and data paths are replaced with default values from
the control definition used by the selected machine.
If there are already operations in the machine group, be very
careful when selecting a different machine to ensure the
new machine supports all the toolpath features that have
been programmed.
Note: The control and post processor are displayed only for information purposes. To change them, you must edit the machine
definition. For more information, see Choosing a Machine and
Control Definition on page 367.
Setting up Comments
In the Machine Group Properties Files tab, use the Output comments
to NC file section to choose the types of comments to include in the
NC file. In Mastercam, you can still view the comments that you
choose to exclude from the NC file.
To record comments that apply to all the operations in the selected
machine group, select the Output group comments to NC check box.
Notes:
To set the defaults and enter the maximum number of characters allowed for comments, use the Control Definition
Manager, NC Output properties page. For more information,
NC Output on page 389.
When editing tool parameters, you can use the Comment field
in the Tool parameters tab (Toolpath parameters tab for Lathe)
to enter operation-specific comments.
You can also enter machine-specific comments when setting
up the machine definition.
Tool settings tab

Use the Tool settings tab to control NC file numbering, tool offsets,
feeds, speeds, coolant, and other toolpath parameters, including
material selection. Most of the default values for these settings come
from the control definition.
Figure 3-29: Tool settings tab

(Machine Group Properties dialog box)
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
To learn more about the Tool Settings tab, review the following information:
Calculating Default Feed rates (page 431)

Setting Toolpath Configuration Parameters (page 432)
38
Assigning Sequence Numbers (page 432)

Using Advanced Options (page 432)
39
Calculating Default Feed rates

Use this section to define the method used to calculate the default
feed rate for an operation.
310
The tool definition for each tool contains default plunge and
feed rates. Select From tool to use these values as the default
value for each operation when a tool is selected.
Select From material to calculate feed rate based on the
material characteristics stored in the material library. After
choosing this option, make sure to Select a material in the
Materials section of this tab.
Select From defaults to use the feed calculation method
stored in the operation defaults file.
The Feed section of the control definition contains important defaults
for calculating feed rates and sets how the control will interpret the
feed rate values that are entered for each toolpath, including how to
Adjust feed on arc move.
TIP: To override the default feed rate, spindle speed, or the
calculation method that is used, simply type in a new value
when creating an operation.
Setting Toolpath Configuration Parameters

Use these options to define how tool numbers are assigned for the
operations in the machine group. You can also choose to override
operation defaults for step and peck values, and select coolant
choices with defaults from the tool definition.
Assigning Sequence Numbers

Enter the starting sequence number and sequence increment in these
fields.
TIP: For more sophisticated sequence number formats,
including decimal sequence numbers, use the Control Definition Manager NC Output properties page to create defaults.
For more information, see NC Output on page 389.
Using Advanced Options

The default values for clearance, retract, and feed planes are read
from the operation defaults file specified on the Machine Group
Properties Files tab. Use the options in this section to replace those
defaults with modal settings from the operations in the machine
group.
For example, the feed plane in the operations defaults file might be
set to 3mm, incremental. However, if you choose to use modal
defaults for the feed plane, every time you create an operation in the
group, the default feed plane is set to the feed plane from the previous
operation, not 3mm.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Stock setup tab

Stock models help you visualize toolpaths more realistically. Use the
options in this tab to create a stock model for the machine group or to
select a file containing the stock model. For Mastercam Lathe, you
can also use this tab to define chucks, tailstocks, and steady rests. You
can choose to display the stock model with the part geometry when
viewing the file or toolpaths, during backplot functions, or when verifying toolpaths.
Figure 3-30: Stock setup tab
The options you can set in the Stock setup tab are based on the
Mastercam product associated with the machine definition in the
selected machine group. You can define different stock setup parameters for Mastercam Lathe than for Mastercam Mill and Mastercam
Router. Your options for defining each type of stock set up are
described below.
Mill / Router Stock Setup

Note: For information on Lathe Stock Setup options, see page 436.
Selecting Stock Model TypesThere are several ways you can create
stock models.
Choose Rectangular or Cylindrical to create simple stock

models that are not defined by actual geometry. All dimensions are entered in this dialog box and no geometry is added
to your part file. You can choose whether or not to Display
the stock on the screen.
3
32
3
Choose Solid to use a solid model inside the current part file
as the stock.
Choose File to use a solid model from an STL file as the stock
model.
34
Setting Stock DimensionsYou can use several techniques for setting

the stock dimensions. Type the dimensions directly into the X, Y, and
Z fields, or use one of the following methods when the exact dimensions are unknown:
35
Choose Select corners to return to the graphics window and

select the two opposing corners of a 3D rectangle.
Choose Bounding box to calculate the furthest points in the
part geometry.
Choose NCI extents to calculate the furthest points in the
toolpaths, based on just the feed rate moves.
Mastercam automatically calculates the stock dimensions and
displays them in the fields. You can then edit them, as necessary.
Setting Stock OriginUse the stock origin to locate the stock relative
to your part. First, choose a point on the stock to use for the stock
origin. In the dialog box, the cross shows you where the stock origin is:
The default position is the middle of the stock. Select a corner of the
part to set it as the stock origin.
Next, type the coordinates of this point in the Stock origin fields, or
click the Select button to choose a point from the graphics window.
36
37
38
39
310
Note: Use the Verify function to perform gouge checking. For

more information, see Verifying Operations on page 551.
Setting Stock ViewSelect a stock view to properly orient the stock
model with respect to the part. This may be necessary if you create
toolpaths in a work coordinate system (WCS) other than Top and
want to align the stock model to your part, or if you have several toolpaths in the machine group that use more than one WCS. The stock
view keeps the stock model constant when the WCS changes. You can
align the stock model to any named view saved in the part file.
To do this, click the Stock View button and select a view from the
View Selection dialog box. The edges of the stock model are parallel
with the axes of the selected view.
Note: If you change the stock view, you might need to reset the
stock origin.
Lathe Stock Setup

Defining and configuring stock boundaries, chuck, tailstock, and
steady rest for lathe machine groups lets you take advantage of many
other Mastercam Lathe features:
When you define a stock model, Mastercam automatically

updates it across several operations, intelligently calculating
rapid moves to and from the home position, between operations, and auto entry/exit vectors. The stock models you
create are also used by the Backplot and Verify functions.
To avoid collisions and gouges, Mastercam reads the boundaries for the stock, chuck, and other peripherals when calculating toolpaths.
You can view the stock and other peripheral boundaries in
the graphics window with the part geometry.
By defining stock and peripherals, you can program miscellaneous operations like opening/closing the chuck, manipulating stock, and repositioning the tailstock or steady rest.
You can create stock models and chucks individually for both
left and right spindles.
You can use several methods to define each boundary:
Choose Parameters to enter specific dimensions and other

values. This works best with relatively simple boundary
contours.
If the boundary already exists as geometry in the graphics

window, choose Chain to select it. This option works well
when you want to create a complicated or detailed model.
If the geometry is in a separate file, choose Select to import it
into the current file. (This technique is not available for stock
models.)
After you create the boundaries, use the Tool Clearance fields to
define a clearance zone around each boundary. When you are
creating a toolpath, Mastercam will warn you every time the tool
violates these clearance distances.
Use the Display Options to selectively display or hide each component in the graphics window.
TIP: Use the Settings, Configuration, Colors properties page
to set stock colors. For more information, see Colors on page
76.
Safety zone tab

In this tab, you define a safety zone around the system origin to allow
the tool to retract to a safe position outside of this area. Safety zones
help avoid collisions that could be caused by the machine indexing,
or by contact with part features or fixtures in the path of the tool.
You can select and further define the best fitting type of safety zone
(spherical, cylindrical, or rectangular) for the part you are machining.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-31: Safety zone tab

Setting the Safety Zone viewSimilar to setting a stock view, you can
orient the safety zone with the part by assigning a specific view to the
safety zone. To do this, click the Safety Zone View button and select a
view from the View Selection dialog box. The edges of the safety zone
are parallel with the axes of the selected view.
Note: You must enable retract moves in the toolpath to activate
the safety zone. To do this, access the Toolpath Parameters tab by
choosing Parameters in the Toolpath Manager list and then
select retract options.
MACHINING / Creating Toolpaths 439
Creating Toolpaths
Mastercam includes an extensive number of intelligent toolpath

functions you can use to quickly build toolpaths for specific applications. Your ability to access toolpath types and features depends on
both your license level and the capabilities of the active machine and
control definition. Most of the Mastercam Mill toolpaths described in
this section are also available if your installation includes Mastercam
Router and the appropriate Plus or Pro license, or Mastercam Lathe
for mill/turn applications.
The process of creating a toolpath consists of the following basic
steps:
1 Select the machine definition from the Machine type menu.
32
3
34
2 Choose a toolpath type from the Toolpaths menu.

3 Use the dialog boxes and prompts that display to chain
geometry or select points or other entities, as necessary.

4 In the Toolpath Parameters tab, select the tool and refine the
35
tool parameters.
5 Use the other tabs in the Toolpath Parameters dialog box to
define and create the toolpath operation for the selected

toolpath type.
TIP: You can also select pre-defined toolpath operations from
a library and apply the operation to selected geometry. For
more information, see Importing Operations on page 568 and
Exporting Operations on page 569.
In this section, you will learn about the different toolpath types you
can create in Mastercam and how to work with basic toolpath functions, including:
Mill Toolpath Types

(page 440)
Nesting Toolpaths
(page 519)
Surface Toolpath
Types (page 471)
Toolpath Chaining
Techniques (page 524)
Multiaxis Toolpath
Types (page 479)
Selecting Tools (page

528)
36
37
38
39
310
Lathe Toolpath Types

(page 489)
Managing Toolpath
Operations (page 534)
Router Toolpath
Types (page 516)
Editing Operations
(page 541)
Mill Toolpath Types

Mastercam Mill has several types of toolpaths that you can create on
wireframe, surface, and solid geometry. In this section, you will learn
more about creating different types of Mastercam Mill toolpaths,
including:
Contour Toolpaths
(page 441)
Pocket Toolpaths (page

463)
Circle Toolpaths
(page 448)
Wireframe Toolpaths
(page 464)
Drill Toolpaths (page

453)
Specialized Toolpaths
(page 468)
You can create these toolpath types with 2- or 3-axis mills, including
those with two linear axes plus one rotary axis. When chaining geometry for these toolpaths, you can select either wireframe geometry or
the edges/faces of solids.
To drive tools along surface geometry, use surface toolpaths.

You can also use wireframe toolpaths to simulate surface
machining with wireframe geometry, or you can create
curves along surfaces or their boundaries and chain those.
Use multiaxis toolpaths when your tool has 4 or 5 programmable axes and the operation requires this type of tool
motion.
Note: Mills that support multiaxis toolpaths also support the
other types of toolpaths described in this section.
TIPS:
When working with toolpaths, you can use functions to
transform, trim, or wrap the toolpath around a cylinder with
axis substitution.
To wrap the toolpath, choose the Rotary axis check box and
button in the Toolpath Parameters tab for the selected operation.
For more information on how to transform or trim operations, see Transforming Operations on page 570 and Trimming Toolpaths on page 573.
3
32
3
Contour Toolpaths
Use contour toolpaths to drive the tool along a path. This toolpath
type is appropriate for both roughing and finishing applications.
Contour toolpaths remove material along a path defined by a chain of
curves; they do not clean out an enclosed area. You can also cut the
contour in depth cuts and/or multiple passes in the cutting plane,
and create remachining operations.
When creating contour toolpaths, you can select an unlimited number of chains for each toolpath, creating either 2D or
3D contour toolpaths. 2D contour toolpaths cut geometry in a
single plane (typically XY) at a constant depth (Z), although
you can create multiple passes at different depths.
Mastercam automatically selects this type if all the geometry
lies in the same plane.
3D contour toolpaths cut geometry in XY and Z, where the Z
depth can vary over the toolpath. Use this type if the geometry for each cutting pass is not contained within a single
plane.
To begin creating a contour toolpath, choose Contour Toolpath from
the Toolpaths menu. After chaining geometry and selecting a tool, use
the Contour parameters tab to choose the Chamfer or Ramp button.
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-32: Example: Contour Tab
Chamfer Contour Toolpaths

Use this toolpath type to cut a chamfer around a contour as a standalone operation. For example, to cut a contour 30mm deep with a
2mm chamfer, create one toolpath to cut the contour to the desired
depth. Then create a separate contour chamfer toolpath to place the
2mm chamfer.
To begin creating a chamfer toolpath, choose Contour toolpath from

the Toolpaths menu. After chaining geometry and selecting a tool, use
the Contour parameters tab to choose the Chamfer button. Then set
the chamfer dimensions in the Chamfering dialog box.
Typically when creating a chamfer toolpath, you will set the Depth
(on the Contour parameters tab) to 0.0 relative to the chained geometry and let Mastercam calculate the tool depth from the chamfer
dimensions. Enter a non-zero depth, (+) or (-), only if you want to
locate the top of the chamfer at a distance from the chained geometry.
IMPORTANT: You must select one of the following tool types
when creating a chamfer toolpath; otherwise a warning
message displays and the toolpath is rejected:
Bull-nose cutter
Ball (spherical) cutter
Chamfer mill
Ramp contour toolpaths

Use ramp contour toolpaths to transition smoothly between depth
cuts by creating a continuous ramp instead of individual plunge cuts.
You can ramp by a set angle, by a set depth, or plunge directly
between depth cuts. This technique is especially useful in high speed
machining.
3
32
3
34
35
Note: Contour ramping is available only for 2D contour toolpaths.
36
To begin creating a ramp contour toolpath, choose Contour toolpath

from the Toolpaths menu. After chaining geometry and selecting a
tool, use the Contour parameters tab to choose the Ramp button.
Then set the chamfer dimensions in the Ramp Contour dialog box.
37
Creating Tabs for Contour Toolpaths

For some contour toolpaths, you may need to create and use tabs. For
example, when you are cutting out small parts, multiple parts or
nested parts. Tabs are uncut areas of a contour toolpath that assist in
holding down a part. While the tool is cutting the contour, it retracts
at the tab location to leave a small amount of stock, then plunges back
to the normal cutting depth.
When you define mill and router contour toolpaths, you can create
tabs by selecting the Tabs check box in the Contour parameters tab,
then clicking the Tabs button to access the Tabs dialog box.
38
39
310
Figure 3-33: Example: Contour Parameters tab
Figure 3-34: Tabs dialog box
Mastercam also provides options for editing and cutting off the tabs.
Use the procedures below to learn more about:
Creating tabs
Editing tabs (page 447)
X To create tabs for a mill or router contour toolpath:
1 In the Tabs dialog box, use the fields in the top section of the
dialog box to configure the tab size. You can create Full tabs
or Partial tabs. Full tabs are the full stock height; at the tab
locations, the tool retracts fully from the part. Partial tabs are
less than the full stock height; you use the Tab thickness field
to define how far to pull back from the cut depth (typically,
partial tabs are thin).
2 After choosing the type of tab to create, enter the Width of
the tab to define how far it extends along the toolpath.
3
32
3
34
3 Use the Tab Position section to set one of the following
methods that the toolpath will use to locate the tabs along
the contour.
Use Automatic to have Mastercam create the desired

number of tabs equally spaced along the contour. If a tab
position will overlap a corner, the tab will wrap around it.
Additional options let you specify a size threshold for
creating tabs, so that Mastercam creates only tabs that
meet or exceed the dimensions you define. This avoids
creating tabs for smaller parts where they are not necessary.
Choose Manual, then Position to manually select each tab
location in the graphics window.
Choose Manual, then Use square point for tab position
to place tabs at each square point along the contour.
4 Select the type of Cutoff Operation.
No cutoff operation: Leaves the tabs uncut so that they

can be removed by hand. Typically, when selecting this
option, you will create partial tabs instead of full tabs and
use a small tab thickness.
After all contour chains: Cuts the tabs after cutting all the
chains in the operation. For example, if you are cutting
several parts, first all the parts are cut and then all the tabs
are cut.
After each contour chain: Cut a contour then cuts the tabs
before moving to the next contour. For example, if you are
35
36
37
38
39
310
cutting several parts, the tabs are cut from the first part
before the second part is cut.
If you select this option, you can also choose to Cut tabs
with first finish pass. Consider using this option when
your contour toolpath have both roughing and finishing
passes; for example, when you are using depth cuts. In
this case, Mastercam will leave the tabs during the
roughing passes, and cut them off with the finish pass,
rather than creating a separate cutoff pass.
Separate operation: Creates a separate Tab Cutoff operation and includes it in the Toolpath Manager so that you
can edit or customize it. You can select a different tool,
edit the feed rate or coolant options, or change other
parameters that you would like to be different from the
original contour operation.
Note: The option to create a separate tab cutoff operation is available only when you first create the operation. When editing the
contour parameters from the Toolpath Manager, you cannot add
a separate tab cutoff operation.
5 To access more advanced tab options, click the Settings
button to define ramped tabs or set a size threshold for the

parts to be automatically tabbed.
When finished, click OK to exit and return to the Tabs dialog

box.
6 When finished setting up other toolpath parameters, click OK
to close the dialog box and create the contour toolpath and, if
defined, the tab cutoff operations.
Editing tabs
Once you have added tabs to a contour toolpath, use one of the
following methods to edit them:
To access the Tabs dialog box, click the Parameters icon for
the contour toolpath in the Toolpath Manager. Use the Tabs
dialog box to view and edit the original tab parameters.
Changes you make using this method affect all the tabs in the
toolpath. The only function you cannot access is the option
to create a separate cutoff operation.
To edit individual tabs, click the Geometry icon for the
contour toolpath in the Toolpath Manager. This opens the
Chain Manager where you can add, delete, or move individual tab locations. You can also change the size and shape
of an individual tab.
X To edit individual tabs:
1 In the Toolpath Manager, click on the Geometry icon for the
32
3
34
35
36
contour toolpath which contains the tabs.

2 In the Chain Manager, right-click on the desired chain and
choose Edit tabs.

Note: The Edit tabs option is available only when you right-click
on a chain; it does not appear if you click elsewhere in the Chain
Manager dialog box.
37
38
3 Use the Edit tabs ribbon bar options to:
Move tabs
Add a new tab location
Edit the size or attributes of a specific tab location
39
Delete a single tab location, or delete all tab locations
310
M
ov
e
Ad tab
dt
a
Ed b
it t
ab
De
let
e
De tab
let
ea
ll t
ab
s
Figure 3-35: Edit tabs ribbon bar
IMPORTANT: If you have created a separate cutoff operation

for the tabs, the changes you make to the tabs in the original
operation are not associative; they do not affect the cutoff
operation. Therefore, any additions, deletions or modifications
you make to tabs in the original operation must also be made
using the same methodin the cutoff operation.
Circle Toolpaths
Circle toolpaths efficiently mill a circle when you select just a single
point, or other circle toolpaths for related applications. After milling
the center of the circle, Mastercam calculates an entry arc before
approaching the perimeter and then a similar exit arc. You can add
enhancements such as multiple passes, multiple depth cuts, and
helical plunge moves, and fine-tune the entry and exit arcs.
In this section, you will learn more about:
Circle Mill Toolpaths (page 448)

Helix Bore Toolpaths (page 449)
Slot mill toolpaths (page 450)
Thread Mill Toolpaths (page 451)
TIP: Use helix bore toolpaths for operations with non-center
cutting insert cutters.
Circle Mill Toolpaths

Use circle mill toolpaths to mill circular pockets based on a single
point. You can select either point entities or the center points of arcs.
Mastercam pockets out a circular area using the diameter and depth
that you specify. After milling the center of the circle, Mastercam
calculates an entry arc before approaching the perimeter and creates
a similar exit arc. The following picture shows a circle mill toolpath
with helical entry:
3
32
3
Here is the same toolpath with a straight plunge entry:
34
35
36
To begin creating a circle mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle

Paths, Circmill Toolpath. Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog
box to select one or more hole locations for the toolpath.
After selecting the tool, use the Circmill parameters tab to enter
values for different cutting parameters and compensation options.
37
38
Helix Bore Toolpaths

Helix bore toolpaths are designed for a non-center cutting insert
cutter. This high-speed boring tool cuts downward in a helical motion
for roughing; steps over to finish at the bottom; then performs a finish
pass in a helical upward motion. Like a circle mill toolpath, you can
39
310
chain only a single point to create the toolpath; the holes outer diameter is determined by your toolpath parameters.
To begin creating a helix bore toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle

paths, Helix bore toolpath. Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog
box to select one or more hole locations for the toolpath.
After selecting the tool, use the Helix bore parameters tab to enter
values for common cutting parameters and compensation options.
Then choose the Rough /Finish parameters tab and complete
entering toolpath information.
Note: There is no specific tool type for Felix tools. When creating a
tool definition for a Felix tool, create it as a flat endmill.
Slot mill toolpaths

Use slot mill toolpaths to efficiently machine obround
slots. Obround slots consist of two straight lines and
two 180-degree arcs at the ends.
Slot mill toolpaths automatically calculate plunge, entry, and exit
points appropriate for slots by:
Calculating the plunge point

Placing the entry/exit arcs at the midpoint of the contour
Creating an entry ramp to plunge gradually to the cut depth
3
32
3
To begin creating a slot mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle paths,
Slot mill toolpath.
Thread Mill Toolpaths

Thread mill toolpaths create a series of helixes for machining a thread
with a thread mill or other suitable tool. For inside diameter (ID)
threads, you must drill a hole first. For outside diameter (OD) threads,
you must create a boss first. You can use point entities or arc center
points for the toolpath. If you select duplicate geometry, or both an
arc and its center point, Mastercam warns you and displays the duplicate geometry in red.
The number of active teeth, top of thread, thread depth, and thread
pitch parameters all indirectly determine the number of revolutions
that the tool makes while machining the thread. If the number of
revolutions is less than one, Mastercam automatically adjusts the top
of thread to create at least one revolution.
In this example, a slot mill was used to cut the coarse threads around
the top of a valve core:
34
35
36
37
38
39
To begin creating a thread mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle

paths, Thread mill toolpath. Then use the Drill Point Selection
dialog box to select one or more hole locations for the toolpath.
310
After selecting a tool, use the Thread mill tab to define the Taper
angle and other thread mill parameters.
Use the following guide to help orient your thread mill toolpath so
that it cuts the threads in the intended manner.
ID / OD
thread
Right- / Lefthand thread
Machining
direction
Milling
direction
ID
Right-hand
Top to bottom
Conventional
ID
Right-hand
Bottom to top
Climb
ID
Left-hand
Top to bottom
Climb
ID
Left-hand
Bottom to top
Conventional
OD
Right-hand
Top to bottom
Climb
OD
Right-hand
Bottom to top
Conventional
OD
Left-hand
Top to bottom
Conventional
OD
Left-hand
Bottom to top
Climb
Drill Toolpaths
Mastercam supports many types of standard drill cycles. Standard
drill toolpaths provide flexible options for selecting drilling points,
such as selecting either points or arcs; automatically selecting all the
points from a previous operation; or choosing drilling patterns such
as grids or bolt holes without first creating geometry. The general
process of creating a standard drill toolpath is straight-forward.
Note: You can also customize drilling operations and create
entirely new drilling cycles. For more information, see Customizing Drilling Operations on page 459.
3
32
3
To begin creating a drill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Drill toolpath.

Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select one or more
hole locations for the toolpath and choose the sort order.
34
After selecting a tool, use the drill type parameters tab (such as
Simple drill - no peck in the sample below) to choose a drill cycle from
the Cycle drop-down list and set drill cycle parameters. Edit the fields
and settings in other drill toolpath tabs, as necessary.
35
Figure 3-36: Example: Drill Cycle Parameters tab
36
37
38
39
310
Choosing a Drill Cycle

The drill cycle you choose determines the parameters you can set for
the drill toolpath. Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Router include all
of the standard drill toolpaths and features described below. In addition, Mastercam Router provides support for block drilling and aggregate heads.
Notes:
Drill cycle availability is determined by the control definition
and is machine and control dependent. For more information
on using a control definition with a specific machine definition, see Choosing a Machine and Control Definition on page
367.
The post must support the selected cycle.
Drill/Counterbore: Recommended for drilling holes with

depths of less than three times the tool diameter.
Peck Drill: Recommended for drilling holes with depths of
more than three times the tool diameter. Retracts fully out of
the drilled hole to remove material chips. Used often with
chips that are hard to remove. (Individual peck drill moves do
not backplot the code only displays after you create the NC
file.)
Chip Break: Drills holes with depths of more than three times
the tool diameter. Retracts partially out of the drilled hole to
break material chips which aids chip removal.
Tap: Taps right or left internal threaded holes.
Bore #1 (feed out): Drills holes with feed-in and feed-out
motion. This creates a straight hole with a smooth surface.
Bore #2 (stop spindle, rapid out): Drills holes with feed-in,
stop spindle, and rapid-out motion.
Fine bore (shift): Stops the spindle at the end of each drill
point, then spins to orient the tool to a pre-defined angle,
shifts off the wall of the drill hole, and retracts.
Custom cycles: Drills holes using customized parameters.
TIP: Multiaxis drill toolpaths (which let you rotate the drill axis
and change it from hole to hole) are an optional feature. For
more information, contact your Mastercam Reseller.
Selecting Drill Points

When you choose Drill Toolpaths or Circle Paths, Circmill Toolpath
from the Toolpaths menu, the Drill Point Selection dialog box
displays. It provides you with many flexible options for selecting drill
holes for the toolpath. Each option is described below.
Figure 3-37: Drill Point Selection dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
Selecting points from the graphics windowChoose one of the

following methods to select points from the graphics window.
310
Select: Returns the cursor to the graphics window where you

can use general selection techniques to select individual
points.
Automatic: Lets Mastercam automatically find drill points.
When you return to the graphics window, select the first
point; then a second point to set the search direction; and
finally, a third point which is the last point in the toolpath.
Mastercam finds and selects all the points within the defined
area.
Entities: Places drill points at the endpoints of entities you
select in the graphics window and sorts them based on the
order that the geometry was created. If you select closed arcs,
the drill points are placed in the center of the arcs.
Window Points: Returns the cursor to the graphics window
where you can click and drag a rectangle around the points to
be drilled.
Reusing points from a previous operationChoose one of the
following options to reuse points from a previous toolpath:
Subprograms: Lets you select a previously created drill toolpath and apply the new operation to its points. Mastercam
creates subprograms for both operations to reuse the point
locations.
Last: Mastercam creates a drill toolpath using the drill points
and sorting order of the previous drill operation.
Masking on an arcEnter a Diameter value to drill at the center
point of all the arcs whose diameter is within the specified tolerance,
or choose Mask on Arc to select an arc from the graphics window.
The selected arc can be either open or closed.
Pattern drillingSelect the Pattern check box and set additional
options on this section for creating a grid of holes or a bolt circle.
Predefine points or geometry are not needed to use these functions.
Sorting Drill Points

Once you have selected all the points, in the Drill Point Selection
dialog box, choose Sorting to specify the drill order. The Point Sorting
dialog box makes it easy to choose a sort order for a specific type of
drilling application.
Figure 3-38: Point Sorting dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
The 2D sort, Rotary sort, and Cross sort tabs provide various
patterns you can choose for specific application types. Each tab and
its application is described below. To choose a sort pattern, click the
button in the selected tab and set additional options, as necessary.
Choose a 2D sort pattern when the points are

generally distributed in a flat plane. Select the Point
to Point option to sort the points by the shortest
distance from one point to the next (Mastercam will
prompt you to select the first point.
Choose a Rotary sort pattern for circular toolpaths.
36
37
38
Choose a Cross sort pattern when the points are wrapped

around a cylinder.
The picture on each sort pattern button gives you an idea of how the
points will be sorted relative to the starting point, which is indicated
on the button by the red cross. Hold your cursor over each button to
see the name of the sort pattern.
39
310
Notes:
Only the drill points in the current toolpath are sorted, not all
drill points in the graphics window.
The start point of the drill toolpath is marked with a red point.
Editing Drill Points

Use the Drill Change at Point dialog box to make point-specific
changes to a drill toolpath, add canned text, or otherwise customize
the toolpath at one or more specific points. To access this dialog box:
When creating a drill toolpath, choose the Edit button in the

Drill Point Selection dialog box .
After creating a drill toolpath, click the Geometry icon in the
Toolpath Manger to access the Drill Point Manager. Then
right-click a point in the Drill Point Manager and choose
Change at point.
Figure 3-39: Drill Change at Point dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
The values displayed in the fields are the values currently in effect.
Select the check mark in front of a field to activate it, then type a new
value. You can apply the change to just the selected point, or to every
point going forward.
Customizing Drilling Operations

To customize drill operations, you must first define or enable the
features you want in the control definition for the machine you are
using. The custom parameters you define for the control definition
are added to the toolpath parameter dialog boxes that display when
you create a drilling operation, such as the Drill cycle parameters tab.
Use these and other toolpath parameters to modify the drilling operation, as necessary.
38
39
310
Here are some of the ways you can customize your drilling operations:
Associate canned text with any drill point or points. Use the
Control Definition Manager Text properties pages to define
the canned text commands you can choose from.
Customize the list of drill cycles and their parameters which
appear in the Drill cycle parameters tab. Use the Control
Definition Manager Machine Cycles properties page to
select the cycles. To customize the names of the cycles and
their parameters, use the Control Definition Manager Text
properties pages.
Define custom parameters for each cycle. Values for these
parameters can be set on an operation-specific basis using
the Custom drill parameters tab. To define custom parameters for a particular cycle, use the Control Definition Manager
Text properties pages.
You can also define custom integer and floating-point variables for
the control definition. These are available when you create any toolpath type, not just drilling. For more information on setting up
control definitions, see Working with Control Files and Control Definitions on page 374.
Feature-based Drilling
Use the feature-based drilling functions described below to automatically create a complete series of drill operations for a set of points or
arcs.
Automatic Drill Toolpaths (page 460)

Solid Drill Toolpaths (page 461)
Start Hole Toolpaths (page 462)
Feature-based drilling toolpath functions automate the process of
searching for drill points, selecting the appropriate tools from the tool
library, and creating complete sequences of drilling operations.
Automatic Drill Toolpaths

Use this toolpath type to automatically create a complete series of
drill operations for a set of points or arcs. For example, after selecting
a set of holes, you can automatically create a sequence of spot
drilling, pre-drilling, tapping, and chamfering operations. Mastercam
automatically picks the appropriate tools from the tool library for
you, based on the tool type you select.
To begin creating automatic drill toolpaths, choose Toolpaths, Circle

paths, Auto drill toolpath.
Use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select one or more hole
locations for the toolpaths. After selecting points, the Drill Point
Manager dialog box displays all of the holes that will be drilled or
machined, in the current drill order. Use this dialog box to edit the set
of points, as necessary.
Note: You cannot use the Drill Point Manager to edit the points
of Solids drilling operations.
Then use the tabs in the Automatic Arc Drilling dialog box to set
parameters for the drill operations that will be automatically created.
The drill cycles used in each operation created for automatic drill
toolpaths are determined by the cycle stored with each tool definition. Only cycles that have been enabled in the Machine Cycles
section for the active control definition can be used.
Note: If you select a flat endmill as the finish tool type, a drill/
counterbore drill cycle is used for the finish drill cycle.
The result of the automatic drilling process is a series of individual
drill operations that display in the Toolpath Manager. The operations
are not associative with each other after they have been generated; if
you change one operation after it has been generated, Mastercam
does not change any others in response. You can use the Toolpath
Manager to view, modify, move, or regroup each operation individually without affecting the others.
Solid Drill Toolpaths

Choose Toolpaths, Solids, Solid drill toolpath to access the solid
drilling function. This function searches for all the holes in a solid and
then automatically creates drill operations for them. You can create a
complete series of drill operations for a set of points or arcs. After
selecting a set of holes, you can automatically create a sequence of
spot drilling, pre-drilling, tapping, and chamfering operations.
Mastercam automatically picks the appropriate tools from the tool
library for you.
You can filter the list of holes, or otherwise delete any unwanted holes
from the list generated by Mastercam. The same set of operations will
be applied to all the holes in the list, so holes that require different
types of drill operations (for example, right-hand tap vs. a bored hole)
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
should be grouped together. When creating a solid drill toolpath, you

can choose either Basic or Advanced options.
Basic options create only finish operations and do not

include spot or step drilling. They include automatic hole
detection and let you set hole detection parameters.
Advanced options let you also set tool, depths, group, library,
custom drill, and pre-drilling parameters so that you can
select spot drilling, pre-drilling (roughing), and finish drill
cycles.
TIP: The automatic drill function is similar to solid drilling; use
auto drill for wireframe geometry, and solid drill for solids.
Start Hole Toolpaths

Use the Start Holes toolpath to automatically create drill toolpaths at
the plunge points for one or more selected operations. Mastercam
intelligently scans individual depth cuts and passes for each operation, and creates toolpaths for multiple plunge points if necessary.
To begin creating start hole toolpaths, choose Toolpaths, Circle
paths, Start hole toolpath.
Then use the Drill Start Holes dialog box to select all of the operations that need drill start hole toolpaths. Mastercam automatically
determines where plunge holes are required for the selected operations, and will calculate the dimensions of the start holes based on the
sizes of the tools used in those operations.
To create just a simple drill operation, choose Basic.

To include pre-drill or spot drill cycles or use other advanced
drilling features, choose Advanced.
Note: To add space to the start holes so that they are a little bigger
than the tool, use the Additional diameter amount and Additional depth amount fields.
Finally, select the tool library in which Mastercam will look for the
drills it needs to match the sizes of the start holes. If an exact match is
not available in the selected library, a drill whose diameter is within
the specified Diameter match tolerance of the hole will be used.
IMPORTANT: Start hole toolpaths are not associative. If you

change the original toolpath, the Start Hole toolpaths are not
automatically updated. When you regenerate the original toolpath after editing it, the start hole toolpaths associated with the
operation are deleted unless they have been manually edited,
in which case you must manually edit them as necessary.
TIP: The Start Holes toolpath function works with all toolpath
types but is especially effective when used together with the
Align plunge entries for start holes feature found in Surface
Rough Pocket. This feature organizes all of the plunge points
so that one pre-drilled hole can serve as the plunge position for
multiple depth cuts.
Pocket Toolpaths
With Mastercam pocket toolpath functions, you can integrate
roughing and finishing cuts in the same operation, or simultaneously
create separate roughing and finishing operations. You can create
separate entry/exit moves for each type of cut, and choose from many
different roughing patterns, including open pockets and high-speed
pocketing with trochoidal loops to minimize tool burial. Finishing
options include feed rate and spindle speed overrides, thin wall
finishing, spring passes, and remachining.
To begin creating a rough or finish pocket toolpath, Choose Toolpaths, Pocket Toolpath. Then chain the geometry for the pockets. All
geometry used to define a pocket and any islands must be in the same
construction plane. Mastercam automatically interprets closed
boundaries within the chained geometry as islands and adjusts the
toolpath accordingly.
Notes:
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
You cannot select a 3D chain for a pocket toolpath type.

To machine a pocket with complicated geometry, consider
using a surface pocket toolpath.
After selecting a tool, use the Pocketing parameters tab to select the
pocket type, based on the chained geometry, and set the pocket depth
and other general cutting parameters. Pocket types can include:
Facing or island facing: Mastercam automatically adjusts cut

depths for islands.
39
310
Open pockets: Mastercam automatically enters and exits the

pocket through the opening.
Remachining: Mastercam calculates the stock remaining
from a previous operation that used a larger diameter
roughing tool, and machines only the leftover stock.
In the Roughing/Finishing parameters tab, select a cutting method
and set other options for the roughing passes. Mastercam offers
different cutting patterns so you can choose the one best suited to
your part geometry and application requirements. You also use this
tab to create a finish pass with separate lead in/out moves distinct
from the entry moves for the roughing passes. You can override the
feed rate and spindle speed and set special options for thin wall
pockets. The finish pass can be created as a separate operation, so
that you can further edit and refine it separately from the roughing
operation.
Wireframe Toolpaths
Use wireframe toolpaths to use surface machining styles without
having to create or select surface entities. Mastercam calculates the
surfaces from your wireframe geometry. In this section, you will learn
about the different types of wireframe toolpaths you can create from
the Toolpaths, Wireframe submenu, including:
Ruled Toolpaths
(page 465)
Coons Patch Toolpaths

(page 466)
Lofted Toolpaths
(page 465)
Swept 2D Toolpaths
(page 467)
Revolved Toolpaths
(page 466)
Swept 3D Toolpaths
(page 468)
Note: Creating wireframe toolpaths can be faster and easier than

creating and machining surfaces. However, Mastercam offers you
more options and greater flexibility when creating surface toolpaths. For more information, see Surface Toolpath Types on page
471.
Ruled Toolpaths
Use this toolpath type to create a linear blend between chains of
curves, simulating a ruled surface over several chains of geometry.
3
32
3
To begin creating a ruled toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Wireframe,

Wireframe Ruled toolpath and use the Chaining dialog box to select
between 2 and 100 chains.
After selecting chains and a tool, use the Ruled Parameters tab to
enter the toolpath parameters. First, select a cutting method to define
the pattern that the tool will follow over the part surface. Then enter
other toolpath dimensions and compensation options.
Finally, select the trimming options. You can define up to two trimming planes for the toolpath. Each trimming plane consists of a value
along one of the coordinate axes. If the toolpath would extend past
the trim plane, it is clipped; if the trim plane is outside the toolpath,
the toolpath will be extended to it.
34
35
36
Lofted Toolpaths
Use lofted toolpaths when you want to create a smooth, curved blend
between chains of curves or cross-sections, simulating a lofted
surface over several chains of geometry.
37
38
39
To begin creating a lofted toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Wireframe,

Wireframe Lofted toolpath and use the Chaining dialog box to select
between 2 and 100 chains.
After selecting chains and a tool, use the Lofted Parameters tab to
enter the toolpath parameters.
310
First, select a cutting direction, across the calculated surface

or along it, and enter the step sizes for each cutting pass.
Then select a cutting method to define the pattern that the
tool will follow over the part surface and enter other toolpath
dimensions and compensation options.
TIP: When you are chaining the geometry for ruled or lofted
toolpaths, select the chains in order and make sure that the
chaining direction is consistent for all the chains so that the
toolpath does not twist.
Revolved Toolpaths
Use the Toolpaths, Wireframe, Wireframe Revolved toolpath function to create a surface of revolution from a cross-section. This toolpath type is calculated in the current construction plane, then
transformed into the current tool plane. You can trim the toolpath to
a given height or width (relative to the construction plane) and
generate a convex or concave shape. You must select a ball endmill for
this toolpath type. The following picture shows a part profile lying flat
in the XY plane, and the revolved toolpath created from the geometry.
Coons Patch Toolpaths

Coons path toolpaths simulate patches between chains of across and
along contours by using points, lines, arcs, or splines to construct
four-sided patches. These patches may be machined separately or

machined with additional patches.
3
32
3
To begin creating a coons patch toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Wireframe, Wireframe Coons toolpath and enter the number of patches
to create in both the along and across directions. You can select up to
50 patches in each direction.
34
After chaining the across and along contours and selecting a tool, use
options in the Toolpath parameters and Coons parameters tabs to
define the tool, and set the cutting direction, cutting method, and
other toolpath parameters and compensation options.
35
Swept 2D Toolpaths
Use the Toolpaths, Wireframe, Wireframe Swept 2D toolpath function to create 2D toolpaths by sweeping one boundary (the across
contour) along a second contour (the along contour). A swept 2D
toolpath can have only one along boundary. The across and along
boundaries are blended to generate a 2D toolpath.
36
37
38
39
Boundaries for a swept 2D toolpath must meet these conditions:
The boundaries may not contain splines.

The along boundary must lie parallel or perpendicular to the
current tool plane, or to the XY plane (top view) if you do not
310
define a tool plane. This only applies when the final toolpath
contains arcs. The final toolpath contains arcs when either
the along boundary contains arcs or when you select an
option to roll the toolpath around corners.
TIP: Swept 2D toolpaths have an advantage over swept 3D
toolpaths in that they output arcs and create much shorter NC
files. However, swept 3D toolpaths give you much more flexibility.
Swept 3D Toolpaths
You can simulate a surface with any of the following sets of boundaries using the Toolpaths, Wireframe, Wireframe Swept 3D toolpath
function:
One across boundary and one along boundary. Unlike 2D

swept toolpaths, the geometry does not have to be confined
to a plane.
One across boundary and two along boundaries.
Two across boundaries and one along boundary.
These boundaries may consist of any combination of lines, arcs, and
splines.
The longer of the two matching boundaries (along or across) is

broken into a number of segments based on the cut distance you
define. This number of segments is then applied to the other
matching boundary.
Specialized Toolpaths
In this section, you will learn about the types of specialized toolpaths
you can create, including
Face Toolpaths (page 469)

Point Toolpaths (page 469)
Manual Entry Operations (page 470)
Face Toolpaths
Use a facing toolpath to quickly clean the stock from the top of a part,
qualify the top of the part, and create a flat surface for future operations. You can base the toolpath on either chained geometry or on the
current stock model.
To begin creating a face toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Face toolpath.
Select the across and along contours in the graphics window. Then
use the Chaining dialog box to select the part geometry, or simply
choose OK without selecting anything to use the stock model.
After selecting a tool, use the Facing parameters tab to enter the toolpath parameters and complete the toolpath.
TIPS:
When facing the stock, it is important to have the tool
overlap the edges of the part by at least 50% of its diameter
to prevent leaving scallops of material at the edges of the
stock.
To face islands, consider using a pocket toolpath, which
includes an automatic island facing feature.
3
32
3
34
35
36
Point Toolpaths
Positioning the tool at a specific point or making it follow a series of
specific points is a helpful technique you can use to avoid a fixture or
clamp, or to get the tool into or out of a tight area or an awkward
shape. You might also use this type of toolpath to position the tool
between cutting operations.
Point toolpaths let you build a series of tool movements by selecting a
series of individual locations in the graphics window, rather than have
the tool follow geometry.
To begin creating a point toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Point toolpath
and use the Point Toolpath ribbon bar to create the toolpath.
37
38
39
310
Ba
ck
up
Ad
d
Re
mo
M ve
ov
e
Ch
an
g
Ra e m
pid od
e
Fe
ed
rat
e
Figure 3-40: Point Toolpath ribbon bar
When you begin creating the toolpath, you are prompted to select the
first point to which the tool will rapid from the home position. To add
additional points, click the locations in the graphics window. Use the
G0 (rapid) or G1 (feed rate) buttons to define the type of move before
selecting points, or to edit them afterwards.
For rapid moves to the point, the control definition determines
whether the rapid move is broken up into separate moves for each
axis or interpolated in multiple axes.
For feed rate moves, the tool moves to the new points at the
feed rate you set.
Use the Back up button to delete points and back up to the previous
point. Click OK when you finish selecting the points.
Use the Tool parameters tab to select a tool, coolant, and set other
toolpath options. To achieve the desired tool motion, try disabling the
reference points feature (deselect the Ref points check box).
Manual Entry Operations

Use this toolpath function to directly insert text, comments, or
Gcodes into your NC programs. You can store text directly with the
operation, or reference an external text file that Mastercam reads
when post processing. You can insert the literal text as Gcode
commands or format them as comments.
IMPORTANT: You must ensure that the text or codes are
appropriate for your control and post processor and are
formatted correctly, and that the post processor is written to
properly handle the comments.
To begin creating a manual entry operation, choose Toolpaths,
Manual Entry and use the Manual Entry dialog box to define the text
to insert. You can select a file or enter the text right in the dialog box (a
maximum of 750 characters).
If you select a file, you can choose to copy the text to the part
file (saving it with the part), or create an external link to the
source file used when you post.
If you choose to create an external link to the text file, you can
edit the file whenever you wish without modifying the operations in Mastercam. The updated text appears in your
programs the next time you post.
Note: To manually insert text, codes, or commands at specific
points within a toolpath or operation, use the Drill Change at
Point dialog box. You might also consider using canned text to
create custom codes or program segments.
Surface Toolpath Types
3
32
3
Use surface toolpaths to drive the tool along drive geometry. At least
one drive surface, solid face, solid body, or CAD file is required for the
toolpath to be created. In this section, you will learn about creating
toolpath surface operations using functions in the Toolpaths, Surface
Rough and Surface Finish submenus.
34
You can select different geometry to enhance tool control. These

geometry types include:
35
Drive geometry: The surfaces, solid faces, solid

bodies or CAD files that will be cut.
Check geometry: The surfaces, solid faces, or solid
bodies that you want the tool to avoid.
Tool containment boundary: A closed chain of
curves that limit tool motion.
CAD file: An STL or other graphics data file used for
drive geometry.
Other geometry specific to the selected toolpath
type, for example, flowline geometry for a flowline
toolpath, or blend curves for a blend toolpath.
Surface Rough and Finish Parallel Toolpaths

To create surface parallel toolpaths, choose the appropriate type
(rough or finish) from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish
submenu. Use a surface rough parallel toolpath to remove the bulk of
the material quickly. It makes multiple depth cuts. Similarly, use the
36
37
38
39
310
finish parallel toolpath to machine over all the surfaces in parallel

passes.
Surface Rough and Finish Radial Toolpaths

To create surface radial toolpaths, choose the appropriate type (rough
or finish) from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish
submenu. You use radial toolpaths to cut from a center point
outward, creating cuts like the spokes of a wheel.
Surface Rough and Finish Project Toolpaths

Surface project toolpaths project either geometry or a toolpath from
an earlier operation onto surfaces. To create surface project toolpaths,
choose the appropriate type (rough or finish) from the Toolpath,

Surface Rough or Surface Finish submenu.
3
32
Surface Rough and Finish Flowline Toolpaths

Flowline toolpaths follow the shape and direction of the surfaces and
create a smooth and flowing toolpath motion. Choose this toolpath
type from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish submenu.
3
34
35
36
Surface Rough and Finish Contour toolpaths

Use surface rough or finish contour toolpaths to make multiple cuts
using constant Z steps. Surface contour toolpaths work well for parts
that have steep walls, such as steep-walled bosses. The rough and
finish contour toolpaths allow the tool to step down gradually in the Z
37
38
39
310
axis instead of stepping over in the X and Y axes. Choose this toolpath
type from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish submenu.
Surface Rough Restmill Toolpaths

Restmilling is a roughing toolpath that cleans up remaining stock
with a planar (constant Z) cut motion. To create this toolpath type,
choose Toolpath, Surface Rough, Rough restmill toolpath. The
graphic below shows the stock remaining after a pocket rough toolpath:
The next graphic shows the part after a restmill operation:
3
32
3
Surface Rough Pocket Toolpaths
Rough pocket toolpaths remove a lot of stock quickly. It creates a
series of planar or constant Z cuts, which is a preferred cutting
method for many roughing tools. To create this toolpath type, choose
Toolpath, Surface Rough, Rough Pocket toolpath.
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Surface Rough Plunge Toolpaths

Rough plunge toolpaths rough a part quickly using a drilling-type
motion. Shops that use these toolpaths often invest in special plunge
roughing tools.
To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Rough, Rough

Plunge toolpath. You can select one of the following methods to
define rough plunge toolpaths:
The zigzag method defines a rectangular grid and the tool

plunges at intervals along it.
The NCI method lets the tool plunge at intervals by following
a previously created toolpath.
Surface Finish Parallel Steep Toolpaths

A finish parallel steep toolpath removes material from surfaces that
fall between two slope angles, for example, you could create a parallel
steep toolpath to remove material from surfaces that slope between
50 and 90 degrees. A parallel steep toolpath is usually used after a
finish parallel toolpath. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath,

Surface Finish, Finish Parallel steep toolpath.
3
32
3
Surface Finish Shallow Toolpaths

A finish shallow toolpath removes material from surfaces that fall
between two slope angles. The graphic below shows a shallow toolpath that removes material from surfaces that slope between 0 and 10
degrees. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface
Finish, Finish Shallow toolpath.
34
35
36
37
Surface Finish Pencil Toolpaths

A finish pencil toolpath follows the path where two surfaces meet. It
cleans out material by driving the cutter tangent to two surfaces at a
38
39
310
time. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Finish,

Finish Pencil toolpath.
Surface Finish Leftover Toolpaths

The finish leftover toolpath removes material left behind by the larger
tool of a previous operation. It calculates how much stock is left over
and uses that information when creating tool motions.
To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Finish, Finish

Leftover toolpath.
Surface Finish Scallop Toolpaths

Use a finish scallop toolpath to create a consistent scallop height over
the whole part regardless of whether the surface becomes steep or
shallow. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface

Finish, Finish Scallop toolpath.
3
32
3
Surface Finish Blend Toolpaths

Surface blend toolpaths offer powerful machining for surfaces that
require cuts to conform to the part shape. A blend toolpath creates
motion that is defined by curves that you create along the drive geometry. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Finish,
Finish Blend toolpath.
34
35
36
37
38
Note: In the part above, the blend curves are the arcs on either side
of the solid.
Multiaxis Toolpath Types

Multiaxis toolpaths allow freedom of motion in the tool axis rather
than restricting tool motion to the Z axis as with other toolpath types.
39
310
You can create multiaxis toolpaths when working with 4-axis and 5axis machine tools. Based on the selected machine tool, you can
choose a 3-, 4-, or 5-axis toolpath output format, as outlined below.
Machine Tool
Toolpath Output Format
4-axis
3- and 4-axis
5-axis (except with Swarf,

Multisurface, Flow, and Port
toolpaths)
3-, 4-, and 5-axis
5-axis with Swarf, Multisurface,

Flow and Port toolpaths
4- and 5-axis
Multiaxis toolpaths require the machine definition to have one rotary

axis for 4-axis output, and two rotary axes for 5-axis output. To enable
the multiaxis toolpath menu selections and toolbar, select a multiaxis
machine as the current machine definition.
Then set the output format and other options in the geometry selection dialog box for the selected multiaxis toolpath type. Each output
format is described below.
3-axis: Limits the tool positions to a single vector (direction).

This output type drags the contact point of the tool over the
selected curves. 3-axis does not provide any additional tool
axis control.
4-axis: Provides one plane of axis rotation that is perpendicular to the 4th (rotary) axis. Choose the 4th axis button in the
Geometry selection dialog box to select the axis about which
the 4th axis rotates, or make the 4th axis selection on the
Multiaxis parameters tab. For example, to set the rotary axis A
to rotate about X, choose the X axis in the dialog box. Tool
axis control is available for 4-axis toolpaths.
5-axis: Provides tool axis rotation in any plane.
In this section, you will learn to create multiaxis toolpaths using functions in the Toolpaths, Multiaxis drop-down menu. These toolpath
functions provide you with enhanced flexibility in the generation of
tool axis vectors, the flow of tool movement over surfaces and solids,
and the projection of curves, points, or surfaces onto surfaces or
solids.
5-axis Curve Toolpaths

(page 482)
5-axis Flowline Toolpaths

(page 486)
5-axis Drill Toolpaths

(page 483)
5-axis Port Toolpaths (page

487)
5-axis Swarf Toolpaths

(page 483)
4-axis Rotary Toolpaths

(page 488)
5-axis Multisurface
Toolpaths (page 484)
Note: Generating multiaxis toolpaths for a machine tool usually
requires post processor customization. For more information on
customizing the post processor for a multiaxis machine tool and
control, contact your Mastercam Reseller.
Selecting Geometry for 5-axis Toolpaths

After selecting a 5-axis toolpath type from the Toolpaths, Multiaxis
menu, you use an interactive dialog box to define parameters, and
then return to the graphics window to select the geometry for the 5axis toolpath. Although each dialog box is different, they share many
of the same parameters, as illustrated in the examples below.
Figure 3-41: Curve 5-axis dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-42: Drill 5-axis dialog box
Follow these general guidelines when selecting geometry for a 5-axis

toolpath (not all options may apply, based on the selected toolpath
type):
The Output Format determines which options are available

for geometry selection. Select 3-axis, 4-axis, or 5-axis.
Select the Curve Type or Entity Type and select the geometry
for the tool to follow.
Select the method for Tool Axis Control. Mastercam aligns
the tool axis to the selected geometry or a plane.
Choose a Tip Control method to set tool tip compensation.
Select the Surfaces to be cut, either the cut pattern or the
part surfaces (Comp to surfaces).
Select Check Surfaces (the areas in the part to be aware of
but stay away from).
Note: To edit the geometry selection after creating the toolpath,
doubleclick the toolpaths Geometry icon in the Toolpath
Manager.
5-axis Curve Toolpaths

Use curve 5-axis toolpaths to cut 3D curves or surface edges. You can
compensate the tool tip to the actual curve, or project the curves onto
surfaces. Curve 5-axis supports several methods for controlling the

tool axis through planes, chains, points, or surfaces.
3
32
3
To begin creating this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis,

5-axis Curve Toolpath.
34
5-axis Drill Toolpaths

Drill 5-axis toolpaths allow you to control the tool axis at each drill
position in the operation. The tool tip can be compensated to a
surface, to a projected point along the tool axis vector, or to the entity
selected for the drill position. The example below shows a drill 5-axis
toolpath using lines and points, where the tool axis vectors are set by
the lines.
35
36
37
38

5-axis drill toolpath.
5-axis Swarf Toolpaths

Use a swarf 5-axis toolpath to cut along part walls using the side of the
cutter. Tapered tools can be used on swarf toolpaths when not using
39
310
surfaces for the floor. The example below shows a swarf 5-axis toolpath with the tool tip compensated to a plane which defines the floor.
Swarf 5-axis toolpath parameters include an optional fanning option

to allow the tool to be as vertical as possible. The fan distance determines the minimum distance that the tool travels between the corner
position and a position where the tool is perpendicular to the cut
direction. A larger fan distance creates a wider fan.

5-axis swarf toolpath.
5-axis Multisurface Toolpaths

Multisurface 5-axis toolpaths use a set of pattern surfaces to control
the flow of tool motion and can compensate to a different set of
surfaces. Tool axis vectors can be generated through points, a plane,
surfaces, or through a chain of curves. To begin creating this type of
toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, 5-axis multisurface toolpath.
Figure 3-43: Multisurface 5-axis dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
Figure 3-44: Example: Surface Selection
Box cut pattern
(shown with thickness)
36
37
38
Z
X
Front view
Part surfaces selected as

cut surfaces (Comp to surfaces)
39
310
In the example below, a box cut pattern was used to generate the flow
of motion and tool axis vectors. Then the tool tip was compensated to
the part surfaces.
5-axis Flowline Toolpaths

Flow 5-axis toolpaths allow precise control of the scallops left on the
part or constant distance stepovers, creating an exact, smooth finish.
The 5-axis output provides 2 degrees of freedom for the tool vectors in
any direction. You can use flow 5-axis toolpaths on a row of adjacent
drive surfaces or on a single surface. The example below shows a flow
5-axis toolpath using a spiral cutting method.

5-axis flowline toolpath.
5-axis Port Toolpaths

Use this specialized toolpath type to simplify the process of
machining a cylinder port, for example, when working with automotive head porting applications. It eliminates fishtail (butterfly)
motion, preventing gouges that can occur when programming a tool
radius larger than the surface radii.
3
32
3
34
35
36
Port 5-axis toolpaths require the following criteria:
A machine definition with at least one rotary axis

Port surfaces that form a closed shape
Lollipop or ball tool types
You can use two different techniques to machine ports. You can select
pattern and cut surfaces that are identical, with the surface normals
pointing toward the inside of the port. Or, you can apply compensation to a different set of surfaces than those selected for the cut
pattern. Using the latter technique allows you to create a second set of
surfaces within the port that are compensated to the port surfaces.
5-axis Port toolpath.
Based on the geometry and parameters you choose in the Port 5-axis
dialog box and the toolpath parameters you specify, Mastercam
applies the following order of operations to create the 5-axis port
toolpath:
Calculates tool positions on the pattern surface
37
38
39
310
Compensates to the port surfaces

Applies point generators
Modifies the tool vectors
Applies axis limits
Applies check surfaces
Checks for gouges
4-axis Rotary Toolpaths

Rotary 4-axis toolpaths work best on closed surface parts. Like other
4-axis toolpaths, the tool is kept in a plane that is perpendicular to the
rotary axis. You can select the X, Y, or Z axis about which the rotary
axis rotates. For example, to set the rotary axis A to rotate about X,
choose the X axis in the dialog box. In this example, all vectors would
be limited to the YZ plane. Rotary 4-axis toolpaths use only ball tools.
The example below shows a rotary 4-axis toolpath using a rotary cut.
To create this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, 4-axis

rotary toolpath. Use general selection techniques when prompted to
select Drive and Check surfaces for the toolpath. Then, use the Toolpath / Surface Selection dialog box to modify and accept your selections.
Figure 3-45: Toolpath / Surface Selection dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
Lathe Toolpath Types
With Mastercam Lathe, you can create many different toolpaths for
turning machines, from roughing and finishing inside and outside
diameters to C-axis (mill/turn) programming. Mastercam Lathe also
includes grooving, threading, drilling, facing and cutoff toolpaths for
all your lathe machining needs.
When you choose a Lathe machine definition from the Machine Type
menu, the Toolpaths menu displays the lathe toolpath types you can
create. This includes a number of mill toolpaths you choose from the
Toolpaths, Mill submenu.
Note: For more information on using Mill toolpath functions, see
Mill Toolpath Types on page 440.
36
37
38
39
310
IMPORTANT: When creating a Mill toolpath with a Lathe

machine definition, you must manually set the tool plane
(Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane). You can use the Toolpaths, Mill, CView utility, or the Plane functions in the Status
Bar. For more information, see Using the CView Utility on page
507 and Setting Planes / Views / WCS on page 150.
In this section, you will learn about the different toolpath types you
can create with Mastercam Lathe, including:
General Turning Toolpaths

Mill / Turn Toolpaths (page 502)
Miscellaneous Operations (page 509)
General Turning Toolpaths

Use the following Lathe toolpath types in applications where the
stock rotates on a spindle and the tooling is fixed. Typically, these are
2D toolpaths in which all tool motion takes place within a single
plane. General turning toolpath types include:
Lathe Face Toolpaths

(page 490)
Lathe Point Toolpaths

(page 496)
Lathe Rough Toolpaths

(page 491)
Lathe Thread Toolpaths (page 497)
Lathe Finish Toolpaths

(page 492)
Cutoff Toolpaths
(page 499)
Lathe Groove Toolpaths

(page 493)
Quick and Canned

Toolpaths (page 500)
Lathe Drill Toolpaths

(page 495)
Lathe Face Toolpaths

Use this type of toolpath to prepare the face of the part for further
machining. Once the face of the part is clean, you can use it to set
tools or determine tool offsets. An example of a face toolpath is shown

below.
You do not chain geometry to create the toolpath. Instead, choose

Lathe Face Toolpath from the Toolpaths menu and use the Face
Parameters tab to specify how much stock to remove.
Note: If you use the stock model for the start and end positions of
each pass and the stock changes, the positions of each pass are
automatically updated when you regenerate the toolpath.
3
32
3
34
Lathe Rough Toolpaths

Rough toolpaths quickly remove large amounts of stock in preparation for a finish pass. Roughing passes are typically straight cuts
parallel to the Z-axis; however, you can set options for plunging into
undercut areas. Standard rough toolpaths also include a semi-finish
option, in which the roughing tool makes a final pass which follows
the part contour, like a finish pass.
To create this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Rough Toolpath. After chaining geometry or selecting points, select a tool. Then
use the Rough parameters tab to select whether the cutting direction
is One-way or Zig-zag, and define the toolpath orientation by
choosing one from the Rough direction / Angle drop-down list.
Note: Compared to other types of lathe roughing toolpaths, this
tab offers you the most complete set of roughing options.
Use the pictures as a guide for entering the different toolpath dimensions. Options on the right side of the tab allow you to select the type
of cutter compensation and complete the toolpath by adding
advanced features such as a semi-finish pass, lead in/out moves, and
toolpath filtering.
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-46: Example: Lathe Rough toolpath,

Rough parameters tab
Mastercam provides additional lathe rough toolpath types, including:
Quick rough toolpaths, which let you quickly create simple

rough toolpaths with fewer options than standard rough
toolpaths.
Canned rough toolpaths, which use your machine tool's
canned cycles to create the most efficient code.
Canned pattern repeat toolpaths, which create roughing
passes in the shape of the part contour, rather than cutting
parallel to the Z-axis.
For more information, see Quick and Canned Toolpaths on page 500.
Lathe Finish Toolpaths

Finish toolpaths follow the part geometry, making final cuts on the
part and, if applicable, refining the roughing toolpath. Unlike the
quick finish and canned finish toolpaths, when you create a standard lathe finish toolpath, a roughing toolpath is not required.
To create this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Finish Toolpath. After chaining geometry or selecting points, select a tool. Then
use the Finish parameters tab to define the toolpath.
Figure 3-47: Example: Lathe Finish toolpath,

Finish parameters tab
3
32
3
34
35
Mastercam provides additional lathe finish toolpath types, including
Quick finish toolpaths, which follow the part geometry,

making final cuts on the part and refining the roughed part.
The Quick finish toolpath function lets you chain a contour
or select an existing rough operation. Finish passes are
created parallel to any OD, ID, or facing contours.
Canned finish toolpaths, which cut parallel to the part geometry, making one final cut on the part and refining the canned
roughing or pattern repeat toolpath. For each canned finish
toolpath you want to create, an existing canned rough or
canned pattern repeat operation must exist in the part.
For more information, see Quick and Canned Toolpaths on page 500.
Lathe Groove Toolpaths

Groove toolpaths are useful for machining indented or recessed areas
that are not otherwise machinable by roughing toolpaths or tools.
Mastercam can machine many types of grooves based on the location
of just a corner point or points; this lets you create groove toolpaths
without having to create or chain geometry. You can also use chained
geometry to specify complicated or intricate groove contours.
36
37
38
39
310
You can machine several grooves in a single operation, even if their

geometry never connects. Mastercam also integrates roughing and
finishing passes, each with separate parameters, in a single operation.
X To create a groove toolpath:
1 Choose Toolpaths, Lathe Groove Toolpath.
2 In the Grooving Options dialog box choose a method for
defining the grooves (1 or 2 points, 3 lines, chain) and

another for selecting points (manual or window).
3 Then, use the Lathe Groove Properties dialog box tabs to
define the toolpath, as follows:

a Select and define a tool in the Toolpath parameters tab.
(For more information, see Selecting a tool on page 529.)
b Choose the Groove shape parameters tab to define the
shape, angle, and orientation (for example, ID, OD, face)

of the grooves in the toolpath, including automatic chamfers/radii on corners. You also use the options in this tab
to specify the groove boundaries. Groove shape parameters apply to all the grooves in the toolpath.
c To create roughing cuts for the groove toolpath and set
options for pecking and depth cuts, choose the Groove

rough parameters tab and select Rough the groove to
enable the options in this tab. To create only a finish operation, make sure this option is deselected.
Note: There is no cutter compensation option in the groove rough
parameters tab; internally, the compensation is set to Computer
and Mastercam determines the direction.
d To create finishing cuts for the groove toolpath, choose
the Groove finish parameters tab and select Finish

groove to enable the options in this tab. To omit the
finishing pass and create only a roughing groove operation, deselect this option.
4 Click OK to accept the toolpath parameters and close the
dialog box.
In addition to the standard groove toolpaths, which include all the

grooving capabilities described above, Mastercam also includes quick
groove and canned groove toolpath types for less-demanding applications. For more information, see Quick and Canned Toolpaths on
page 500.
3
32
Lathe Drill Toolpaths

Mastercam Lathe offers several different types of drill cycles for drill
toolpaths. Lathe drill toolpaths typically drill into the face of the part
along the centerline.
TIP: To drill off-center or in a different plane, use one of

Mastercam's C-axis toolpaths.
You do not select geometry or drill points in the graphics window to
create a Lathe drill toolpath. Mastercam creates the toolpath entirely
from parameters you set in the Lathe Drill dialog box tabs.
Mastercam offers the following standard drill cycles:
Drill/Counterbore (long)
Bore #1 and #2
Peck Drill (long)
Misc #1 and #2
Chip break (long)
Custom cycle 9 - 20
34
35
36
Tap
The exact list of cycles varies, depending on the active control definition. You can customize both the drill cycles and how they are
displayed using the Control Definition Manager, Machine Cycles
properties page. You can also use the Control Definition Manager to
define and name custom drill cycles which are added to the list you
can choose from when creating a drill toolpath. Any custom drill
parameters you define for the control definition display in the Lathe
Drill dialog box Custom parameters tab. The post processor used with
the control must also be configured to support canned cycles.
Note: For more information on setting up drill cycles for the
control, see Machine Cycles on page 401.
To create a drill toolpath, choose Lathe Drill Toolpath from the Toolpaths menu to access the Lathe Drill Cycle parameters tab (the exact
name of this tab changes depending on the selected drill cycle).
37
38
39
310
When you create a drill toolpath, there are three Z-axis dimensions
you must enter in addition to the drill point (the location of the hole).
Depth: How deep to drill the hole.

Clearance: A safe point along the drilling axis to which the
tool rapids before approaching the part.
Retract: The position the tool rapids to from the clearance
point, then feeds into the part.
You can enter these distances as absolute or incremental values.
Clearance
Depth
Retract
Clearance
Retract
Depth
Absolute
Incremental
When using absolute, each distance is calculated from the

construction origin.
When using incremental, each distance is calculated from
the drill point, or, optionally, from the stock face.
Lathe Point Toolpaths

Positioning the tool at a specific point or making it follow a series of
specific points is a helpful technique you can use to avoid a fixture or
clamp, or to get the tool into or out of a tight area or an awkward
shape. You might also use this type of toolpath to position the tool
between cutting operations.
Lathe point toolpaths let you build a series of tool movements by
selecting a series of individual locations in the graphics window,
rather than have the tool follow geometry.
To begin creating a point toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Point
Toolpath and use the Point Toolpath ribbon bar to create the toolpath.
Ba
ck
up
Ad
d
Re
mo
M ve
ov
e
Ra
pi
Ra d
pi
Fe d w
ed ith
Ch rat bre
an e ak
ge
mo
de
Figure 3-48: Point Toolpath ribbon bar
3
32
When you begin creating the toolpath, you are prompted to select the
first point to which the tool will rapid from the home position. To add
additional points, click the locations in the graphics window. Use the
G0 (interpolated rapid / rapid with break), or G1 (feed rate) buttons to
define the type of move before selecting points, or to edit them afterwards.
For each point in the toolpath, you can program the following types of
tool movement :
34
Rapid: The tool rapids to the new point in a straight line

(interpolated in multiple axes).
Rapid break: The tool rapids to the new point, but each axis
is interpolated separately; in other words, first the Z-axis
component of the move is performed, then the X-axis move
(the actual order of the axes depends on the tool orientation
and the direction of movement).
Feed rate: The tool moves to the new points at the
programmed feed rate (G1).
Change mode: Changes the type of motion to a particular
point when editing a point toolpath. First select the button
for the desired type of motion (Rapid, Rapid break). Then
choose Change mode and click on the point to change. You
can select more than one point. Press [Enter] when you have
finished selecting points.
35
36
37
Use the Back up button to delete points and back up to the previous
point. Click OK when you finish selecting the points.
38
Use the Toolpath parameters tab to select a tool, coolant, and set
other toolpath options. To achieve the desired tool motion, try
disabling the reference points feature (deselect the Ref points check
box).
39
Lathe Thread Toolpaths

Use this toolpath type to create spiral shapes on a part to make a
screw, bolt, or nut. You can program straight or tapered threads on the
outside, inside, or face of a part.
310
A threading toolpath is typically the last toolpath performed on a

lathe part because of the need for accuracy. A threaded part has to fit
precisely into another part. You can program threads on the OD
(outside diameter) or ID (inside diameter) to secure parts to each
other.
Mastercam provides several thread tables with hundreds of predefined thread sizes. You can also calculate your own thread sizes for
non-standard diameters using pre-defined thread formulas.
With Mastercam, you do not select geometry to create a thread toolpath. It is created entirely from the thread parameters you enter.
Choose Lathe Thread Toolpath from the Toolpaths menu. Choose a
tool, then use the Thread shape parameters and Thread cut parameters tabs to define the thread toolpath.
Figure 3-49: Lathe Thread Toolpath,
Thread shape parameters tab
In the Thread shape parameters tab, there are three main parts to the
parameters you define:
Thread form geometry: Select the dimensions from a thread

form table; compute them from a formula, or just enter the
values directly into the fields.
Thread orientation: Program threads on the ID, OD, or face/
back. You can also enter a taper value, or cut threads from the
other side of the X-axis by selecting the proper options. The

guide pictures update as you make different selections.
Thread allowance values: Choose these from a table, or enter

the values directly.
TIP: To preview the thread geometry in the graphics window,
choose Draw geometry. You can also use the picture in the tab
to verify your selections.
Use the Thread cut parameters tab to enter toolpath and cutting
parameters for a thread toolpath.
Figure 3-50: Lathe Thread Toolpath,
Thread cut parameters tab
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
Cutoff Toolpaths
Cutoff toolpaths vertically cut off pieces of the part, such as sections
of bar stock. When you choose Toolpaths, Lathe Cutoff Toolpath, you
do not chain any geometry for the cutoff toolpath. Instead, you select
the point where the part is cut off. Then select a tool and use the
Cutoff Parameters tab to define the toolpath.
39
310
Figure 3-51: Lathe Cutoff Toolpath,

Cutoff parameters tab
In the following example of a cutoff toolpath, the dotted line shows

the toolpath. The boundary is marked with a circle.
Quick and Canned Toolpaths

Mastercam provides special types of toolpaths for turning applications: quick toolpaths for simple parts and canned toolpaths, which
take advantage of your machine tool's canned cycles.
Notes:
Canned toolpaths are machine- and control-dependent. To
create canned toolpaths, the control definition used with the
selected Lathe machine type must allow the corresponding
canned cycles. You set these parameters in the Control Definition Manager, Machine Cycles properties page. For more
information, see Machine Cycles on page 401.
The post processor used with the control must also be configured to support canned cycles.
Quick toolpathsThe Toolpaths, Lathe Quick menu includes quick
rough, finish, and groove toolpaths, which let you create simple toolpaths by entering only a few parameters.
Quick rough toolpaths: Coarsely cuts the part geometry in

preparation of a finish toolpath. Choose this toolpath type to
quickly create a simple roughing operation and do not need
Mastercam's more advanced roughing features.
Quick finish toolpaths: Useful for placing finish passes on an
uncomplicated part where you do not need all of
Mastercam's more advanced finishing options. You can chain
geometry for this toolpath or simply select an existing
roughing operation. Quick finish toolpaths are also associative.
Quick groove toolpaths: Creates simple, symmetrical
grooves. Quick groove toolpaths offer you a subset of
Mastercam's grooving options.
Canned toolpathsUse functions in the Toolpaths, Lathe Canned
toolpath menu to create very efficient NC programs using your CNC
machine controllers canned cycle programs. Another benefit of
creating canned toolpaths is that you can change the toolpath by
editing canned cycle parameters at the control level using the Control
Definition Manager, instead of recreating the NC program.
Mastercam Lathe canned toolpath types include:
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
Canned rough toolpaths: Creates a roughing toolpath based

on your machine tool control's canned cycles. For example, a
Fanuc-compatible post would typically output a G71.
39
Canned finish toolpaths: Creates a finish pass for a canned

rough or pattern repeat toolpath which is based on your
machine tool control's canned cycles. For example, a Fanuccompatible post would typically output a G70 for this toolpath.
310
Canned groove toolpaths: Use canned groove toolpaths to

machine a groove using your machine tool control's canned
cycles. For example, a Fanuc-compatible post would typically
output a G75.
Canned pattern repeat: Creates a roughing toolpath in which
the cutting passes follow the part contour. Each cutting pass
offsets the contour by a stepover percentage which you
control. Use this toolpath type when the stock to be removed
is similar to the shape of the part contour and a regular
roughing pass would cut mostly air. The code produced by
this toolpath is based on your machine tool control's canned
cycles. For example, a Fanuc-compatible post would typically
output a G73.
Notes:
Using canned toolpath types results in a very compact NC
program, but you do not have access to all of Mastercam's
features for the selected toolpath type (roughing, finishing,
grooving, and pattern repeat).
The canned toolpath dialog boxes display only those parameters that are supported by your machine controllers canned
cycle programs.
Use the Lathe canned cycles section in the control definition to
configure which canned cycles will be available and which
toolpath features will generate canned cycle output.
If canned cycle output is not enabled, Mastercam will generate
long-hand output; in other words, individual Gcodes for
every positioning and cutting move.
Mill / Turn Toolpaths

Mill / turn toolpaths use live tooling in which the tool rotates in its
own spindle. The part can be stationary in the chuck or the part
spindle can be programmed as a rotary axis (C-axis). You use tool
planes (Tplanes) to specify how the tool is oriented with respect to the
part.
Mill / turn machines come in two styles: C-axis and Y-axis.
The C-axis machine, which is more common, provides linear

motion in the X and Z axes and rotary motion around the C
axis.
Y-axis machines support the C-axis motion and have an

additional linear axis that allows the milling tool to move
above and below the spindle's center line.
In this section, you will learn how to create the following mill/turn
toolpath types.
C-axis Contour Toolpath Types
C-axis Contour Toolpaths (page 503):
Creates a rotary toolpath that wraps

around the spindle axis.
C-axis Cross-contour
Toolpaths (page 504):
Cuts parallel to the spindle axis, for

example, to cut a slot lengthwise on
the part.
C-axis Face Contour Toolpaths (page 505):
Machines chained geometry or a

contour on the face of a part.
C-axis Drill Toolpath Types
C-axis Drill Toolpaths (page 505):
Creates a rotary axis drill toolpath that

wraps around the spindle axis (axis substitution).
C-axis Cross Drill

Toolpaths (page
Drills from the side towards the centerline

or off-center.
506):
Using the CView
Utility (page 507):
Drills on the face of the part parallel to the

centerline, but not necessarily on the
centerline.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
C-axis Contour Toolpaths

Use C-axis contour toolpaths to cut geometry which wraps around a
cylinder. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, C-axis Contour Toolpath. A typical application would be to
cut text on a round part. Mastercam sets the tool plane (Tplane) and
construction plane (Cplane) to the top. This way, the tool is placed
perpendicular to the spindle axis, which is the axis of rotation.
Choosing this toolpath sets the default cutter compensation to Off so
39
310
that the center of the tool follows the chained geometry. (You can
override this, as necessary.)
Mastercam
creating a C-axis
contour toolpath
C-axis contour toolpaths automatically set the rotation type to Axis

substitution around the Z axis. This gives you the choice of chaining
either flat geometry which will be rolled around the cylinder, or
geometry which is already properly positioned in 3D space.
To access the Rotary axis dialog box, choose the Rotary axis check
box and button in the Toolpath Parameters tab for most toolpaths. If
the geometry is already properly positioned, select the Unroll option.
If the geometry is flat, deselect this option. Flat geometry should be in
the Top Cplane at a Z-depth of 0 (zero).
C-axis Cross-contour Toolpaths

Use cross-contour toolpaths to cut parallel to the axis of rotation.
These toolpaths are most often used to cut slots. Mastercam sets the
tool plane (Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane) so that the tool is
placed perpendicular to the axis of rotation (typically, the part
spindle). To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, Cross Contour Toolpath.
The following picture shows a cross contour toolpath which cuts slots
along the outside of the cylinder. The tool cuts the slot by following
the single straight line in the middle of each slot.
Note: Choosing this toolpath type also sets the default cutter
compensation to Off so that the center of the tool follows the
chained geometry.
C-axis Face Contour Toolpaths

Face contour creates a toolpath on the face of the part with the tool
parallel to the axis of rotation. Mastercam automatically sets the tool
plane (Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane) to the side so that the
tool is placed perpendicular to the face of the part. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, Face Contour Toolpath.
The following picture shows a face contour toolpath. The dotted line
represents tool movement.
3
32
3
34
35
36
Set the rotation type to C-axis in the Rotary Axis dialog box to produce
polar-conversion output for a C-axis lathe, or select Y-axis rotation to
produce X-Y-Z coordinate output.
37
C-axis Drill Toolpaths
38
Use C-axis drill toolpaths to drill holes perpendicular to the part's

spindle axis, as when drilling holes in a cylinder. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, C-axis Drill Toolpath.
You can choose points which are already in their correct 3D positions
around the Z axis, or you can choose points which are in the top
construction plane and let Mastercam roll them around the axis of
rotation. The toolpath is then created by converting the X coordinate
of each point in the top Cplane to an angle about the Z axis. The position is determined by the rotary axis diameter entered in the Rotary
axis dialog box. The resulting toolpath is then displayed in its rolled
state.
39
310
If the points are already in their correct 3D positions, you must

choose the Rotary Axis button in the C-axis drill dialog box and check
Unroll. Even if the points lie in different planes, you can select all the
points that you want to drill at the same time without having to
specify the tool plane for every hole.
Note: C-axis drill toolpaths are similar to C-axis cross drill toolpaths. The difference is how they produce the rotary motion. For
more information, see Comparing C-axis Drill and Cross-drill
Toolpaths on page 506.
C-axis Cross Drill Toolpaths

Use these toolpaths to drill holes perpendicular to the parts spindle
axis, as when drilling holes in a cylinder. Mastercam uses the side tool
plane (Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane) so that the tool axis
will be perpendicular to the axis of rotation. To create this toolpath
type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, Cross Drill Toolpath.
Cross drill toolpaths also let you choose arcs instead of points to identify the drill points. When you select arcs, the drill point is the arc
center point and the drilling direction is the arc normal. Select arcs
instead of points when you are drilling off-center, because Mastercam
will use the plane of the arc as the Tplane.
Comparing C-axis Drill and Cross-drill Toolpaths

C-axis drill toolpaths and C-axis cross-drill toolpaths are both used to
drill perpendicular to the axis of rotation, but they each use different
rotary axis parameters.
When creating a C-axis cross-drill toolpath, use the side

Tplane and select a rotary axis in the Rotary axis dialog box to
create the rotary axis codes (Y-axis or C-axis).
When creating a C-axis drill toolpath, create the toolpath in
the top Tplane and use axis substitution. This gives you the
flexibility to select either points that are properly positioned
in 3D space around the rotation axis, or point that lie in the
top plane. Select the Unroll option if the drill points are
already properly oriented, or deselect it if the points are in
the top plane.
C-axis Face Drill Toolpaths

Face drill toolpaths allow you to drill holes in the face of the part.
Because this toolpath uses live tooling on a stationary part, you can
drill holes that are not on the centerline. Depending on how the post
processor is configured, this toolpath typically outputs a mill drill
cycle such as G81, whereas a regular lathe drill toolpath outputs a
lathe drill cycle such as G99. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, Face Drill Toolpath.
When selected, Mastercam sets the Tplane and Cplane to the side so
that the tool is placed perpendicular to the face of the part.
3
32
3
Using the CView Utility

Many C-axis toolpaths automatically set the Tplane and Cplane for
you. However, mill toolpaths do not. Use the CView Utility function
and dialog box to set Tplanes and Cplanes for these toolpath types.
X To run the Cview utility:
1 Prior to creating a mill toolpath, from the Machine Type
menu, select a lathe machine definition that supports this

type of toolpath.
2 From the Mastercam menu, choose Toolpaths, Mill, Cview
utility.
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
3 In the Cview dialog box, use the following procedure to
define the toolpath orientation:
a In the C-axis Milling Type section, set the general orien-
tation of the toolpath. This selection determines the

Tplane.
Choose Cross if the toolpath will move along the side

or along the length of the part.
Choose Axis substitution to wrap the toolpath around
the part.
b In the Construction Plane (Relative to Tplane) section,
define how the Cplane will be oriented relative to the

Tplane:
Choose Parallel to set the Cplane equal to the Tplane.

Choose Perpendicular or Swiss to set the Cplane to
either of the two planes perpendicular to the Tplane.
For example, for Cross millingwhich sets the Tplane
to Backthe Perpendicular option would set the
Cplane to Top. Swiss would set it to Left, which is the
other perpendicular plane.
c Choose an Initial Angle Adjustment to rotate the part so
that a particular section or face is aligned to the Tplane/

Cplane that you have selected. Choose the Select button
to return to the graphics window and select an entity.
Select a point to rotate the part so that the tool plane is

normal to an imaginary line drawn from the point
perpendicular to the X-axis.
Select a line to rotate the part so that the Tplane is
normal to an imaginary line drawn from a point along
the selected line to the X axis. The imaginary line is
perpendicular to selected line and the X axis.
Select an arc to set the Initial Angle normal to the arc's
plane.
TIP: Choose Display to temporarily close the dialog box and
view a representation of these settings in the graphics window.
The tool displays its orientation in the Tplane; the white rectangle represents the Cplane. Press Enter to exit the display and
return to the Cview dialog box.
3
32
3
34
4 Click OK to accept the settings and exit the dialog box.

5 To begin creating the toolpath using the orientation you have
defined, choose Toolpaths, Mill and select a Mill toolpath

type.
IMPORTANT: The Tplane and Cplane orientation you set with
the CView utility function remains in effect until you change it,
either by using the Planes function in the Status bar, or by
choosing a toolpath type from the Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths
menu. These toolpath types have a pre-defined orientation that
is automatically set.
Miscellaneous Operations
You use miscellaneous operations to manipulate the stock and
program the movements of peripherals like tailstocks, chucks, and
steady rests. These toolpaths might output M-codes or G-codes. You
can program miscellaneous operations only for peripherals that are
supported by the active machine definition
Choose from the following operation types:
Stock Transfer Toolpaths

(page 510)
Chuck Toolpaths (clamp/

unclamp, reposition) (page 513)
Stock Advance Toolpaths

(page 511)
Tailstock Toolpaths (advance/

retract, reposition) (page 514)
35
36
37
38
39
310
Stock Flip Toolpaths

(page 512)
Steady Rest Toolpaths (reposition) (page 515)
Stock Transfer Toolpaths

This toolpath type lets you program operations on the opposite side
or back of a lathe part in the same Mastercam file.
Figure 3-52: Lathe Stock Transfer Properties dialog box
IMPORTANT: Before programming a stock transfer operation,

you must first use Stock Setup in the Toolpath Manager to
define the stock and chuck boundaries. Define stock only for a
single spindle; Mastercam cannot create the transfer operation
if stock has been defined for both spindles. The sub-spindle
does not have to be defined in Stock Setup, but if it is not, it
cannot be simulated in the backplot function.
To create a stock transfer operation, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Misc
Ops, Lathe Stock Transfer. In the Lathe stock transfer tab, use the
following process to create an operation which transfers the stock to a
chuck on the other spindle.
Transfer the geometryChoose the Transfer geometry option. This
creates a copy of your part geometry aligned with the repositioned
stock. (The original geometry is left unchanged.) Choose the Select
button to return to the graphics window and select the specific entities or chains that you want to copy. You can specify a different level
for the new geometry, as necessary.
Locate the stockEnter the original and new positions for the stock.
You can select the locations, or choose From stock back face to automatically use the back face of the stock as currently calculated by
Mastercam. The point you choose does not have to be on the face of
the stock. You can choose any convenient reference point.
Control the chucksUse the Main Spindle Position section to enter
the location of a reference point on the chuck which is currently
holding the stock. Enter the current location and the location to
which the chuck will move after the stock has been picked-off or
Select the locations.
Then, enter the coordinates of a reference point of a chuck on the
sub-spindle which will be receiving the stock. Enter its current location, and the location where it will pick-off the part. The relationship
between this Z-coordinate and the current stock location determines
how much of the stock will be clamped. If you choose the Get dia.
from stock option, Mastercam automatically calculates the current
stock diameter at the Z coordinate you enter for the pick-off position.
The final location of the chuck after it picks off the part is determined
by the Transferred Position you specify for the stock.
Move the coordinate systemChoose Construction Origin or Tool
Origins to relocate the coordinate system to the new spindle. Select
the desired Move... option and Z position of the source and destination locations.
Stock Advance Toolpaths

To create a stock advance toolpath, choose Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe
Stock Advance from the Toolpaths menu. Use the options in the
Lathe Stock Advance Properties tab to create a stock advance operation that repositions the stock in the spindle or controls a bar feeder.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-53: Lathe Stock Advance Properties dialog box
TIP: If the current bar feeder is not capable of measuring how

far it has advanced the stock, use the Toolpath parameters tab
in this dialog box to select a tool used to stop the stock from
advancing or to pull the stock to its new position.
Stock Flip Toolpaths

Stock flip operations output a comment and program stop in the NC
code, which lets the operator manually remove the stock and reposition (flip) it in the chuck. To program operations on the opposite side
or back of a lathe part in the same Mastercam file, choose Toolpaths,
Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe Stock Flip. Use the Lathe stock flip tab to
enter parameters for the new operation.
Figure 3-54: Lathe Stock Flip Properties dialog box
3
32
3
34
Chuck Toolpaths (clamp/unclamp, reposition)
Use this type of toolpath to create a lathe chuck operation that will
clamp, unclamp, and reposition the chuck. This lets you take advantage of the automatic clamping and unclamping features on your
machine. Mastercams collision avoidance features prevent the tool
from making a move into the chuck.
IMPORTANT: To create a chuck operation, you must first
define the chuck in the Toolpath Manager Stock Setup tab.
Also, the machine and control definition must support the
operation.
To create a chuck toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe
Chuck. Use the Lathe chuck tab to enter parameters for the new operation.
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-55: Lathe Chuck Properties dialog box
If your machine has two spindles, select the active spindle for
the operation.
Select the type of operation. You can create operations to
clamp, unclamp, or move the chuck.
Enter the original and final positions of the chuck, or choose
the Select button to select the locations from the graphics
window.
To restrict the chuck's movement to X-axis moves only,
choose the Diameter only option. This is especially useful for
Swiss machines where the chuck moves in Z instead of the
tool.
Tailstock Toolpaths (advance/retract, reposition)

Use this miscellaneous lathe toolpath option to create a tailstock
operation to reposition the tailstock.
IMPORTANT: To create a tailstock operation, the tailstock
must already be defined in the Toolpath Manager Stock Setup
tab and the machine and control definition must support the
operation.
To access the Lathe Tailstock Properties tab and define the operation,
choose Toolpaths, Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe Tailstock.
Figure 3-56: Lathe Tailstock Properties dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
In the Operation section, select Advance or Retract to indicate
whether the operation is moving the tailstock towards the part or
pulling it away. Mastercam automatically advances or retracts the
quill based on your selection.
Then, enter the original and destination positions of a reference point
on the tailstock, or choose the Select button to select the locations
from the graphics window. If you have created a stock model and
drilled a 60-degree center hole in the face, choose the Auto option to
automatically position the tailstock in the hole.
Steady Rest Toolpaths (reposition)

Steady rest operations allow you to use the automatic steady rest
repositioning features on the machine. Mastercams collision avoidance features prevent the tool from making a move into the steady
rest.
36
37
38
39
310
IMPORTANT: To create a steady rest operation, you must first

define a steady rest in the Toolpath Manager Stock Setup tab.
Also, the machine and control definition must support this type
of operation.
To create an operation that repositions the steady rest, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe Steady Rest use the Lathe steady rest
tab to define the operation.
Figure 3-57: Lathe Steady Rest Properties dialog box
Enter the original and destination positions for a reference point on

the steady rest. You can choose Select to return to the graphics
window and select the locations if you wish. The point you choose
can be any convenient reference point on the steady rest.
Router Toolpath Types

In addition to all of the Mastercam Mill toolpath types, Mastercam
Router provides all the controls you need to create block or gang
drill toolpaths, including those used with straight and T block drills.
Block drill toolpaths optimize the drilling routine by dropping the
correct drills according to the drill pattern you specify.
Mastercam Router supports a wide variety of tool shapes and types,
including Right Angle (RA) and Compound Angle (CA) head control.
This aggregate head programming allows you to apply RA and CA
heads to your traditional toolpaths. To learn more about this, see
Block Drilling Toolpaths on page 517.
Mastercam Router features include VBScript support and cabinet

design software links. Depending on the Mastercam Router product
you have installed, you may also have Nesting and Engraving toolpath
functions.
Nesting allows you to fit parts onto a sheet of material for

best yield. Nesting operates on geometry or toolpaths.
Engraving gives you the effect of classic hand-carved art
using your CNC machine. Sharp inside corners, created by
the Z-axis climbing in the corners, give the finished piece a
crisp edge, which is unattainable with conventional
machining. For more information, see Engraving Toolpaths
on page 522.
Block Drilling Toolpaths

Mastercam Router shares the Mastercam Mill drill toolpaths and also
allows you to create block drilling operations. Block drill toolpaths
create holes in parts at specified locations using tooling containing
multiple drills. To create these toolpaths, the size and spacing of the
arcs must match the size and spacing of the drills on the block.
In the example below, the holes in the furniture panel would require a
drill block with 5 mm drills spaced 32 mm apart.
3
32
3
34
35
36
5 mm arcs spaced
32 mm apart
37
38
Note: Use the Machine Definition Manager to create definitions

for drill blocks or aggregate heads.
Drill blocks contain multiple drills and are required to create Block
Drill toolpaths in Mastercam Router. The Block Drill toolpath is
specially designed to use multiple tools for drilling in a single operation. Drill blocks cannot be used for any toolpath other than Block
Drill.
39
310
The example below shows a drill block and offsets needed by

Mastercam when defining the tooling.
Figure 3-58: Example: Block Drill head and tool offsets
Lead drill
Offset from
lead drill to
second drill
Offset from
lead drill to
third drill
Both head and tool position offsets
are relative to the lead drill
Working with Aggregate Heads

Mastercam organizes aggregate tooling information in a hierarchy of
heads, blocks, and tool stations.
Heads are complete assemblies that respond to axis

commands and move as a unit.
Blocks are mounted on heads and hold the individual tool
stations.
Tool stations are mounted on the block and hold individual
tools.
Large or complicated routers might have several heads, each of which
can contain several blocks. Each block, in turn, can have multiple
tools. When creating an aggregate head, you work at the block level to
define individual blocks and their tool stations. In some instances,
you will find that what is commonly referred to as an aggregate head
outside of Mastercam is defined as a block in Mastercam.
Mastercam supports right-angle, compound-angle, and vertical
blocks. The offset is the distance from the center of the block base to a
known position on the machine tool. The offset is represented as a
coordinate position. For example, X100 Y0 Z0 would place the aggregate block 100mm in X from the reference point.
Z
Y
X
Aggregate position offset
shown in side view
32
3
34
Nesting Toolpaths
Nesting is the process of fitting multiple copies of a part within a
boundary (material sheet) for best yield. Parts can be nested next to
each other or even within each other to provide the most efficient use
of the material. Mastercam Nesting is an add-on to other Mastercam
products, such as Mastercam Router, Mill, and Wire.
You can choose to nest geometry or toolpaths. You can bring in geometry from a file or chain it in the graphics window. To use toolpaths for
nesting, they must already be defined in the current part file.
Nesting provides several methods for defining sheets of material. A
sheet definition consists of the sheet geometry, length and width
dimensions, quantity of that sheet to be used in the nesting session,
position of the lower left corner (origin), and the grain direction. Each
material sheet you define can be used in the current nesting session.
You can also save the sheets to a nesting sheet library file (.NSL) for
reuse.
Both geometry parts and toolpath parts can be added as clusters. A
cluster is a collection of parts that are nested as a single unit and
maintain their spatial relationship with each other.
The parts in a nesting session or operation can lie at different Z
depths. Nesting generates the session at the current Z (construction)
depth.
35
36
37
38
39
310
The Nesting add-on to Mastercam provides two modes of operation:

Rectangular and TrueShape.
Rectangular nesting places a bounding box around the part

and uses the box as the part boundary for nesting. Rectangular nesting supports a subset of the TrueShape nesting
functionality and is provided with Mastercam Router Entry
and Router Pro.
TrueShape nesting extends nesting functionality beyond

Rectangular nesting by creating interlocking copies of
different parts to provide maximum material usage. The
graphic below shows a part (geometry only) nested with
TrueShape nesting. Copies of the part or toolpath are fitted
together using the part shape, a rotation angle, reversing the
copy (mirror), and other parameters. With TrueShape
Nesting, Mastercam nests the parts or toolpaths within the
sheet boundary regardless of its shape, allowing you to use

irregular shaped sheets.
3
32
3
34
Note: TrueShape nesting is a separately-purchased option for

Mastercam Design, Router, Mill, and Wire. For more information,
contact your local Mastercam Reseller.
X Use the following guidelines to create nesting operations:
1 In Mastercam, create or import the geometry or toolpaths
that define the parts you want to nest.
35
36
2 Create or open a nesting session by choosing Xform, Xform
Geometry Nesting (geometry-based nesting) or Toolpaths,

Toolpath Nesting (toolpath-based nesting).
37
3 In the Nesting dialog box, choose material sheets by selecting
or defining them.
4 Select or create nesting parts based on chained geometry
(imported from a file or selected in the current Mastercam

file), or from predefined toolpaths selected in the Toolpath
Manager.
5 Set nesting parameters.
6 View and refine nesting session results.
38
39
7 Save the nestings session, sheets and parts, as necessary.
310
Nesting Tips and Guidelines

Save common sheet sizes to nested sheet libraries (.NSL files)
or in individual MCX files.
To create as many sheets as needed to accommodate the
number of parts, choose Create necessary quantity in the
Sheets tab.
Save common parts to nested part libraries (.NPL files) or in
MCX files.
When you are satisfied with the nesting results, save the
nesting session to create a .NST file you can reuse. The .NST
file contains part information and nesting session parameters.
When you require a controlled number of each part in the
nesting session, create a group.
To read a detailed report about the nesting results, choose
Details in the Nesting Results dialog box.
Engraving Toolpaths
When creating Engraving toolpaths, you can define roughing,
finishing, and remachining operations. Engraving generates a
contour-like finish pass as part of the roughing operation.
TIP: Although engraving toolpaths do not require roughing,
you can use roughing to clean out cavities as an alternative to
pocketing.
X Use the following general steps to create an engraving
toolpath:
1 Choose a lathe machine definition from the Machine Type
menu.
2 Select Toolpaths, Engraving toolpath.
3 After selecting an appropriate tool and setting tool parame-
ters, choose the Engraving parameters tab to set the clearance, retract plane and feed plane heights, machining depth
and direction, top of stock, and the amount of stock to leave
for a finish pass. You can also set the toolpath to roll around
sharp corners, wrap a toolpath on a curved surface, filter
points from the toolpath for smoother motion, specify the
number and type of depth cuts, and remachine the toolpath.
Note: If you use a flat cutter to machine out a cavity and plan to
remachine the corners, you can enter an Angle for flat cutter
offset that offsets the tip of the straight (flat) bit to match the Vgroove tip position. This ensures that the roughing operation does
not gouge the engraved edge.
4 In the Roughing / Finishing parameters tab, define the
roughing, finishing, or remachining operations for the toolpath. You can select from several roughing methods or
patterns. The one you choose depends on the shape of the
part. Use Parallel spiral and Clean corners on round parts;
Zigzag and One way for rectangular parts. You should also
use One way if the material has a grain that you want to cut
only in one direction.
Note: The rough cutting methods are unavailable when you
create an engraving remachining operation. Remachining toolpaths always use the zigzag cutting pattern.
5 Click OK to accept the toolpath parameters and close the
3
32
3
34
35
dialog box.
Engraving Tips and Guidelines

Engraving requires closed boundaries and a V-groove (or
chamfer) tool.
Inner boundaries are islands you can emboss by selecting
Rough in the Roughing/finishing tab.
To remove material from a cavity, use an engraving roughing
toolpath and a straight (flat) bit. In the Engraving parameters tab, enter an Angle for flat cutter offset that matches
the V-groove tool you selected for engraving. Set the XY
stock to leave value to leave material for the finish pass.
After creating the roughing operation, reselect the geometry
and create an engraving toolpath to carve the geometry with
the V-groove tool.
When creating a roughing operation for engraving, set the
Tolerance in the Roughing/Finishing tab to a value smaller
than the XY stock to leave value (specified in the Engraving
parameters tab) but larger than the default. A looser tolerance will reduce the size of the NC program. After creating
the roughing operation, reselect the geometry and create a
36
37
38
39
310
remachining operation to clean up areas of material left by

the roughing operation.
An engraving remachining toolpath uses a smaller tool to

remove material that cannot be removed by the roughing
tool, and then makes a finish pass. You can calculate the
material to be removed either from the previous operation or
from the dimensions of the roughing tool.
Note: If you use a previous operation to calculate the remaining
stock for an engraving remachining operation, you cannot rearrange the operations later in the Toolpath Manager.
Toolpath Chaining Techniques

Chaining is the process you use to select and link pieces of geometry
so that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. This
topic provides general information on chaining geometry to create
toolpath operations.
When you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves
(lines, arcs, and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Most toolpaths require geometry to be chained. Usually you chain the geometry that is used in a single operation, such as a contour toolpath or
pocket toolpath. Chaining determines the direction of tool travel
during machining. However, you can chain together separate sets of
entities to be cut in a single operation. For example you can chain
together the entities for separate parts to be cut from the same workpiece in the same operation.
Working with Open and Closed Chains

Chains are open or closed.
Open chain
Closed chain
In an open chain the start and end points are different coordinates.
Examples of open chains are single lines or arcs. An open chain may
consist of a single entity or several contiguous entities. Partial

chaining is a method of selecting entities as open chains.
In a closed chain the start and end points share the same coordinates.
Closed chains typically consist of several entities that have adjacent
end points and that form a closed boundary. Examples of closed
chains are rectangles or circles.
Mastercam determines chaining direction differently for open chains
than closed chains. In an open chain, the start point is placed at the
end of the chain closest to the selection point and the chain direction
points to the opposite end of the chain. In a closed chain, you set
default values in the Chaining Options dialog box that determine
whether the chaining direction for closed chains is clockwise, counterclockwise, or based on the cursor position.
TIP: When creating open and closed chains, use options in the
Chaining dialog box to reverse the chain direction, and move
the start or end position of the chain.
Chaining Direction
3
32
3
34
35
All chains have a direction. Direction for closed chains is either clockwise or counterclockwise, while the direction for open chains points
toward one of the chain endpoints. The chaining direction determines the direction of tool movement in a toolpath.
36
In surface creation, Mastercam uses chaining direction to synchronize the chains to create a smooth, regular surface. Errors in establishing chaining direction often result in a twisted surface that cannot
be machined. In the example below, the arrow shows the counter-
37
38
39
310
clockwise chaining direction for a closed chain that consists of several

lines and arcs. The chain starts at the base point of the arrow.
Chaining arrow
Closed chain for pocket toolpath. This chain consists of

several lines and arcs and has a counterclockwise direction.
Chaining Contour Toolpaths

You can chain 2D geometry, 3D geometry, or a combination of 2D and
3D geometry for contour toolpaths. Chaining 2D geometry generates
a 2D contour toolpath. Mastercam automatically defaults the
Contour type to 2D if you chain only 2D geometry.
If you chain 3D geometry or a combination of 2D and 3D geometry,
you can choose to create either a 2D or 3D contour toolpath.
2D chaining contours offset and flatten 3D geometry to an

absolute depth, relative to the construction plane.
3D chaining contours offset 3D geometry with depths
matching the chains, then add the incremental depth value.
Adding to a Chained Contour (Mastercam Lathe)

To define a line that will be added to the start and/or end of the
chained contour without creating extra geometry, you can use the
New Contour Line or Adjust Contour dialog boxes. This may be
necessary when the geometry that is chained for a toolpath lies totally
within the stock boundary. Adding a line to the contour to extend the
chain in a pre-defined direction can help ensure that the tool does not
rapid into the stock at the start of a pass, or rapid along the stock at
the end of a pass.
To access the New Contour dialog box:
Click the Lead In or Lead In/Out button on the parameters

tab for any lathe toolpath except thread, drill, and C-axis
toolpaths.
Then select the Add Line check box and button from the
Lead In/Out dialog box.
To access the Adjust Contour dialog box, choose Adjust start of
contour or Adjust end of contour from the Groove Shape Parameters
tab.
Note: In the Groove Shape Parameters tab, the Adjust end / start
of contour options are available only when the groove is defined
from chained geometry.
Synchronizing Chains
Many Mastercam functions, such as surface creation and ruled toolpaths, use chain synchronization. Choose a synchronization mode
(sync mode) if you have attempted to create a toolpath and found that
it twists as shown below. The twisting could affect the surface of the
part, making it unmachinable or irregular.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
Original geometry
Sync mode set to None
Sync mode set to By Branch
38
39
310
When synchronizing chains, Mastercam breaks a chain into a number

of separate chains for the purpose of creating the toolpath or surface.
Use the Sync mode setting in the Chaining Options dialog box to
define how you want to divide the chains. You can also set a default
startup Sync mode on the Settings, Configuration dialog box
Chaining properties page.
Choose one of the available Sync mode options defined below:
None: Synchronizes the chains by dividing them each into an

even number of points. Certain surfaces and toolpaths
require more precision than this option provides.
by Entity: Matches the chains by the endpoints of each
entity. Requires both chains to have the same number of entities.
by Branch: Matches the chains at branch points. Can be used
for most chain synchronization.
by Node: (Applies only to parametric splines). Matches two
or more splines by the node points of each spline. Each spline
must have the same number of node points.
by Point: Matches the chains by point entities on the
endpoints of each entity. You must pre-define the points
where you want the chains to sync.
Manual: Matches the chains of areas you specify.
Manual/density: Matches the chains that you specify and
allows you to assign a density for each chain. If an area has
small radii, use a higher density (such as 2) for a better finish.
Selecting Tools
In this section, you will learn about selecting tools and setting feeds,
speeds, and other general toolpath parameters. For most mill, router,
and lathe toolpath types, the Toolpath Parameters tab displays after
you chain or select geometry, solids, or surfaces for a new toolpath.
You can also access this tab by clicking the Parameters icon in the
Toolpaths Manager list.
Note: Changing parameters after creating a toolpath may require
you to regenerate the toolpath.
TIP: In the Toolpath Manager list, click the Parameters icon to

access all Toolpath Parameters dialog box tabs, such as Toolpath parameters, Pocket parameters, Roughing / Finishing
parameters, and so on.
Selecting a tool
The Toolpath parameters tab options vary, based on the selected toolpath type. However, there are many common fields for all toolpath
types and the method you use to select a tool is basically the same.
Mill and router toolpath parameters are very similar. Lathe toolpaths
share some mill and router toolpath parameters but also include
many that are unique to lathe machine tools. To become more
familiar with the differences and similarities between Mill / Router
and Lathe toolpath parameters, compare the following examples.
3
32
3
34
Figure 3-59: Example: Mill Pocket Toolpath parameters tab
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-60: Example: Lathe Rough Toolpath parameters tab
Note: For detailed information on individual fields in the Toolpath parameters tab for a specific toolpath type, refer to the
online Help.
Use the large area in the left section of the Toolpath parameters tab to
select a tool for the operation. All tools that have been added to or are
used in the current machine group display in this area by default.
To change the tools display, similar to setting Windows file view
options, rightclick in this area and choose an option from the View
menu.
If you display tools in a list, you can sort the list by clicking on column
headers. To reorder the columns, click and drag them to new positions.
Use one of the following methods to select a tool:
In the tool display area, click the tool you want to use.
If the tool you want is not displayed, choose Select library
tool. This opens the Tool Selection dialog box where you can
select a tool from the current tool library, or from any tool
library you choose.
Use the rightclick menu option to Create new tool and
define the tool.
IMPORTANT: Any new tool definitions you create are stored
only in the current machine group, unless you save them to a
tool library.
TIPS:
To simplify the display, choose Tool Filter and define criteria
that will limit the display to only tools that meet your criteria.
You can select a tool from the library just by entering its tool
number, provided that in the Machine Group Properties
dialog box Tool Settings tab, the option to Search tool
library when entering tool number is selected. To configure
this setting, click the Tool Settings icon in the Toolpath
Manager list.
Doubleclick a tool to edit its tool definition, or choose Edit
tool from the rightclick menu.
Working with the Tool Selection dialog box
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
The Tool Selection dialog box displays when you choose the Select
library tool button in the Toolpath parameters tab.
39
310
Figure 3-61: Toolpath Selection dialog box
Use this dialog box to select tools from a tool library and add them to
the current machine group. Adding tools to the machine group allows
you to select and use them in a toolpath.
Doubleclick a tool to add it to the current operation and

close the dialog box.
To list tools from a different library, select one from the
drop-down list located in the upper left corner. If the library
you want to use does not appear in the list, click the folder
button (next to the drop-down list) then navigate to the
library file location and select it for display.
You can also filter the tool list by a number of different
criteria to make it easier to find the right tool. Select Filter
active to apply a defined tool filter, or click the Filter button
to define or edit the selection criteria, then apply it.
When you select a tool, the other fields in the Toolpath parameters
dialog box tabs update with default values that you can override.
Default parameters can come from the tool definition, machine and
control definition, and the operation defaults. The machine group
properties define the source of the default values for many of the
parameters.
TIPS:
Mastercam Mill and Router toolpath types can use tools and
tool libraries interchangeably.
While working in the tool display window, click and drag
columns to rearrange them, or sort the tools by clicking on a
column header. Use the rightclick menu to access more
display options.
Using the Toolpath Parameters Rightclick Menu

When you rightclick anywhere in the Toolpath parameters tabwith
the exception of the Comments text box, you can choose the
following options from an extensive rightclick menu.
Figure 3-62: Toolpath Parameters rightclick menu
Mill / Router
3
32
3
34
Lathe
35
36
37
Create new tool: Create a new tool instead of selecting one
from the list. The tool definition you create is stored only in
the current machine group unless you save it to a library.
Edit tool: Edit the tool definition for the selected tool. Unless
you save the changes to the library, they are stored only in the
machine group and do not affect the tool definition in the
library.
Get block drill: (Router) This option is available only when
you create or edit a block drilling toolpath. Use it to access
the Drill Block Selection dialog box where you can view,
select, or edit the drill blocks defined for the machine type.
Drill blocks must be predefined for the selected machine
type using the Machine Definition Manager.
38
39
310
Get angled head (Mill), Get aggregate (Router): Access the

Aggregate dialog box, where you can select an aggregate
tooling block and set tools in the block.
Tool manager: This menu item includes the current tool
library file name. Use it to access the Tool Manager dialog box
and view and manage tool libraries, the tools in your part file,
and tool definitions.
View: Display the tools as large icons, a simple list, or a
detailed list.
Arrange tools: Sort the tools by tool number or tool name.
These options are helpful if you have the tools displayed as
icons without any column headers.
Popup tool: (Lathe) Set options to view a larger picture of the
tool and control the popup action by hovering the mouse
over a tool icon in the Toolpath parameters tab.
Import operations: (Mill / Router) Import one or more operations from an operations library and automatically apply
them to the current geometry selection.
Feed/speed calculator: (Mill / Router) Use the calculator to
calculate feeds and speeds including surface speed or feed
per tooth.
Save parameters: Save all parameters defined in the Toolpath parameter dialog box tabs to the operation defaults file
(.DEFAULTS) used in the machine group. This overwrites the
values stored in the operations defaults file only for the
selected toolpath type.
Reload parameters: Restore the values in the Toolpath
parameters dialog box tabs with those defined for the toolpath type in the machine groups operation defaults file.
Note: You set the operation defaults file using the Files tab in the
Machine Group Properties dialog box. Initially, the .DEFAULTS
file that displays in the Files tab is associated with the selected
control definition. To view this setting, and other machine group
defaults, click the machine group Files icon in the Toolpath
Manager list.
Managing Toolpath Operations

In the Toolpath Manager, each operation has a name that describes
the type of machining action it includes, such as Surface Rough Flow-
line. A single part can have many operations within one or more
machine groups and toolpath groups.
Each operation has at least four parts:
Figure 3-63: Example: Operation details in Toolpath Manager
32
Toolpath Parameters: Includes all the machining information, such as tool selection, number of cutting passes, etc.
Tool definition: Information about the size and shape of
the tool.
Part geometry: Contains the geometry selections for the
part or section you are machining.
Toolpath: A separate intermediate file that contains all of
the toolpath data. The post-processor uses the NCI file to
create an NC file for your specific machine/control.
3
34
35
To view and edit this information, click an icon in the Toolpath

Manager list. Operations that are more detailed and specific to a
selected machine and toolpath type provide additional icons representing information you can view and edit.
36
Lathe-specificFor lathe toolpaths, click the Update Stock / Do not

update stock icon to enable or disable this feature. When enabled,
as shown below, Mastercam Lathe provides you with feedback on
the stock shape as it is machined.
37
Figure 3-64: Example: Lathe Operation details
38
Surface toolpathsFor surface toolpaths, you can click additional
geometry icons to view and edit information on the Drive surfaces,
Check surfaces, Containment boundaries, Start points menus, and
CAD files used in the operation.
39
310
Figure 3-65: Example: Surface Operation details
Flowline toolpathsFor flowline toolpaths, you can also view and

edit flowline information for the toolpath by selecting the Geometry - Flowline Data icon.
Figure 3-66: Example: Flowline Operation details
Using Toolpath Manager icons

Toolpath Manager icons are visual indicators that represent different
types of information about the operations in a machine group and
their status. Each icon you may see in the Toolpath Manager and its
purpose is described below.
Operations Folder icons

Operation folder: Contains the operation components
such as toolpath parameters, tool parameters, and
geometry or solids.
Selected Operation: When you select an operation, the
folder displays a blue check mark. You select operations
to collectively perform certain functions on the selected
group, such as regenerate, backplot or verify.
Parameters icons
Toolpath parameters: Opens the Toolpath Parameters
dialog box where you can select a tool, set feeds, speeds,
and other general toolpath parameters.
Subprogram: Indicates that the operation contains one
or more subprograms and opens the related dialog box
for transform or non-transform operations. (A subprogram is an NC program that is called from the main NC
program to repeat code within an operation.)
Tool icon
Tool parameters: Opens the Define Tool dialog box
where you can define the tool and its parameters for the
operation.
Lathe tool parameters: Click to open the Lathe Tools
dialog box where you can define the tool type, insert,
holder, and cutting parameters.
3
32
3
34
35
Generic Geometry icon

Geometry: Allows you to edit the geometry by opening
the appropriate editing function, such as the Drill Point
Manager, or Chain Manager.
Solid / Surfaces icons

Solid/Surfaces: Indicates that the operation contains a
solid, a surface, or a combination of solids, surfaces, and
geometry. Use this option to open the associated editing
function, such as the Toolpath / Surface Selection dialog
box.
36
37
38
Geometry Drive surfaces: Provides access to the Drive

surface selection menu for surface toolpaths.
Check surfaces: Opens the Edit Drive Geometry dialog
box where you can make changes to drive surfaces.
Geometry Containment boundaries: Opens the Chain
Manager where you can select containment boundaries
for surface toolpaths.
Start points: Identifies start points of surface geometry
and allows you to reselect a start point.
39
310
Flowline: Applies only to surface flowline toolpaths and

allows you to change flowline parameters.
CAD file: Indicates that a CAD file was selected for a
surface toolpath. Use this option to select a different
CAD file.
Toolpath Operation icons

Toolpath on: Toolpath display is on (icon is blue).
Toolpath off: Toolpath display is off (icon is gray).
Toolpath not restored: The file has not been restored (via
a toolpath regeneration) since the file was opened with
the restore NCI option deselected (icon is light blue).
Toolpath locked: Toolpath has been edited after regeneration. Toolpath editor, highfeed machining, and batch
processing all lock the toolpath. Locking prevents unintentional regeneration. To reverse locking, click the Lock
button at the top of the Toolpath Manager.
Posting off: Posting is turned off for the toolpath. To
reverse the posting status, click the Post button at the
top of the Toolpath Manager.
Dirty toolpath: The toolpath needs to be regenerated.
This happens if you have changed certain parameters of
the underlying geometry. To regenerate toolpaths, use
the Regenerate buttons at the top of the Toolpath
Manager. You can choose to regenerate all invalid toolpaths, or only those you select.
Update stock enabled: Indicates that the Mastercam
Lathe update option is enabled, allowing Mastercam to
provide feedback on the stock shape as it is machined.
Update stock disabled: Indicates that the Mastercam
Lathe update option is disabled. Mastercam will not
provide feedback on the stock shape as it is machined.
Batch: Indicates that in the Tool parameters tab the
operation has been marked to Batch. The operation is
set to batch mode and will be processed separately from
other operations. (This parameters is not available in
Mastercam Wire.)
TIP: If you choose to backplot, verify or post process a dirty,

unlocked operation, a message informs you that the selected
operations may require regeneration. You can choose whether
to regenerate the operations before continuing with the function. If you choose not to regenerate, the dirty operations are
processed as is by the selected function. This message does
not appear if you choose to backplot, verify or post operations
that are dirty and locked. In this case, the function proceeds
without interruption and the information in the binary NCI file is
used as is. For more information on using these functions,
see Backplotting Operations on page 548, Verifying Operations
on page 551, and Post Processing on page 558.
Displaying Toolpaths
When you generate a toolpath, the tool motion is drawn in the
graphics window. Sometimes the display of multiple toolpaths can
obscure the geometry and each other. You may find it simpler to work
with toolpath display turned off.
Showing / Hiding All ToolpathsTo show or hide the display of all
toolpaths in the graphics window, position the cursor in the
graphics window and press the Alt key and the T key [Alt+T] at the
same time. This key sequence toggles the visibility of all toolpaths
on and off in the graphics window.
Showing / Hiding Selected ToolpathsTo change the display state of
one or more toolpaths, in Toolpath Manager select one or more
toolpath operations and press T [Select+T]. Mastercam turns off
the toolpath display for the selected toolpaths. To turn the display
back on, press T again. This is especially helpful if you are working
with a complex part and want to view only specific toolpaths.
When you use this technique to turn off the display of individual
operations, they are not affected by pressing [Alt+T] in the
graphics window. They remain hidden until you press T again
when the cursor is positioned in the Toolpath Manager.
Notes:
You may need to repaint the display after toggling the toolpath
display on and/or off.
Toolpaths will not be displayed for operations marked dirty
until they are regenerated.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Guidelines for Working with Operations

Singleclick on the text or icon of an operation to select it.
The icon of the selected operation appears with a blue check
mark.
To select multiple operations, hold down the Ctrl key and
click the text or icon associated with the operations you want
to select.
Copy or move operations within the list by dragging and
dropping. Operations that are copied and moved from one
group to another will take on the properties of the new group.
Subgroups can also be moved into positions of parent
groups.
Note: If the operation being copied or moved is not compatible
with the machine setup for the machine group, a message
informs you, and asks if you want to cancel the copy/move or
accept Mastercam's attempt to modify the operation to fit the
machine definition.
Deleted operations can be restored by using the Undelete

command from the rightclick menu. You can undelete an
operation up until you load another file or exit Mastercam.
To quickly and easily add a comment to an operation, single
click it, then click it again as if to rename it. When the operation text disappears, type in your comment and either click
somewhere else or press Enter. The comment appears at the
end of the operation text as well as in the Comments field in
the Toolpath parameters tab for the selected operation.
IMPORTANT: The text you enter in this manner overwrites
any comment text you have already entered for that operation.
To hide most of the text that appears next to the list icons, use
the Display command in the rightclick menu.
Editing Operations
Toolpath Manager icons and rightclick menu functions offer many
flexible methods you can use to edit operations. So far in this chapter,
you have learned about using Toolpath Manager icons to:
Edit a machine definition (page 371)

Edit a control file (page 377)
3
32
Set machine group properties (page 427)

View and edit toolpath operations (page 534)
This section provides information on how to use the Toolpath
Manager rightclick menu and its Edit selected operations submenu
functions. In this section, you will learn about:
Editing Common
Parameters (page
542)
Changing the NC File

Name (page 544)
Renumbering Tools
(page 545)
Renumbering Work
Offsets (page 546)
Reversing Toolpaths
(page 547)
Recalculating Feeds /
Speeds (page 547)
To access these editing functions, select one or more operations in the

Toolpath Manager, rightclick and choose an editing function from
the Edit selected operations submenu.
3
34
35
36
37
Note: Prior to choosing an editing function from this submenu,

you must first select the operations you want to edit in the Toolpath Manager list.
38
39
310
Editing Common Parameters

Use the Edit common parameters function and dialog box to efficiently edit parameters shared by a selected group of operations. The
operations you can update with this function must be in the same
machine group.
Figure 3-67: Edit Common Parameters dialog box:
The large area in the left side of the dialog box lists all selected operations in ascending order by operation number.
Use the check box next to each field in this dialog box to select the
fields you want to edit. This flexible design lets you implement
changes to one field, all fields, or any combination of fields you
choose. When you click OK or Apply, only selected (activated) fields
and their associated values are used to edit the operations in the list.
TIPS:
Use the Select all and Deselect all buttons,
located in the lower left corner, to quickly
select / deselect all fields.
To deselect (disable) the Clearance or Retract fields for all

edited operations, select the check box next to the field and
choose Disable from the Use drop-down list.
32
Note: If a change does not fit an operation in the list, it is ignored

during the update process. For example, changes to Feed plane do
not affect a drilling operation. Also, before accepting a change, the
update process verifies that the change can be supported by the
machine groups Machine Definition and Control Definition. If it
cannot, a message identifies the field and conflict, and no change
occurs.
After selecting a field, use one of the following methods to change it:
Type a value in the field

Click the field button and set parameters in the related dialog
box
Select a value from a drop-down list
To update the operations with your changes, click OK or Apply.
Use the Abs/Inc drop-down list to choose a plane setting for the
selected field and specified value. Most toolpaths provide Clearance,
Retract, Feed plane, Top of stock, and Depth parameters you enter in
either absolute or incremental values. Absolute values are always
measured from the origin. Incremental values are relative to other
parameters or chained geometry. For example, incremental Depth
and Top of Stock parameters are relative to the location of the chained
geometry. The Clearance, Retract, and Feed plane are relative to the
Top of stock.
All tools added to or used in the active machine group appear in the
large area below the Tool field. To choose a tool and apply it to all
selected operations, start by selecting the Tool check box. This activates the Tool selection option. Then select a tool by clicking it. Use
the Filter check box and button to modify the tool display. To access
the Tool Selection dialog box and its options, click the Select library
tool button. You can also pick additional options from the menu that
displays when you rightclick in the Tool area.
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-68: Edit Common Parameters, Tool rightclick menu
Use the Propagate button in conjunction with the operations

list to copy one or more selected fields from one operation to
all other operations in the list. First, select the operation you
want to copy fields from by clicking it in the list. The operation is highlighted to indicate its selection. Click Propagate
to update all common parameters fields with values from the
selected operation. Then select one or more fields to apply,
edit them as necessary, and click Apply. The selected fields
and values are applied to all operations in the Edit Common
Parameters list. To use another operation to propagate and
update additional fields, repeat this procedure. To accept the
changes and exit the function, click OK rather than Apply.
TIP: To update the common parameter values with those used
in a selected operation, rather than select an operation and
click the Propagate button, you can simply doubleclick the
operation.
Changing the NC File Name

The Change NC file name function lets you specify the name of the
NC file to use when posting output for one or more operations. The
changed setting is applied to all operations you selected in the Toolpath Manager list prior to choosing the function.
Figure 3-69: Enter toolpath name dialog box
IMPORTANT: This setting overrides the NC output file setting

specified for the machine group in the Machine Group Properties Files tab, Toolpath name field. However, the file will be
saved to the location specified by the data path entered in the
Files tab, Toolpath name field. This location displays in the
Enter new NC name dialog box, as illustrated above.
3
32
Renumbering Tools
The Renumber tools function makes it easy to renumber the tools
used in the selected operations, and optionally, those that have been
saved with the part file but are not used in any of its operations. For
example, you might use this function when reprogramming a job for a
different machine tool.
Note: Tools are renumbered based on the current order of operations.
Figure 3-70: Renumber Tools dialog box
3
34
35
36
37
38
The Starting tool number and Tool number increment fields

are required fields; others are optional.
To renumber all the tools that have been saved to the part
file, regardless of whether they are used in its operations,
select the Also renumber tools not used in any operation
option. Deselect this option to renumber only the tools that
are included in the selected operations.
39
310
When you return to the Toolpath Manager after accepting

work offset changes, Regenerate all selected operations.
Renumbering Work Offsets

Use this function to renumber the work offsets for non-transform
operations within the Toolpath Manager.
Figure 3-71: Renumber Work Offsets dialog box
Note: Tools are renumbered based on the current order of operations.
The Starting work offset number and Work offset number

increment fields are required fields; others are optional.
When you apply your changes, any work offset information
previously defined for the selected operations is updated
with the renumbering information you provided.
Reversing Toolpaths
The Reverse toolpath function allows you to transpose the
machining direction and swap the side where cutter compensation in
control is applied for selected operations. If cutter compensation in
control is off in the toolpath, it remains off; only the machining direction is reversed.
After reversing a toolpath, the NCI file is automatically locked

to prevent you from regenerating the toolpath.
3
32
3
Recalculating Feeds / Speeds

Use this function to adjust the feed rate, plunge rate, retract rate, and
spindle speed for multiple toolpaths based on a new stock material.
This process requires that the feed calculation be set to Material.
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Backplot and Verify

In this section, you will learn to use the Toolpath Manager Backplot
and Verify functions as part of the machining process.
Backplotting Operations
Backplotting simulates tool motion for selected operations.
This animated display allows you to view the cutting process
in the graphics window in a manner similar to stepping
through or running a video file.
Use Backplot to spot errors in a program before machining the part.
To begin backplotting, select one or more operations in the Toolpath
Manager list, then click the Backplot button. To move forward and
backward through the backplot simulation, use the Backplot VCR bar,
located above the graphics window.
Pla
y
St
op
Re
w
St ind
ep
St ba
e c
Fa p fo k
s r
Tra t for ward
c w
Dr e ard
aw
Figure 3-72: Backplot VCR bar
Run speed slider
Set conditional stops
Visible motion position slider
You can run Backplot in Draw mode, which displays the toolpath as
the tool moves along, or Trace mode, which displays the entire toolpath as the tool moves over it. The direction of each tool move is highlighted as the backplot progresses. The default colors are light blue at
the start and red at the end of each move, but you can set them to any
color you choose.
As you step through the toolpath, the Details tab of the Backplot
dialog box displays information on the type of move, and the Info tab
MACHINING / Backplot and Verify 549
displays information such as cycle time and path length for the
selected operation.
Backplot dialog box and
Details tab (default)
Backplot dialog box, Info tab
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Use the Isolate option to select specific tool motion in the

toolpath for closer examination. Only selected tool moves
display. You can also isolate motion by selecting a path in the
Backplot operation list.
Use the Options button to customize backplot settings
such as tool display, holder display, and tool motion colors
using fields in the Backplot Options dialog box.
Figure 3-73: Backplot Options dialog box
Verifying Operations
Use the Verify function in the Toolpath Manager to create a
3D simulation of machining selected operations. The model
created by this function represents the surface finish. It also
shows collisions, if any exist, and enables you to find and correct
program errors before they reach the shop floor.
Toolpath verification provides two modes of operation: Standard and
TrueSolid.
Standard mode uses pixel-based technology to represent the

machined part. If your installation does not include the TrueSolid verification add-on, you must use Standard mode for
3-, 4- and 5-axis toolpath verification. For information on
purchasing TrueSolid verification, contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
TrueSolid mode uses solid modeling technology for toolpath
simulation. TrueSolid also uses OpenGL graphics for
dynamic 3D solid rendering and animation. After verifying a
part in TrueSolid mode, you can rotate and magnify the part
to more closely check features, surface finish, or scallops.
Because of these enhanced capabilities, TrueSolid verification is the best choice for toolpath simulation.
Notes:
3
32
3
34
35
36
In Mastercam Lathe, use TrueSolid mode for best results.

The Turbo feature shows the machined part without simulating the tool motion. Selecting Turbo for either Standard or
TrueSolid verification may produce results more quickly. TrueSolid Turbo is available only for 3-axis toolpaths in Top view,
and does not support WCS or simulate part indexing.
37
38
39
310
Running the Verification

To begin verification, select one or more operations in the Toolpath
Manager list, then click the Verify button. Use the control buttons
located at the top of the Verify dialog box to start, pause, rewind, step
through, and fast forward through the verify simulation.
Figure 3-74: Verify dialog box
Use other options in this dialog box to:
Select the tool display mode: Turbo, Simulate tool, or Simulate tool and holder.
Set display parameters affecting movement, speed, and
quality of simulation.
Set stop/pause conditions.
Turn Verbose mode on or off.

Select verification speed.
Access Verify settings and features, including slice (cross
section), measure, zoom, and options to save the stock
model.
If you select the Verbose check box on the Verify dialog box, the Verify
ribbon bar displays.
Figure 3-75: Verify ribbon bar
on
/o
ff
ion
Co
ola
nt
om
pe
ns
at
Cu
tte
rc
sp
ee
d
Sp
ind
le
Fe
ed
rat
rd
ina
te
s
nc
oo
Po
sit
io
co
de
G
32
When you stop the verification process, either by using a selected stop
option or with the VCR controls, this ribbon bar displays read-only
information about the tool move that occurred just prior to the stop
position. The coordinates for the stop position also display. If you
close the Verify controls dialog box , the ribbon bar also closes.
Note: While a verification is in progress, you cannot change the
tool display mode. You must wait for the verification process to
finish, then choose Restart.
Configuring Verification Parameters

To set parameters for the verification process, click the Configure
button in the Verify controls dialog box.
Then use fields in the Verify Options dialog box to customize:
34
35
36
37
38
39
Stock shape, file, boundaries, initial size source.

Tool profile, MCX and NCI file selection, tool and STL tolerances.
Color settings for stock, collision, tool, and cut stock.
310
Miscellaneous options for TrueSolid simulation, cutter

compensation, axis display, STL file comparison, chip
removal, tool color and display, screw thread simulation.
Figure 3-76: Verify Options dialog box
Note: If you are verifying the current part file (MCX) and do not
set stock dimensions in the Verify configuration dialog box, the
stock values that are specified in the part file are used (Machine
Group Properties, Stock Set up tab). If stock values cannot be used
from the part file, the stock dimensions in the NCI file associated
with the part file are used. If you are verifying a different NCI file,
Mastercam scans the specified NCI file for the stock dimensions.
Tool Simulation During Verification

During verification, Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Router show a
solid representation of the tool as it moves through the toolpath. To
set the shape of the tool profile, use options in the Tool Profile section
of the Verify configuration dialog box:
To use the tool parameters to display the tool profile, choose

Auto.
To use the selected part file as the tool profile, choose As
defined. The part file is selected when you set up the tool.
Mastercam scales the part file by the diameter you enter for
the tool.
Note: If you are using an Undefined tool type, the part file is not
scaled.
Tool simulation in TrueSolid Turbo modeVerify does not simulate
all tool shapes in TrueSolid Turbo mode. When verifying in TrueSolid
Turbo mode, the program simulates the tool shape by extruding it
upward from the tool tip. To properly simulate tools that perform
undercutting, do not use TrueSolid Turbo mode. Instead, verify parts
that use undercutting tools in TrueSolid tool simulation mode.
3
32
3
34
Using STL comparison

STL comparison allows you to check the accuracy of the part model
created by Verify against an STL file (a 3D model file). STL comparison
is only available in Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Router, and only
in TrueSolid Turbo mode when using box-shaped stock.
To enable STL comparison, select the Use TrueSolid and Compare to
STL file check boxes in the Verify Options dialog box. After running
the verification, you are prompted to select an STL file before
accessing the STL Compare dialog box.
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-77: STL Compare dialog box
To view the part model against the geometry contained in the STL file,
choose Compare. In addition to the comparison, you can show the
machined model and the STL model separately or together.
You can set the colors in the STL Compare dialog box to denote areas
on the part where material is being left or where the part is gouged.
Each color represents a range of values for the amount of stock left on
the part or removed from the part. For example, the first color can
represent material greater than 0.003 left on the part. The next color
can represent any material left between 0.003 and 0.002. The horizontal shading boundary near the middle of the dialog box indicates
the color used to show zero stock left (a correct toolpath). Values and
colors above this boundary denote areas above the stock; values and
colors below this boundary denote areas in the stock.
To change range settings, enter numeric values in the text boxes on

the left. To change the color mapped to a range, enter a value in the
text box or choose the color palette button and select a color from the
Colors dialog box.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Post Processing
Post processing refers to the process by which the toolpaths in your
Mastercam part files are converted to a format that can be understood by your machine tool's control (for example, G-codes). A
special program called a post processor reads the Mastercam file and
writes the appropriate NC code. Generally, every machine tool or
control will require its own post processor, customized to produce
code formatted to meet its exact requirements and user preferences.
In addition, you can customize a post processor to reflect job or shop
preferences, for example, safety blocks or tolerances.
Post processors have two components.
An executable file such as MP.DLL, which is provided with

Mastercam. This is often used as is. Custom executables
can be developed for advanced applications, as necessary.
A post customization script (.PST) which is used by MP.DLL
to customize the post output for your machine tool. It
includes format statements, processing logic, miscellaneous
integers and custom variable definitions, system variables,
etc. Mastercam includes a wide variety of working posts for
common machines and NC controllers, which can be further
customized for specific needs.
A single post executable (such as MP.DLL) produces NC output for a
wide variety of machines by reading different .PST files. You can use
one post executable with one or more .PST file.
Post processors do not read Mastercam part files directly. Instead,
Mastercam creates an NCI file as an intermediate file format to be
used by the post processor. You can choose to save the NCI files in a
text format so that you can review them directly. This can be very
useful when customizing posts, debugging post problems, or
analyzing problems with the NC code for a particular part, because it
lets you see the exact data that the post is reading.
MACHINING / Post Processing 559
IMPORTANT: If you are upgrading to Mastercam X from a

prior Mastercam version, please note the following information:
You must update post processors used with previous
Mastercam versions before using them with the current
version.
Toolpath operations generated in previous versions of
Mastercam may be marked dirty, requiring you to regenerate them before post processing.
Mastercam X handles lathe coordinates differently than
previous versions. This requires a modification to the post
processor.
Post Processors, and Control / Machine Definitions

Producing the correct NC code for your machine and application
requires properly configured machine definition, control definition,
and .PST files.
The machine definition file (.MMD, .LMD, or .RMD)

describes the physical capabilities of your machine. These
include the linear and rotary axes that are mounted on the
machine; the types of linear, rapid, and rotary motion the
axes are capable of, including limits; coolant options; axis
orientation; tool changers; and spindles, turrets, and chucks.
The selected control definition (.CONTROL) for the machine
definition provides information to the post processor about
the processing capabilities of the control. These include
machining tolerance values; machine cycles and subprograms; feed rate dimensioning, and many other settings. The
control definition also includes defaults for file locations,
operation defaults files, tool settings and offsets, and other
referenced files.
The .PST file reads the information from the machine and
control definition and contains the processing logic and
format statements to generate the proper G-codes, M-codes
and other commands for your machine. It also contains
information that Mastercam reads to customize its interface
to support the post.
Each control definition includes a list of post processors that have
been configured for the control. Use the Machine Definition Manager
to select the specific post that will be used with the machine or for a
specific job. Mastercam's modular architecture makes it easy to share
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
a single control across multiple machines; define several posts for a

single machine; or update components when your equipment
changes.
About PST files

The contents of the .PST file are contained in the following major
areas:
Definition area: includes format statements and assignments, variable declarations and initialization, etc.
Postblock area: includes predefined and user-defined
postblocks. Postblocks are groups of commands that contain
the processing logic.
Post text area: includes data used by Mastercam to
customize the interface, allowing you to enter the proper
data and parameters to take advantage of your machine's
unique capabilities.
When you configure a new control definition to work with a particular
.PST file, Mastercam appends another post text area to the .PST file,
separated by a header. Through post processor customization, it is
possible to support machine tool / controller options you cannot set
through Mastercam directly. Contact your Mastercam reseller for
more information on post support.
WARNING: Customizing the .PST file is an advanced, sophisticated task that should only be attempted by knowledgeable
users, or your local Mastercam reseller. Programs created with
incorrect post processor files can cause your machine tool to
crash or behave in unpredictable ways. If you have any doubts,
please consult your Mastercam reseller for assistance or more
information!
Notes:
Mastercam also supports binary post processors. These are
posts in which the processing logic is encapsulated in a special
binary file with a .PSB extension, which cannot be edited in a
standard text editor. Post text and similar data can still be
written to a separate .PST file, though, using the Control Definition Manager.
For more information on MP post processors, see the MP Post
Processor Reference Guide, available on CD from your
Mastercam reseller.
About NCI files

Every toolpath or wirepath operation has an NCI file associated with
it. An NCI file is Mastercam's intermediate NC format. It contains all
the machining instructions and information for the NC file, but in a
generic format common to all machines. The post processor uses the
NCI file to create the final NC program for a specific machine or
control. The NCI file is the primary input for a Mastercam post
processor. In Mastercam X, the NCI file typically contains the toolpaths for an entire machine group.
There are actually two types of NCI files: binary and text NCI files.
When you create an operation in a Mastercam file, Mastercam automatically creates a binary NCI file with the same name as the last
operation. Mastercam works with these NCI files in the background.
You do not work with them directly unless you are writing a post
processor or doing other very advanced work.
When you post an operation, you have the option to create and save a
text NCI file. This contains the information from the binary NCI file in
a text format so you can read it. Use the control definition to tell
Mastercam how you want to work with NCI files. Consult your
Mastercam reseller if you need more documentation.
Understanding the NCI data format

This section introduces the format of a text NCI file. NCI data is
arranged in pairs of lines. The first line of each pair is an operation
code, or NCI G-code that indicates the type of operation, such as a
linear move or a stock definition. (Note that the codes used in the NCI
file do not look like the G-codes that you are used to seeing in your NC
programs, because they have to be machine- and control-independent.) The second line provides parameters used by the NCI code. For
example, operation code 1020 defines stock block size and material. It
has eight parameters, which appear below it on the second line. The
format for this particular NCI code looks like this:
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
where 1 = X component, width (stck_ht)
39
2 = Y component, height (stck_wdth)

3 = Z component, thickness (stck_thck)
4 = X origin of block (stck_x)
5 = Y origin of block (stck_y)
310
6 = Z origin of block (stck_z)

7 = Origin corner (stck_crnr)
8 = String with the stock material (stck_matl)
In addition, parameter 7 (Origin corner)can be one of the
following integers:
0 = top of block, center
1 = top of block, upper left corner
2 = top of block, upper right corner
3 = top of block, lower right corner
4 = top of block, lower left corner
5 = bottom of block, upper left corner
6 = bottom of block, upper right corner
7 = bottom of block, lower right corner
8 = bottom of block, lower left corner
In an actual file, NCI code 1020 might appear as:
1020
1. 1. 1. 0. 0. 0. 4 ALUMINUM inch 6061
This defines a 1x1x1 inch block of stock, made of 6061 aluminum. The
stock origin is X0, Y0, Z0; Z0 is the top of the stock model, and X0, Y0 is
the lower left corner.
For detailed reference information about NCI codes and formats, see
the Mastercam MP Post Reference Guide, which is available from your
Mastercam reseller.
Post Processing Toolpath Operations

All the operations in the Mastercam part file are listed in the Toolpath
Manager. Before posting operations, review the machine settings for
each machine group. These settings include the name of the post
processor and the name of the NC file that will be written.
X To create a machine-readable NC program from your
Mastercam part file:
1 In the Toolpath Manager, select the operations you want to
post process. You can select operations from more than one
machine group. All selected operations marked with a blue
check mark will be post processed.
TIP: To access advanced options for selecting operations,

rightclick in the Toolpath Manager and choose Select. For
example, you can select all the operations which use a particular tool, or which cut specific part geometry.
2 Click Post in the Toolpath Manager toolbar.
3 If you have not selected all the operations in a machine
group, you are asked if you want to post process all the operations.
To post all the operations in the selected machine group,

choose Yes.
3
32
3
To post only the selected operations, choose No.

4 In the Post processing dialog box, set the types of files to
create and indicate whether you want to view them in a text

editor as they are created. You can also choose to send the NC
files directly to the machine tool control.
5 To generate the NC files, click OK.
34
35
Disabling / Enabling Posting for Selected Operations

X To disable/ enable posting for any operation in the Toolpath
Manager:
36
1 In the Toolpath Manager, select one or more operations to
exclude from post processing (disable). Use standard

Windows selection methods to select multiple operations. All
selected operations are marked with a blue check mark.
37
2 In the Toolpath Manager toolbar, click Toggle
posting. The selected operations are marked with

the Toggle posting icon, indicating that are disabled
from post processing.
38
3 To enable post processing for an operation that displays the
Toggle posting icon, select it and click Toggle posting again.

The icon is removed and post processing is enabled for the
selected operation.
Note: Operations for which posting has been disabled are not
posted even if they are part of a batch job.
39
310
Machining Solids
Machining solid entities demands slightly different techniques than
machining wireframe or surfaces. This section introduces important
concepts and techniques, including:
Chaining solid edges

Toolpath operations designed for solids
Solid drilling with solid feature recognition
Using the Solids Manager to organize operations
MACHINING / Power User Tips 565
Power User Tips

This section contains overviews of advanced CAM techniques
including:
Creating and managing operations libraries
3
32
Creating tools and managing tool libraries

Creating material libraries
Editing machine definitions and control definitions
Creating part libraries
Batch Processing Toolpath Operations on page 565

Importing Operations on page 568
Exporting Operations on page 569
34
Transforming Operations on page 570

Trimming Toolpaths on page 573
Batch Processing Toolpath Operations

Batch processing lets you post a large number of toolpath operations
from one or more files at one time, in batch mode. This lets you separate post processing from other Mastercam design and toolpath
generation activities and maximize use of your Mastercam system
and machine tools.
Use batch files to:
Generate the toolpath operation (that is, the binary NCI file)
with or without generating the NC program.
Select toolpath operations for batch processing from any
Mastercam file, not just from the current file.
Automatically submit toolpath operations for batch
processing by selecting the To batch option on the Toolpath
parameters tab.
Create, save, and rerun batch files (.BCH), and edit batch files
directly using a file editor.
Automate toolpath regeneration and file saves of batched
operations.
Set time limits on batched operations.
Log batch processing operations.
35
36
37
38
39
310
To begin a batch processing job, right-click in the Toolpath Manager

and choose Batch. The Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box opens,
where you can create and customize the batch job. In this section, you
will learn about:
Selecting Files for Batch Processing (page 566)

Selecting Operations from a Batch File (page 566)
Selecting Batch Operations from Mastercam Files (page 567)
Tagging Operations for Batch Processing (page 567)
Running Batch Jobs (page 567)
Reviewing Batch Processing Log Files (page 568)
Selecting Files for Batch Processing

There are two ways to build a list of files for a batch processing job.
Use the Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box to read operations from one or more Mastercam files and add them to a
list. Use this method even if the operations you want to
include are in the current Mastercam file. Operations can be
tagged for batch processing so that they are automatically
added to the batch list when you select their source file.
Open a batch file, which contains the list of operations to be
processed and their source files.
You can use the Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box to combine
both methods. This means that you can open a batch file, and then
add operations from other Mastercam files. You can then choose
whether or not to save the new list to the batch file, create a new batch
file, or just run the job.
Selecting Operations from a Batch File

Open the Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box by right-clicking in
the Toolpath Manager and choosing Batch. Click on the Open button
in the Batch file section:
Select the desired batch file (.BCH). The operations appear in the list,
along with the name of the Mastercam file they are found in.
Note: When you open a batch file, its contents overwrite whatever
is already in the window. You can only list the contents of one
batch file at a time.
If you do not want to add any other operations to the list from the
batch file, you can click OK now to run the job.
Selecting Batch Operations from Mastercam Files

Once a Mastercam file has been saved, its operations are available for
batch processing. If you want to include operations from the current
file, you must save the file before the operations will be available.
Click on the Open button in the Source file section:
Any operations that have been tagged with the To batch option will
automatically appear in the batch file list (unless you have disabled
this feature in the Advanced properties). You can add other operations to the list by selecting them and clicking the red arrow.
Tagging Operations for Batch Processing

You can choose to tag an operation for batch processing by selecting
the To batch option in the Toolpath parameters tab for the operation:
Operations that have been tagged for batch processing appear in the
Toolpath Manager with a special icon:
These operations can not be regenerated like normal operations in
the Toolpath Manager. They can only be regenerated when a batch
job is being run. Also, they cannot be transformed.
To remove the batch tag from an operation, edit its Toolpath parameters and de-select the To batch option. Then regenerate the operation. You can add the operation to a batch job by selecting it manually.
3
32
3
34
35
36
Running Batch Jobs

When you run a batch job, Mastercam opens each file which has an
operation in the batch list. You can set whether or not the operations
are automatically regenerated. Each operation is posted according to
the settings and preferences recorded in the machine group and
machine definition saved in each Mastercam file. This means that a
batch job can contain toolpaths from different machines or which
reference different post processors. As each operation is processed,
Mastercam will write the NC code to the file specified in the machine
group properties for the operation, so that a single batch job can
result in many NC files.
37
38
39
Note: Batch processing is not available in Mastercam Wire.
310
TIPS:
Save the Mastercam file before opening the Batch Toolpath
Operations dialog box. It reads the toolpaths from
Mastercam files on your hard drive, not from system
memory, so until the current file is saved, it does not know
about its toolpaths.
Operation types whose toolpath cannot be regenerated (for
example, Trimmed toolpaths) cannot be processed in batch
mode.
Operations tagged for batch processing cannot be transformed.
Operations tagged for batch processing are not regenerated
when you regenerate operations in the Toolpath Manager.
They can only be regenerated during batch processing.
If you clear the To batch toolpath parameter on an existing
operation, the operation must be regenerated.
Reviewing Batch Processing Log Files

Mastercam automatically maintains two logs for each batch file that
you create:
batch_name.log records every instance of the batch file being

run.
batch_name.err records every action Mastercam takes when
it processes the job. Check this log when a batch job fails to
complete properly to see exactly what Mastercam was doing
when the job failed.
Mastercam saves them in the same directory as your batch files (typically, /mcamx/batch). Use any text editor to open them.
Importing Operations
You can import saved operations to the current Mastercam file, with
or without their geometry. Import these operations from a previously
created operations library.
You can also automatically recalculate feeds and speeds based on the
current job setup, put the operations in specific tool and construction
planes, and check for and eliminate duplicate tools.
Click the operation to select it for import. Mastercam marks selected
operations with a blue check mark. Press [Ctrl] and click to select
multiple operations or to deselect an operation. Press [Shift] and click

to select a range. Choose OK to import the selected operations.
Notes:
If you have imported only the operations parameters, the operations in the Toolpath Manager will be marked for regeneration.
If you import parameters without geometry, the operation will
be marked dirty. You can assign the parameters to other geometry in your current file and then regenerate the toolpath.
3
32
3
Guidelines for importing toolpath operations

When you are importing toolpath operations and you choose
to import the operations geometry, choose an origin (0,0)
point for the imported operations. You can import the operations multiple times by continuing to choose origin points.
Press [Esc] to return to Toolpath Manager and view imported
operations in the operations list.
You must import a file that contains compatible operations
to the type you are creating. Compatible operations contain
similar types of geometry. The following list shows which
toolpath types are compatible:
Contour, pocket, facing, ruled, revolution, swept 2D, swept
3D, Coons, loft use chains for geometry.
Drill, point, circle mill, thread mill, auto drill use points for
geometry.
All surface toolpaths use surfaces as geometry.
Exporting Operations
You can easily export operations from the current Mastercam file to
an operations library. Export these operations with or without their
geometry.
You can also automatically check for and exclude duplicate tools from
the exported operations.
Click the operation to select it for export. Mastercam marks selected
operations with a blue check mark. Press [Ctrl] and click to select
multiple operations or to deselect an operation. Press [Shift] and click
to select a range. Choose OK to export the selected operations.
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Transforming Operations
Use the Transform toolpaths function from the Toolpath menu to run
the same toolpaths in different locations or at different orientations in
the same part file. You can transform single toolpaths, or several at a
time. Consider using transform toolpaths when you want to:
Cut multiple copies of a part on several fixtures. You can then

assign different work offsets to each separate operation
created by the transform.
Cut the same feature at several locations in a part. You can
choose to run each operation created by the transform at a
specific coordinate distance from the original, or rotate the
copies around a center point.
Cut the same feature on different faces of a part, or a tombstone application. You can also rotate a toolpath through a
plane other than the original toolplane. In addition to
changing the orientation of the toolpath, you can add a coordinate translation, too.
Cut a mirror image of a part, in either the same plane or a
different one.
When you transform a toolpath, you can choose to maintain an associative link between the original operation and the source operation,
or you can create new operations that are entirely separate. You can
also choose to create copies of the original geometry at the new locations.
When you click on the Parameters icon for a transform operation, you
will see the Transform parameters dialog box tabs, not the parameters
for an individual toolpath. You can then edit the transformation
settings, or change it to an entirely different type of transformation. A
single transform operation can include multiple source operations;
for example, in the picture above, the transformation includes both
the slot mill and drill operations. Transform operations are associative; this means that if you make a change to either of the source operations or their geometry, the transform operation will be marked dirty
until you regenerate it.
Instead of creating a transform operation, you can choose to create
copies of the source operation (and optionally, their geometry). If this
option had been chosen in the above example, instead of the single
Transform by Toolplane operation, you would see additional drill or
slot milling operations in the Toolpath Manager. If you click on the
Parameters icon for these new operations, you will see toolpath
parameter settings, not transform settings. You can then edit or
customize each of the individual copies if you wish. These new opera-
tions are not associative; if you change the original toolpaths, the new
operations will not be marked dirty.
Note: The transformed operations will be written to the active
machine group (where the red arrow is in the Toolpath Manager),
even if the source operations are from a different machine group.
Make sure the transformed operations are compatible with the
machine and control definition in the destination machine
group.
Use the Transform Operations Parameters dialog box to begin
creating a transform operation.
3
32
3
Figure 3-78: Transform Operations Parameters dialog box
34
35
36
37
Select the source operations, the type of transform, and how you want
to organize the toolpaths which result. After you select the type of
transformation, choose only one of the remaining dialog box tabs
(Translate, Rotate, Mirror) to complete the operation. For example, if
you choose a Rotate transformation, the Translate and Mirror tabs are
unavailable.
38
39
Selecting Operations to Transform (page 572)

Choosing Transformation Types (page 572)
Organizing Transform Operations (page 573)
Associating Work Offsets (page 573)
310
Selecting Operations to Transform

Use the large window in the center of the dialog box to select the
operations to transform. You can choose several operations by
holding down the Ctrl key and clicking all the operations you want to
select.
Note: Transformed operations are created in the current machine
group (indicated by the position of the insert arrow in the Toolpath Manager).
You can select operations from different machine groups, but because
each machine group can have a different machine associated with it,
verify that the transformed operation can be run in the destination
machine group.
Choosing Transformation Types

Use the Type and Method tab to determine how you will transform
the selected operations.
Select Translate to run the operations at a new location; for

example, cutting multiple copies of the same part at different
fixtures on the table. Select this option also when you want to
run the same operation in a different plane; for example,
cutting a contour on each side of a block.
Select Rotate to run the operation at an angle to the original
operation. You can choose to rotate the operation in the
same plane as the original operation, or through a different
plane.
Select Mirror to create a mirror image of the selected operations. Like Rotate, you can mirror the operation in the same
plane or in a different one.
Next, choose the transformation method.
Choose Tplane if the transformed operations will be in a

different orientation than the original and you want the tool
axis to transform along with the operation. You typically
select this option if you are transforming operations to
different views. This also activates the Work offset
numbering section, so that you can output a different work
offset with each new tplane.
Choose Coordinate to compute new coordinates for the
transformed operation in the same Tplane as the original
operation.
Organizing Transform Operations

Choose the types of operations you want to create with the transform
operations function. You can choose to create transform operations,
new toolpath operations, or both. In general, transform operations
maintain associativity with the original operations, but new toolpath
operations will let you individually edit each individual toolpath. In
addition, this option will copy the toolpath geometry to each transform location.
Associating Work Offsets

For some types of transformations (such as tool plane and rotate),
you can choose to associate different work offsets with each transformed operation. The Work offset numbering options will be activated automatically when you choose a transform type which
supports them.
Choose Off if you do not want to output any offset code, or choose
Maintain source operation's to use the same offset as the original
toolpath. You can also choose to assign a different offset to each new
operation, based on the values you enter here. If you choose Match
existing offsets, Mastercam checks to see if an offset has already
been created which matches a particular transform, before it automatically creates a new one.
3
32
3
34
35
36
Trimming Toolpaths
A trim operation is a special type of operation which lets you select
one or more toolpaths and trim them to one or more closed chains.
Trim operations are similar to containment boundaries or check
surfaces, but can be more flexible because:
They let you select a Cplane or view that you can trim relative
to.
37
38
You can trim any type of toolpath in addition to surface toolpaths.

You can trim more than one toolpath with the same trim
operation.
When you create a trim operation, Mastercam stores it in the
Toolpath Manager like any other operation. It also keeps the
original source operation, marking it with a special trim icon.
The trim operation and source operations are associative with each
other, which means you can edit the parameters for each operation
separately and update the other operation by regenerating it. When
39
310
you post, you only select the source toolpaths (in this case, the pocket
toolpath), you do not post the Trimmed operation itself.
To create a trim operation, follow this general outline:
First, create the source toolpaths and the trim geometry. Note
that Mastercam will trim the toolpath right to the trim geometry, without regard to cutter compensation, so you might
offset the trim geometry from the desired boundary by the
width of the tool. The trim geometry needs to be a closed
contour, but it does not have to be at the same Z-depth as the
part geometry or tool moves; Mastercam will project it in the
trim operation's Cplane onto the toolpath to calculate the
intersections with the toolpath.
Select Toolpaths, Trim toolpath from the menu. You will be
prompted to select the boundary chains, and then a point
(called a bias point) which tells Mastercam on which side of
the boundary you want to keep the tool movements. For
example, if you were trying to contain a toolpath inside a
circle, click anywhere inside the circle.
Use the Trimmed dialog box to select the toolpaths to trim.
You can also edit or reselect the bias point. Choose the T/C
Plane button to select a different Cplane to use as the trimming plane, if desired. The Cplane you select determines how
Mastercam calculates the intersection of the boundary
geometry and the toolpath.
Choose OK in the Trimmed dialog box to complete the operation. Both the original operation and the trim operation
appear in the Toolpath Manager. When you are ready to cut
the part, you only choose the source operation for post
processing. If you delete the trim operation, you must regenerate the original toolpath.
Tips for Trimming Toolpaths

When creating a trimmed toolpath or wirepath, keep the following
tips in mind:
Arcs perpendicular to the trimming plane (construction

plane) are not trimmed. To adjust for this condition, the trimming plane should be rotated 90 degrees to a plane parallel to
the arcs plane.
You should backplot the toolpath to be trimmed to check the
placement of the trimming boundaries. Fit the trimming
boundaries to the screen before back plotting to see an overlaying image.
Trimming in the 3D Cplane calculates only actual 3D intersections of the trimming boundaries and the toolpath.
A maximum of 50 trimming boundaries may be defined.
Avoid using splines as trimming boundaries. If splines must
be used as trimming boundaries, they should be broken into
a number of smaller splines or preferably lines or arcs using
one of the Break functions (choose Edit, Trim / Break from
the menu).
Trimming does not incorporate any cutter compensation.
Trimming entities should be created to reflect the center line
of the cutter.
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
577
Index
For more information on terminology and functions used in previous versions of Mastercam,
please refer to the Mastercam X Quick Reference Card included with your installation, and the
Mastercam Version 9 to X Function Map, located in the Mastercam \Documentation directory.
Numerics
2D / 3D
working in ......................................... 146
5-axis
selecting geometry for toolpaths ...... 481
A
about ..................................................... 110
analyze
entities............................................... 254
arc entities
creating ............................................. 196
creating points in center ................... 191
creating polar .................................... 197
arcs
control definition defaults ................ 396
attributes
about ................................................. 138
assigning to transformed entities ..... 238
changing....................................142, 144
setting........................................138, 140
AutoCursor
about ................................................. 116
customizing....................................... 120
using FastPoint mode ....................... 119
using Override................................... 122
using visual cues ................................. 20
B
backplot
defaults................................................ 95
operations ......................................... 548
C
CAD
defaults................................................ 82
editing ............................................... 182

in Mastercam .................................... 116
canned cycles
C-axis
contour toolpaths (mill / turn ) ........ 503
drilling toolpaths (mill / turn) .......... 503
chaining
contour toolpaths ............................. 526
defaults ............................................... 79
open and closed................................ 524
overview .............................................. 23
setting chain direction...................... 525
solids ......................................... 134, 137
synchronizing ................................... 527
techniques ........................................ 524
wireframe geometry.......................... 134
wireframe tips ................................... 137
chamfers
creating ............................................. 214
C-hooks
running user applications .................. 39
Zip2Go .............................................. 106
circle entities
creating ............................................. 196
creating from center point................ 197
creating from edge points................. 198
circle toolpaths
Mill / Router...................................... 448
color
defaults ............................................... 77
setting attributes............................... 138
setting, changing............................... 144
communication
defaults ............................................. 385
configuration
about ................................................... 69
backplot defaults ................................ 95
7/7/05
46
CAD defaults ....................................... 82

chaining defaults................................. 79
color defaults....................................... 77
converter defaults ............................... 75
dimension attribute defaults .............. 84
dimension text defaults ...................... 85
file type defaults .................................. 74
leaders / witness defaults.................... 86
note text defaults................................. 85
post processing defaults ..................... 94
print defaults....................................... 82
screen defaults .................................... 76
shading defaults .................................. 80
Solid defaults....................................... 81
start and exit defaults.......................... 89
tolerance defaults................................ 72
toolpath defaults ................................. 92
configuration files (.CONFIG)
about ................................................... 69
managing ............................................ 70
merging ............................................... 99
construction planes
about ................................................. 152
contour toolpaths
about ................................................. 441
chaining............................................. 526
creating tabs...................................... 443
Control Definition Manager
about ................................................... 25
accessing ........................................... 376
arc defaults ........................................ 396
building a post processor list ............ 379
canned cycle defaults........................ 403
communication defaults................... 385
cutter comp defaults ......................... 400
drill cycle defaults ............................. 402
editing ............................................... 376
feed defaults ...................................... 399
file type defaults ................................ 386
helix defaults ..................................... 396
linear motion defaults....................... 395
machine cycle defaults...................... 401
misc integer / reals defaults .............. 390
NC dialog box defaults ...................... 387
NC output defaults............................ 389
operation defaults (.DEFAULTS) ...... 406
rotary defaults ................................... 398
subprogram defaults ......................... 405
text defaults....................................... 408

tolerance defaults ............................. 384
tool defaults ...................................... 393
work system defaults ........................ 392
control definitions
about ................................................. 101
adding post processors ..................... 380
choosing............................................ 367
creating ............................................. 376
editing ............................................... 376
listing all ............................................ 381
properties of...................................... 383
toolpath defaults ............................... 103
validating .......................................... 381
working with ..................................... 374
control files (.CONTROL)
working with ..................................... 374
converters
converting files.................................... 30
defaults................................................ 75
coordinate systems
about (Lathe)..................................... 178
about (Mill / Router) ......................... 151
and machine definitions................... 160
views and planes ............................... 151
coordinates
displaying..................................160161
entering in FastPoint mode .............. 119
Cplanes
about ................................................. 152
setting................................................ 153
setting in Lathe ................................. 180
customizing
AutoCursor........................................ 120
drop-down menus .............................. 51
Mastercam workspace ........................ 41
right-mouse button menu .................. 58
shortcut keys ....................................... 65
toolbars ............................................... 46
cutter compensation
Cview
utility ................................................. 507
D
deleting.................................................. 184
Design
about ................................................. 116
7/7/05
579
editing ............................................... 182

dialog boxes
working with ....................................... 16
dimension attributes
defaults................................................ 84
dimension text
defaults................................................ 85
documentation
resources ............................................... 6
drafting
default properties................................ 83
dimension attribute defaults .............. 84
dimension defaults ............................. 88
dimension text defaults ...................... 85
leaders / witness defaults ................... 86
note text defaults ................................ 85
drafting dimensions
configuration defaults......................... 88
drill cycles
choosing............................................ 454
drill points
editing ............................................... 458
selecting ............................................ 455
sorting ............................................... 456
drill toolpaths
creating ............................................. 453
feature-based drilling ....................... 460
drop-down menus
adding functions ................................. 55
adding submenus ............................... 56
adding to toolbars ............................... 56
creating ............................................... 53
customizing......................................... 51
deleting ............................................... 54
deleting functions ............................... 56
moving functions ................................ 55
renaming............................................. 54
E
editors
selecting ............................................ 109
engraving
toolpaths ........................................... 522
entities................................................... 184
live editing ..................................... 187
analyzing ........................................... 254
changing attributes ........................... 142
creating ............................................. 186

creating views from........................... 167
deleting ............................................. 183
deleting duplicates ........................... 183
editing ............................................... 227
live, fixed, phantom ............................ 22
selecting ............................................ 126
setting color ...................................... 144
shading................................................ 80
transforming (Xform) ......................... 36
undeleting......................................... 184
events
undo and redo .................................. 182
F
FastPoint mode
using.................................................. 119
feed rate values
feeds / speeds
recalculating ..................................... 547
fields
entering values.................................... 18
locking and unlocking ........................ 18
files
assigning defaults by type................... 74
conversion defaults............................. 75
merging ............................................... 30
opening and translating ................... 104
opening with other applications ...... 108
saving ................................................ 105
sharing .............................................. 106
fillets
creating ............................................. 214
functions
adding to toolbars............................... 49
G
General Selection
about ................................................... 20
using the ribbon bar ......................... 125
geometry
creating ............................................. 186
modifying.......................................... 227
graphics view
about ................................................. 152
7/7/05
46
graphics window
about ................................................... 12
changing the appearance of.............. 147
groups
activating from Toolpath Manager... 423
creating.............................................. 424
machine............................................. 425
managing ............................................ 12
Gview
about ................................................. 152
H
HASP
about ..................................................... 3
helixes (entry)
Help
about ..................................................... 4
using ...................................................... 4
horizontal machining center
tombstoning...................................... 176
I
insert arrow (Toolpath Manager)
using .................................................. 423
interactive prompts
using .................................................... 15
K
key mapping (.KMP)
about ................................................... 66
L
lathe
construction planes (Cplanes).......... 180
tool and machine definitions............ 178
toolpath types ................................... 489
leaders / witness lines
defaults................................................ 86
learning mode
about ................................................... 20
Level Manager
setting the main ................................ 358
using the rightclick menu ............... 360
levels
about ................................................. 358
setting attributes ............................... 138

setting the main ........................145, 358
libraries
(operations, tools, materials).............. 27
operations ........................................... 27
line entities
creating ............................................. 192
creating by bisecting/midlines ......... 194
creating by closest position .............. 194
creating by endpoints ...............192194
creating parallel ................................ 196
creating perpendicular ..................... 195
setting attributes ............................... 138
linear motion (interpolating)
M
machine cycles
Machine Definition Manager
about ................................................... 25
machine definitions
about ................................................. 101
and coordinate systems .................... 160
changing............................................ 371
choosing............................................ 367
editing ............................................... 371
selecting ............................................ 369
machine group properties
about .........................................421, 427
changing a machine definition......... 370
file options ........................................ 428
stock .................................................. 434
tool settings....................................... 430
machine groups
creating .............................369, 424, 425
machine types..................................... 36
machining
overview ............................................ 366
machining (CAM)
about ................................................. 365
main level
setting........................................145, 358
masking
about ................................................. 127
material libraries
about ................................................... 27
menus
7/7/05
581
adding functions to............................. 49

See also drop-down menus
merge
pattern files ......................................... 30
Mill
specialized toolpaths ........................ 468
toolpath types ................................... 440
mill / turn toolpaths.............................. 502
miscellaneous integer / real values
miscellaneous shapes
creating ............................................. 201
N
NC
changing the file name ..................... 544
creating a program from a part file... 562
dialog box defaults ............................ 387
output defaults.................................. 389
NCI files
about ................................................. 561
nesting
tips and guidelines ............................ 522
toolpaths ........................................... 519
NetHASP
about ..................................................... 3
node points
creating ............................................. 190
note text
defaults................................................ 85
O
operation defaults (.DEFAULTS)
editing ............................................... 407
setting................................................ 406
operations
editing ............................................... 541
folder icons ....................................... 536
libraries ............................................... 27
post processing ................................. 562
using the insert arrow ....................... 423
verifying ............................................ 551
Operations Manager
about ................................................... 13
P
part orientation
changing Tplane or WCS example170176

pattern
files ...................................................... 30
PDF
viewing .................................................. 7
planes
Status bar options ............................. 155
views and coordinate systems .......... 151
planes / views / WCS
setting ............................................... 150
plotting
about ................................................. 110
pocket
toolpaths ........................................... 463
point entities
create by position ............................. 189
create dynamically............................ 190
create in arc center ........................... 191
create node points ............................ 190
create point by endpoints................. 191
creating ............................................. 189
creating in uniform segments .......... 190
setting attributes............................... 138
point position
creating ............................................. 189
position coordinates
entering............................................. 118
entering relative................................ 123
post processing
about ................................................. 558
control and machine definitions ...... 559
defaults ............................................... 94
post processors
about ................................................. 103
running the post ............................... 562
text defaults in controls .................... 408
validating control definitions ........... 381
primitive entities
creating surfaces and solids.............. 220
printing ................................................. 110
defaults ............................................... 82
R
ribbon bars
docking and undocking ...................... 19
navigating ........................................... 17
working with ....................................... 17
7/7/05
46
rightclick menus
using .................................................... 23
right-mouse button menu
customizing......................................... 58
rotary motion
Router
block drilling ..................................... 517
specialized toolpaths ........................ 468
toolpath types ................................... 516
running Mastercam................................... 2
S
safety zones
machine group properties ................ 437
screen display
changing............................................ 149
defaults................................................ 76
shading ................................................ 80
selection
examples ...................................130134
settings .............................................. 127
using General Selection ...................... 20
separators
adding to menus ................................. 59
adding to toolbars ............................... 59
removing from menus ........................ 60
removing from toolbars ...................... 60
sequence numbers
defaults.............................................. 389
shading
defaults................................................ 80
shortcut keys
about ................................................... 25
adding ................................................. 67
customizing......................................... 65
modifying ............................................ 67
removing assignments ........................ 68
SIM licensing
about ..................................................... 3
Sketcher
about ................................................... 21
using the toolbar ............................... 186
Solids
about ................................................... 35
defaults................................................ 81
primitives .......................................... 220
Solids Manager
about ................................................... 13
spline entities
creating ............................................. 217
creating automatically ...................... 218
creating from blend .......................... 220
creating from curves ......................... 220
creating manually ............................. 217
start / exit
defaults................................................ 89
Status bar
2D / 3D mode.................................... 146
about ................................................... 12
planes / views / WCS ........................ 155
stock setup
subprograms
support and services ................................. 8
surfaces
toolpath types ................................... 471
T
terms and concepts................................. 11
text (post processor)
tolerances
setting system defaults........................ 72
tool axes (Lathe)
rotating.............................................. 179
tool planes
about ................................................. 152
tool settings
tool tips
using.................................................... 15
toolbar states (.MTB)
about ................................................... 60
creating ............................................... 62
deleting ............................................... 63
loading ................................................ 63
toolbars
about ................................................... 14
adding ................................................. 49
adding drop-down menus .................. 56
adding functions ................................. 49
adding separators ............................... 59
customizing......................................... 46
7/7/05
583
customizing settings ........................... 42

deleting functions ............................... 50
hiding / showing ................................. 61
moving functions ................................ 50
opening, saving, and resetting............ 46
renaming and deleting........................ 50
states ................................................... 62
using the rightclick menu ................. 64
toolpath groups
creating ............................................. 424
Toolpath Manager
about ...........................................13, 421
backplotting operations.................... 548
file options ........................................ 428
icons .................................................. 536
machine group icons ........................ 537
machine group properties ........421, 427
safety zone options ........................... 437
solid / surfaces icons......................... 537
tool icons........................................... 537
toolpath operations
guidelines.......................................... 540
icons .................................................. 538
managing .......................................... 534
safety zones ....................................... 437
toolpath types
C-axis contour (mill / turn)............... 503
C-axis drill (mill / turn) ..................... 503
circle (Mill / Router).......................... 448
contour (Mill / Router) ..................... 441
engraving .......................................... 522
general turning (Lathe) ..................... 490
Lathe ................................................. 489
Mill .................................................... 440
mill / turn .......................................... 502
miscellaneous operations (Lathe) .... 509
multiaxis............................................ 479
nesting............................................... 519
pocket (Mill / Router) ....................... 463
Router................................................ 516
specialized (Mill / Router) ................ 468
surface............................................... 471
wireframe .......................................... 464
toolpaths
about ................................................... 26
associativity......................................... 26
chaining ............................................ 524

common parameters ........................ 542
creating ............................................. 439
defaults ............................................. 103
displaying.......................................... 539
editing ....................................... 541, 542
parameters ........................................ 533
reversing ........................................... 547
setting system defaults ....................... 92
synchronizing chains........................ 527
WCS and tool planes......................... 176
tools
renumbering ..................................... 545
selecting .................................... 528, 529
Tplanes
about ................................................. 152
and WCS............................................ 176
changing example..................... 170176
transform
assigning entity attributes ................ 238
using (Xform) .................................... 236
translators
converter defaults ............................... 75
file types ............................................ 104
trim / break / extend
using.................................................. 227
turning toolpaths
Lathe ................................................. 490
U
Undo
using.................................................... 31
units of measure (metric / inch)
changing ........................................... 100
user applications
running ............................................... 39
V
verify
about ................................................... 97
operations ......................................... 551
running ............................................. 552
vertical turret lathes
setting views for ................................ 180
viewports
setting ............................................... 149
7/7/05
46
views
changing in a viewport...................... 150
changing origins................................ 165
creating by rotating........................... 168
creating from entities........................ 167
creating from normals ...................... 169
managing .......................................... 163
measuring origins ............................. 164
planes and coordinate systems......... 151
setting for vertical turret lathes......... 180
standard ............................................ 152
top ..................................................... 162
Tplane / Cplane (example) ............... 158
visual cues
dragging and dropping toolbars ......... 48
using AutoCursor .............................. 117
W
WCS
changing example .....................170176
example ............................................. 177
Tplanes .............................................. 176
views, planes, coordinate systems .... 151
work offsets
renumbering ..................................... 546
work system
workspace orientation ............................ 10
X
Xform
assigning entity attributes................. 238
transforming entities .......................... 36
using .................................................. 236
Z
Z depth
setting................................................ 146
Zip2Go
sharing files ....................................... 106
Zoom
using .................................................. 148
7/7/05
671 Old Post Road

Tolland, Connecticut 06084 USA
www.mastercam.com
Printed in the USA on recycled paper.
Mastercam X Reference Guide 1-883310-42-3

MastercamX - RefGuide Ok

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

MastercamX - RefGuide Ok

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Reference Guide

ii MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Mastercam Reference Guide

PLEASE READ THIS STATEMENT AND THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

Intellectual Property Rights

The Software is and includes intellectual property of CNC. All associated

iv MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

CNC WARRANTS THAT THE MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS

U.S. Government Restricted

If this Software was obtained through or in accordance with a CNC "Educational

vi MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

CNC software programs Mastercam Design LT and Mastercam Demo do not

All rights not expressly granted are reserved by CNC.

Mastercam is a registered trademark of CNC.

Printed in the United States of America.

Starting Mastercam ..............................................................2

Getting Help ...........................................................................4

The Mastercam Workspace ...............................................10

viii MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Mastercam Menus ..............................................................29

Customizing Your Workspace ............................................41

Removing Shortcut Assignments ................................... 68

Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)............69

The Role of Machine and Control Definitions .................101

Opening and Translating Files ..........................................104

Printing and Plotting ..........................................................110

Drawing and Design Basics .............................................116

x MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Customizing AutoCursor behavior ...............................120

Creating Geometry ............................................................186

Create point small arcs ................................................. 191

xii MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Create cone .....................................................................223

Advanced Drawing and Design ........................................269

Shading Settings ............................................................ 270

xiv MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Dimension Ribbon Bar Shortcut Keys ..........................346

Power User Tips ................................................................358

Machining Process Overview ..........................................366

Linear ............................................................................. 395

Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files ........................413

Setting Machine Group Properties ..................................421

Creating Toolpaths ............................................................439

xvi MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Surface Rough Restmill Toolpaths ...............................474

Recalculating Feeds / Speeds ....................................... 547

Backplot and Verify ...........................................................548

Post Processing .................................................................558

Machining Solids ...............................................................564

xviii MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Starting Mastercam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 2

Get a basic orientation to the interface and functions.

2 MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Or select Mastercam from the Windows Program menu. By

INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Starting Mastercam 3

2 To open a machine-specific Mastercam product (for

example, Mill, Router or Lathe), select a machine definition

Learning about HASP and NetHASP

Refer to the Mastercam X Installation Guide or contact your local

Error checking out a [Mastercam product name] license. No

4 MASTERCAM X / Reference Guide

Using Online Help (page 4)

Using Online Help